Home

PTP 600 Series User Guide (600-10-05)

1. Spectrum Management Radar Avoidance Local Channel 2 State A VAILABLE Mean 93 dBm 99 9 92 dBm Peak 91 dBm Local Receive Channel Spectrum 40 50 60 a v 70 80 90 p m m N N N N N N N N N N a wo ad ao D o bod N oO n m M tf tf ld oO oO oO ora i i Kgl Kgl Kgl Channel Center Frequency MHz Peer Receive Channel Spectrum Active Channel History Help 40 50 60 E a k 70 80 90 100 N N N N N N N N N N a wo vad ao D o r N 0 f ft tf m oO f p p N Le Le D D D CEI Channel Center Frequency MHz Attributes CC CO Vatue Juris Spectrum Management Page Refresh Period s00 Seconds Channel Bandwidth 30 MHZ Submit configuration changes Reset form phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 7 29 Managing spectrum Chapter 7 Operation Table 138 Channel states in the spectrum management plot radar avoidance State and color Meaning This channel is currently in use hosting the Point to Point wireless link This channel has interference above the interference threshold This channel has an interference level below the interference threshold and is considered by the Spectrum Management algorithm suitable for hosting the Point to Point link The system administrator has barred this channel from use Because the low signal levels encountered when a unit is powered up in a labo
2. c ccc cceccccseeccceeceseeeceeesceceeceeaeeceaseeeeae 4 2 Table 45 ODU environmental specifications 4 0c cexssevuvesa ceeseedsovasavssdousehsaesestecsanarianreebcerarnsbavessesiaees 4 2 Table 46 PIDU physical specifications vi cisccscessssascca ycssacnssdoeacannedeacsagcosadanads canebes E ANARE EREE 4 3 Table 47 PIDU environmental specifications sss sssesssersserrsersserssersssrrssresserssressersserssrerssesseere 4 3 Table4S PIDU electrical SpecitiCations senrinone nnne a N O E 4 3 Table 49 PTP SYNC unit physical specifications ii 3iccsccsscssdensscesscanaes sdeatece seeandeaedtocnenbeed seensaceedeadies 4 4 Table 50 PTP SYNC unit environmental specifications sss ssseesseessserssessserssersserssersserssersseess 4 4 Tabl 51 PTP SYNG unit electrical SpecifiCatiOns ois cicesdiwnssciseriasessexesatenotaeansenesswies E EARTE 4 4 Table 52 PTP SYNC unit timing specifications GPS SYNC IN RJ 45 eecccceccccseeeceeeeeeneeeeees 4 5 Table 53 PTP SYNC unit timing specifications 1PPS IN SMA cccccccesseseeccneeeeeeceeeeseecenaeeees 4 5 Table 54 GPS SYNC IN Port PINOULS ys sesags sccsscinsisadasseteascsiacs bcirscsdscatsenehiees aiden ee ae a 4 6 Table 55 Fiber Ethernet interface specifications 1000BaSeSX s ssseesssesserssserssesssesssersseess 4 7 Table 56 Fiber Ethernet interface specifications 1000BaSeLxX ssssseesssrsssesssesssesssesssersseess 4 7 Table 57 PTP 600 wireles
3. 5 10 15 30 5730 25 N A N A N A 5732 25 23 N A N A 5734 25 25 N A N A 5736 25 25 23 N A 5738 25 25 25 N A 5740 25 25 25 17 5742 5750 25 25 25 21 5752 5822 25 25 25 25 5824 5832 25 25 25 21 5834 25 25 25 17 5840 25 25 23 N A 5842 25 23 19 N A 5844 25 19 N A N A 5846 23 N A N A N A phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Wireless specifications PTP 59600 available spectrum settings Use the Lower Center Frequency attribute see Step 2 Wireless configuration on page 6 51 to slide the available channels up and down the 5 9 GHz band in steps of 2 MHz In the 30 MHz channel bandwidth Figure 69 the PTP 59600 variant operates on a 10 MHz channel raster In the 15 MHz Figure 70 10 MHz Figure 71 and 5 MHz Figure 72 channel bandwidths the PTP 59600 variant operates on a 6 MHz channel raster The channel raster is set to even center frequencies Aa NOTE These tables contain data for one typical region code The specified channel center frequencies may not be available in other region codes The PTP 59600 product variant does not apply any band edge power reduction Figure 69 PTP 59600 available spectrum in 30 MHz channel bandwidth 5870 5900 LCF 5840 5850 5880 5910 5860 5890 LCF 5842 5842 5872 5902 LCF 5844 5874 5904 5864 5894 LCF 5846 5846 5876 5866 5896 LCF 5848 5878 5908 5825 MHz 5925 MHz phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 4 29 Chapter 4 Refere
4. Software Upgrade Complete The software upgrade was completed Successfully To complete the upgrade a system reboot is required Please use the Reboot Wireless Unit button below to reboot the unit Software Version 58600 04 01 Reboot Wireless Unit Select Reboot Wireless Unit When the Are you sure pop up box is displayed select OK The unit will now reboot The unit should restart in normal operational mode and the link should recover If the unit or link fails to recover refer to Testing link end hardware on page 8 2 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Using recovery mode Resetting IP amp Ethernet configuration To reset IP and Ethernet configuration back to factory defaults from the Recovery Options page Figure 184 proceed as follows 1 Select Reset IP amp Ethernet Configuration back to factory defaults The reset pop up box is displayed http 169 254 1 1 l x Are you sure you want to return the IP amp Ethernet configuration back to Factory default Default IP A address 169 254 1 1 Cancel 2 Record the IP address as it will be needed to log into the unit after recovery 3 Select OK The reset confirmation page is displayed Ethernet amp IP configuration erased successfully PTP 58600 Full Recovery Options Browse Upgrade Software Image Reset IP amp Ethernet Configuration back to factory defaults Erase Configuration
5. Data Port Wireless Down Alert When enabled this causes the data Ethernet link to be dropped briefly when the wireless link drops This signals to the connected network equipment that this link is no longer available Connected Ethernet switches can be configured to forward Ethernet frames on an alternate path identified using the Spanning Tree Protocol STP phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 2 Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces Table 103 Bridging attributes Attribute Local Packet Filtering Meaning If Local Packet Filtering is enabled the management agent learns the location of end stations from the source addresses in received management frames The agent filters transmitted management frames to ensure that the frame is transmitted at the Ethernet data or management port or over the wireless link as appropriate If the end station address is unknown then management traffic is transmitted at the Ethernet port and over the wireless link In out of band local management mode management frames are not transmitted over the wireless link and so address learning is not active Reconnecting to the management PC If Management Mode has been set to Out of Band Local or Out of Band connect the PTP 600 to the local management PC via the OOBM interface the AUX port of the ODU If the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway IP Address of the unit ha
6. Step 7 Enter HTTP and Telnet Settings This unit supports network management using HTTP HTTPS TLS TELNET and SNMP interfaces HTTPS TLS is configured using the Security Wizard HTTP and TELNET are configured using this web page SNMP is configured using the SNMP web page SNMP is disabled by default WARNING Management access will be impossible if HTTP HTTPS TLS TELNET and SNMP are all disabled To re gain access operate the unit in recovery mode and select Reset IP and Ethernet Configuration This will re enable the HTTP interface HTTPS Port Number k43 HTTP Access Enabled Ono Yes HTTP Port Number 80 Telnet Access Enabled Ono yes Telnet Port Number 23 SNMP Control Of HTTP And Telnet Disabled O Enabled TFTP Client Disabled Enabled Debug Access Enabled Ono Yes Cross Site Request Forgery Protection Disabled Enabled 44 Back Next gt gt phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 31 Task 5 Configuring security 6 32 Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Table 105 HTTP and Telnet attributes Attribute Meaning HTTPS Port The port number for HTTPS access A value of zero means the Number wireless unit uses the default port Aa NOTE HTTPS access is controlled by license key HTTP Access No means that the unit will not respond to any requests on the Enabled HTTP port Yes means that the unit will respond to requests on the HTTP port Remote management via HTTPS is
7. OR Identity Based User Accounts are Enabled and the current user s role is Security Officer 5 Perform Task 3 Installing license keys on page 6 14 and ensure that the installed license key meets all requirements including HTTPS TLS compatibility Check that Encryption Algorithm is AES If necessary generate and enter a new license key with the above settings 6 To activate HTTPS TLS mode perform Using the Security Wizard on page 6 24 Using the Security Wizard If the PTP 600 is to operate in secure mode use the Security Wizard to review and configure HTTPS TLS security related parameters The Security Wizard is only available when both of the following conditions are true e The wireless unit has a license key with either 128 bit or 256 bit AES link encryption enabled e AND o EITHER identity based user accounts are disabled o OR identity based user accounts are enabled and the user s role is Security Officer Starting security wizard Select menu option Security The Security Configuration Wizard page is displayed Figure 108 Review the summary If any updates are required select Continue to Security Wizard 6 24 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 5 Configuring security Figure 108 Security Configuration Wizard page Security Configuration Wizard This page shows a summary of the current security configuration Press the Continue to Security Wizard but
8. System Configuration This page controls the day to day configuration of the PTP wireless unit Equipment Link Name an E Site Name Master Slave Mode Master Link Mode Optimization IP Traffic Channel Bandwidth 5 MHz Max Receive Modulation Mode 640AM 0 92 Lowest Ethernet Modulation Mode BPSK 0 63 Ethernet Capped Max Wireless Speed Disabled Enabled Max Transmit Power 25 dBm Antenna Gain 23 0 dBi Cable Loss 10 0 dB EIRP 48 0 dBm Submit Updated System Configuration 6 92 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 12 Updating system configuration Table 125 System Configuration attributes Attribute Meaning Link Name User defined identity for the unit If Link Name Access is enabled this is updated in Step 2 Wireless configuration on page 6 51 Site Name User defined name for the site with additional notes if required Master Slave Read only Updated in Step 2 Wireless configuration on page 6 Mode 51 Link Mode Read only Updated in Step 2 Wireless configuration on page 6 Optimization 51 Channel Read only Updated in Step 2 Wireless configuration on page 6 Bandwidth 51 Max Receive Modulation Mode The maximum mode the unit will use as its adaptive modulation By default the Max Receive Modulation Mode is the highest mode available For minimum error rates set the maximum modulation mode to the minimum necessary t
9. ccccccsecccceseceeeseccencceueeceeaeeceaeeceaeeseeseeeees 3 2 Acceptance OF this agreement siscse seccsscesubsustessezeeevus seeteousesevevestasiacssseeurdearenienandeceaGieneayseeseeeey 3 2 Definitions sorier ioeina a E E RI A eens EENEN ENE A ers T AN 3 2 Grant Of CENS eusnnim a a E 3 2 Conditions OL MSE sranie a e E TO E a E E ai 3 3 Title and restrictions wisi sacsicicsenssenkecassces sed spassnes E E A E Aa 3 4 Connidentialil yansa A N E S 3 4 Right touse Cambium s Mamie deore A E E EEE 3 5 Transler usii a O R a Ea 3 5 Update Smara aa E E E E AREO E 3 5 Maintenance se scseissssadeisesiesicaxcnaveenrcasetsan chavs baseon E E ERAEN EEE OEO ESER EA AA EA ASR 3 5 Disclalme Tosa e an Ea reer ster a a a aa aa eer 3 6 Limitation Of Ma DUI Gy eeoa E EEEN EENE EE ORRA 3 6 US GOVEPNME IE araara nia E E RE A 3 7 Term of licensees a E R E E I 3 7 GOvermimg laW ernennen e A E a E A eae 3 7 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 v Contents ASSUM GN 2s c2sse2sisaesadeasassaveaswaeertas sacar S E dda vteneceudteaadeaaanesemesteaERd 3 7 Survival Of provisions zs sccsszsecccaseshvenndaaspes A ETEA O taeun haga acstaeybes 3 8 EMtine AQreesmMe Mt stcsicosshecdendidcasodedacusds e E hioeaccnndbtoassadsuateoatsioenseisdersralsie EES 3 8 gl otha oFeT atealacy s a n its 1 VaR eee aR eae oe toe an eR ero er oe ee ee eee 3 8 Hardware Wairanty essri seampaaue sans ons aie adecaoaaaseaan cans aeneaaase saad odes ete lancea ad mannan eels 3 19 Linit OF MMS DULY
10. phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Table 74 PTP 59600 TDM mode threshold Wireless specifications power and link loss System threshold dBm eee Maximum link loss dB Modulation per channel bandwidth dBm per channel bandwidth mode 5 10 15 30 All 5 10 15 30 MHz MHz MHz MHz bands MHz MHz MHz MHz BPSK 0 63 single 97 1 94 1 92 0 88 7 25 0 168 1 165 1 163 0 159 7 QPSK 0 63 single 88 5 86 1 84 4 79 4 24 0 158 5 156 1 154 4 149 4 QPSK 0 87 single 84 6 81 9 80 1 76 0 23 0 153 6 150 9 149 1 145 0 16QAM 0 63 single 82 5 79 6 77 8 73 7 22 0 150 4 147 6 145 8 141 7 16QAM 0 63 dual 78 8 76 0 74 1 70 4 22 0 146 8 144 0 142 1 138 4 16QAM 0 87 single 78 3 75 1 73 7 70 2 20 0 144 3 141 1 139 7 136 2 16QAM 0 87 dual 74 2 71 6 70 2 66 9 20 0 140 2 137 6 134 2 132 9 64QAM 0 75 single 74 7 71 4 70 2 67 3 18 0 138 7 135 4 134 2 131 3 64QAM 0 75 dual 70 9 68 3 66 8 63 6 18 0 134 8 132 2 130 8 127 6 64QAM 0 92 single 71 2 68 1 67 0 63 3 18 0 135 2 132 0 131 0 127 3 64 QAM 0 92 dual 66 7 64 2 62 7 58 7 18 0 130 7 128 2 126 7 122 7 256QAM 0 81 single N A N A N A 63 3 18 0 N A N A N A 127 3 256QAM 0 81 dual N A N A N A 58 7 18 0 N A N A N A 122 7 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 45 Data network specifications Chapter 4 Reference information Data network specifications This sectio
11. vi phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide PEP 54600 regulatory compliance scssisesicesisanissesaeseniese acs oea ye O SE 4 68 PEP 58600 regulatory Complian Ce yisiicis sass sestscssece arata EEE R 4 70 PTP 59600 regulatory COMP ANCE wsesiscecsdcsas cxcsdaaneusacuhesesaagiswasassbend ahacesaiieaessnledaesvelaisteealiies 4 72 Thailand notiliCation x i ii c2eisceenseasvivazeesvcatninayaaaaiassugancunnacaveesabenusenntaasynevaiseteedvennenestesarteanecd te 4 73 Data throughput tables sirist tags a saneaanscansnanedeantars E 4 74 Data throughput Capacity sisone ann an E E reas clad aulionteaeeteeuaeen yes 4 74 Range adjustment CULVES pais pissccs acesdesi gasasconsadssnonaed saneacnad EEPE E A OER a 4 85 Chapter 5 I nstallation ccccsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eases ee eeeee aiana naana aandaa 5 1 Preparing for InStallatlOm i4 lt ssissdessacnsanesdadsordsccassesencasoasecuesasecdeasaueasdedosmadoasioesaadedaned OROT EARE 5 2 Unit Pre C OMG Ural Ohver eienn i A E O tenance 5 2 Safety precautions before install ation ss sissicsssassszssscsasanescsssassues sdasvncs reii h ni aai 5 2 Protection Ve Quine CMS iraia a EEEN 5 2 Selecting mstallation OPU ONS rasaan En E E A N N O E ee ane eee 5 3 Preparing personnel errira iina EE ENE E NEEE TERE EE ERAR 5 3 Preparing MVentOry creeren e E EE E A teiv ade ahanes 5 3 Preparo Toolse onon onn A a a A T E A OOO 5 3 Installing the ODU and top LPU serana AEE a ee 5 4 Checks and Safety precautio
12. Ethernet Configuration Mismatch Ethernet fragments runt packets have been detected when the link is in full duplex This indicates an auto negotiation or forced configuration mismatch Ethernet Link Disabled Warning The Ethernet link has been administratively disabled via the SNMP Interface The Ethernet Interface MIB II ifAdminStatus attribute has been set to DOWN To enable the Ethernet interface set the ifAdminStatus attribute to UP Ethernet Link Status Fiber Link Status A non OK value indicates that the Ethernet link is down The most likely cause is that the unit has no Ethernet cable plugged into its PIDU port A non OK value indicates that the fiber link is down There are two possible causes Either the fiber link has been installed but disabled because the license key does not include fiber support Or the fiber link could not be established even though a fiber carrier was detected due perhaps to a broken TX fiber or the link is disabled at the fiber link partner Fips Operational Mode Alarm Incompatible Master and Slave The unit is FIPS 140 2 capable but has not been configured correctly for FIPS 140 2 operation The FIPS operational mode alarm values are FIPS mode is not configured The Security Wizard has not been completed FIPS mode is configured but not active The Security Wizard has been completed but the HTTP and Telnet management interfaces have not bee
13. Figure 32 Grounding and lightning protection On mast OF COWET ccecccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeees 2 25 Figure 33 Grounding and lightning protection on Wall ccccccccsseseeccceeeeecccneeeecccneuseeeeseeseeees 2 26 Figure 34 Grounding and lightning protection on DUiIdING cece ceeeeeeccceeeeseeceeeeeeecenaneeeees 2 28 Figure 35 Grounding and lightning protection inside high building cc eecccceeeceeeeeeeees 2 29 Figure 36 TDD synchronization configuration standalone with UltraSynce cceeeeeeeeees 2 30 Figure 37 TDD synchronization configuration single link with PTP SYNC ceeceeeeseeeeeeees 2 31 Figure 38 TDD synchronization configuration cluster with PTP SYNC and GPS s a s 2 32 Figure 39 TDD synchronization configuration cluster with PTP SYNC and no GP6 2 33 Figure 40 Grounding and lightning protection for GPS receiver on building c eee 2 35 Figure 41 Grounding and lightning protection for GPS receiver on tower or Mast 2 36 Figure 42 Fiber optic cable and connector specification c ccccessecccaesdseccsesaestscesanestandausseasaesesncanes 4 8 Figure 43 PTP 25600 BRS band channel assignments srriressicnsrnrncinsiirierins iy anika aike 4 13 Figure 44 PTP 45600 available spectrum in 30 MHz channel bandwidth RC 23 4 14 Figure 45 PTP 45600 available spectrum in 20 MHz channel bandwidth RC 23 4 15 Figure 46 PTP 45600 av
14. Indication of UC APL mode The PTP 600 is operating in UC APL mode when the UC APL capability graphic is displayed in the navigation bar and the Secure Mode Alarm is absent from the Home page Alternatively navigate to the Summary page of the Security Wizard and check that the Secure Mode Alarm is in the Secure Mode Is Active state Exiting from the UC APL operational mode A PTP 600 ODU in UC APL operational mode can be prepared to accept new security configuration by zeroizing critical security parameters CSPs The unit remains UC APL capable Reverting to standard operation A UC APL capable ODU can be used in standard mode by loading a standard non FIPS and non UC APL software image and rebooting The critical security parameters CSPs are zeroized when the unit is no longer UC APL Capable phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Unified Capabilities Approved Product UC APL mode Further reading on UC APL For more information on UC APL refer to the following Planning for UC APL operation on page 2 43 describes how to prepare for FIPS 140 2 operation by obtaining the required cryptographic material and by configuring the PTP 600 system Configuring for UC APL applications on page 6 114 is a summary of all the configuration tasks that are necessary if the unit is to operate in UC APL secure mode Task 3 Installing license keys on page 6 14 describes how to ensure that UC APL operation is en
15. PTP 600 Series User Guide Data network planning Data network planning This section describes factors to be considered when planning PTP 600 data networks Management mode Decide how the PTP 600 will be managed In many network applications the wireless link will provide the only communication path to a remote site In such applications ODUs and other network equipment at the remote site will be managed over the wireless link For applications of this type select either out of band or in band management mode Make sure that the same management mode is selected for ODUs at both ends of a link See Management network on page 1 40 for further explanation of management modes In band modes In the in band management modes management traffic is multiplexed with customer traffic at a single physical interface In the default in band management mode the management agent can be reached from the PIDU port at the local ODU and assuming that the wireless link is established from the PIDU port at the remote ODU In the alternative in band local management mode the IP interface of the management agent is always connected in a VLAN and Ethernet frames in this management VLAN are filtered discarded at the wireless port Use the in band local management mode in networks that require only local access to the ODU management agent For correct operation of in band local management mode ensure that the same management VLAN ID is configure
16. PTP 600 Series User Guide Ethernet bridging Figure 21 Protocol layers between external interfaces and the management agent Management Agent HTTP SNMP SMTP TCP IP Ethernet Wireless Ports MAC Relay Entity Media Access Method Specific Functions Further reading on Ethernet bridging For more information on Ethernet bridging refer to the following e Data network planning on page 2 37 describes factors to be considered when planning PTP 600 data networks e Data network specifications on page 4 46 contains specifications of the PTP 600 Ethernet interface e Task 6 Configuring wireless and telecoms interfaces on page 6 45 describes how to configure the IP and Ethernet attributes of the PTP 600 e Reviewing system configuration attributes on page 6 92 describes how to review the IP and Ethernet attributes of the PTP 600 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 1 45 Telecoms circuits Chapter 1 Product description Telecoms circuits This section describes how telecoms traffic E1 or T1 may be carried over PTP 600 links The PTP 600 link provides native support for one or two E1 links or one or two T1 links The link relays unstructured E1 or T1 data and provides accurate timing transfer Lowest telecoms modulation mode In narrow channel bandwidth and lower modulation modes the link may have insufficient capacity to relay the E1 T1 payload in this case the wireless link continues to carry timing information in ord
17. 5696 5708 5702 5714 5486 5498 5510 5522 5534 5546 5558 5570 5582 5594 5606 5618 5630 5642 5654 5606 5678 5690 5470 MHz 5725 MHz Figure 64 PTP 54600 available spectrum in 5 MHz channel bandwidth SHISTISIISTISIISIISTIS ISTSTI S ISTISI S IS S SISITISTISTISIS ISI SIIST SI SIIST ISIS S S5I ST ST S S 5 S5iis s 5 5 LCF 5474 44 14 1 4 14 TIS II STISTISTIS ISIIS ISTISIISTIST ISHS SIS SIS 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 l6lle6li6 lle sl llel 6jlell 6el 7 i7 7 7 TIBISHI9II9HOT aA IA 2 34 4S TSE 77ST Sif 9yol soy 7st 2 Si Sl l4 4 is leyell7i7 slig igtiolloliaii2 4 O 6 1 21 81 4 0 6 121 18 4 oO 6 2 1a i4 OS 2 8 14 0 6 12 18 4 Ol 6 2 i8 i424 floes 2iisli4 joll eli2iisiiafio LCF 5476 CREXI NAAN O AnA ooan 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 515 51 5 slfe 4 l4 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 61 6 66 6 1617 17 7 8 la 1 2 3 7 7 9 o lo 2 3 alis 8 lallallollolla 1 2 l8 2 4 6 2 8 0 2 8 0 2 allo o le i2 sll4 lolle 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 515 f5 alla 5 5115 5 5 5 5 6 66 6 6 l6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 LCF 5478 silo 0 112 3 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 allaljoljo 4 4 4 0 2 4 lo 2 41 0
18. 7 8 Task 2 Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces Select Submit Updated System Configuration The reboot verification page is displayed The Configuration Changes Require a System Reboot The configuration changes you requested can only be activated via a system reboot Would you like to reboot the wireless unit now Reboot Wireless Unit lt lt Back Select Reboot Wireless Unit and then OK to confirm the reboot Table 100 P interface attributes Attribute Meaning IP Address Internet protocol IP address This address is used by the family of Internet protocols to uniquely identify this unit on a network Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address and to other networks Defines the address range of the connected IP network The IP address of a computer on the current network that acts as a gateway A gateway acts as an entrance and exit to packets from Use VLAN For This controls whether or not the management interfaces Management WWW SNMP SMTP SNTP use VLAN tags Interfaces j Ensure that the configured VLAN is accessible otherwise it will not be possible to access the unit following the next reboot The PTP 600 management function is only compatible with single VLAN tagged packets Any management packet with two or more packets will be ignored VLAN Only displayed when Use VLAN for Management Interfaces is Management VID enabled Enter the VLAN VID ran
19. Automatic Ranging The ranging mode allows the installer to control the behavior of the system s automatic ranging algorithms The default value is 0 to 40 km 0 to 25 miles If the installer is required to install a link of greater than 40 km 25 miles then the ranging mode attribute MUST be configured to 0 to 100km 0 to 62 miles or 0 to 200km 0 to 124 miles mode depending on the range of the link Aa NOTE If preferred range functions can be configured to operate in miles as described in Protecting access to the summary and status pages on page 6 41 Target Range Installers that know the range between the two wireless units to within 1 km can use the target range mode The main advantage of the target range mode is that it reduces the time taken by the units to range To use the target range mode the installer MUST select Target Range as the ranging mode and enter the approximate range in km in the Target range data entry field at both ends of the link Platform Variant Chooses either an integrated unit or a connectorized unit that requires an external antenna Antenna Gain Cable Loss Only displayed when Platform Variant is set to Connectorized Gain of the antenna that is connected to the unit Only displayed when Platform Variant is set to Connectorized Loss in the cable between the ODU and the antenna A NOTE If there is a significant difference in length of
20. Further reading on cabling and lightning protection For more information on cabling and lightning protection refer to the following e Maximum cable lengths on page 2 7 gives maximum permitted lengths of interface cables in PTP 600 installations e Grounding and lightning protection on page 2 21 describes the grounding and lightning protection requirements of a PTP 600 installation e Ordering components on page 2 53 lists the components required for PTP 600 installations including cables connectors grounding kits and LPUs e Installing the drop cable and bottom LPU on page 5 16 describes how to install the drop cable from the ODU to the LPU and PIDU and to provide grounding for the installation e Installing the PIDU on page 5 29 describes how to prepare the indoor cables to connect to the network phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 1 21 PTP SYNC unit Chapter 1 Product description PTP SYNC unit This section describes the optional PTP SYNC unit and its interfaces This unit may be used to implement TDD synchronization PTP SYNC unit description The PTP SYNC unit Figure 15 is an optional component It is required when TDD synchronization is implemented using PTP SYNC It measures the difference between the TDD frame timing and a 1 Hz timing reference and signals this time difference to the ODU For more information on this feature refer to TDD synchronization on page 1 34 The PTP SYNC is a compact indoor unit mount
21. Item Notes GPS receiver Trimble Acutime Gold GPS receiver Cambium part number WB3903 GPS adapter cable kit optional Avoids the need to fit a 12 way circular connector to the GPS drop cable PTP SYNC lt gt Trimble Adapter Cable Cambium part number WB3961 O sies J m lammo Kit contents adapter cable GPS receiver circular connector to RJ45 socket RJ45 plug housing Outdoor drop cable Refer to Table 32 for specifications and part numbers RJ45 connectors Refer to Table 32 for specifications and part numbers Cable grounding kits Refer to Table 32 for specifications and part numbers Lightning Protection Unit LPU kits One kit is required per GPS receiver LPU End Kit PTP 250 300 500 Cambium part number WB2978D Kit contents LPU grounding cable nuts bolts and cable glands As an alternative to the GPS adapter cable the drop cable can be connected directly to the GPS unit via a 12 way circular connector using the components and tools listed in Table 40 This connection requires soldering phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 2 73 Ordering components Chapter 2 Planning considerations Table 40 Recommended outdoor connectors for Trimble GPS receiver Item Manufacturer Part number 12 way circular connector Deutsch IMC26 2212X Size 22 crimp socket Deutsch 6862 201 22278 Crimp tool Positioner Daniels Manufacturing Corp Daniels Manu
22. Reboot Software Version Recovery 04 02 Recovery Reason Recovery Button Active MAC Address 00 04 56 80 2e 12 Select Reboot When the Are you sure pop up box is displayed select OK The unit will now reboot The unit should now start up in normal mode but with the IP and Ethernet configuration reset to factory defaults If the unit fails to recover refer to Testing link end hardware on page 8 2 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 7 57 Using recovery mode Chapter 7 Operation Erasing configuration To erase the entire configuration of the unit from the Recovery Options page Figure 184 proceed as follows 1 Select Erase Configuration The erase pop up box is displayed http 169 254 1 1 d x 9 IF YOU ERASE THE CONFIGURATION YOU WILL HAVE TO RE ENTER ALL CONFIGURATION re you sure you want to ERASE the configuration banks Cancel 2 Select OK The erase confirmation page is displayed Lower Non volatile configuration bank erased successfully Upper Non volatile configuration bank erased successfully Semi perm Non volatile configuration bank erased successfully PTP 58600 Full Recovery Options Browse Upgrade Software Image Reset IP amp Ethernet Configuration back to factory defaults Erase Configuration Reboot Software Yersion Recovery 04 02 Recovery Reason Recovery Button Active MAC Address 00 04 56 80 2e 12 Select Reboot When the Ar
23. Table 130 lists the procedures that may be performed from each menu option Many of these procedures are part of the initial configuration and alignment process described in Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Table 130 Procedures performed from each menu option Procedures Home Status Viewing the system summary on page 7 5 Checking that the units are armed on page 6 85 Viewing the system status on page 7 6 Checking the installed software version on page 6 17 Configuration Reviewing system configuration attributes on page 6 92 Configuring AES encryption on page 6 22 LAN Configuration Configuring the IP interface and management mode on page 6 7 QoS Configuration Configuring quality of service on page 6 96 SFP Configuration Telecoms Configuring SFP on page 6 109 Performing a telecoms loopback test on page 8 16 Save And Restore Spectrum Management Saving the system configuration on page 6 110 Restoring the system configuration on page 7 48 Configuring spectrum usage at the master on page 7 20 Viewing spectrum usage at the slave on page 7 23 Barring channels on page 6 62 Statistics Checking system statistics on page 7 35 Comparing actual to predicted performance on page 6 95 Detailed Counters Checking detailed counters on page 7 41 Test Ethernet packet errors reported by ODU on page 8 7 Diagnostics Plotter Using the diagnostics plotter on pa
24. Task 2 Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment To configure the IP interface proceed as follows 1 Select menu option System Configuration LAN Configuration The LAN configuration page is displayed LAN Configuration This page controls the LAN configuration of the PTP wireless unit atrbutes Wale nts IP Address 1 11 100 126 Subnet Mask 255 ass fo jo Gateway IP Address 1 1 t 1 _ 254 Use VLAN For Management Interfaces No VLAN Tagging Data Port Auto Negotiation O Disabled Enabled 1000 Mbps Full Duplex 100 Mbps Full Duplex Data Port Auto Neg Advertisment 100 Mbps Half Duplex 10 Mbps Full Duplex 10 Mbps Half Duplex Data Port Auto Mdix O Disabled Enabled Data Port Wireless Down Alert Disabled Enabled Local Packet Filtering Disabled Enabled Submit Updated System Configuration 2 Update IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway IP Address to meet network requirements as specified by the network administrator Review the other IP interface attributes and update them if required Table 100 If Management Mode has been set to Out of Band Local or Out of Band review and update the management port attributes Table 101 Review and update the data port attributes Table 102 6 Review and update the bridging attributes Table 103 6 8 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide
25. To configure the classification of priority encoded Ethernet frames into up to eight traffic classes select menu option System Configuration QoS Configuration The QoS Configuration page is displayed Figure 149 or Figure 150 Update the Layer 2 Control Protocols Table 126 and Ethernet Priority Que mapping Table 127 as required To use IEEE 802 1Q classification rules select Reset Default Priority Mappings The 802 1Q rules are shown in Table 127 Select Submit Updated Configuration Figure 149 QoS Configuration page Ethernet QoS Configuration This page controls the quality of service configuration Layer 2 Control Protocols Bridge a7 v MRP a7 m CFM a7 M R APS a7 m EAPS a7 v Priority Scheme Priority Scheme Ethernet IP MPLS Ethernet Priority PO om P1 lai P2 at v P3 a1 T P5 av PS 21 7 em Untagged Q0 v Reset Default Priority Mappings Submit Updated Configuration 6 96 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Figure 150 QoS Configuration page 1P MPLS Task 14 Configuring quality of service QoS Configuration This page controls the quality of service configuration Layer 2 Control Protocols Brage MRP arv CFM av R APS Q7 v EAPS Q7 v Priority Scheme Priority Scheme Ethernet PmPLS Unknown Network Layer Protocol Unknown Protocol Q1 v IP DSCP 00 DF Qiv 16 CS2 Q3 v 32
26. 2568 MHz 5 10 15 30 63 dBm MHz 1 EIRP 2 18 Taiwan Upper 2660 2690 MHz 5 10 15 23 dBm MHz Taiwan Middle 2595 2625 MHz 5 10 15 23 dBm MHz Taiwan Lower 2565 2595 MHz 5 10 15 23 dBm MHz 1 Region code 16 the 30 MHz bandwidth is not approved for 2 5 GHz in FCC regions 2 Region code 16 the EIRP limit is approximately 63 dBm 10 x Log 360 Antenna Azimuth BW PTP 25600 products are not able to exceed this EIRP limit with any available antenna phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Table 84 Licenses and region codes for PTP 45600 Compliance with radio regulations Region License Frequencies DFS Channel Max code regulation bandwidth power 23 US Federal 4400 4600 MHz 5 10 15 20 30 27 dBm MHz 24 NTIA 4400 4600 MHz 10 20 30 MHz 27 dBm Table 85 Licenses and region codes for PTP 48600 Region License Frequencies DFS Channel Max code regulation bandwidth power 14 USA Canada 4940 4990 MHz 5 10 20 MHz 24 dBm Public Safety 1 15 US Federal 4710 5000 MHz 5 10 15 20 MHz 27 dBm Extended 23 US Federal 4710 4940 MHz 5 10 15 20 MHz 27 dBm 24 NTIA 4700 4940 MHz 10 20 MHz 27 dBm 1 Region code 14 PTP 48600 Max Power depends upon Antenna Gain o If Antenna Gain lt 26 dBi then Max Power 24 dBm o If Antenna Gain gt 26 dBi then Max Power 50 Antenna Gain dBm Table 86 License
27. Cambium PTP 600 Series User Guide System Release 600 10 05 Cambium Networks Accuracy While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document Cambium Networks assumes no liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document or from use of the information obtained herein Cambium reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein to improve reliability function or design and reserves the right to revise this document and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes Cambium does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product software or circuit described herein neither does it convey license under its patent rights or the rights of others It is possible that this publication may contain references to or information about Cambium products machines and programs programming or services that are not announced in your country Such references or information must not be construed to mean that Cambium intends to announce such Cambium products programming or services in your country Copyrights This document Cambium products and 3 Party software products described in this document may include or describe copyrighted Cambium and other 3 Party supplied computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media Laws in the United States and other countries preserv
28. Only select a data rate that is within the capability of connected network equipment otherwise loss of service may occur The new setting will only take effect after a system reboot Management Port Forced Configuration Only displayed when Management Port Auto Negotiation is set to Disabled This forces the speed and duplex setting of the out of band management Ethernet interface Over the air throughput will be capped to the rate of the Ethernet interface at the receiving end of the link Use the same setting for both ends of the link The same configuration must be forced on connected network equipment otherwise a duplex mismatch will occur and data throughput will be greatly reduced Management Port Auto Mdix This enables disables the Auto Medium Dependent Interface MDI Medium Dependent Interface Crossover MDIX capability Default is Enabled Management Port Wireless Down Alert When enabled this causes the out of band management Ethernet link to be dropped briefly when the wireless link drops This signals to the connected network equipment that this link is no longer available Connected Ethernet switches can be configured to forward Ethernet frames on an alternate path identified using the Spanning Tree Protocol STP Table 102 Data port attributes Attribute Data Port Auto Negotiation Meaning Enabled means that configuration of the data Ethernet i
29. 13 44 0 00 16 67 Mbps MAC Address 00 04 56 80 5a 1a Link Capacity 25 99 Mbps Remote MAC Address 00 04 56 80 5a 19 Transmit Modulation Mode 16QA4M 0 63 Dual 5 MHz Remote IP Address https 1 100 18 Receive Modulation Mode 64Q4M 0 75 Dual 5 MHz Telecoms Link Symmetry 1to1 Channel 4 Disabled Receive Modulation Mode Detail Limited By The Wireless Conditions Channel B Disabled Range 0 0 km TDD Synchronization TDD Synchronization Inactive TDD Sync Disabled Status Page Refresh Period fso Seconds Update Page Refresh Period Reset form The page is subdivided into five categories e Equipment This contains the unit s inventory and identification information e Wireless This presents the key wireless metrics which are displayed as a series of measurements e Ethernet Internet This describes the unit s network identity and connectivity e Telecoms This describes the unit s E1 T1 telecoms interface parameters e TDD Synchronization This shows the status of TDD synchronization The status page can be configured to refresh itself at an operator defined rate if the user is logged in as system administrator The refresh period defaults to 3600 seconds and can easily be changed to refresh at any period between 2 seconds and 3600 seconds Pressing the Update Page Refresh Period button causes a new page refresh period to be adopted by the system The page refresh mechanism uses a HTML Meta refresh command Therefore the r
30. 20 20 135 7 133 3 131 3 129 4 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 37 Wireless specifications Chapter 4 Reference information Table 67 PTP 49600 IP mode threshold power and link loss System threshold dBm Output Maximum link loss dB per channel bandwidth Reed per channel bandwidth Modulation mode agm 5 10 20 All 5 10 20 MHz MHz MHz bands MHz MHz MHz BPSK 0 63 single 98 6 95 5 91 9 24 166 6 163 5 159 9 QPSK 0 63 single 94 3 90 7 87 5 24 162 3 158 7 155 5 QPSK 0 87 single 90 8 87 3 84 0 24 158 8 155 3 152 0 16QAM 0 63 single 88 7 85 2 81 8 24 156 7 153 2 149 8 16QAM 0 63 dual 85 3 81 6 78 5 24 153 3 149 6 146 5 16QAM 0 87 single 84 4 80 6 77 3 24 152 4 148 6 145 3 16QAM 0 87 dual 81 0 77 2 74 5 24 149 0 145 2 142 5 64QAM 0 75 single 81 2 77 7 74 7 23 148 2 144 7 141 7 64QAM 0 75 dual 78 2 74 7 71 9 23 145 2 141 7 138 9 64QAM 0 92 single 77 0 73 9 71 0 21 142 0 138 9 136 0 64QAM 0 92 dual 74 0 70 9 67 6 21 139 0 135 9 132 6 256QAM 0 81 single 75 2 71 9 68 0 20 139 2 135 9 132 0 256QAM 0 81 dual 72 1 68 4 64 5 20 136 1 132 4 128 5 4 38 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Table 68 PTP 49600 TDM mode threshold power and link loss Wireless specifications System threshold dBm Output Maximum link loss dB per ch
31. 3 3 30 0 6 3ft dish 33 4 5 Not allowed 4 10 7 1 15 5 0 30 2 3 4ft dish 34 8 5 Not allowed 6 10 Not allowed 3 15 7 1 30 4 2 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 Planning for connectorized units Chapter 2 Planning considerations Aa NOTE Table 14 has been calculated on the basis of 0 5 dB cable loss and the highest gain antennas per size of which Cambium are aware At these operating frequencies feeder losses even with short cables are unlikely ever to be below 0 5 dB for practical installations and cable diameters ANOTE Antenna Gain and Cable Loss must be entered correctly in the Installation Wizard as they are used by the software to impose an automatic constaint on Maximum Power Level For more information see Step 2 Wireless configuration on page 6 51 Calculating RF cable length 5 8 GHz FCC only The 5 8 GHz band FCC approval for the product is based on tests with a cable loss between the ODU and antenna of not less than 1 2 dB If cable loss is below 1 2 dB with a 6 ft diameter external antenna the connectorized PTP 600 may exceed the maximum radiated spurious emissions allowed under FCC 5 8 GHz rules Cable loss depends mainly upon cable type and length To meet or exceed the minimum loss of 1 2 dB use cables of the type and length specified in Table 15 source Times Microwave This data excludes connector losses Table 15 RF cable lengths required to achieve 1 2 dB loss at 5 8 GHz
32. 4651 4851 4871 4801 4977 Japon 4951 497 LCF 4722 e722 4742 aren 4762 4002 4822 a542 4062 4062 4002 2522 ABAD ABBE ABBE 4732 4752 4772 4792 4812 4832 4052 4872 4882 4012 Bae 2052 4072 LCF 4729 723 4743 a763 4763 a803 4823 2543 2563 4063 003 4025 ES 4733 47534773 4783 4873 a833 4853 2873 4893 4073 aeaa aosa 4973 LCF 4724 Aran 47a a764 a784 a804 4824 4604 4064 4854 4004 4024 ADAM MOON EH 4734 a754 4776 a794 a814 4834 4854 4874 4804 4014 AB a054 4074 LCF 4725 725 4745 4765 4705 4005 4625 4845 4065 4885 2505 4075 ONS HOES HOES 4735 a755 4775 4795 4875 4835 4055 4875 4895 4015 a835 4955 4975 LCF 4726 4726 4746 4766 4786 4806 4826 4846 4866 4886 4906 4926 Jasza 4908 4008 LCF 4727 4737 a757 4777 4797 4817 4897 a857 4877 4897 4017 Japan j 4057 4877 LCF 4728 LCF 4729 2729 0749 0760 a780 4809 3620 a849 4869 4680 4000 4029 MND 06D 4080 Region Code 23 4940 MHz 4710 MHz Region Code 15 5000 MHz phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 19 Wireless specifications Chapter 4 Reference information Figure 53 PTP 48600 available spectrum in 15 MHz channel bandwidth a718 a733 4748 4763 4776 4763 4808 4025 2838 2853 4068 2883 006 4079 4028 ORR AOBB ATS AE 2728 4743 4758 4775 4768 805 a818 2833 4048 4063 4078 4
33. 4756 4766 4776 4786 4796 4806 4816 4826 4836 4846 4856 4866 4876 4886 4896 4906 4916 4926 4936 4946 4956 4966 4976 4986 4721 4731 4741 4751 4761 4771 4781 4791 4801 4811 4821 4831 4041 4851 4861 4871 4881 4891 4901 4911 4921 4931 4941 4051 4961 4971 4981 4097 Lor 4717 4717 4727 4737 4747 4757 4767 4777 4787 4797 4807 4817 4827 4837 4847 4857 4867 4877 4887 4897 4907 4917 4927 4937 4947 4957 4967 4977 4987 4722 4732 4742 4752 4762 4772 4782 4792 4802 4812 4822 4832 4842 4852 4862 4872 4882 4892 4902 4912 4922 4932 4942 4952 4962 4972 4982 4992 LCF 4718 2008 4048 4968 4968 4078 4906 4723 4733 4743 4753 4763 4773 4783 4793 4803 4813 4825 4833 4843 4853 4863 4875 4889 4895 4903 4073 3023 3033 a043 4958 4963 4973 4983 4995 LCF 4719 a719 4729 4739 4749 4759 4769 4779 4789 4799 4809 4819 4829 4839 4849 4859 4869 4879 4889 4899 4909 4919 4929 4930 4949 4959 4969 4979 4980 4724 4734 4744 4754 4764 4774 4784 4794 4804 4814 4824 4834 4844 4854 4864 4874 4884 4894 4904 4914 4924 4934 4944 4954 4964 4974 4984 4994 Region Code 23 fe A A A 4940 MHz 4710 MHz 4 20 Region Code 15 eeeesssS 9 sS aM 5000 MHz ph
34. 49 64 148 94 66 71 33 35 100 06 50 25 25 12 75 37 single 64QAM 0 92 83 66 41 83 125 48 56 20 28 10 84 30 42 33 21 17 63 50 single 64QAM 0 75 68 36 34 18 102 54 45 93 22 96 68 89 34 59 17 30 51 89 single 16QAM 0 87 53 18 26 59 79 77 35 73 17 86 53 59 26 91 13 46 40 37 single 16QAM 0 63 38 23 19 11 57 35 25 68 12 84 38 53 19 35 9 67 29 02 single QPSK 0 87 single 26 59 13 29 39 88 17 86 8 93 26 79 13 46 6 73 20 18 QPSK 0 63 single 19 11 9 56 28 67 12 84 6 42 19 26 9 67 4 84 14 51 BPSK 0 63 single 9 56 4 78 14 33 6 42 3 21 9 63 4 84 2 42 7 25 At zero range All rates are in Mbit s phn 2512 007v000 Dec 2012 4 79 Data throughput tables 4 80 continued Modulation 10 MHz Mode Tx Rx Both 256QAM 0 81 66 38 33 19 99 56 dual 64QAM 0 92 dual 55 92 27 96 83 88 64QAM 0 75 dual 45 70 22 85 68 55 16QAM 0 87 dual 35 55 17 78 53 33 16QAM 0 63 dual 25 56 12 78 38 34 256QAM 0 81 33 19 16 59 49 78 single 64QAM 0 92 27 96 13 98 41 94 single 64QAM 0 75 22 85 11 42 34 27 single 16QAM 0 87 17 78 8 89 26 66 single 16QAM 0 63 12 78 6 39 19 17 single QPSK 0 87 single 8 89 4 44 13 33 QPSK 0 63 single 6 39 3 19 9 58 BPSK 0 63 single 3 19 1 60 4 79 Chapter 4 Reference
35. Cambium or a Cambium distributor Cambium warrants that hardware will conform to the relevant published specifications and will be free from material defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service Cambium shall within this time at its own option either repair or replace the defective product within thirty 30 days of receipt of the defective product Repaired or replaced product will be subject to the original warranty period but not less than thirty 30 days To register PTP products or activate warranties visit the support website For warranty assistance contact the reseller or distributor Using non Cambium parts for repair could damage the equipment or void warranty Contact Cambium for service and repair instructions 4 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Problems and warranty Portions of Cambium equipment may be damaged from exposure to electrostatic discharge Use precautions to prevent damage phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 5 Security advice About This User Guide Security advice Cambium Networks systems and equipment provide security parameters that can be configured by the operator based on their particular operating environment Cambium recommends setting and using these parameters following industry recognized security practices Security aspects to be considered are protecting the confidentiality integrity and availability of information and assets Assets include the abilit
36. Identify the security level for each of the security roles Three security levels are available e No authentication no privacy e Authentication no privacy e Authentication privacy If authentication is required identify the protocol Two authentication protocols are available e MD5 e SHA If privacy will be used identify the protocol Two privacy protocols are available e DES e AES AES link encryption is only available to users who have purchased an appropriate license key phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 2 47 Security planning Chapter 2 Planning considerations y 2 48 If authentication or authentication and privacy protocols are required identify passphrases for each protocol for each SNMP user It is considered good practice to use different passphrases for authentication and privacy Passphrases must have length between 8 and 32 characters and may contain any of the characters listed in Table 17 Table 17 Permitted character set for SNMPv3 passphrases Character Code Character Code lt space gt 32 59 33 lt 60 34 61 35 gt 62 36 63 37 64 amp 38 A Z 65 90 39 91 40 92 41 93 ii 42 94 43 95 44 f 96 E 45 a Z 97 122 46 123 47 124 0 9 48 57 125 58 126 Identify up to two SNMP users that will be configured to receive notifications traps Identify the IP address and UDP
37. If the link is to be installed in any permitted region other than the default or alternative then obtain a new license key from the reseller or distributor Table 90 Default and alternative region codes for PTP 600 variants Variant Default region code Alternative region and regulation code and regulation PTP 25600 16 FCC USA 18 Taiwan PTP 45600 23 US Federal none PTP 48600 15 US Federal Extended 23 US Federal PTP 49600 14 USA Canada Public 18 Hong Kong Public Safety Safety PTP 54600 FCC IC 13 Canada 12 FCC USA PTP 54600 ETSI RoW 26 ETSI 13 Australia PTP 54600 OOBM 12 Mexico none PTP 58600 FCC IC 1 FCC USA Canada none Taiwan Brazil PTP 58600 ETSI RoW 25 ETSI 4 UK PTP 58600 OOBM 3 Mexico none PTP 59600 16 Russia 17 India phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Notifications Notifications This section contains notifications of compliance with the radio regulations that are in force in various regions PTP 25600 regulatory compliance The PTP 25600 complies with the regulations that are in force in the USA The relevant notifications are specified in this section U S Federal Communication Commission FCC notification This device complies with Part 27 of the US FCC Rules and Regulations Use of this product is limited to operators holding Licenses for the specific operating channels This equipment has been tested and fou
38. Link planning Chapter 2 Planning considerations Link planning This section describes factors to be taken into account when planning links such as range obstacles path loss and throughput PTP LINKPlanner is recommended PTP LINKPlanner The Cambium PTP LINKPlanner software and user guide may be downloaded from the support website see Contacting Cambium Networks on page 2 PTP LINKPlanner imports path profiles and predicts data rates and reliability over the path It allows the system designer to try different antenna heights and RF power settings It outputs an installation report that defines the parameters to be used for configuration alignment and operation The installation report can be used to compare the predicted and actual performance of the link Range and obstacles Calculate the range of the link and identify any obstacles that may affect radio performance Perform a survey to identify all the obstructions such as trees or buildings in the path and to assess the risk of interference This information is necessary in order to achieve an accurate link feasibility assessment The PTP 600 Series is designed to operate in Non Line of Sight NLoS and Line of Sight LoS environments An NLOS environment is one in which there is no optical line of sight that is there are obstructions between the antennas The PTP 600 Series will operate at ranges from 100 m 330 ft to 200 km 124 miles within 3 modes 0 40 km 0 25 mi
39. O Arm With Tones Arm Without Tones O Change Config Without Arming Submit Wireless Configuration Next dBm km dBi dB MHz gt gt phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 51 Task 6 Configuring wireless and telecoms interfaces Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Table 111 Step 2 Wireless Configuration attributes Attribute Access Method Meaning Link Access means that the link is established between a pre paired Master and Slave Link Name Access means that a link can only be established between units that have identical Link Name attributes Group Access means that a link can only be established between units that have identical Group ID attributes Link Name Only displayed when Access Method is set to Link Name Access A link can only be established between units that have identical Link Names Link Name may consist of letters A Z and a z numbers 0 9 spaces and the following special characters lt gt _ Group ID Only displayed when Access Method is set to Group Access A link can only be established between units that have identical Group IDs Target MAC Address Dual Payload This is only displayed when Access Method is set to Link Access This is the MAC Address of the peer unit that will be at the other end of the wireless link This is used by the system to ensure the unit establishes a wireless link to the c
40. Planning considerations Site planning This section describes factors to be taken into account when choosing sites for the ODU PIDU and PTP SYNC unit if installed ODU site selection When selecting a site for the ODU consider the following factors e Height and location to ensure that people are kept away from the antenna see Calculated distances and power compliance margins on page 4 54 e Height and location to achieve the best radio path e Ability to meet the requirements specified in Grounding and lightning protection on page 2 21 e Aesthetics and planning permission issues e Cable lengths see Maximum cable lengths on page 2 7 e The effect of strong winds on the installation see Wind loading on page 2 9 e The risk that hazardous gases will be present see Hazardous locations on page 2 11 PIDU site selection When selecting a site for the PIDU consider the following factors e Indoor location with no possibility of condensation e Availability of a mains electricity supply e Accessibility for viewing status indicators and pressing Recovery switch e Cable lengths see Maximum cable lengths on page 2 7 Aa NOTE The use of DC supplies of less than 55v will reduce the usable distance between the PIDU and ODU Figure 28 2 6 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Site planning Figure 28 Relationship between DC voltage and cable length 250 200 g Cable length metres 3
41. RF cable type Minimum cable length LMR100 0 6 m 1 9 ft LMR200 1 4 m 4 6 ft LMR300 2 2 m 7 3 ft LMR400 3 4 m 11 1 ft LMR600 5 0 m 16 5 ft 2 20 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Grounding and lightning protection Grounding and lightning protection This section describes the grounding and lightning protection requirements of a PTP 600 installation A WARNING Electro magnetic discharge lightning damage is not covered under warranty The recommendations in this guide when followed correctly give the user the best protection from the harmful effects of EMD However 100 protection is neither implied nor possible The need for power surge protection Structures equipment and people must be protected against power surges typically caused by lightning by conducting the surge current to ground via a separate preferential solid path The actual degree of protection required depends on local conditions and applicable local regulations Cambium recommends that PTP 600 installation is contracted to a professional installer Standards Full details of lightning protection methods and requirements can be found in the international standards IEC 61024 1 and IEC 61312 1 the U S National Electric Code ANSI NFPA No 70 1984 or section 54 of the Canadian Electric Code Aa NOTE International and national standards take precedence over the requirements in this guide phn 2512 007v000
42. Top LPU direct ground cable O if mandated by regulations 5 50 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Installing an E1 or T1 interface 2 Connect and ground the top LPU for E1 or T1 The procedure is similar to that described in Connecting and grounding the ODU and top LPU on page 5 8 with the following differences Connect the E1 T1 back to back cable to the E1 T1 port of the ODU Connect a ground cable from the ODU to the E1 T1 top LPU If mandated by local regulations then connect a ground cable from the E1 T1 top LPU to the grounding system 3 Install the main drop cable for E1 or T1 by following the procedure described in Installing the drop cable and bottom LPU on page 5 16 4 Install the bottom LPU for E1 or T1 The procedure is similar to that described in Installing and grounding the drop cable at building entry on page 5 27 except that the short drop cable is run to the site of the E1 or T1 patch panel Drop cable to E1 or T1 link Telecoms channel cables OQ O Ground cable Lightning Protection Unit LPU Patch panel for E1 or T1 link E1 or T1 drop cable from ODU DN Channel A Channel B phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 5 51 Installing an E1 or T1 interface Chapter 5 Installation 5 Configure the patch panel to connect the E1 or T1 drop cable to the telecoms channels The telecoms connection pin outs are specified in Table 98 mi tit Channel
43. U Boit 5 MO Square gack U BoR SH MB Square gack Two kits are required per standard link total four LPUs For installations not in hazardous locations use LPU End Kit PTP600 Cambium part number WB2907D For installations in hazardous locations use LPU End Kit PTP400 600 Atex Hazloc Compliant Cambium part number WB3938A Kit contents two LPUs grounding cables 600mm ODU to LPU cable nuts bolts and glands Cable ties cable cleats For securing cables Purchase separately Indoor Cat5e cable The connected network equipment must feature screened RJ45 connectors and must be connected to ground otherwise the PIDU will not be grounded To connect the PIDU to network equipment use screened cable that meets this specification Screening Must be either foil screen FTP or braided screen STP cable Connectors Must use screened RJ45 connectors with metal shells at both ends Electrical connection There must be a continuous electrical connection between both screened connectors Drop cable tester 2 62 An optional item for testing the resistances between the RJ45 pins of the drop cable Order from the support website see Contacting Cambium Networks on page 2 by completing the order form phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Ordering components Components required with connectorized ODUs Connectorized ODUs require the addition
44. authentication or privacy protocols Auth No Priv means that users are required to use only authentication protocols Auth Priv means that users are required to use both authentication and privacy protocols Authentication Protocol Privacy Protocol The authentication protocol to be used to access the PTP 600 via SNMP This is disabled when Security Level is set to No Auth No Priv MD5 means Message Digest Algorithm SHA means NIST FIPS 180 1 Secure Hash Algorithm SHA 1 The privacy protocol to be used to access the PTP 600 via SNMP This is disabled when Security Level is set to No Auth No Priv or Auth No Priv DES means Data Encryption Standard DES symmetric encryption protocol AES means Advanced Encryption Standard AES cipher algorithm Aa NOTE A user configured to use AES privacy protocol will not be able to transmit and receive encrypted messages unless the license key enables the AES capability phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 67 Task 7 Setting up SNMP agent Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Step 4 SNMP user accounts configuration for SNMPv3 The Step 4 SNMP User Accounts Configuration page is displayed Figure 135 If the chosen SNMP Security Mode is Web based then SNMP user accounts must be configured to access the unit Update the individual user attributes Table 116 for up to 10 SNMP users Select Next
45. i DFS In this mode the unit monitors the spectrum looking for the channel with the lowest level of interference Statistical techniques are used to select the most appropriate transmit and receive channels The unit can be configured such that it operates in i DFS mode but does not operate on selected channels This allows a frequency plan to be implemented in cases where multiple links are installed in close proximity e Fixed Frequency In this mode the unit must be configured with a single fixed transmit frequency and a single fixed receive frequency These may set to the same value or to different values This mode should only be considered in exceptional circumstances for example where it is known that are no sources of interference on the selected channels Regions with mandatory radar detection The PTP 600 fully conforms to regional regulatory requirements for radar avoidance In regions that mandate DFS the unit first ensures that there is no radar activity on a given channel for a period of 60 seconds before radiating on that channel Once a channel has been selected for operation the unit will continually monitor for radar activity on the operating channel If detected it will immediately cease radiating and attempt to find a new channel In DFS regions choose DFS or DFS with i DFS e Dynamic Frequency Selection DFS Once a channel is selected the unit will only attempt to find an alternative channel if rada
46. least 60 seconds even if there is found to be no radar on the channel phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 1 31 Wireless operation Chapter 1 Product description e When operating on a channel the spectrum management algorithm implements a radar detection function which looks for impulsive interference on the operating channel If impulsive interference is detected spectrum management will mark the current operating channel as having detected radar unavailable channel and initiate a channel hop to an available channel The previous operating channel will remain in the unavailable state for thirty minutes after the impulsive interference pulse was detected e After the thirty minutes have expired the channel will be returned to the usable channel pool There is a secondary requirement for bands requiring radar avoidance Regulators have mandated that products provide a uniform loading of the spectrum across all devices In general this prevents operation with fixed frequency allocations However e ETSI regulations do allow frequency planning of networks as that has the same effect of spreading the load across the spectrum e The FCC does allow channels to be barred if there is actually interference on them Aa NOTE Fixed frequency allocation is not recommended in radar avoidance regions as any radar detection would cause a system outage of at least 30 minutes Encryption The PTP 600 supports optional encryption for data transmitt
47. line When the cable is in position and the grip handle is fastened to the supporting structure remove the hoist line 2 Connect the top end of the main drop cable to the top LPU unused port as described in Connecting an RJ45 and gland to a unit on page 5 21 3 Lay the main drop cable as far as the building entry point ensuring there is enough length to extend through the wall of the building to the bottom LPU 4 Attach the main drop cable to the supporting structure using site approved methods 5 Ground the drop cable to the supporting structure at the points shown in Figure 32 mast or tower installation or Figure 33 wall installation as described in Making a drop cable ground point on page 5 23 Aa NOTE A mast or tower may require additional grounding points as specified in Protection requirements for a mast or tower installation on page 2 24 5 20 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Installing the drop cable and bottom LPU Connecting an RJ45 and gland to a unit Perform this task to connect the drop cable to an ODU or LPU This procedure contains illustrations of an ODU but it applies in principle to both the ODU and the LPU To connect the drop cable with a gland to a unit LPU or ODU proceed as follows 1 Insert the RJ45 plug into the socket in the unit making sure that the locking tab snaps home 2 Support the drop cable and gently hand screw the gland body into the unit until the O
48. ou dont le gain est sup rieur au gain maximal indiqu sont strictement interdits pour l exploitation de l metteur Table 34 Allowed antennas for deployment in USA Canada 5 4 GHz Manufacturer Antenna Type Gain Parabolic dBi Dish Andrew Andrew 2 foot Parabolic P2F 52 29 4dBi 29 4 Y Andrew Andrew 2 foot Dual Pol Parabolic PX2F 52 29 4 Y 29 4dBi Andrew Andrew 3 foot Parabolic P3F 52 33 4dBi 33 4 Andrew Andrew 3 foot Dual Pol Parabolic PX3F 52 33 4 33 4dBi Andrew Andrew 4 foot Parabolic P4F 52 34 9dBi 34 9 Andrew Andrew 4 foot Dual Pol Parabolic PX4F 52 34 9 34 9dBi phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Ordering components Manufacturer Antenna Type Gain Parabolic dBi Dish Gabriel Gabriel 2 foot High Performance QuickFire 28 2 Y Parabolic HQF2 52 N Gabriel Gabriel 4 foot High Performance QuickFire 34 4 Y Parabolic HQF4 52 N Gabriel Gabriel 2 foot High Performance Dual 28 1 Y QuickFire Parabolic HOFD2 52 N Gabriel Gabriel 4 foot High Performance Dual 34 3 Y QuickFire Parabolic HOFD4 52 N Gabriel Gabriel 2 foot Standard QuickFire Parabolic 28 5 Y QF2 52 N Gabriel Gabriel 2 foot Standard QuickFire Parabolic 28 5 Y QF2 52 N RK Gabriel Gabriel 2 5 foot Standard QuickFire Parabolic 31 2 Y QF2 5 52 N Gabriel Gabriel 4 foot Standard QuickFire Parabolic 34 8 Y QF4 52 N Gabriel Ga
49. phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 2 15 Link planning Chapter 2 Planning considerations Aa NOTE There is a small difference between the rates for IP and TDM because there is fragmentation in TDM for low priority traffic which causes the throughput to be reduced by approximately 1 compared to the IP mode Calculation example Suppose that the link characteristics are e Product variant PTP 600 Lite e Link Symmetry 1 1 e Link Mode Optimization TDM e Modulation Mode 64QAM 0 92 Dual e Channel Bandwidth 10 MHz e Link Range 60 km The calculation procedure for this example is as follows 1 Use Table 92 to look up the data throughput capacity rates Tx 41 41 Mbits s Rx 41 41 Mbits s Both 82 81 Mbits s 2 Divide these rates by 2 to give PTP 600 Lite rates Tx 20 70 Mbits s Rx 20 70 Mbits s Both 41 40 Mbits s 3 Use Figure 87 to look up the Throughput Factor for 1 1 TDM and Link Range 60 km The factor is 0 86 4 Multiply the rates from Step 2 by the Throughput Factor from Step 3 to give the throughput capacity of the link Tx 17 80 Mbits s Rx 17 80 Mbits s Both 35 60 Mbits s 2 16 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Planning for connectorized units Planning for connectorized units This section describes factors to be taken into account when planning to use connectorized ODUs with external antennas in PTP 600 links When to install connectorized units The majority of radio lin
50. proceed as follows 1 Prepare the drop cable end as follows Bare back the cable outer and copper screen to 50mm Bare back the cable inner to 17mm Un twist the cable pairs Strip the individual conductors to 5mm phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 Installing a GPS receiver for PTP SYNC Chapter 5 Installation 2 Fit the plug outer associated boot and boot insert 3 Connect the socket contacts using either of the following techniques Crimp Crimp the socket contacts onto each of the conductors using the correct crimp tool and positioner setting the wire size selector to 3 for 24AWG wire Solder When soldering the socket contacts onto each of the conductors ensure that there is no solder or flux residue on the outside of the contact Care should also be taken that the individual conductor insulation does not peel back with the soldering heat allowing possible shorts when assembled into the plug shell 5 44 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Installing a GPS receiver for PTP SYNC 6 Fit four dummy contacts into the unused 12 way circular connector locations 6 7 8 and 10 to provide strength and sealing Push the contacts in from the pin insertion side Pin insertion side Plug mating side Insert the eight RJ45 contact pins into the pin insertion side of the 12 way circular connector in accordance with Figure 101 It is easiest to insert the pins from the center out i
51. 0 41 1 803 285 0 0 0 0 0 0 254 254 153 153 92 92 37 37 98 98 194 194 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 822 822 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 655 655 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Managing performance Table 145 Detailed Counters attributes Attribute Meaning Tx amp Rx Octets Total number of octets bytes transmitted or received over the interface Rx Drops Total number of frames dropped due to the lack of sufficient capacity in the receive buffer Rx Packets Total number of packets received by the interface This includes both good and bad packets Rx Broadcasts Total number of good broadcast packets Rx Multicasts Total number of good multicast packets Rx CRC and Align Rx Undersize Rx Oversize Total number of packets with CRC or frame alignment errors Total number of packets received that are less than 64 bytes and have a valid CRC Total number of packets received that are greater than the maximum number of bytes with a valid CRC Rx Fragments Total number of packets that are less than 64 bytes with an invalid CRC these packet types are also known as runts Rx Jabbers Total number of packets received that are greater than the maximum number of bytes with an invalid CRC Rx 64 Bytes T
52. 0 256QAM 0 81 dual 72 1 68 4 66 9 64 5 20 20 136 1 132 4 130 9 128 5 4 36 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Wireless specifications Table 66 PTP 48600 TDM mode threshold power and link loss System Threshold dBm per channel bandwidth Output power dBm Maximum link loss dB per channel bandwidth Modulation Mode 5 10 15 20 sich ahh 5 10 15 20 MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz BPSK 0 63 single 98 6 95 5 93 3 91 9 27 27 169 6 166 5 164 3 162 9 QPSK 0 63 single 91 4 88 8 87 8 85 7 27 27 162 4 159 8 158 8 156 7 QPSK 0 87 single 87 9 85 2 83 5 81 9 27 26 158 9 156 2 154 5 151 9 16QAM 0 63 single 85 4 82 7 81 1 79 6 25 25 154 4 151 7 150 1 148 6 16QAM 0 63 dual 81 9 79 5 77 8 76 5 25 25 150 9 148 5 146 8 145 5 16QAM 0 87 single 81 0 78 2 76 8 75 5 25 25 150 0 147 2 145 8 144 5 16QAM 0 87 dual 77 8 75 4 74 0 72 5 25 25 146 8 144 4 143 0 141 5 64QAM 0 75 single 77 9 75 2 73 9 72 6 23 23 144 9 142 2 140 9 139 6 64QAM 0 75 dual 75 0 72 6 71 1 69 3 23 23 142 0 139 6 138 1 136 3 64QAM 0 92 single 76 5 73 9 72 3 70 7 21 21 141 5 138 9 137 3 135 7 64QAM 0 92 dual 73 3 71 0 69 0 67 2 21 21 138 3 136 0 134 0 132 2 256QAM 0 81 single 75 1 72 3 70 8 69 3 20 20 139 1 136 3 134 8 133 3 256QAM 0 81 dual 71 7 69 3 67 3 65 4
53. 0 6 8 4 6 2 LCF 4405 4 4 41 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4j j4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 1 2 alla 5 7 7 Ila l8 0 3 6 7 9 1 7 9 11171 3119 g 7 T LCF 44 ajja jjajaja alfalfa alal Tala AAAA 4 i4 CF 4406 i allallallallat aliatlatialialiatlallatlalialfolis sisi siististis isiisl s is 0 1 1213 S44 STE lel I71 71 8 folio fO fOl i422 3 13 14 15 7 5 ete B28 14 OHS 2 8 4 Of lel f2 sil4 folje 2 8 4 ffO e 2 8i 4 so e j2 18 LCF 4407 4 4114 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 41 4 4 41 4 4 14 4 5 5 5 0 3 3 4 61 71 7118 9 1 2 5 if 1 17 9 7 3 9 5 7 5 T if a 414 4 4 14 4 4 4l14 4 4 4 l4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 LCF 4408 Jallallallallalla la 4 l14 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 0 1 12112 13 13 4 SI6 I6117 8 18 9ll9 1 2 3 5 7 8 4 o 6 2 8 14 6121 8 4 Jollee sais 0 2 4 8 0 4400 MHz These LCFs are only available with RF card version 2 or greater phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 eos peng Fery kory Feer Eeey aaa Ee e anash oone 4600 MHz 4 17 wone Wireless specifications Chapter 4 Reference information Region code 24 NTIA e Inthe 30 MHz Figure 49 channel bandwidth the PTP 45600 variant operates on a 30 MHz channel raster This bandwidth is only available in ODUs fitted with RF card version 2 or greater e Inthe 20 MHz Figure 50 channel bandwidth the PTP 45600 variant operates on a 20 MHz channel raster e Inthe 10 MHz Figure 51 channel bandwidth th
54. 02 Sep 2011 09 46 56 GMT 00 00 Disabled Enabled phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 15 Connecting link to the network Table 129 SNTP clock attributes Attribute Meaning SNTP State Enabled means that the ODU will obtain accurate date and time updates from a networked time server SNTP Primary Server Specifies the primary SNTP server determining the order in which the servers are tried SNTP Primary Server Dead Time Time in seconds to wait before retrying communications with an unresponsive primary SNTP server Setting the value to zero disables the timer SNTP Server Retries SNTP Server Timeout SNTP Poll Interval Number of times the PTP will retry after an SNTP server fails to respond Time in seconds the PTP will wait for a response from an SNTP server The SNTP server polling interval SNTP Server 1 and 2 SNTP Server Status Status message reflecting the state of communications with the SNTP server SNTP Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the networked SNTP server SNTP Server Port Number Enter the port number of the networked SNTP server By convention the default value for the port number is 123 SNTP Server Authentication Protocol SNTP Server Key Identifier Authentication protocol to be used with this SNTP server None or DES SNTP key identifier A key of zeros is
55. 1 23 132 5 129 1 128 7 124 1 4 32 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Wireless specifications Table 62 PTP 25600 TDM mode threshold power and link loss System threshold dBm PoR Maximum link loss dB Modulation per channel bandwidth ae per channel bandwidth mode 5 10 15 20 All 5 10 15 20 MHz MHz MHz MHz bands MHz MHz MHz MHz BPSK 0 63 single 97 6 95 1 93 0 90 4 23 156 6 154 1 152 0 149 4 QPSK 0 63 single 91 6 89 1 88 2 85 2 23 150 6 148 1 147 2 144 2 QPSK 0 87 single 88 3 85 6 85 1 81 5 23 147 3 144 6 144 1 140 5 16QAM 0 63 single 86 4 83 9 83 5 79 4 23 145 4 142 9 142 5 138 4 16QAM 0 63 dual 84 2 80 8 80 7 76 6 23 143 2 139 8 139 7 135 6 16QAM 0 87 single 81 7 78 1 77 3 73 6 23 140 7 137 1 136 3 132 6 16QAM 0 87 dual 78 6 74 4 74 3 70 0 23 137 6 133 4 133 3 129 0 64QAM 0 75 single 78 8 75 2 74 2 70 6 23 137 8 134 2 133 2 129 6 64QAM 0 75 dual 75 4 71 0 70 9 66 7 23 134 4 130 0 129 9 125 7 64QAM 0 92 single 76 0 73 4 72 2 68 6 23 135 0 132 4 131 2 127 6 64QAM 0 92 dual 73 5 69 3 68 9 64 8 23 132 5 128 2 127 9 123 8 A oe 73 4 71 6 69 1 65 4 23 132 4 130 6 128 1 124 4 256QAM 0 81 dual 70 4 67 6 65 9 61 6 23 129 4 126 6 124 9 120 6 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 33 Wireless specifications Ch
56. 1 65 describes the optional UC APL mode of operation phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 1 1 Overview of the PTP 600 Chapter 1 Product description Overview of the PTP 600 This section introduces the key features typical uses product variants and components of the PTP 600 Purpose Cambium PTP 600 Series Bridge products are designed for Ethernet bridging over point to point microwave links in the licensed bands 2 5 GHz 4 5 GHz 4 8 GHz and 4 9 GHz and in the unlicensed bands 5 4 GHz ETSI Band B 5 8 GHz ETSI Band C and FCC ISM band and 5 9 GHz Users must ensure that the PTP 600 Series complies with local operating regulations The PTP 600 Series acts as a transparent bridge between two segments of the operator s network In this sense it can be treated as a virtual wired connection between two points The PTP 600 Series forwards 802 3 Ethernet packets destined for the other part of the network and filters packets it does not need to forward The system is transparent to higher level protocols such as VLANs and Spanning Tree Key features 1 2 The key features of the PTP 600 Series include e True non line of sight NLOS operation by using a combination of Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing OFDM modulation and Multiple Input Multiple Output MIMO techniques e Wireless connections of up to 200km 124 miles in near line of sight conditions and up to 10km 6 miles in deep non line of sight conditions e Co
57. 1 port at which SNMP traps are received SNMP Trap User Account 1 The user name and associated protocols to use when sending SNMP traps to server 1 SNMP Trap IP Address 2 SNMP Trap Port Number 2 The IP address of the second SNMP server trap receiver This will normally be the network management system but it may be a separate trap receiver Enter zeros to disable logging on the second SNMP server The server 2 port at which SNMP traps are received SNMP Trap User Account 2 The user name and associated protocols to use when sending SNMP traps to server 2 Confirming SNMP configuration for SNMPv3 When the Confirm SNMP Configuration page Figure 137 is displayed review the settings and select either Back or Confirm SNMP Configuration and Reboot When the settings are confirmed the unit reboots phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Figure 137 Confirm SNMP Configuration page for SNMPv3 SNMP State SNMP Version SNMP Security Mode SNMP Engine ID Format SNMP Port Number MIB II System Objects Sys Contact Sys Name Sys Location System Admin Policy Security Level Authentication Protocol Privacy Protocol Read Only Policy Security Level Authentication Protocol Privacy Protocol User 1 Name Role User 2 Name Role Trap Configuration SNMP Enabled Traps Trap 1 Configuration SNMP Trap IP Address SNMP Trap Port Number SNMP Trap User Account Tr
58. 14 41 71 166 85 94 46 31 49 125 95 64QAM 0 75 dual 163 14 40 78 203 92 102 26 34 09 136 35 77 19 25 73 102 92 16QAM 0 87 dual 126 91 31 73 158 64 79 55 26 52 106 07 60 05 20 02 80 07 16QAM 0 63 dual 91 24 22 81 114 04 57 19 19 06 76 25 43 17 14 39 57 56 256QAM 0 81 118 47 29 62 148 09 74 26 24 75 99 02 56 06 18 68 74 74 single 64QAM 0 92 99 82 24 95 124 77 62 57 20 85 83 42 47 23 15 74 62 97 single 64QAM 0 75 81 57 20 39 101 96 51 13 17 04 68 17 38 59 12 86 51 46 single 16QAM 0 87 63 46 15 86 79 32 39 78 13 26 53 03 30 02 10 01 40 03 single 16QAM 0 63 45 62 11 40 57 02 28 59 9 53 38 12 21 58 7 19 28 78 single QPSK 0 87 single 31 73 7 93 39 66 19 89 6 63 26 51 15 01 5 00 20 01 QPSK 0 63 single 22 81 5 70 28 51 14 30 4 76 19 06 10 79 3 60 14 39 BPSK 0 63 single 11 40 2 85 14 25 7 15 2 38 9 53 5 39 1 80 7 19 At zero range All rates are in Mbit s phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 83 Data throughput tables 4 84 continued Modulation 10 MHz Mode Tx Rx Both 256QAM 0 81 66 38 33 19 99 56 dual 64QAM 0 92 dual 55 92 27 96 83 88 64QAM 0 75 dual 45 70 22 85 68 55 16QAM 0 87 dual 35 55 17 78 53 33 16QAM 0 63 dual 25 5
59. 1PPS IN interface and the 1PPS timing source e On cluster slave units Ensure that there is a cable connection between the slave GPS SYNC IN interface and the SYNC OUT interface of the preceding unit in the chain STATUS LED double blinks Meaning There may be a fault in the GPS SYNC IN or 1PPS IN cables Action Check the GPS wiring in accordance with Table 54 Aa NOTE This state is not available in PTP SYNC model number WB3665AA ODU LED does not illuminate within 90 seconds Meaning There may be no communication between PTP SYNC and ODU Action Ensure that the PTP SYNC ODU OUT interface is connected to the ODU and LPUs if installed via the drop cable 8 14 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Testing PTP SYNC ODU LED blinks red Meaning Error in communication with ODU Possible causes are fault in the ODU or PIDU cable or maximum recommended cable lengths exceeded Action Confirm that the ODU and PIDU cables are not too long see Maximum cable lengths on page 2 7 Check the ODU cable wiring by following the procedure described in Test resistance in the ODU cable on page 8 8 GPS LED does not illuminate or blink on clustered units Meaning This indicates a fault only when the timing source is a GPS receiver Action Table 152 describes the action to be taken depending upon the behavior of the GPS LEDs at the master and slave s Table 152 Clustered PTP SYNC units GPS LE
60. 2 control protocols by inspecting the Ethernet destination address of each bridged frame Table 77 Table 77 Destination address in layer 2 control protocols Destination address Protocol 01 80 c2 00 00 00 to 01 80 c2 00 IEEE 802 1 bridge protocols 00 0f 01 80 c2 00 00 20 to 01 80 c2 00 IEEE 802 1 Multiple Registration Protocol MRP 00 2f 01 80 c2 00 00 30 to 01 80 c2 00 IEEE 802 1ag Connectivity Fault Management 00 3f CFM 01 19 a7 00 00 00 to 01 19 a7 00 Ring Automatic Protection Switching R APS 00 ff 00 e0 2b 00 00 04 Ethernet Automatic Protection Switching EAPS phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 47 Syslog message formats Chapter 4 Reference information Syslog message formats This section describes the format and content of syslog messages Format of syslog server messages PTP 600 generates syslog messages in this format SP x20 CO X3A SC X3B LT lt x3C GT gt X3E syslog pri header SP message pri LT 1 182 GT header timestamp SP hostname timestamp month SP days SP hours minutes seconds month Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec days 1 31 hours 00 23 minutes seconds Q0 59 hostname 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 message PTP600 CO SP configuration status event a configurat
61. 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Hardware warranty Hardware warranty Cambium s standard hardware warranty is for one 1 year from date of shipment from Cambium or a Cambium Point To Point Distributor Cambium warrants that hardware will conform to the relevant published specifications and will be free from material defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service Cambium shall within this time at its own option either repair or replace the defective product within thirty 30 days of receipt of the defective product Repaired or replaced product will be subject to the original warranty period but not less than thirty 30 days phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 3 19 Limit of liability Chapter 3 Legal information Limit of liability IN NO EVENT SHALL CAMBIUM NETWORKS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PARTY FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL EXEMPLARY OR OTHER DAMAGE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS OR FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY EVEN IF CAMBIUM HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the above exclusion or limitation may not apply to you IN NO CASE SHALL CAMBIUM S LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT YOU PAID FOR THE PRO
62. 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 26 PTP 600 Series User Guide Wireless specifications Figure 68 PTP 58600 available spectrum in 5 MHz channel bandwidth 51 5 51 51 5 5 5 5 51 5 5 5 5 f5 5 51 5 5 _ TIITII 77777777 8 8 8 8 8 8 LCF 5730 Hisiistialla isiielleli7ii7iialiatia oljolta 2 i2tisti3tl4 0 6 2 8 4 0 6 2 8 4 0 6 8 4 0 2 8 4 1 5 5 5 151 5 5 5 5 5 51 5 s 5 s s 5 51 5 5 LCF 5732 7II7 711 71 7 7171 717477717 8 tis falls 8 ifs sls SIISTI4 ISIS 61 16 71 8 1 8 91 9 olla 1 2 f2 13 14 4 2 8 4 O 6 2 8 4 o 16 121 8 4 o le 2 8 i4 oO 6 LCF 5734 5 7 6 4 5725 MHz 5850 MHz phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 27 Wireless specifications 4 28 Chapter 4 Reference information PTP 58600 transmit power reduction at the band edges Operation at or near the 5 8 GHz band edges can results in a lower maximum transmit power In some configurations the PTP 600 Series solution reduces the power when operating at the edge channels The amount of reduction if any is dependent on the region code of the region of operation This currently only affects systems configured with region code 1 The power reductions in the edge channels for 5 MHz 10 MHz 15 MHz and 30 MHz are presented in Table 60 for region code 1 ONLY Table 60 PTP 58600 band edge Tx power reduction Power Levels for Channel Center Channel Width MHz
63. 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Data network planning Ensure that the design of the data network permits bi direction routing of IP datagrams between network management systems and the ODUs For example ensure that the gateway IP address identifies a router or other gateway that provides access to the rest of the data network Quality of service for bridged Ethernet traffic Decide how quality of service will be configured in PTP 600 to minimise frame loss and latency for high priority traffic Wireless links often have lower data capacity than wired links or network equipment like switches and routers and quality of service configuration is most critical at network bottlenecks PTP 600 provides eight queues for traffic waiting for transmission over the wireless link QO is the lowest priority queue and Q7 is the highest priority queue Traffic is scheduled using strict priority in other words traffic in a given queue is transmitted when all higher priority queues are empty Layer 2 control protocols Select the transmission queue for each of the recognised layer 2 control protocols L2CP These protocols are essential to correct operation of the Ethernet network and are normally mapped to a high priority queue Ethernet frames that match one of the recognised L2CPs are not subject to the Ethernet and IP MPLS classification described below Priority schemes Select the priority scheme based on Ethernet priority or
64. 3 15 Cambium Networks end user license agreement Chapter 3 Legal information Libpng libpng versions 1 2 6 August 15 2004 through 1 2 35 February 14 2009 are Copyright 2004 2006 2008 Glenn Randers Pehrson and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng 1 2 5 with the following individual added to the list of Contributing Authors Cosmin Truta libpng versions 1 0 7 July 1 2000 through 1 2 5 October 3 2002 are Copyright 2000 2002 Glenn Randers Pehrson and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng 1 0 6 with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors Simon Pierre Cadieux Eric S Raymond Gilles Vollant and with the following additions to the disclaimer There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the library or against infringement There is no warranty that our efforts or the library will fulfil any of your particular purposes or needs This library is provided with all faults and the entire risk of satisfactory quality performance accuracy and effort is with the user libpng versions 0 97 January 1998 through 1 0 6 March 20 2000 are Copyright 1998 1999 Glenn Randers Pehrson and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng 0 96 with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors Tom Lane Glenn Randers Pehrson Willem van Schaik libpng versions 0
65. 4499 4519 4539 4559 4579 4429 4449 4469 4489 4509 4529 4549 4569 4589 LCF 4411 LCF 4415 LCF 4417 4400 MHz 4600 MHz These LCFs are only available with RF card version 2 or greater phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 Wireless specifications Chapter 4 Reference information Figure 46 PTP 45600 available spectrum in 15 MHz channel bandwidth RC 23 LCF 4408 LCF 4409 LCF 4410 LCF 4411 LCF 4412 LCF 4413 4400 MHz 4600 MHz These LCFs are only available with RF card version 2 or greater Figure 47 PTP 45600 available spectrum in 10 MHz channel bandwidth RC 23 LCF 4408 LCF 4409 LCF 4410 4400 MHz 4600 MHz These LCFs are only available with RF card version 2 or greater 4 16 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Wireless specifications Figure 48 PTP 45600 available spectrum in 5 MHz channel bandwidth RC 23 Z 4 14 4 14 4 4114 4 14 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 4 4 LCF 4403 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 follol a l2 2 3 5 le le zllalls 9 1 4 lalis 7 9 5 1 7 9 zi 31 9 51 1 7 9 iA 1 7 3 1 E 4j j4 4 l4 l4 4 l4 i4 4 4 14 4 Talla 4jj4j 14 14 14 4 4 4 14 LCF 4404 4 4 414 l4 4 l4ll4ll4il4a i4iiallalia s 51 5 5 5 15 5 5 5 1 5 ol 1 213114 1 41 5115 eli 7 17 8lleljo oe tHall2ii3lis 4 5 6 7 4 jjo 8j 4 lo l6 2 8 4 lolle 2 la 4 0 2 8 4
66. 4dBi Andrew Andrew 4 foot Parabolic P4F 52 34 9 Y 34 9dBi Andrew Andrew 4 foot Dual Pol Parabolic PX4F 34 9 Y 52 34 9dBi Andrew Andrew 6 foot Parabolic P6F 52 37 6 Y 37 6dBi Andrew Andrew 6 foot Dual Pol Parabolic PX6F 37 6 Y 52 37 6dBi Gabriel Gabriel 2 foot High Performance 28 2 Y QuickFire Parabolic HQF2 52 N Gabriel Gabriel 4 foot High Performance 34 4 Y QuickFire Parabolic HQF4 52 N Gabriel Gabriel 6 foot High Performance 37 4 Y QuickFire Parabolic HOF6 52 N phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 2 67 Ordering components 2 68 Chapter 2 Planning considerations Manufacturer Antenna Type Gain Flat Parabolic dBi Plate Dish Gabriel Gabriel 2 foot High Performance Dual 28 1 Y QuickFire Parabolic HQFD2 52 N Gabriel Gabriel 4 foot High Performance Dual 34 3 Y QuickFire Parabolic HQFD4 52 N Gabriel Gabriel 6 foot High Performance Dual 37 3 Y QuickFire Parabolic HOFD6 52 N Gabriel Gabriel 2 foot Standard QuickFire 28 5 Y Parabolic QF2 52 N Gabriel Gabriel 2 foot Standard QuickFire 28 5 Y Parabolic QF2 52 N RK Gabriel Gabriel 2 5 foot Standard QuickFire 31 2 Y Parabolic QF2 5 52 N Gabriel Gabriel 4 foot Standard QuickFire 34 8 Y Parabolic QF4 52 N Gabriel Gabriel 4 foot Standard QuickFire 34 8 Y Parabolic QF4 52 N RK Gabriel Gabriel 6 foot Standard QuickFire 37 7 Y Parabolic QF6 52 N Gabriel Gabriel 2 foot Standard Dual QuickFire 28 4 Y Parab
67. 514 Syslog Server 2 Syslog Server IP Address 0 0 do o Syslog Server Port 514 Submit Updated Configuration phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 81 Task 9 Configuring syslog Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Table 122 Syslog Configuration attributes Attribute Meaning Syslog Client Enabled means that event messages are logged Disabled means that event messages are not logged Syslog Client Port The client port from which syslog messages are sent Syslog Server 1 and 2 Syslog Server IP The IP address of the syslog server Address Enter zeros to disable logging on the syslog server Syslog Server Port The server port at which syslog messages are received 6 82 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 10 Configuring remote access Task 10 Configuring remote access Configuring web based management attributes The HTTP and Telnet interfaces should be disabled if the HTTPS interface is configured See Configuring HTTPS TLS page 6 23 If the HTTP HTTPS Telnet and SNMP interfaces are all disabled then it will be necessary to use the Recovery image to reset IP amp Ethernet Configuration back to factory defaults to re enable the interfaces Select menu option Management Web The Web Based Management page is displayed Figure 144 Update the attributes as required Table 123 and select Submit Updated Configuration Fig
68. 5725 5850 30 10 PTP 59600 Russia 5825 5925 5 10 15 6 30 10 India 5875 5925 5 10 15 6 30 10 1 6 Aa NOTE For PTP 25600 channel widths of 30 MHz are available where allowed by local regulations and subject to some restrictions on channel choice For PTP 58600 ETSI 5 GHz Band C use of the product is only allowed where permitted by country specific regulations phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Outdoor unit ODU Outdoor unit ODU This section describes the ODU and its interfaces ODU description The ODU is a self contained unit that houses both radio and networking electronics The ODU is supplied in two configurations integrated attached to its own flat plate antenna Figure 2 or connectorized without an antenna Figure 3 Figure 2 PTP 600 Series integrated ODU front and rear views Figure 3 PTP 600 Series connectorized ODU front and rear views phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 1 7 Outdoor unit ODU Chapter 1 Product description Connectorized variant The connectorized ODU is designed to work with externally mounted antennas that have higher gains than the integrated antenna Connectorized units can cope with more difficult radio conditions as described in When to install connectorized units on page 2 17 ODU interfaces 1 8 The ODU interfaces are illustrated in Figure 4 and described in Table 2 Figure 4 ODU interfaces Table 2 ODU int
69. A Pin 2 E Z Pin 3 I 7 E1 T1 Rx Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 Pin 7 E1 T1 Tx Z t PAE E1 T1 Rx Pin 8 Aa NOTE If it is necessary to disconnect the E1 T1 cable from the ODU refer to Disconnecting an RJ45 and gland from a unit on page 5 22 Table 98 E1 or T1 patch panel pin outs E1 or T1 Connector 120 Ohm signal 120 Ohm Telecoms drop cable Pinout balanced signal channel RJ 45 pin Signal Name twisted pair balanced number RJ 45 pin twisted pair number description Pin 1 E1T1A TX Pin 2 Rx Ring A Pin 2 E1T1A TX Pin 1 Rx Tip A Pin 3 E1T1A_RX Pin 5 Tx Ring A Pin 4 E1T1B_TX Pin 2 Rx Ring B Pin 5 E1T1B TX Pin 1 Rx Tip B Pin 6 E1T1A RX Pin 4 Tx Tip A Pin 7 E1T1B_RX Pin 5 Tx Ring B Pin 8 E1T1B_RX Pin 4 Tx Tip B 5 52 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Installing an E1 or T1 interface Baluns The patch panel may include a Balun for transmission over 75 Ohm co axial unbalanced lines The Balun should conform to the requirements of ITU G703 An example of a Balun is shown in Figure 106 It allows the transmit and receive data carried over a 75 Ohm cable to be converted to a balanced form for transmission over a 120 Ohm signal balanced twisted pair The balancing of E1 T1 120 Ohm signals is illustrated in Table 98 Figure 106 Example of a Balun Testing the E1 T1 installation Test the telecoms links by performing loopback connection tests as
70. Connecting link to the network on page 6 99 e Task 16 Configuring the fiber interface on page 6 105 e Task 17 Saving the system configuration on page 6 110 Aa NOTE If FIPS 140 2 secure mode is required refer to Configuring for FIPS 140 2 applications on page 6 111 If UC APL secure mode is required refer to Configuring for UC APL applications on page 6 114 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 1 Preparing for configuration and alignment Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Preparing for configuration and alignment This section describes the checks to be performed before proceeding with unit configuration and antenna alignment Safety precautions during configuration and alignment All national and local safety standards must be followed while configuring the units and aligning the antennas A WARNING Ensure that personnel are not exposed to unsafe levels of RF energy The units start to radiate as soon as they are powered up Respect the safety standards defined in Compliance with safety standards on page 4 51 in particular the minimum separation distances Observe the following guidelines e Never work in front of the antenna when the ODU is powered e Always power down the PIDU before connecting or disconnecting the drop cable from the PIDU ODU or LPU Regulatory compliance during configuration and alignment All applicable radio regulations must be followed while configuring the units and aligning the antennas
71. Dec 2012 2 21 Grounding and lightning protection Chapter 2 Planning considerations Lightning protection zones 2 22 The rolling sphere method Figure 30 is used to determine where it is safe to mount equipment An imaginary sphere typically 50 meters in radius is rolled over the structure Where the sphere rests against the ground and a strike termination device such as a finial or ground bar all the space under the sphere is considered to be in the zone of protection Zone B Similarly where the sphere rests on two finials the space under the sphere is considered to be in the zone of protection Figure 30 Rolling sphere method to determine the lightning protection zones Assess locations on masts towers and buildings to determine if the location is in Zone A or Zone B e Zone A In this zone a direct lightning strike is possible Do not mount equipment in this zone e Zone B In this zone direct EMD lightning effects are still possible but mounting in this zone significantly reduces the possibility of a direct strike Mount equipment in this zone A WARNING Never mount equipment in Zone A Mounting in Zone A may put equipment structures and life at risk phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Grounding and lightning protection General protection requirements To adequately protect a PTP 600 installation both ground bonding and transient voltage surge suppression are required B
72. EIRP limits Allowed EIRP on products operating in the bands used by the PTP 600 Series For example in the 5 4 GHz and 5 8 GHz bands these limits are calculated as follows e Inthe 5 4 GHz band 5470 MHz to 5725 MHz the EIRP must not exceed the lesser of 30 dBm or 17 10 x Log Channel width in MHz dBm e Inthe 5 8 GHz band 5725 MHz to 5875 MHz the EIRP must not exceed the lesser of 36 dBm or 23 10 x Log Channel width in MHz dBm Some countries for example the USA impose conducted power limits on products operating in the 5 8 GHz band Conforming to the limits Ensure the link is configured to conform to local regulatory requirements by installing license keys for the correct region code In the following situations the license key does not automatically prevent operation outside the regulations e When using connectorized ODUs with external antennas the regulations may require the maximum transmit power to be reduced To ensure that regulatory requirements are met for connectorized installations refer to Calculating maximum power level for connectorized units on page 2 18 2 2 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Regulatory planning e When installing 5 4 GHz links in the USA it may be necessary to avoid frequencies used by Terminal Doppler Weather Radar TDWR systems For more information refer to Avoidance of weather radars USA only on page 2 5 Available spectrum The available spectrum f
73. IP MPLS priority to match QoS policy in the rest of the data network Ethernet priority is also known as Layer 2 or link layer priority IP MPLS priority is also known as Layer 3 or network layer priority Ethernet priority scheme Ethernet priority is encoded in a VLAN tag Use the Ethernet priority scheme if the network carries traffic in customer or service provider VLANS and the priority in the VLAN tag has been set to indicate the priority of each type of traffic Select a suitable mapping from the Ethernet priority to the eight PTP 600 queues An advantage of Ethernet priority is that any VLAN tagged frame can be marked with a priority regardless of the higher layer protocols contained within the frame A disadvantage of Ethernet priority is that the priority in the frame must be regenerated whenever traffic passes through a router phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 2 39 Data network plannin Chapter 2 Planning considerations p g IP MPLS priority scheme IP priority is encoded in the DSCP field in an IPv4 or IPv6 header The DSCP field provides 64 levels of priority Determine the DSCP values used in the network and select a suitable mapping from these DSCP values to the eight PTP 600 queues An advantage of IP priority is that priority in the IP header is normally propagated transparently through a router Also the DSCP field supports a large number of distinct priority code points A disadvantage of DSCP is that frames receive a single
74. MHz and 5470 5725 MHz and these radars could cause interference and or damage to license exempt local area networks LELAN For the connectorized version of the product and in order to reduce potential radio interference to other users the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power EIRP is not more than that permitted by the regulations The transmitted power must be reduced to achieve this requirement phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Notifications This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the US FCC Rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with these instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment on and off the user is encouraged to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Increase the separation between the affected equipment and the unit e Connect the affected equipment to a power outlet on a different circuit from that which the receiver is connected to e Consult th
75. Management page or alternately by selecting Fixed Frequency mode These steps unavoidably disable interference avoidance mechanisms and should not be taken if the risk of errors due to interference is more severe than the risk due to channel changes Fixed frequency operation is not available when radar detection requirements exist in the frequency band Channel barring is allowed in radar regions but it is unwise to bar all channels except one as any radar signals detected on that channel will drop the link for up to 30 minutes phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Telecoms circuits Further reading on telecoms circuits For more information on telecoms circuits refer to the following e Installing an E1 or T1 interface on page 5 50 describes how to install the hardware for an E1 or T1 interface e Task 6 Configuring wireless and telecoms interfaces on page 6 45 describes how to configure the telecoms interfaces using the installation wizard e Performing a telecoms loopback test on page 8 16 describes how to test and E1 or T1 link when a fault is suspected phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 1 47 System management Chapter 1 Product description System management This section introduces the PTP 600 management system including the web interface installation configuration alerts and upgrades Management agent PTP 600 equipment is managed through an embedded management agent Management workstations netwo
76. Number of lost packets lt 2 Perform Test resistance in the ODU cable Perform Test resistance in the ODU cable No fault found 8 6 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Testing link end hardware Test Ethernet packet errors reported by ODU Log into the unit and select Administration Statistics Detailed Counters Select Reset System Counters at the bottom of the page and wait until the Ethernet Rx Packets counter has reached 1 million the count will only update when the page is refreshed If the counter does not increment or increments too slowly because for example the PTP 600 is newly installed and there is no offered Ethernet traffic then abandon this procedure and consider using the procedure Test ping packet loss on page 8 J Check the Ethernet Rx Crc And Align counter The test has passed if this is less than 10 Test Ethernet packet errors reported by managed switch or router If the ODU is connected to a managed Ethernet switch or router it may be possible to monitor the error rate of Ethernet packets Please refer to the user guide of the managed network equipment The test has passed if the rate of packet errors reported by the managed Ethernet switch or router is less than 10 in 1 million packets Test ping packet loss Using a computer it is possible to generate and monitor packets lost between the PIDU and the ODU This can be achieved by executing the Command Prompt applicat
77. OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The license and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution license including the GNU Public License Zlib Copyright 1995 2005 Jean loup Gailly and Mark Adler This software is provided as is without any express or implied warranty In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose including commercial applications and to alter it and redistribute it freely subject to the following restrictions 1 The origin of this software must not be misrepresented you must not claim that you wrote the original software If you use this software in a product an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required 2 Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original software 3 This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution Jean loup Gailly jloup gzip org Mark Adler madler alumni caltech edu phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012
78. PIDU under the ODU connection cover can be found a PCB header and three jumpers Jumpers J906 and J907 should be removed and connection to the remote LEDs and Recovery switch made to J908 as shown in Figure 11 Figure 11 Remote LED and recovery switch wiring Green Power LED J908 opu Connection Yellow Ethemet LED Remove links J306 and J907 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 1 15 Powered indoor unit PIDU Chapter 1 Product description Further reading on the PIDU 1 16 For more information on the PIDU refer to the following PIDU site selection on page 2 6 describes how to select a location for the PIDU Ordering components on page 2 53 lists the components required for PTP 600 installations including PIDU units with Cambium part numbers PIDU specifications on page 4 3 contains specifications of the PIDU such as dimensions weight environmental and electrical requirements Installing the PIDU on page 5 29 describes how to install the PIDU connect it to the ODU and prepare the network cables Task 1 Connecting to the unit on page 6 3 describes how to connect the PIDU to a management PC to allow configuration and alignment of the PTP 600 Task 15 Connecting link to the network on page 6 99 describes how to connect the PIDU to the network when configuration installation and alignment are complete Testing link end hardware on page 8 2 describes how the PIDU is used when testing the link end hardware for suspe
79. PTP 600 Series User Guide Installing the ODU and top LPU Mounting the ODU and top LPU To mount the ODU and top LPU proceed as follows 1 Attach the ODU bracket strap to the pole using M8 x 40 mm or M8 x 70 mm bolts M8 flat washers and M8 coil washers If LPU mounting option 1 back to back has been chosen mount the LPU on the bracket bolts The LPU must be vertical with cable glands facing downwards Tighten to ensure the assembly grips but can be adjusted on the pole Use the integral safety loop Figure 92 to hoist the ODU up to the bracket observing the precautions described in Checks and safety precautions on page 5 4 Offer the ODU with pre fitted mounting bracket to the bracket strap and affix using the captive M8 bolt Tighten to ensure the assembly grips but can be adjusted on the pole Adjust the elevation and azimuth of the unit to achieve an approximate visual alignment does not apply to connectorized ODUs Tighten all three bracket bolts to the required torque setting of 14 Nm 11 lb ft Do not over tighten the bolts as this may lead to failure of the assembly If LPU mounting option 2 U bolt has been chosen mount the LPU using the U bolt bracket The LPU must be vertical with cable glands facing downwards phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 5 7 Installing the ODU and top LPU Chapter 5 Installation Connecting and grounding the ODU and top LPU To connect and ground the ODU and top LPU proc
80. Refresh Period 3600 Seconds Interference Threshold 85 dBm Channel Bandwidth 30 MHz Submit configuration changes Reset form phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 7 31 Managing spectrum Chapter 7 Operation Viewing the active channel history The active channel history is a time series display of the channels used by the PTP 600 Series over the last 25 hours To view the active channel history select the Active Channel History hyperlink from the Spectrum Management page An example of the active channel history display is shown in Figure 174 Where there are parallel entries on the display this signifies that the wireless link occupied this channel during the measurement period The measurement periods are one minute from zero to sixty minutes and twenty minutes from 60 minutes to twenty five hours Figure 174 Active channel history screen Active Channel History IP 10 10 10 11 Channel Number NU e AD O w 25h 22h 19h 16h 13h 10h 7h 4h 60m 50m 40m 30m 20m 10m Om Quantisation Interval History 7 32 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Managing spectrum Viewing historic spectrum management metrics The results of previous measurement quantization periods can be viewed from both the master and slave Spectrum Management pages To view these results hold down the shift key and click the appropriate channel on the Local Receive Channel Separation plot The time seri
81. Restore Configuration Save Configuration A snapshot of the latest system configuration can be saved to a file as a backup The file can then be used to restore this unit to a known state or configure a replacement unit to the same state The configuration values are encrypted for security Click the button below to save the configuration file Save Configuration File Restore Configuration Note this utility will only restore configuration files that were saved using software version 09 00 Please select the configuration file to restore Browse Restore Configuration File and Reboot 6 110 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Configuring for FIPS 140 2 applications Configuring for FIPS 140 2 applications This is a summary of all the configuration tasks that are necessary if the unit is to operate in FIPS 140 2 secure mode For more information refer to FIPS 140 2 mode on page 1 60 and Planning for FIPS 140 2 operation on page 2 42 Prerequisites for FIPS 140 2 configuration To confirm that all prerequisites for FIPS 140 2 are ready proceed as follows 1 Ensure that the following cryptographic material has been generated using a FIPS approved cryptographic generator Key Of Keys TLS Private Key and Public Certificates for the correct IP address Entropy Input Wireless Link Encryption Key for AES Identify the Port number for HTTPS 3 Ensure that the web browsers used are enabl
82. STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Original SSLeay License Copyright 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA lhash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following condition
83. Step 1 SNMP Configuration SNMP Minimum Privilege Level O System Administrator Security Officer Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Ovii2e v3 MiB based Web based O MAC Address IP Address Text String Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet 161 Next gt gt Table 113 Step 1 SNMP Configuration attributes for SNMPv3 Attribute Meaning SNMP Minimum Minimum security level which is permitted to administer SNMP Privilege Level security settings SNMP State Enables or disables SNMP SNMP Access Enables or disables access control to SNMP management by IP Control address SNMP Access A list of up to three IP addresses permitted to perform SNMP Control IP Address 1 2 3 management Only displayed when SNMP Access Control is Enabled SNMP Version SNMP protocol version v1 2c or v3 SNMP Security Mode MIB based means that SNMPv3 security parameters are managed via SNMP MIBs Web based means that the SNMPv3 security parameters are not available over SNMP but instead are configured using the SNMP Accounts page as described in Step 3 SNMP user policy configuration for SNMPv3 on page 6 66 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 7 Setting up SNMP agent Attribute Meaning SNMP Engine ID Specifies whether the Engine ID is generated from the MAC Format Address IP Address or Text String SN
84. Task 5 Configuring security Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment ANOTE If the Key of keys is entered or modified in the Security Wizard user accounts are reset when Commit Security Configuration is selected It is then necessary to reconfigure them Configuring local user accounts Perform this task to ensure that user access to the web based management interface is controlled in accordance with the network operator s security policy If identity based user accounts are enabled this procedure may only be performed by a Security Officer Setting user account options Select menu option Management Web Local User Accounts The User Accounts page is displayed Figure 117 Review and update the User Account Management attributes Table 106 If any attributes have been updated select Submit User Account Updates 6 34 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 5 Configuring security Figure 117 User Accounts page identity based user accounts not shown Local User Accounts Local User Account Management Identity Based User Accounts O Disabled Enabled Auto Logout Period 10 minutes Minimum Password Change Period 0 minutes Password Expiry Period 0 days Maximum Number Of Login Attempts 3 Login Attempt Lockout Action Timeout Disable Account Login Attempt Lockout Period 1 minutes Webpage Session Control Disabled Enabled Password Expiry Action Force Password Change Disa
85. Thailand 5470 5725 5 10 15 30 dBm EIRP MHz 30 MHz 21 Korea 5470 5650 15 MHz 27 dBm EIRP Mug 10 MHz 25 dBm EIRP 5 MHz 22 dBm EIRP 26 ETSI 5470 5600 Yes 30 MHz 30 dBm EIRP MHS 15 MHz 27 dBm EIRP 5650 5725 MHz 10 MHz 25 dBm EIRP 1 5 MHz 22 dBm EIRP 1 Region codes 13 and 26 the band 5600 MHz to 5650 MHz is reserved for the use of weather radars 4 62 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Compliance with radio regulations Table 88 Licenses and region codes for PTP 58600 Region License Frequencies DFS Channel Max power code regulation bandwidth 1 FCC USA 5725 5850 5 10 15 and 30 25 dBm Canada MHz 2 MHz Taiwan Brazil 2 China 5725 5850 30 MHz 32 dBm EIRP MHz 15 MHz 29 dBm EIRP 10 MHz 28 dBm EIRP 5 MHz 25 dBm EIRP 3 Australia 5725 5850 5 10 15 30 36 dBm EIRP Hong Kong MHz MHz Mexico 4 UK Finland 5725 5795 Yes 30 MHz 35 dBm EIRP MHz 15 MH 33 dBm EIRP 5815 5850 i M 10 MHz 31 dBm EIRP 1 5 MHz 28 dBm EIRP 5 Singapore 5725 5850 5 10 15 30 30 dBm EIRP MHz MHz 6 Eire 5725 5850 30 MHz 32 dBm EIRP MHZ 15 MHz 29 dBm EIRP 10 MHz 28 dBm EIRP 5 MHz 25 dBm EIRP 7 Norway 5725 5795 Yes 30 MHz 53 dBm EIRP MHz 15 MH 51 dBm EIRP 5815 5850 2 MHz 10 MHz 50 dBm EIRP 1 5 MHz 47 dBm EIRP 8 Full Power 5725 5850 5 10 15 30 25 dBm MHz MHz 10 Spain 5725 5795 Yes 30 MHz 35 dBm EIRP pan
86. This attribute defaults to a value of twenty minutes which means that the mean and percentile values displayed for each channel are calculated over the 20 minute period All channel decisions are made using the values computed over the statistics window period Spectrum management in fixed frequency mode The transmit and receive frequencies can be fixed in a PTP 600 wireless link Once fixed frequency mode is configured the spectrum management software will not attempt to move the wireless link to a channel with lower co channel and adjacent channel interference Therefore this mode of operation is only recommended for deployments where the installer has a good understanding of the prevailing interference environment see Step 2 Wireless configuration on page 6 51 Care must also be taken to ensure that the frequency allocations at each end of the link are compatible phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 1 29 Wireless operation Chapter 1 Product description Fixed frequency mode is not available in regions where radar detection is required by the regulations Adaptive modulation The PTP 600 series can transport data over the wireless link using a number of different modulation modes ranging from 256QAM 0 81 to BPSK 0 63 For a given channel bandwidth and TDD frame structure each modulation mode transports data at a fixed rate Also the receiver requires a given signal to noise ratio in order to successfully demodulate a given modulation mode
87. This section contains specifications of the ODU PIDU and other equipment required for PTP 600 installations ODU specifications The PTP 600 ODU conforms to the specifications listed in Table 43 Table 44 and Table 45 These specifications apply to all PTP 600 product variants Table 43 Integrated ODU physical specifications Category Specification Dimensions Width 370 mm 14 5 in Height 370 mm 14 5 in Depth 95 mm 3 75 in Weight 5 5 Kg 12 1 Ibs including bracket Table 44 Connectorized ODU physical specifications Category Specification Dimensions Width 305 mm 12 in Height 305 mm 12 in Depth 105 mm 4 01 in Weight 4 3 Kg 9 1 lbs including bracket Table 45 ODU environmental specifications Category Specification Temperature 40 C 40 F to 60 C 140 F Wind loading 150 mph 242 kph maximum See Wind loading on page 2 9 for a full description Humidity 100 condensing Waterproofing IP66 UV exposure 10 year operational life UL746C test evidence 4 2 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide PIDU specifications Equipment specifications The PTP 600 PIDU conforms to the specifications listed in Table 46 Table 47 and Table 48 These specifications apply to all PTP 600 product variants Table 46 PIDU physical specifications Category Specification Dimensions Width 250 mm 9 75 in Height 40 mm 1 5
88. a diagnostic type to plot refer to Table 140 for definitions Use the Trace Selection to select traces of the maximum mean or minimum values of the diagnostic type Maximum values are displayed in red mean values are displayed in purple and minimum values are displayed in blue Select Plot Selected Diagnostic The trace is displayed in the graph Figure 178 Diagnostic Plotter page Diagnostic Plotter The plot displays three traces Maximum values are displayed in red mean values are displayed in purple and minimum values are displayed in blue attrites a Diagnostics Selector Vector Error Vector Error 6 9 118 14 6 9 8 dB Trace Selection V Max MV Mean V min Page Refresh Period fi 0 Seconds Plot Selected Diagnostic phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 7 45 Managing performance Chapter 7 Operation Changing the diagnostics refresh period The default refresh period is 3600 seconds 1 hour If a much shorter refresh period is selected for example 60 seconds it is possible to monitor the performance of an operational PTP 600 link in real time To change the diagnostics refresh period select menu option System Diagnostics Plotter The Diagnostics Plotter page is displayed Figure 178 Enter the required refresh frequency in the Page Refresh Period attribute Downloading diagnostic data To download diagnostics data proceed as follows 1 Select menu option System Diagnostics Plotter CSV Downlo
89. accordance with the terms of such an agreement High Risk Materials Components units or 3 Party products used in the product described herein are NOT fault tolerant and are NOT designed manufactured or intended for use as on line control equipment in the following hazardous environments requiring fail safe controls the operation of Nuclear Facilities Aircraft Navigation or Aircraft Communication Systems Air Traffic Control Life Support or Weapons Systems High Risk Activities Cambium and its supplier s specifically disclaim any expressed or implied warranty of fitness for such High Risk Activities 2011 2012 Cambium Networks Limited All Rights Reserved phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Safety and regulatory information This section describes important safety and regulatory guidelines that must be observed by personnel installing or operating PTP 600 equipment Important safety information A WARNING To prevent loss of life or physical injury observe the safety guidelines in this section Power lines Exercise extreme care when working near power lines Working at heights Exercise extreme care when working at heights Grounding and protective earth The Outdoor Unit ODU must be properly grounded to protect against lightning It is the user s responsibility to install the equipment in accordance with national regulations In the USA follow Section 810 of the National Elec
90. agent Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Step 3 SNMP user policy configuration for SNMPv3 The Step 3 SNMP User Policy Configuration page is displayed Figure 134 If the chosen SNMP Security Mode is Web based then SNMP user accounts must be configured to access the unit SNMP users may have one of two security profiles System administrator or Read only Update the web based security profile attributes Table 115 These will determine which authentication and privacy protocols are required for SNMP users with roles System administrator and Read only Select Next Figure 134 Step 3 SNMP User Policy Configuration page for SNMPv3 Step 3 SNMP User Policy Configuration Attributes ve units System Admin Policy Security Level O No Auth No Priv Auth No Priv Auth Priv Authentication Protocol MD5 Vv Privacy Protocol DES v Read Only Policy Security Level O No Auth No Priv Auth No Priv Auth Priv Authentication Protocol MDS v Privacy Protocol DES v Ad Back Hext gt gt phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 7 Setting up SNMP agent Table 115 Step 3 SNMP User Policy Configuration attributes for SNMPv3 Attribute Security Level Meaning Defines the security level and associated protocols that are required to allow SNMP users to access the PTP 600 No Auth No Priv means that users are not required to use
91. and Slave sites This task consists of the following procedures Starting up the units on page 6 85 Checking that the units are armed on page 6 85 Aligning antennas on page 6 86 Aligning separate antennas for spatial diversity on page 6 87 Monitoring received signal level on page 6 88 Disarming the units on page 6 91 Starting up the units To connect one of the units to a management PC and start up both units proceed as follows 1 Select the unit from which this process is to be controlled either Master or Slave This is the local unit Check that the management PC is connected to the local unit powered up and logged on Start the local unit Start the remote unit Log into the local unit as described in Logging into the web interface on page 6 5 Checking that the units are armed Select menu option Home The System Summary page is displayed Check that the Install Arm State is set to Armed Figure 145 this confirms that the units are ready for alignment phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 85 Task 11 Aligning antennas Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Figure 145 System Summary page when unit is armed System Summary aubutes value Ut Link Name Slave Elapsed Time Indicator 00 39 44 If the units are not armed execute the installation wizard as described in Task 6 Configuring wireless and telecoms interfaces on page 6 45 Aligning antennas Use this procedure to ali
92. and the resistance is less than 2K Ohms regardless of cable length the test has failed Test UltraSync GPS receiver The UltraSync GPS synchronization unit if installed is located between the ODU and the LPU Use the status LEDs Figure 187 to test the GPS unit Figure 187 GPS synchronization unit ETH1 ETH2 PWR PWR To troubleshoot the UltraSync GPS synchronization unit proceed as follows Power supply Check that the 3 3V and RF_ON LEDs are lit indicating that the GPS is receiving power If they are not lit confirm that all link end hardware PIDU LPU ODU and cabling tests have been performed Synchronization Approximately 2 minutes after powering on the GPS_FIX LED should be lit If it is not ensure the GPS is at a height of at least 1 8m above the ground where there is an unobstructed path to the sky Timing When the GPS FIX LED lights up the PPS_OUT LED should begin blinking faintly at one pulse per second indicating that sync is being generated If does not replace or repair the GPS synchronization unit phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Testing the radio link Testing the radio link This section describes how to test the link when there is no radio communication when it is unreliable when the data throughput rate is too low or when a unit is causing radio or TV interference It may be necessary to test the units at both ends of the link No activity I
93. asymmetric fixed or adaptive TDD Range Optical Line of Sight 200 km 125 miles Non Line of Sight 10 km 6 miles Over the air encryption Proprietary scrambling mechanism Weather sensitivity Sensitivity at higher modes may be reduced by adjusting the Adaptive Modulation Threshold Error Correction FEC phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 9 Wireless specifications Chapter 4 Reference information Table 58 PTP 600 wireless specifications per frequency variant Item PTP PTP PTP PTP PTP PTP PTP 25600 45600 48600 49600 54600 58600 59600 RF band 2 496 2 568 4 400 4 710 4 900 5 470 5 725 5 825 GHz 2 572 2 614 4 600 5 000 4 990 5 725 5 850 5 925 2 618 2 690 Channel 5 MHz 5 MHz 5 MHz 5 MHz 5 MHz 5 MHz 5 MHz bandwidth 10 MHz 10 MHz 10 MHz 10 MHz 10 MHz 10 MHz 10 MHz 15 MHz 15 MHz 15 MHz 20 MHz 15 MHz 15 MHz 15 MHz 30 MHz 20 MHz 20 MHz 30 MHz 30 MHz 30 MHz 30 MHz 2 2 Typical 5 dB 5 dB 5 dB 5 dB 6 dB 6 dB 6 dB receiver noise Typical 18 dBi 21 5 dBi 22 dBi 22 dBi 23 dBi 23 dBi 23 dBi antenna 1 gain integrated Antenna 18 11 11 11 8 8 8 beamwidth integrated Max path 157 dB 157 dB 157 dB 157 dB 169 dB 166 dB 166 dB loss 5 MHz channel 1 PTP 49600 maximum permitted antenna gain is 26 dBi 2 PTP 54600 and 58600 Lite versions do not support channel bandwidth 5 MHz phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2
94. at the master log into the master ODU for the link Select menu option System Spectrum Management The Spectrum Management page is displayed Figure 167 Review and update the configuration attributes Table 135 and select Submit configuration changes Figure 167 illustrates 15 MHz operation other channel bandwidths are similar The width of the vertical green bar represents the channel width phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Managing spectrum Figure 167 Spectrum Management as seen from the Master Local Receive Channel Spectrum 40 50 60 70 Power dBm 80 30 100 0 F M D Channel Center Frequency MHz 5784 5790 5796 5802 5808 5736 5742 5748 5754 5760 5766 5772 5814 5820 5826 5832 5838 Peer Receive Channel Spectrum 40 Active Channel History Help 50 60 70 Power dBm 80 90 100 5736 5742 5748 5754 5760 5766 5772 5778 5784 5790 5796 5802 5808 5814 5820 5826 5832 5838 Channel Center Frequency MHz A e e Spectrum Management Page Refresh Period 3600 Seconds E dBm Tx Color Code A Rx Color Code B Asymmetric DFS O Disabled Enabled Hopping Margin B Hopping Counter 0 0 Hopping Period 180 Seconds Channel Bandwidth 15 MHz Table 135 Spectrum Management attributes Attribute Meaning Page Refresh Period The page refreshes automatically according to the setting e
95. capability when SNMPv3 users are configured with AES privacy and VACM is configured to require privacy In this case recovery is by either a restoring the correct license key or b using recovery mode to erase all configuration and entering new configuration Option b will cause default users and access configuration to be re created System logging syslog PTP 600 supports the standard syslog protocol to log important configuration changes status changes and events The protocol complies with RFC 3164 PTP 600 creates syslog messages for configuration changes to any attribute that is accessible via the web based interface or via the enterprise MIB at the SNMP interface PTP 600 additionally creates syslog messages for changes in any status variable displayed in the web based interface PTP 600 creates syslog messages on a number of events for example successful and unsuccessful attempts to log in to the web based interface PTP 600 can be configured to send syslog messages to one or two standard syslog servers Additionally PTP 600 logs event notification messages locally Locally stored event messages survive reboot of the unit and are overwritten only when the storage capacity is exhausted approximately 2000 messages The locally stored events can be reviewed using the web based user interface Only users with Security Officer role are permitted to configure the syslog client Users with Security Officer System
96. default classification if they contain a network layer protocol other than IPv4 or IPv6 MPLS priority is encoded in the traffic class TC field in the outermost MPLS label Select a suitable mapping from MPLS TC to the eight PTP 600 queues Back to back links Avoid the use of direct cabled copper connections between two PIDUs Where two or more links are deployed in a chain use one of the following solutions e Copper or fiber connections between the PIDU and a suitable Ethernet switch or router e A fiber connection between two ODUs with the Ethernet Media Type to Use control set to Fiber Media Only For more information refer to the PTP 600 Series Optical Interface Upgrade Guide Green Ethernet switches Do not connect PTP 600 units to Ethernet networking products that control the level of the transmitted Ethernet signal based on the measured length of the Ethernet link for example Green Ethernet products manufactured by D Link Corporation The Ethernet interfaces in these networking products do not work correctly when connected directly to the PTP 600 PIDU 2 40 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Security planning Security planning This section describes how to plan for PTP 600 links to operate in secure mode Planning for SNTP operation Before starting to configure Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP e Identify the time zone and daylight saving requirements that apply to the
97. drip loops e All bends must have a minimum radius of 203 mm 8 in and a minimum angle of 90 Figure 31 A diagonal run is preferable to a bend even though it does not follow the contour or run parallel to the supporting structure e All bends curves and connections must be routed towards the grounding electrode system ground rod or ground bar e Grounding conductors must be securely fastened phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 2 23 Grounding and lightning protection Chapter 2 Planning considerations Braided grounding conductors must not be used Approved bonding techniques must be used for the connection of dissimilar metals Figure 31 Grounding cable minimum bend radius and angle Radius not less than 203 mm 8 in Angle not less than 90 S Protection requirements for a mast or tower installation 2 24 If the ODU is to be mounted on a metal tower or mast then in addition to the general protection requirements above the following requirements must be observed The equipment must be lower than the top of the tower or its lightning air terminal The metal tower or mast must be correctly grounded A grounding kit must be installed at the first point of contact between the drop cable and the tower near the top A grounding kit must be installed at the bottom of the tower near the vertical to horizontal transition point This grounding kit must be bonded to the tower or tower ground bus bar TGB if insta
98. factor converted from dB d distance from point source in m Rearranging terms to solve for distance yields d P G 4r S Calculated distances and power compliance margins Table 81 shows calculated minimum separation distances recommended distances and resulting margins for each frequency band and antenna combination These are conservative distances that include compliance margins At these and greater separation distances the power density from the RF field is below generally accepted limits for the general population Explanation of terms used in Table 81 Tx burst maximum average transmit power in burst Watt P maximum average transmit power capability of the radio Watt G total transmit gain as a factor converted from dB S power density W m d minimum distance from point source meters R recommended distances meters C compliance factor 4 54 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Table 81 Power compliance margins Compliance with safety standards Band Antenna Tx burst P G S d R 0 w w wW m m m 2 5 GHz Integrated 0 25 0 2 63 10 0 32 2 6 0 4 5 GHz Integrated 0 5 0 4 158 10 0 71 5 7 0 4 8 GHz Integrated 0 5 0 4 158 10 0 71 5 7 0 Connectorized 0 5 0 4 398 10 1 1 5 4 5 4 9 GHz Integrated 0 25 0 2 158 10 0 5 2 4 0 Connectorized 0 25 0 2 398 10 0 8 5 6 25 5 4 GHz Integrated 0 005 0 00
99. grounding kit The cable grounding kit for 1 4 and 3 8 cable Figure 12 contains the following components e 1x grounding cable with grounding 2 hole lug fitted M10 e 1xself Amalgamating tape e 1x PVC tape e 3x tie wraps e 2x bolt washer and nut Ground cables must be installed without drip loops and pointing down towards the ground otherwise they may not be effective To ground the drop cable to a metal structure using the Cambium grounding kit part number 01010419001 proceed as follows 1 Remove 60 mm 2 5 inches of the drop cable outer sheath ALAA ALLA ALAA toat i phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 5 23 Installing the drop cable and bottom LPU Chapter 5 Installation 2 Cut 38mm 1 5 inches of rubber tape self amalgamating and fit to the ground cable lug Wrap the tape completely around the lug and cable Self amalgamating tape 3 Fold the ground wire strap around the drop cable screen and fit cable ties Cut the surplus from the cable ties 5 24 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Installing the drop cable and bottom LPU 5 Cuta 38mm 1 5 inches section of self amalgamating tape and wrap it completely around the joint between the drop and ground cables Self amalgamating tape 6 Use the remainder of the self amalgamating tape to wrap the complete assembly Press the tape edges together so that there are no gaps Self amalgamating tape 7 Wrap a layer of PVC
100. iiss sssiecevsises is ara ices nesteeasiage danadioednaraian eae 4 48 Event message Sivas scevienensiedssanscuuvaveeaeusonsaicus E tox eaaceuanebass tec OEE 4 49 Compliance with safety standards onanere oorner E A E OTRE 4 51 Electrical safety COMP ANGCE i5 cdesssccssecsesasdensscasoasecaesscenasesoeseoodsedesdecrswasacdestee RON cbedeveestee 4 51 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC compliance s sii scccdssacscavsaasecavtassistedanedtgueanssteanedearcas 4 51 Human exposure to radio frequency CMETGY cccccsecccsesccceeececeeecceesecseecceaeceeeecesseseeaeeees 4 52 Hazardous location complian jissisccicesssiaciesstadodacs bas raas einant ren Er E EEEREN ROTTER SKTE RE 4 56 Compliance with radio regulationSse ienna A A OTOR 4 58 Type APPOvalS sirsiran netni aa EREET EAE EAE A a 4 58 FCC and ETSI compliance testing without PTP SYNC siiscccceueaecedadeacstudausastutarsssdvtanesions 4 59 FCCand ETSI compliance testing with PTP SYN sccss acscsseiadi asna anene E ee 4 59 Examples of regulatory Init assisen E radia ectis pitted oa ee 4 60 Default and alternative region COMES iiscrssesssecscexscaessonseeasaceddvesedeassavaceesvaxtavertearacassensesss eee 4 66 NOUIIGA LIONS siosaia i aaa a a sande onandenmeadainaxeiiaei aa ndadaas E 4 67 PTP 25600 regulatory COMPLIANCE cece cceccccnesccceececaeecaeecccseeeeeaecceaeeeceeeeesseseesueseeaenes 4 67 PIP 49600 regulatory Compliance s c se caccactsssiaatety N eas eects eee am oe eS 4 68
101. in Depth 80 mm 3 in Weight 0 864 Kg 1 9 lbs Table 47 PIDU environmental specifications Category Specification Temperature 40 C 40 F to 60 C 140 F Humidity 0 to 95 non condensing Waterproofing Not waterproof Table 48 PIDU electrical specifications Category AC Input Specification 90 264 V AC 47 60 Hz Alternative DC Input 37 60 VDC DC Output Voltage For mains input 55 V 2V 0V For DC input Output voltage at maximum rated output current not more than 1 5 V below the DC input voltage AC Input connector IEC 320 C8 figure of eight DC Output current 1 4A Efficiency Over Current Protection Better than 84 Hiccup current limiting trip point set between 120 to 150 of full load current Hold up time At least 20 milliseconds phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 3 Equipment specifications Chapter 4 Reference information PTP SYNC specifications The PTP SYNC unit conforms to the specifications listed in Table 49 Table 50 and Table 51 Table 49 PTP SYNC unit physical specifications Category Specification Dimensions Width excluding ears 174 mm 6 69 in Width including ears 196 mm 7 54 in Height 31 5 mm 1 21 in Depth 79 mm 3 04 in Weight 0 485 Kg 1 1 lbs Table 50 PTP SYNC unit environmental specifications Category Specification Te
102. in the web based management interface Frame duration must be identical across all links in a synchronized network The PTP Link Planner provides a capability for computing suitable frame parameters in a synchronized network Please refer to the Link Planner User Guide for guidance on configuring TDD synchronization Link symmetry is always 1 1 in synchronized networks Link capacity in synchronized networks The TDD frame duration is extended in synchronized networks to allow for the propagation delay of the longest link in the network and to incorporate additional guard periods These guard periods protect against delayed interference from distant units in the same network The longer frame duration results in slightly lower link capacity than for an equivalent non synchronized link with the same channel bandwidth and modulation mode However TDD synchronization also reduces interference and this may allow operation in higher modulation modes The benefit of operating in a higher modulation mode normally outweighs the penalty of the slightly longer TDD frame Advantages of PTP SYNC over UltraSync PTP SYNC has several advantages over the UltraSync solution e PTP SYNC does not require individual GPS receivers nor must they be located close to the ODUs This reduces the complexity and the cost of the installation on the mast e The GPS receiver can be located anywhere with a clear view of the sky offering additional flexibility in the
103. in use During this time between 10 and 15 seconds the Master unit will not transmit and as a consequence of this neither will the Slave unit During this time the installation tone on the master unit will drop back to the band scan state and the Slave unit will drop back to the Scanning state with the pitch of the tone set to the background noise level Alignment of the unit should cease during this time e Radar detection If the unit is operating where mandatory radar avoidance algorithms are implemented the ranging behavior may be affected The Master has to monitor the initially chosen channel for 60 seconds to make sure it is clear of radar signals before transmitting If a radar is detected during any of the installation phases a further compulsory 60 seconds channel scan will take place as the master unit attempts to locate a new channel that is free of radar interference e Ranging The PTP 600 Series does not require the user to enter the link range The Master unit typically takes less than 60 seconds to determine the length of the link being installed The Master unit will remain in the Scanning state until the range of the link has been established The Master unit will only move to the Synchronized state when the range of the link has been established The Slave unit does not have a ranging process The slave unit will change to the Synchronized state as soon as the wanted signal is demodulated e Retrying same channel If at th
104. information Table 93 Throughput for PTP 600 Full link symmetry 2 1 link optimization IP This combination is not available with Channel Bandwidth 5 MHz phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Data throughput tables Table 94 Throughput for PTP 600 Full link symmetry 2 1 link optimization TDM Modulation 30 MHz 20 MHz 15 MHz Mode Tx Rx Both Tx Rx Both Tx Rx Both 256QAM 0 81 193 06 96 53 289 58 130 66 65 33 195 99 98 83 49 42 148 25 dual 64QAM 0 92 dual 162 66 81 33 243 98 110 08 55 04 165 13 83 27 41 63 124 90 64QAM 0 75 dual 132 92 66 46 199 38 89 96 44 98 134 94 68 05 34 02 102 07 16QAM 0 87 dual 103 41 51 70 155 11 69 98 34 99 104 98 52 94 26 47 79 40 16QAM 0 63 dual 74 34 37 17 111 50 50 31 25 15 75 46 38 05 19 03 57 08 256QAM 0 81 96 53 48 26 144 79 65 33 32 66 97 99 49 42 24 71 74 12 single 64QAM 0 92 81 33 40 66 121 99 55 04 27 52 82 56 41 63 20 82 62 45 single 64QAM 0 75 66 46 33 23 99 69 44 98 22 49 67 47 34 02 17 01 51 03 single 16QAM 0 87 51 70 25 85 77 55 34 99 17 49 52 49 26 47 13 23 39 70 single 16QAM 0 63 37 17 18 58 55 75 25 15 12 58 37 73 19 03 9 51 28 54 single QPSK 0 87 single 25 85 12 92 38 77 17 49 8 75 26 24 13 23 6 62 19 85 QPSK 0 63
105. installation phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 1 35 Wireless operation Chapter 1 Product description e The PTP SYNC solution is compatible with standard 1 Hz interfaces allowing an operator to take advantage of alternative timing references that may be already present at the site e The recommended GPS receiver continues to provide accurate timing even after the number of received satellites has dropped down to one leading to significantly better availability of the reference signal e The PTP SYNC offers the possibility of creating synchronized single hub networks where no GPS receiver is required Installation armed state The PTP 600 must be armed before installation or alignment of a link using the Installation Wizard In the installation armed state the modulation mode is fixed at BPSK 0 63 Single and the TDD frame duration is extended to allow the link to acquire at unknown range PTP 600 must be disarmed following successful installation to allow ACM to operate normally The Installation Wizard also provides an option to make configuration changes without arming This option is useful where configuration will be modified in an existing link without changing alignment or link range Further reading on wireless operation For information on planning wireless operation refer to the following e Regulatory planning on page 2 2 describes the regulatory restrictions that affect radio spectrum usage such as frequency range and rad
106. is absent but the standard service type Type 6 attribute is present PTP 600 selects the role for the authenticated user according to service type The supported values of service type are as follows e Login 1 Read Only e Administrative 6 System Administrator e NAS Prompt 7 Read Only If the auth role and service type attributes are absent PTP 600 selects the Read Only role The auth role vendor specific attribute is defined in Table 21 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 2 51 Security planning Chapter 2 Planning considerations Table 21 Definition of auth role vendor specific attribute Field Length Value Notes Type 1 26 Vendor specific attribute Length 1 12 Overall length of the attribute Vendor ID 4 17713 The same IANA code used for the SNMP enterprise MIB Vendor Type 1 1 auth role Vendor 1 4 Length of the attribute specific part Length Attribute 4 0 3 Integer type 32 bit unsigned Supported values Specific invalid role 0 readonly role 1 system admin role 2 security officer role 3 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Ordering components Ordering components This section describes describes how to select components for a planned PTP 600 link as an alternative to PTP LINKPlanner It specifies Cambium part numbers for PTP 600 components PTP 600 kits The PTP 600 is supplied as a Link or an End kit A Link kit contains componen
107. layer of 50 mm 2 inch PVC tape from bottom to top starting from 25 mm 1 inch below the edge of the self amalgamating tape overlapping at half width phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Installing connectorized antennas 8 Repeat with a further four layers of 19 mm 0 75 inch PVC tape always overlapping at half width Wrap the layers in alternate directions Second layer top to bottom Third layer bottom to top Fourth layer top to bottom Fifth layer bottom to top The bottom edge of each layer should be 25 mm 1 inch below the previous layer 9 Completed weatherproof connection phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 5 15 Installing the drop cable and bottom LPU Chapter 5 Installation Installing the drop cable and bottom LPU Perform this task to install the drop cable from the top LPU to the bottom LPU and PIDU and to provide grounding and lightning protection for the installation This task consists of the following procedures Preparing drop cables on page 5 17 Assembling an RJ45 connector and gland on page 5 18 Installing and grounding the main drop cable on page 5 20 Connecting an RJ45 and gland to a unit on page 5 21 Disconnecting an RJ45 and gland from a unit on page 5 22 Making a drop cable ground point on page 5 23 Installing and grounding the drop cable at building entry on page 5 27 The drop cable and ground cable installation must meet the requirements define
108. level on page 6 88 Without moving the Slave antenna adjust the elevation and azimuth of the Master antenna to achieve the highest receive signal level using one of the three recommended methods Repeat steps 2 and 3 as necessary to fine tune the alignment to find the center of the beam When the antennas have been aligned on the center of the beam verify that the receive level is within the predicted range from the installation report If this is not the case go back to step 2 The current value of receive level can be verified by using the graphical installation method see Method 2 graphical install on page 6 90 or by selecting menu option Status and monitoring the Receive Power attribute on the System Status page If after repeated attempts to align the receive level still does not lie within the predicted range this may be because the data provided to the prediction tool such as PTP LINKPlanner is inaccurate For example estimates of path obstructions antenna heights or site locations may be inaccurate Check this data and update the prediction as necessary Once the antennas have been aligned correctly tighten the integrated ODU or connectorized antenna mountings To ensure that the action of tightening does not alter antenna alignment continue to monitor received signal level Aligning separate antennas for spatial diversity If a connectorized ODU is installed at either site with two separate antennas for spati
109. limited portion of the Spectrum The three frequency bands are as shown in Figure 43 e Band 1 channels A B C and D 16 5 MHz blocks e Band 2 channels A through G 6 MHz blocks e Band 3 channels E F G and H 16 5 MHz blocks phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Wireless specifications Figure 43 PTP 25600 BRS band channel assignments Stations operating in 2568 2577 MHz and 2674 2618 MHz are se dary to adhece channel JA JB JC JD operations and must not cause interference and must accapt any ntarterance fram othar slators oe E E N ZW c SAR GFR RAR FG 1 hs EFi 6 4 16 5 MHz Blocks 41 7 6 MHz Blocks 4 16 5 MHz Blocks Consisting of 3 5 5 MHz channels each Consisting of 3 5 5 MHz channels each 2495 MHz 2572 MHz 2614 MHz 2690 MHz Ga Guard Bands MDS Channels 1 amp 2 9 Instructional Television ig Broadband Radio Service BRS Fixed Service ITFS PTP 45600 available spectrum settings The PTP 45600 product variant does not apply any band edge power reduction AX NOTE To identify the RF card version that is fitted in a PTP 45600 ODU refer to the System Status page as described in Viewing the system status on page 7 6 The Hardware Version attribute is formatted as Dxx Ryy z where Ryy contains the version of the RF card For example RO2 means that the ODU is fitted with RF card version 2 Region code 23 e Use the Lower Center Frequency attribute see
110. link capacity is variable and depends on the prevailing wireless conditions as well as the distance range between the two wireless units Transmit Modulation Mode The modulation mode currently being used on the transmit channel A list of all the modulation modes can be found in Data throughput tables on page 4 74 where data rate calculations plots are given for each available modulation mode Receive Modulation Mode The modulation mode currently being used on the receive channel A list of all the modulation modes can be found in Data throughput tables on page 4 74 where data rate calculations plots are given for each available modulation mode Link Symmetry A ratio that expresses the division between transmit and receive time in the TDD frame The first number in the ratio represents the time allowed for the transmit direction and the second number represents the time allowed for the receive direction Aa NOTE Link Symmetry is configured at the master ODU only The appropriate matching Link Symmetry is set at the slave ODU automatically For example if Link Symmetry is configured as 2 to 1 at the master ODU then the slave ODU will be set automatically as 1 to 2 In this example the master slave direction has double the capacity of the slave master direction phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 Web bas ed management Chapter 7 Operation Attribute Meaning Receive This supplies
111. maximum power level for connectorized units on page 2 18 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 2 17 Planning for connectorized units Chapter 2 Planning considerations Aa NOTE Under Industry Canada regulations this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum or lesser gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada To reduce potential radio interference to other users the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power EIRP is not more than that necessary for successful communication Conform ment a la r glementation d Industrie Canada le pr sent metteur radio peut fonctionner avec une antenne d un type et d un gain maximal ou inf rieur approuv pour l metteur par Industrie Canada Dans le but de r duire les risques de brouillage radio lectrique a l intention des autres utilisateurs il faut choisir le type d antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonn e quivalente p i r e ne d passe pas l intensit n cessaire a l tablissement d une communication satisfaisante Calculating maximum power level for connectorized units If a connectorized PTP 600 link is to be installed in a country that imposes an EIRP limit in the selected band choose an external antenna and RF cable that will not cause the PTP 600 to exceed the EIRP limit To calculate the highest setting of Maximum Power Level that will be permitted use this formul
112. minimum error rates set the maximum modulation mode to the minimum necessary to carry the required traffic The modulation mode that must be achieved before the link is allowed to bridge Ethernet frames Arm With Tones means that audio tones will be emitted during antenna alignment the recommended option Arm Without Tones means that audio tones will not be emitted during antenna alignment Change Config Without Arming means that configuration changes will be made without arming the ODU for alignment phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 57 Task 6 Configuring wireless and telecoms interfaces Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Fixed frequency example Figure 127 shows an example of the fixed frequency configuration for a 30 MHz channel bandwidth In this example the Fixed Transmit Frequency is set to 4436 MHz and the Fixed Receive Frequency is set to 4436 MHz Care must be taken when configuring the Fixed Transmit and Receive Frequencies to ensure that both frequencies are on the same channel raster as the Lower Center Frequency For example if the channel raster is 10 MHz both the Fixed Transmit and Receive Frequencies must be a multiple of 10 MHz from the Lower Center Frequency 4426 4416 10 MHz and 4486 4416 10 MHz x 7 Figure 127 Step 2 Wireless Configuration page extract for fixed frequency Channel Bandwidth 30MHz 20MHz 15MHz 10MHz 5MHz Link Symmetry Adaptive 2t0
113. nisi ut aliquip ex ea commodo consequat Duis aute irure dolor in reprehenderit in voluptate velit esse cillum dolore eu fugiat nulla pariatur Excepteur sint occaecat cupidatat non proident sunt in culpa qui officia deserunt mollit anim id est laborum lt 44 Back Next gt gt Below is a presentation of the banner as it will appear on the login page Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetur adipisicing elit sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua Ut enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud exercitation ullamco laboris nisi ut aliquip ex ea commodo consequat Duis aute irure dolor in reprehenderit in voluptate velit esse cillum dolore eu fugiat nulla pariatur Excepteur sint occaecat cupidatat non proident sunt in culpa qui officia deserunt mollit anim id est laborum E ihave read understand and accept the above notice s 6 28 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Step 4 Login information settings Task 5 Configuring security The Step 4 Login Information Settings page is displayed Figure 112 Set Display Login Information to No or Yes Select Next Figure 112 Step 4 Login Information Settings page Step 4 Enter Login Information Settings Please specify whether or not Login Information is displayed after the Login page The Login Information page contains information of both the last successful login and recent unsuccessful login attempts
114. not affected by this setting HTTP Port The port number for HTTP access A value of zero means the Number wireless unit uses the default port Telnet Access Enabled No means that the unit will not respond to any requests on the Telnet port Yes means that the unit will respond to requests on the Telnet port Telnet Port Number The port number for Telnet access A value of zero means the wireless unit uses the default port SNMP Control of HTTP And Telnet Disabled means that neither HTTP nor Telnet can be controlled remotely via SNMP Enabled means that both HTTP and Telnet can be controlled remotely via SNMP TFTP Client Enabled means that the unit will respond to TFTP software download requests Debug Access Enabled Yes means that Cambium Technical Support is allowed to access the system to investigate faults Cross Site Request Forgery Protection Enabled means that the system is protected against cross site request forgery attacks at the web based interface Aa NOTE If HTTP Telnet and SNMP are all disabled as required for FIPS 140 2 or UC APL mode the secure web server becomes the only management tool for the ODU web interface To reenter the web interface after Step 7 of the Security Wizard use the URL https aa bb cc dd where aa bb cc dd is the IP address of the unit phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User G
115. of the cable where the weatherproofing gland clamps the cable should be between 6 mm and 7 mm If the finished diameter is less than 6 mm the weatherproofing gland may not seal correctly If the finished diameter is greater than 7 mm it will be difficult to assemble the weatherproofing gland without damaging the fiber optic cable Assembly can be made easier by fitting the weatherproofing gland before fitting the connectors to the fiber optic cable LC connectors should be supplied with dust caps to prevent dust build up phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Wireless specifications Wireless specifications This section contains specifications of the PTP 600 wireless interface These specifications include RF bands channel bandwidth spectrum settings maximum power and link loss General wireless specifications Table 57 lists the wireless specifications that apply to all PTP 600 variants Table 58 lists the wireless specifications that are specific to each frequency variant Table 57 PTP 600 wireless specifications all variants Item Specification Channel selection Manual selection fixed frequency Dynamic frequency selection DFS or DFS with i DFS is available in radar avoidance regions Manual power control To avoid interference to other users of the band maximum power can be set lower than the default power limit Integrated antenna type Flat plate antenna Duplex scheme Symmetric fixed
116. of the screen The instantaneous receive power bar also encodes the state of the wireless link using green to signify that the wireless link is up and red for all other states The installation metric is simply the instantaneous receive power in dBm 110 PDA version To access the PDA version of the graphical installation tool use a hidden URL http lt ip address gt pda cgi This link is only available to system administrators 6 90 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 11 Aligning antennas Disarming the units When antenna alignment is complete both units in the link must be disarmed in order to e Turn off the audible alignment aid e Enable adaptive modulation e Fully enable spectrum management features such as i DFS if configured e Clear unwanted installation information from the various systems statistics e Store the link range for fast link acquisition on link drop e Enable higher data rates ANOTE After 24 hours the units will be disarmed automatically provided that they are armed and that the link is up To disarm the units select menu option Installation The Disarm Installation page is displayed Figure 122 Select Disarm Installation Agent The confirmation pages is displayed Figure 147 Figure 147 Optional post disarm configuration Installation Disarmed The installation agent has been successfully disarmed To complete the installation process it is recomme
117. of the slave master direction Link Symmetry is subject to the following restrictions Adaptive is not supported in regions where radar avoidance is in use Adaptive is not supported when link optimization is set to TDM Adaptive is not supported in 5 MHz channel bandwidth 2 to 1 and 1 to 2 are not supported in 5 MHz channel bandwidth 2 to 1 and 1 to 2 are not supported when E1 T1 services are enabled Spectrum Management Control Is used to configure the PTP 600 Series Spectrum Management features see Managing spectrum on page 7 20 for more details In regions that do not mandate DFS Radar Detection the Spectrum Management Control options are i DFS and Fixed Frequency In regions that mandate DFS Radar Detection the Spectrum Management Control options are DFS and DFS with i DFS The Spectrum Management Control is disabled if the regulatory requirement is fixed frequency only phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 Task 6 Configuring wireless and telecoms interfaces Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Attribute Meaning Lower Center Frequency The centre frequency MHz of the lowest channel that may be used by this link Not displayed when Spectrum Management Control is set to Fixed Frequency Use this attribute to slide the available channels up and down the band To observe the effect this will have on spectrum
118. on these options refer to Mounting options for the PTP SYNC GPS receiver on page 2 34 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 5 37 Installing a GPS receiver for PTP SYNC Chapter 5 Installation Preparing GPS drop cables Perform this task to prepare the Cat5e cables that connect the GPS to the PTP SYNC Always use Cat5e cable that is gel filled and shielded with copper plated steel Alternative types of cable are not supported by Cambium Aa NOTE The maximum permitted lengths of Cat5e cables are specified in Maximum cable lengths on page 2 7 For details of supported cables and recommended connectors refer to Ordering components on page 2 53 Main drop cable To prepare a long section of drop cable to connect the GPS to the LPU 1 Cut off the approximate length required allowing a bit of surplus or leave it on the drum so that it can be unwound as the cable is hoisted 2 Slide one or more hoisting grips onto to the top end of the GPS drop cable To determine the number of hoisting grips required consult the grip manufacturer 3 Secure the hoisting grip to the cable using a special tool as recommended by the manufacturer 4 Ifa GPS adapter cable kit is available attach the plug housing and an RJ45 plug to the top end of the main GPS drop cable as described in Assembling an RJ45 plug and housing for GPS on page 5 39 5 Ifa GPS adapter cable kit is not available fit a 12 way circular connector to the top end of the mai
119. page 7 56 Reset IP amp Ethernet Configuration back to factory defaults Erase Configuration Use this option to restore the IP and Ethernet attributes to their defaults Refer to Resetting IP amp Ethernet configuration on page 7 57 Use this option to erase the entire configuration of the unit This will also erase factory settings such as target MAC address range setting and license key Refer to Erasing configuration on page 7 58 Zeroise Critical Security Parameters Use this option to reset encryption keys and the system administrator password Refer to Zeroizing critical security parameters on page 7 34 Reboot phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 Use this option to reboot the unit Refer to Rebooting the unit on page 7 58 Using recovery mode Chapter 7 Operation Upgrading software image To restore a working software image from the Recovery Options page Figure 184 proceed as follows 1 2 4 Select Browse Navigate to the required software image This may be the most recent image if software corruption is suspected or an older image if an incorrect image has just been loaded Click on the image and select OK Select Upgrade Software Image The Upgrade Progress Tracker page is displayed Upgrade Progress Tracker Writing software image to FLASH Overall Upgrade Progress When the Software Upgrade Complete page is displayed check that the correct image has been downloaded
120. phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Cambium Networks end user license agreement THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE OpenSSL Copyright c 1998 2008 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display
121. point Connect the lighting arrestors to the master ground bar of the building RF cable Equipment cabin O Ground cable Ground bus conductor Lightning arrestors Rack Ground Bar RGB Master Ground Bar MGB To antenna External Ground Bar EGB Ground ring 5 When dressing the antenna cables form drip loops near the lower ends These ensure that water is not constantly channeled towards the connectors phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 5 11 Installing connectorized antennas Chapter 5 Installation 6 Ifthe ODU is mounted outdoors weatherproof the N type connectors fitted to the ODU by following the procedure Weatherproofing an N type connector on page 5 13 Weatherproof the antenna joints in the same way unless the antenna manufacturer specifies a different method 7 Ground the antenna cables to the supporting structure at the correct points They should be grounded within 0 3 meters 1 foot of the ODU and antennas using the using the Cambium grounding kit part number 01010419001 Antenna cables RF cable Ground cables Supporting structure Connectorized ODU A NOTE A mast or tower may require additional grounding points as specified in Protection requirements for a mast or tower installation on page 2 24 8 Dress the antenna cables and attach them to the supporting structure using site approved methods Ensure that no undue strain is placed on the ODU or a
122. port number of the associated SNMP manager phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide SNMPv3 default configuration MIB based When SNMPv3 MIB based Security Mode is enabled the default configuration for the usmUserTable table is based on one initial user and four template users as listed in Table 18 Table 18 Default SNMPv3 users AuthProtocol Object Entry 1 Name initial SecurityName initial usSMHMACMD5Aut hProtocol PrivProtocol StorageType usmDESPrivProtocol nonVolatile Security planning Object Entry 2 Entry 3 Name templ ateMD5 DES templ ateSHA DES SecurityName templ ateMD5 DES templ ateSHA DES AuthProtocol usmHMACMD5Aut hProtocol usmHMACSAHAut hProtocol PrivProtocol usmDESPrivProtocol usmDESPrivProtocol StorageType nonVolatile nonVolatile phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 Object Entry 4 Entry 5 Name templateMD5 AES templateSHA AES SecurityName templateMD5 AES templateSHA AES AuthProtocol usmHMACMD5AuthProtocol usmHMACSHAAuthProtocol PrivProtocol usmAESPrivProtocol usmAESPrivProtocol StorageType nonVolatile nonVolatile 2 49 Security planning VACM default configuration Chapter 2 Planning considerations The default user i ni tial is assigned to VACM groupi nitial in the vacmSecurityToGroupTable table The template users are not assigned to a group PTP 600 creates default view
123. rA 6 42 Task 6 Configuring wireless and telecoms interface ccccccssesscccceeeseccceeeeecceaeeneceeneeeees 6 45 Staring instalation wizard sensara acta iaapsey bes E arama oe ete acer ea wee 6 45 Step 1 Interface configuration ccc ceccccseeccceeccceeeceeeeeceeeeceasececseceeeeceeseseeeecesseseeseneees 6 48 Step 2 Wireless COMfGuratiOn iss0si7sesea dive n aan E O EEEE 6 51 Step 3 TDD synchronization optional sic svscissievecssdeesatensasnscasdes i OEE TEEN TEED 6 58 Step 3 or 4 Confirm installation configuratioM 4 5ccs5 0ccseessecasacesseaa a cs sdessccssacaseecsorasseaaente 6 60 Barring nanne lI zeae a Pe eee eC oan nr ee rnee eure Hee a erat een Rien ers en ree eee ee RA 6 62 Task 7 Setting up SNMP ag nt nassaan AAEE E ES 6 63 Contiguring SNIMPV3 agent tceianiscsseSacenestes Sansa bwsupadesinsdaaesd e e sean deters yeeteryeaieans 6 63 Configuring SNMPVv1 20 dq ents iczczicseesee sassasesteceestedetaent E AEE CO TETE 6 72 Task 8 Configuring alarms and MESSAGES cccccseccceesecceeseceencecaeecesaeseceesceeueseeaeeceseeseeeeeeees 6 77 Configuring generation of diagnostics AlArMS cccccccsesccceeseceeecceeeeseneeeeeaeseeaeeceeaeeeees 6 77 Configuring generation of email MESSAGES ccccessesscccceeeeecceneesecccnsaeeecceseueeceeseeseeenea 6 79 Task 9 C ontiqurinG SVSlOG ss acaiasgansiatassncasacncdecioansiees e r e E EE EEA EOR cannes 6 81 Configuring system logging SYSIOG
124. radio base stations and fixed terminal stations for wireless telecommunication systems with the basic restrictions or the reference levels related to human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic fields 110 MHz 40 GHz general public e ICNIRP International Commission on Non lonizing Radiation Protection guidelines for the general public See the ICNIRP web site at http www icnirp de and Guidelines for Limiting Exposure to Time Varying Electric Magnetic and Electromagnetic Fields Power density exposure limit Install the radios for the PTP 600 family of PTP wireless solutions so as to provide and maintain the minimum separation distances from all persons The applicable power density exposure limit from the standards see Human exposure to radio frequency energy on page 4 52 is 10 W m for RF energy in the 2 4 5 2 5 4 5 8 and 5 9 GHz frequency bands Calculation of power density Aa NOTE The following calculation is based on the ANSI IEEE C95 1 1991 method as that provides a worst case analysis Details of the assessment to EN50383 2002 can be provided if required phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 53 Compliance with safety standards Chapter 4 Reference information Peak power density in the far field of a radio frequency point source is calculated as follows P G S 4rd Where Is power density in W m P maximum average transmit power capability of the radio in W G total Tx gain as a
125. real time clock manually To keep time without connecting to a networked time server select menu option Management Time The Time Configuration page is displayed Figure 151 Set SNTP State to Disabled Review and update the manual clock attributes Table 128 and select Submit Updated Configuration phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 15 Connecting link to the network Figure 151 Time Configuration page SNTP disabled Time Configuration CA r SNTP State Disabled Enabled Set Time o klo koo Set Date 2005 i jan lla Time Zone GMTODOO w Daylight Saving Disabled Enabled Submit Updated Configuration Table 128 Manual clock attributes Attribute Meaning SNTP State Disabled means that the PTP 600 will keep time without connecting to a networked time server Set Time Set hours minutes and seconds Set Date Set year month and day Time Zone Set the time zone offset from Greenwich Mean Time GMT To set the clock to UTC time set Time Zone to GMT 00 00 Daylight Saving Disabled means that daylight saving adjustments will not be applied to the time Enabled means that daylight saving adjustments will be applied according to local rules To set the clock to UTC time set Daylight Saving to Disabled Setting the real time clock to synchronize using SNTP To synchronize with a networked
126. reserved for testing Server Key Key used to authenticate SNTP communications For DES keys this must be 16 hexadecimal characters as per the DES specification with the least significant bit of each pair used to maintain odd parity Server Key Confirm Must match the Server Key Status phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 103 Task 15 Connecting link to the network Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Attribute Meaning SNTP Sync This shows the current status of SNTP synchronization If No Sync is displayed then review the SNTP Server IP Address and Port Number A change of state may generate an SNMP trap or SMTP email alert SNTP Last Sync This shows the date and time of the last SNTP synchronization System Clock This displays the local time allowing for the Time Zone and Daylight Saving settings Local Time Settings Time Zone Set the time zone offset from Greenwich Mean Time GMT To set the clock to UTC time set Time Zone to GMT 00 00 Daylight Saving Disabled means that daylight saving adjustments will not be applied to the time Enabled means that daylight saving adjustments will be applied to the time according to local rules To set the clock to UTC time set Daylight Saving to Disabled 6 104 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 16 Configuring the fiber interface Task 16 Configuring the fiber interface This task
127. ring seal is flush to the unit body i 4a NOTE Do not fit the back shell prior to securing the gland body 3 Once the gland is fully hand screwed into the unit tighten it with a spanner to torque 10 Nm 7 4 ftlbs phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 5 21 Installing the drop cable and bottom LPU Chapter 5 Installation 4 When the gland body has been fitted tighten the gland back shell Do not over tighten the gland back shell as the internal seal and structure may be damaged The following example shows correctly tightened and over tightened gland back shells Disconnecting an RJ45 and gland from a unit Perform this task to disconnect the drop cable from an ODU or LPU This procedure contains illustrations of an ODU but it applies in principle to both the ODU and the LPUs To disconnect the drop cable with a gland from a unit LPU or ODU proceed as follows 1 Remove the gland back shell 2 Wiggle the drop cable to release the tension of the gland body When the tension in the glad body is released a gap opens at the point shown in red in the above photograph 5 22 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Installing the drop cable and bottom LPU 3 Unscrew the gland body Use a small screwdriver to depress the RJ45 locking cap 5 Unplug the RJ45 Making a drop cable ground point Perform this task to connect the screen of the drop cable to the metal of the supporting structure using a cable
128. supported 256QAM 0 81 dual 62 2 25 130 2 4 34 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Wireless specifications Table 64 PTP 45600 TDM mode threshold power and link loss Outpu System threshold dBm t Maximum link loss dB per channel bandwidth power per channel bandwidth Modulation dBm mode 5 10 15 ae a All 5 10 15 20 30 MHz MHz MHz 2 bands MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz BPSK 0 63 single 96 6 93 7 92 0 90 4 88 0 27 166 6 163 7 162 0 160 4 158 0 QPSK 0 63 single 90 4 89 1 87 8 86 0 83 1 27 158 1 155 4 153 3 151 6 149 5 QPSK 0 87 single 88 1 85 4 83 3 81 6 79 5 27 160 3 159 1 157 8 156 0 153 1 16QAM 0 63 single 16QAM 0 63 dual 82 5 79 1 77 2 75 6 73 9 27 152 5 149 1 147 2 145 6 143 9 86 1 82 8 80 7 79 2 77 2 27 156 1 152 8 150 7 149 2 147 2 16QAM 0 87 single 81 2 78 2 76 1 74 4 72 0 27 151 2 148 2 146 1 144 4 142 0 16QAM 0 87 dual 77 7 74 4 72 4 70 8 69 2 27 147 7 144 4 142 4 140 8 139 2 64QAM 0 75 single 77 7 74 5 72 4 70 7 68 6 25 145 7 142 5 140 4 138 7 136 6 64QAM 0 75 dual 74 2 70 9 69 1 67 5 65 9 25 142 2 138 9 137 1 135 5 133 9 64QAM 0 92 single 75 9 72 2 70 2 68 6 66 5 25 143 9 140 2 138 2 136 6 134 5 64QAM 0 92 dual 71 7 68 5 66 8 65 4 63 7 2
129. system e Determine whether or not there is a requirement to synchronize the PTP 600 clock with an SNTP server at regular intervals If SNTP server synchronization is not required the clock can be set to run manually The clock is battery backed and will continue to operate for several days after the ODU is switched off e If SNTP server synchronization is required identify the details for one or two SNTP servers IP address port number and server key e For secure applications the PTP 600 can be configured to authenticate received NTP messages using the DES protocol This is a requirement when operating in UC APL secure mode Planning for HTTPS TLS operation Before starting to configure HTTPS TLS operation ensure that the cryptographic material listed in Table 16 is available Table 16 HTTPS TLS security material Item Description Quantity required Key of Keys An encryption key generated using a cryptographic key generator The key length is dictated by the installed license key License keys with AES 128 will require a key of keys of 128 bits License keys with AES 256 will require a key of keys of 256 bits The key output should be in ASCII hexadecimal characters Two per link For greater security each link end should be allocated a unique Key of Keys phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 2 41 Security planning Chapter 2 Planning considerations Item Description Quan
130. tape from bottom to top starting from 25 mm 1 inch below and finishing 25 mm 1 inch above the edge of the self amalgamating tape over lapping at half width Top Bottom phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 5 25 Installing the drop cable and bottom LPU Chapter 5 Installation 10 Repeat with a further four layers of PVC tape always overlapping at half width Wrap the layers in alternate directions Second layer top to bottom Third layer bottom to top Fourth layer top to bottom Fifth layer bottom to top The edges of each layer should be 25mm 1 inch above A and 25 mm 1 inch below B the previous layer Bottom Prepare the metal grounding point of the supporting structure to provide a good electrical contact with the grounding cable clamp Remove paint grease or dirt if present Apply anti oxidant compound liberally between the two metals Clamp the bottom lug of the grounding cable to the supporting structure using site approved methods Aa NOTE Use a two hole lug secured with fasteners in both holes This provides better protection than a single hole lug phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Installing the drop cable and bottom LPU Installing and grounding the drop cable at building entry Perform this procedure to install and ground the drop cable and LPU at the building or cabinet entry point Figure 98 Figure 98 Grounding at building entry oe Screened CAT5e cable O
131. the following cryptographic material is generated using a FIPS approved cryptographic generator e Key of Keys e TLS Private Key and Public Certificates e Entropy Input e Wireless Link Encryption Key for AES Ensure that the web browsers used are enabled for HTTPS TLS operation using FIPS approved cipher specifications 2 42 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Security planning Ensure that following attributes of user accounts for the web based management interface have been configured to match the operator s network security policy e Auto Logout Period e Maximum Number of Login Attempts e Login Attempt Lockout e Minimum Password Change Period e Password Expiry Period e Webpage Session Control Ensure that the following are configured e Password complexity rules reset to best practice values e User account passwords compliant with the network security policy e RADIUS authentication disabled Configure all of the above correctly to ensure that PTP 600 is operating in compliance with the FIPS 140 2 validation Planning for UC APL operation If the link is to operate in UC APL secure mode ensure that the following cryptographic material is generated using a FIPS approved cryptographic generator e Key of Keys e TLS Private Key and Public Certificates for the correct IP address o these should be encoded in DER format o maximum key size is 2048 bits e Entropy I
132. the following procedures e Checks and safety precautions on page 5 4 e Selecting a position for the ODU connectorized on page 5 5 e Selecting a mounting option for the top LPU on page 5 6 e Mounting the ODU and top LPU on page 5 7 e Connecting and grounding the ODU and top LPU on page 5 8 e Installing an UltraSync GPS receiver on page 5 9 If a connectorized ODU is being installed see also Installing connectorized antennas on page 5 10 Checks and safety precautions A WARNING To prevent failure of the assembly take the following precautions Do not remove the pre fitted mounting bracket Do not mount the ODU on poles with diameter less than 50mm 2 or greater than 75mm 3 Check that the integrated lifting eye and its fixing Figure 92 are not damaged in any way and have not been exposed to a shock loading due to a fall Do not reverse the rear bracket strap Figure 91 Figure 91 Do not reverse the rear bracket strap 5 4 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Installing the ODU and top LPU Check that the ODU is pre fitted with a mounting bracket designed to ease installation and with ground cables Figure 92 Figure 92 ODU with mounting bracket and earth bonding leads Integrated lifting eye Ground cables Mounting bracket Selecting a position for the ODU connectorized If the ODU is connectorized select a mounting position that gives it maximum protection from the ele
133. time server select menu option Management Time The Time Configuration page is displayed Figure 152 Set the SNTP State attribute to Enabled Review and update the SNTP clock attributes Table 129 and select Submit Updated Configuration phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 101 Task 15 Connecting link to the network 6 102 Figure 152 Time Configuration page SNTP enabled Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Time Configuration SNTP State SNTP Primary Server SNTP Primary Server Dead Time SNTP Server Retries SNTP Server Timeout SNTP Poll interval SNTP Server 1 SNTP Server Status SNTP Server IP Address SNTP Server Port Number SNTP Server Authentication Protocol SNTP Server Key identifier Server Key Server Key Confirm SNTP Server 2 SNTP Server Status SNTP Server IP Address SNTP Server Port Number SNTP Server Authentication Protocol SNTP Server Key Identifier Server Key Server Key Confirm Status SNTP Sync SNTP Last Sync System Clock Local Time Settings Time Zone Daylight Saving Submit Updated Configuration O Disabled Enabled Server 1 O Server 2 300 gt r4 3 3600 02 Sep 2011 09 22 24 OK seconds seconds seconds 10 faao fhi 1205 123 None Opes Server not yet used 0 Jo Jo fo 123 None Opes 02 Sep 2011 09 22 24
134. to ensure that service personnel are aware the same Class 1 Laser hazard could exist at the indoor end of the cable phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 5 57 Installing a fiber interface Chapter 5 Installation Inserting the SFP fiber module The SFP fiber module may be damaged by ESD It is supplied in an ESD protective case Observe ESD handling procedures when unpacking and installing the module The performance of 1000BaseSX and 1000Base LX connections can be seriously affected by dust build up Keep all dust covers in place until just before the connection is to be made To insert the SFP module into the ODU proceed as follows 1 Remove the blanking plug from the FIBER port of the ODU 2 Insert the SFP Module into the SFP receptacle of the FIBER port with the PCB connector down and label up as shown 3 Push the module home until it clicks into place 5 58 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Installing a fiber interface 4 Remove the fiber dust protection cap Connecting the fiber optic cable The fiber optic cable assembly is very delicate To avoid damage handle it with extreme care Ensure that the fiber optic cable does not twist during assembly especially when fitting and tightening the weatherproofing gland To connect the fiber optic cable to the SFP module proceed as follows 1 Thread the gland and extension tube over the fiber optic cable as shown Thread the gland onto the f
135. unit GPS SYNC IN port are specified in Table 54 Table 54 GPS SYNC IN port pinouts Pin no Connector pinout Signal description signal name Pin 1 12VGPS 12 V output to GPS receiver module 250 mA max Pin 2 GND Ground Pin 3 GPS _1PPSA 1 Hz pulse input Pin 4 GPS_RXDA GPS receive data Pin 5 GPS_RXDB GPS receive data Pin 6 GPS_1PPSB 1 Hz pulse input Pin 7 GPS_TXDA GPS transmit data Pin 8 GPS_TXDB GPS transmit data A NOTE The GPS_1PPS GPS_RXD and GPS_TXD signals conform to International Telecommunication Union ITU recommendation V 11 RS422 Signal polarities A 1 PPS timing datum is detected when GPS_1PPSA goes positive relative to GPS_1PPSB A serial data start bit is detected when GPS_RXDA or GPS_TXDA goes positive relative to GPS_RXDB or GPS_TXDB Fiber specifications The characteristics of the laser device are e Type Class 1 Vertical Cavity Surface Emitting Laser e Operating Wavelength 850nm or 1310nm e EN60825 1 1994 A1 2002 A2 2001 There are two versions of the fiber interface upgrade kit one contains a 1000BaseSX 850 nm SFP module Table 55 and the other contains a 1000BaseLX 1310 nm SFP module Table 56 The components of these kits are not interchangeable The fiber optic cable and fiber optic cable terminations are not supplied as part of the kits 4 6 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Equipment specifications Table 55 Fiber Ethe
136. use of the Software and may be amended only in writing signed by both parties except that Cambium may modify this Agreement as necessary to comply with applicable laws Third party software 3 8 The software may contain one or more items of Third Party Software supplied by other third party suppliers The terms of this Agreement govern your use of any Third Party Software UNLESS A SEPARATE THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE LICENSE IS INCLUDED IN WHICH CASE YOUR USE OF THE THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE WILL THEN BE GOVERNED BY THE SEPARATE THIRD PARTY LICENSE Trademarks Java Technology and or J2ME Java and all other Java based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the U S and other countries UNIX UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries Net SNMP Various copyrights apply to this package listed in various separate parts below Please make sure that you read all the parts Part 1 CMU UCD copyright notice BSD like Copyright 1989 1991 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University Derivative Work 1996 1998 2000 Copyright 1996 1998 2000 The Regents of the University of California All Rights Reserved phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Cambium Networks end user license agreement Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that t
137. user accounts 1 Vetr1234 ReadOnly DOE o o 2 mic2345 eccccccccce icabweccnce g g 3 MB3456 ReadOnly oe ececeececee aay o o 4 Em7654 System Administrator V seeeeeeeeee EPEE EEE o o 3 Gr4567 Ss o o 6 EE o sesesoee 7 y Read Only 8 5 9 ReadOnly Joneeeeee __ C 10 Ea Submit User Account Updates Reset To Factory Defaults phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 39 Task 5 Configuring security Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Table 108 dentity based user accounts attributes Attribute Meaning Name Enter a user name Role Select a role from the list Security Officer System Administrator Read Only Aa NOTE At least one user must be assigned the Security Officer role If RADIUS is enabled then this rule is relaxed in which case the RADIUS server s SHOULD be configured with at least one user with Security Officer privileges Password Enter a password for the user Passwords must comply with the complexity rules Table 107 Password Confirm Retype the password to confirm Force Password Force this user to change their password when they next log on Change Disable Tick the box to disable a user account Enforcing password changes To force a user to change their password when they next log in as a Security Officer select menu option Management Web Local User Accounts and tick that user s Force Password Change box F
138. v 2c c public 10 10 10 10 iso 3 6 1 4 1 17713 1 9 5 0 a 10 10 10 1 tFTPServerPortNumber This setting is optional The port number of the TFTP server from which the TFTP software upgrade file name will be retrieved default 69 tFTPSoftwareUpgrade FileName tFTPStartSoftware Upgrade The filename of the software upgrade to be loaded from the TFTP server For example to set the TFTP software upgrade filename on 10 10 10 10 to B1095 dld enter this command snmpset_d exe v 2c c public 10 10 10 10 iso 3 6 1 4 1 17713 1 9 7 0 s B1095 dld Write 1 to this attribute to start the TFTP software upgrade process The attribute will be reset to 0 when the upgrade process has finished For example enter this command snmpset_d exe v 2c c public 10 10 10 10 iso 3 6 1 4 1 17713 1 9 8 0i1 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Restoring upgrading and rebooting Table 147 Monitoring tFTP attributes Attribute tFTPSoftwareUpgradeStatus Meaning This is the current status of the TFTP software upgrade process Values idle 0 uploadinprogress 1 uploadsuccessfulprogrammingFLASH 2 upgradesuccessfulreboottorunthenewsoftwareimag e 3 upgradefailed 4 For example enter this command snmpget d exe v 2c c public 10 10 10 10 iso 3 6 1 4 1 17713 1 9 9 0 tFTPSoftwareUpgradeStatus Text This describes the status of the TFTP software upgrade process including an
139. value for the HTTPS TLS interface e User account passwords for the web based interface To zeroize the CSPs select option Security Zeroize CSPs and then Select Zeroize CSPs and Reboot Wireless Unit Confirm the reboot Alternatively select the Zeroize CSPs option in Recovery mode 7 34 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Managing performance Managing performance This section describes how to manage the performance of the PTP 600 link This section contains the following procedures e Checking system statistics on page 7 35 e Checking detailed counters on page 7 41 e Using the diagnostics plotter on page 7 45 e Downloading diagnostic data on page 7 46 e Diagnostics calculated over time on page 7 47 Checking system statistics To check system statistics select menu option System Statistics The System Statistic page is displayed Figure 176 Aa NOTE To enable or disable the display of commas in long integers for example 1 234 567 select menu option Management Web Web Properties and update the Use Long Integer Comma Formatting attribute phn 2512 007v000 Dec 2012 7 35 Managing performance 7 36 Figure 176 System Statistics page System Statistics System Histograms Transmit Power 25 0 17 5 15 0 14 0 dBm Receive Power 37 2 64 0 110 0 51 3 dBm Vector Error 7 2 19 6 31 0 29 4 dB Link Loss 110 8 79 6 0 0 107 3 dB Signal Strength Ratio 0 7 0 0 1 0 0 0 dB T
140. wireless link as appropriate If the end station address is unknown then management traffic is transmitted at the Ethernet port and over the wireless link Wireless link down alert The PTP 600 Series provides an optional indication of failure of the wireless link by means of a brief disconnection of the copper data port or the fiber data port The Wireless link down alert can be used to trigger protection switching by Spanning Tree Protocol STP or Ethernet Automatic Protection Switching EAPS in a redundant network Back to back links PTP 600 will not operate correctly if a direct cabled copper connection is made between two PIDUs Where two or more links are deployed in a chain use one of the following solutions e Copper or fiber connections between the PIDU and a suitable Ethernet switch or router e A fiber connection between two ODUs with the Ethernet Media Type to Use control set to Fiber Media Only For more information refer to the PTP 600 Series Optical Interface Upgrade Guide Protocol model Ethernet bridging behavior at each end of the wireless link is equivalent to a two port managed transparent MAC bridge where the two ports are e Ethernet Port e Wireless Port Frames are transmitted at the Wireless port over a proprietary point to point circuit mode link layer between ends of the PTP 600 link Ethernet frames received at the Ethernet port or generated internally within the management agent are en
141. with copper plated steel This is the only type of outdoor drop cable supported in this application phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 1 17 Cabling and lightning protection Chapter 1 Product description Indoor connections The Cat5e cable that connects the PIDU to the network equipment must meet the following requirements e Screening Must be either foil screen FTP or braided screen STP cable e Connectors Must use screened RJ45 connectors with metal shells at both ends e Electrical connection There must be a continuous electrical connection between both screened connectors The connected network equipment must feature screened RJ45 connectors and must be connected to ground otherwise the PIDU will not be grounded and this may increase the levels of unwanted radiation from the ODU PIDU cables Aa NOTE The ODU network connection implements automatic MDI MDI X sensing and pair swapping allowing connection to networking equipment that requires cross over cables MDI X networks or straight through cables MDI Networks Cable grounding kits Drop cables must be grounded at the points specified in Grounding and lightning protection on page 2 21 One cable grounding kit Figure 12 is required for each drop cable grounding point Figure 12 Cable grounding kit for 1 4 and 3 8 cable 1 18 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Cabling and lightning protection Lightning protection units LPU
142. 0 0 0 0 676 230 898 366 0 0 3600 Seconds Wireless Wireless Rx Octets Wireless Tx Octets Wireless Rx Drops Wireless Rx Packets Wireless Rx Broadcasts Wireless Rx Multicasts Wireless Rx Cre And Align Wireless Rx Undersize Wireless Rx Oversize Wireless Rx Fragments Wireless Rx Jabbers Wireless Rx 64 Bytes Wireless Rx 65 To 127 Bytes Wireless Rx 128 To 255 Bytes Wireless Rx 256 To 511 Bytes Wireless Rx 512 To 1023 Bytes Wireless Rx 1024 To Max Bytes Wireless Tx Drops Wireless Tx Packets Wireless Tx Broadcasts Wireless Tx Multicasts Wireless Tx Collisions Wireless Tx 64 Bytes Wireless Tx 65 To 127 Bytes Wireless Tx 128 To 255 Bytes Wireless Tx 256 To 511 Bytes Wireless Tx 512 To 1023 Bytes Wireless Tx 1024 To Max Bytes Wireless Tx Fifo Drops Wireless Rx Pause Frames Wireless Tx Pause Frames Wireless Rx Classified Drops Wireless Tx Frames Q0 Wireless Tx Frames Q1 Wireless Tx Frames Q2 Wireless Tx Frames Q3 Wireless Tx Frames Q4 Wireless Tx Frames Q5 Wireless Tx Frames Q6 Wireless Tx Frames Q7 Wireless Rx Frames Q0 Wireless Rx Frames 1 Wireless Rx Frames Q2 Wireless Rx Frames Q3 Wireless Rx Frames 4 Wireless Rx Frames Q5 Wireless Rx Frames Q6 Wireless Rx Frames Q7 Update Page Refresh Period Reset System Counters 55 012 55 012 349 490 349 490 0 0 598 153 106 106 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 524 524 46 46 1 1 28 28 16 16 0
143. 0 67 7 18 140 1 137 1 135 0 131 7 64QAM 0 92 single 74 4 72 5 66 2 65 0 18 138 4 136 5 134 6 129 0 64 QAM 0 92 dual 70 2 69 1 70 7 61 5 18 134 2 133 1 130 2 125 5 256QAM 0 81 single N A N A N A 64 0 18 N A N A N A 128 0 256QAM 0 81 dual N A N A N A 59 6 18 N A N A N A 123 6 4 42 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Table 72 PTP 58600 TDM mode threshold Wireless specifications power and link loss System threshold dBm Output Maximum link loss dB Modulation per channel bandwidth aba per channel bandwidth mode 5 10 15 30 All 5 10 15 30 MHz MHz MHz MHz bands MHz MHz MHz MHz BPSK 0 63 single 95 1 92 5 90 8 86 3 25 166 1 163 5 161 8 157 3 QPSK 0 63 single 88 7 87 8 86 0 80 6 24 158 7 157 8 155 9 150 6 QPSK 0 87 single 85 5 83 8 81 6 77 8 23 154 5 152 8 150 6 146 8 16QAM 0 63 single 82 0 81 3 79 1 75 3 22 150 0 149 3 147 1 143 3 16QAM 0 63 dual 79 4 77 6 75 6 71 7 22 147 4 145 6 143 6 139 7 16QAM 0 87 single 78 7 76 3 74 7 71 2 20 144 7 142 3 140 7 137 2 16QAM 0 87 dual 75 1 73 2 71 0 67 7 20 141 0 139 2 137 0 133 7 64QAM 0 75 single 74 4 72 3 70 6 67 9 18 138 4 136 3 134 6 131 9 64QAM 0 75 dual 70 9 69 5 67 6 64 0 18 134 9 133 5 131 6 128 0 64QAM 0 92 single 70 9 68 0 66 6 63 1 18 134 9 132 0 130 6 127 1 64 QAM 0 92 dual 66 8 64 6 65 5 58 7 18 13
144. 0 8 128 6 126 5 122 7 256QAM 0 81 single N A N A N A 63 1 18 N A N A N A 127 1 256QAM 0 81 dual N A N A N A 58 7 18 N A N A N A 122 7 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 43 Wireless specifications Chapter 4 Reference information Table 73 PTP 59600 IP mode threshold power and link loss System threshold dBm Output Maximum link loss dB Modulation per channel bandwidth ens per channel bandwidth mode 5 10 15 30 All 5 10 15 30 MHz MHz MHz MHz bands MHz MHz MHz MHz BPSK 0 63 single 97 1 94 1 92 0 88 7 25 0 168 1 165 1 163 0 159 7 QPSK 0 63 single 90 7 88 1 87 1 82 5 24 0 160 7 158 1 157 1 152 5 QPSK 0 87 single 87 2 84 4 83 5 79 3 23 0 156 2 153 4 152 5 148 3 16QAM 0 63 single 85 0 81 9 81 2 77 1 22 0 153 0 149 9 149 2 145 1 16QAM 0 63 dual 81 9 78 8 77 5 73 5 22 0 149 9 146 8 145 5 141 5 16QAM 0 87 single 80 9 78 0 76 7 72 9 20 0 146 9 143 9 142 7 138 9 16QAM 0 87 dual 76 5 73 9 73 2 70 0 20 0 142 5 139 9 139 2 136 0 64QAM 0 75 single 77 0 74 6 73 6 70 3 18 0 141 0 138 6 137 6 134 3 64QAM 0 75 dual 73 1 71 0 70 4 67 5 18 0 137 1 135 0 134 4 131 5 64QAM 0 92 single 72 1 71 0 68 9 65 7 18 0 136 1 135 0 132 9 129 7 64 QAM 0 92 dual 70 2 67 2 66 1 62 1 18 0 134 2 131 1 130 1 126 1 256QAM 0 81 single N A N A N A 63 9 18 0 N A N A N A 127 9 256QAM 0 81 dual N A N A N A 59 9 18 0 N A N A N A 123 9 4 44
145. 012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Wireless specifications Available spectrum settings This section shows how the spectrum available to each PTP 600 frequency variant is divided into radio channels This division is based on configured parameters such as region code channel bandwidth channel raster and lower center frequency Refer to the appropriate frequency variant as follows e PTP 25600 available spectrum settings on page 4 11 e PTP 45600 available spectrum settings on page 4 13 e PTP 48600 available spectrum settings on page 4 19 e PTP 49600 available spectrum settings on page 4 22 e PTP 54600 available spectrum settings on page 4 23 e PTP 58600 available spectrum settings on page 4 25 e PTP 59600 available spectrum settings on page 4 29 PTP 25600 available spectrum settings The supported 2 5GHz frequency range is split into three bands according to the bands specified in the FCC BRS EBS Post Transition Band plan only for PTP 25600 and region code 16 e Lower 2496 MHz to 2572 MHz with a 5 5MHz channel raster 76 MHz total e Middle 2572 MHz to 2614 MHz with a 6 MHz channel raster 42 MHz total e Upper 2618 MHz to 2690 MHz with a 5 5 MHz channel raster 76 MHz total A NOTE For the PTP 25600 product variant the unit will only operate in Fixed Frequency mode and the user is unable to select i DFS The PTP 25600 product variant support channel center frequencies as specified in Table 59 The 30MHz Channel Bandwid
146. 1 Connecting to the unit on page 6 3 If the SFP fiber module has already been installed an alarm is displayed on the System Summary page to indicate that an SFP module has been detected but the current license key does not include fiber support Figure 154 phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 6 105 Task 16 Configuring the fiber interface Figure 154 Fiber license key alarm Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment System Summary atiributes Ya Link Name Tower of London Elapsed Time Indicator 00 43 06 System Clock 20 Nov 2006 11 24 53 The absence of this alarm indicates either that the SFP module is not connected correctly or that the current license key already includes fiber support Entering the license key for Ethernet fiber support 6 106 Select menu option System License Key enter a userid and password if requested The Software License Key page is displayed If the Capability summary table includes the attribute Ethernet Fiber Support then the unit already supports fiber connection Figure 155 Figure 155 Ethernet fiber support enabled Software License Key A valid software license key is required before installation of the PTP Point to Point wireless link can commence If you do not have a valid license key please contact your distributor License key data entry License Key d62a 9f62 a659 9640 be7e a129 77d7 2a Validate license key license key ae Capability summary Pro
147. 1 O1to1 O 1to2 Spectrum Management Control Oi DFS Fixed Frequency Default Raster on Oott Fixed Tx Frequency a36 w MHZ Tx Color Code Ay Fixed Rx Frequency 4460 w MHz Rx Color Code l AY Automatic Tx Power Control Disabled Enabled Installation Tones Disabled Enabled Submit Wireless Configuration lt lt Back Hext gt gt Step 3 TDD synchronization optional To enable TDD Synchronization set the TDD Synchronization Mode attribute to Enabled in the Step 2 Wireless Configuration page Figure 126 and select Next Step 3 TDD Synchronization page is displayed Figure 128 The attributes are described in Table 112 Update the attributes as required and select Next For more information on the available options refer to Configuration options for TDD synchronization on page 2 30 When TDD Synchronization is enabled the following restrictions apply e Ranging Mode and Target Range are disabled e Link Symmetry is forced to 1 1 operation only 6 58 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 6 Configuring wireless and telecoms interfaces Figure 128 Step 3 TDD Synchronization page Step 3 TDD Synchronization Please enter the following TDD Synchronization parameters TDD Synchronization data entry Attributes value its TDD Sync Device UltraSyne PTPSYNC Cluster Master Slave Cluster Master Cluster Slave PTP Sync Site Reference Internal
148. 12_007v000 Dec 2012 5 61 Installing a fiber interface Chapter 5 Installation 2 Using a screwdriver push downwards to release the cables as shown ra 3 Locate the latch release mechanism of the SFP module 1000BaseLX 1000BaseSx 5 62 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment This chapter describes all configuration and alignment tasks that are performed when a PTP 600 link is deployed Observe the precautions in Preparing for configuration and alignment on page 6 2 Configure the two units Master and Slave by performing the following tasks e Task 1 Connecting to the unit on page 6 3 e Task 2 Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces on page 6 7 e Task 3 Installing license keys on page 6 14 e Task 4 Upgrading software version on page 6 17 e Task 5 Configuring security on page 6 21 e Task 6 Configuring wireless and telecoms interfaces on page 6 45 e Task 7 Setting up SNMP agent on page 6 63 e Task 8 Configuring alarms and messages on page 6 77 e Task 9 Configuring syslog on page 6 81 e Task 10 Configuring remote access on page 6 83 When all equipment has been installed at both link ends perform the following tasks e Task 11 Aligning antennas on page 6 85 e Task 12 Updating system configuration on page 6 92 e Task 13 Checking wireless performance on page 6 95 e Task 14 Configuring quality of service on page 6 96 e Task 15
149. 1S DlimKinG s2 cstese aepeasestcecineaesoc ase a E A ates Mae taeaRS 8 3 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 xi Contents Ethernet LED did not blink 10 Times vz iiescass savasediazecasqens asp eapacedy gas in eaa KEERA E NE 8 3 Ethernet LEDS Off ic ia vsasey ebivasasassdesasesanestaussdesnsaon deme ates naoaderagenesesananginnweis pena eaten eseasedeeioe 8 4 Ethernet LED blinks irregularly sitecvsstsdcccanlssccvsetdaweanadataeanacadseanad aeoaea niia 8 5 Power LED is on Ethernet LED blinks randomly cccccssscccsseccsesccensecesesccenerenanseees 8 5 Test resistance in the ODU Cable yicsdssssseaaselanendns sanadansgn a aanita 8 8 Test UltraSync GPS PeCeiver vi sccam sess iieo io EEEE VEA EE A Ea 8 10 Testing the radio link eriin dass sessdesdacsadeanessedeai ae anare eed ae ad S 8 11 Noa syste cs a daistas vids a tdica sc databaniewaaa N A 8 11 DOME ACUIVILY ecscccsactererianesedesavcenemaaoageetasanseemaan ccew A E 8 11 Radio and television imterferenCe is ccisissscaszsszdecassenccaszcsaces geasscea sgasnccadccnedcaascasacseacesdenaeaegeeacs 8 12 Tesno P DPS YN Gorrien o cada cease anauoatnadeteas saan seats apabensh ona teniat outs EIA 8 13 Checking the PTPESYNC LEEDS 2 55 14 s22 2xasnsonnntare ones a saneeniaats E 8 13 EE DSO Mot Mra sonaa vasa cv aon cau pags auiedaatis ce mags aoa waste ETER 8 14 STATU SLED 1S ONSt6 dy cenene EERTE ETETE EEEE 8 14 STATUS LED Gouble bWinks 3 3 5 5535dsezeinccadasassaiorseansdbacesesabvac
150. 2 4462 4522 4552 4582 LCF 4423 4513 4543 4573 4433 4463 4493 4523 4553 4583 4443 4473 4503 4533 4563 LCF 4424 4424 4484 4514 4574 4494 4524 4554 4584 4504 LCF 4425 a 4455 Aa e 12405 1 1525 4445 4475 4505 1835 56 LCF 4418 LCF 4420 4400 MHz 4600 MHz These LCFs are only available with RF card version 2 or greater phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Wireless specifications Figure 45 PTP 45600 available spectrum in 20 MHz channel bandwidth RC 23 LCF 4410 4410 4430 4450 4490 4510 4530 4550 4570 4590 4440 4500 4540 4560 4580 4411 4431 4451 4471 4491 4511 4531 4551 4571 4421 4441 4461 4481 4501 4521 4541 4561 4581 LCF 4412 4432 4452 4492 4512 4532 4552 4572 4442 4482 4502 4522 4542 4562 4582 Lor 4413 443 4433 4453 4473 493 4513 4533 453 4573 4423 4443 4463 4483 4503 4523 4543 4563_ LCF 4414 4415 4435 4455 4475 4495 4515 4535 4555 4575 4425 4445 4465 4485 4505 4525 4565 4585 LCF 4416 4436 4456 4496 4516 4536 4556 4576 4446 4486 4506 4526 4546 4566 4586 4417 4457 4477 4517 4537 4557 4577 4427 4507 _ 4527 4567 4587 LCF 4418 4438 4498 4518 4538 4558 4578 4488 4508 4528 4548 4588 LCF 4419 4419 4439 4459 4479
151. 2 5832 5812 Dp n Channel Center Frequency MHz Aa NOTE For more information select the Help hyperlink from the Spectrum Management page X axis and Y axis The X axis shows a stylized view of the selectable wireless channels Adjacent channels on the display have a 10 MHz overlap Channels are displayed separately for clarity The axis is labeled using the channel center frequencies in MHz The Y axis shows the interference power levels from 100 to 40 dBm 7 24 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Managing spectrum Channel states The active channel channel 5 in Figure 169 is always marked using hatched green and white lines The width of the hatching is directly proportional the channel bandwidth spectral occupancy of the channel The individual channel metrics are displayed using a colored bar and an T bar The colored bar represents the channel state Table 136 Table 136 Channel states represented in the spectrum management plot State Meaning The channel is currently in use hosting the Point to Point wireless link The channel has interference above the interference threshold The channel has an interference level below the interference threshold and is considered by the Spectrum Management algorithm suitable for hosting the Point to Point link The system administrator has barred this channel from use For improved visibility an additional red lock symbol is use
152. 2 Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces Task 2 Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces This task consists of the following procedures e Configuring the IP interface and management mode on page 6 7 e Reconnecting to the management PC on page 6 13 e Configuring quality of service on page 6 96 Configuring the IP interface and management mode The IP interface allows users to connect to the PTP 600 web interface either from a locally connected computer or from a management network Before setting Management Mode to Out of Band or In Band ensure that the Master and Slave units are configured with different IP addresses otherwise the management agent will not be able to distinguish the two units Forcing Ethernet configuration is a last resort that should only be selected if problems are experienced with auto negotiation The Ethernet Auto Negotiation and Auto Neg Advertisement attributes must have the same settings in the PTP 600 and in connected network equipment If they are not consistent then a duplex mismatch will occur resulting in greatly reduced data capacity The Auto Neg Advertisement data rate must be within the capability of the connected network equipment otherwise loss of service will occur Aa NOTE To configure the Ethernet link to run at a fixed speed and duplex leave Ethernet Auto Negotiation set to Enabled and set Auto Neg Advertisement to the required speed phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 7
153. 2 xix List of Tables Table 32 Inventory for standard installations lt asccisacccatiacsieenssonacseagnesapiaseecsseerscapnecercig eearsuepsteiaddees 2 60 Table 33 Additional inventory for connectorized ODUS cc ccccseecccccneeesceceeeeseccenseseeccenseeeeeenees 2 63 Table 34 Allowed antennas for deployment in USA Canada 5 4 GHZ eeccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeenees 2 64 Table 35 Allowed antennas for deployment in USA Canada 5 8 GHZ eeceecccceeceeeeeeeeneeees 2 66 Table 36 Sectored antennas for deployment in USA Canada 5 8 GHZ cec ieee ceecceeeeeeeeeeees 2 70 Table 37 Additional inventory for UltraSyne installations cceececceseececcceeeseeccneeseecenaeneeecenees 2 71 Table 38 Additional inventory for PTP SYNC installations 2 0 0 0 cceccccseeeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeneeeeeeenees 2 72 Table 39 Additional inventory for GPS receiver installations cccccccccccseeccseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeees 2 73 Table 40 Recommended outdoor connectors for Trimble GPS receiveP ccceeeeeceeeeneeeeeeeeees 2 74 Table 41 Additional inventory for E1 or T1 or OOBM installations c cc eeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 2 74 Table 42 Additional inventory for fiber installations sessca sicsace ocsedeceneaaseasndsawsasaestesadacdatees sccbiesseness 2 75 Table 43 Integrated ODU physical Specifications lt sc cs2c53 sisdecsaeiesaaewcsariaseaesaage caer een eee 4 2 Table 44 Connectorized ODU physical specifications
154. 2 2 4 0 2 4 0 6 81 4 O 16 2 18 5470 MHz anon awan NOAA Dann PFNOn Onna Duna A AU Noon Dahon 5725 MHz 4 24 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Wireless specifications PTP 58600 available spectrum settings Use the Lower Center Frequency attribute see Step 2 Wireless configuration on page 6 51 to slide the available channels up and down the 5 8 GHz band in steps of 2 MHz In the 30 MHz channel bandwidth Figure 65 the PTP 58600 variant operates on a 10 MHz channel raster In the 15 MHz Figure 66 10 MHz Figure 67 and 5 MHz Figure 68 channel bandwidths the PTP 58600 variant operates on a 6 MHz channel raster The channel raster is set to even center frequencies Aa NOTE These tables contain data for one typical region code The specified channel center frequencies may not be available in other region codes Figure 65 PTP 58600 available spectrum in 30 MHz channel bandwidth LCF 5740 LCF 5742 LCF 5744 LCF 5746 LCF 5748 5725 MHz 5850 MHz phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 25 Chapter 4 Reference information Wireless specifications Figure 66 PTP 58600 available spectrum in 15 MHz channel bandwidth co m fe LCF 5738 LCF 5740 LCF 5850 MHz 5725 MHz Figure 67 PTP 58600 available spectrum in the 10 MHz channel bandwidth N m te LCF 5734 LCF 5736 LCF 5850 MHz 5725 MHz phn
155. 23 bytes Tx 1024 to Max Total number frames transmitted in the size range 1024 to Maximum bytes Tx FIFO Drops Total number frames dropped due to lack of capacity in the transmit buffer for example when the PTP 600 Series is connected to the local Ethernet at a connection speed of less than 1 Gbps Rx amp Tx Frames Q0 Q7 Total number of received or transmitted frames for each Traffic Class QO to Q7 Rx amp Tx Pause Frames Total number of received or transmitted pause frames Ethernet interface only Packets To Internal Stack The total number of good packets the bridge has transmitted to the internal stack Packets From Internal Stack The total number of good packets the bridge has received from the internal stack Packets Ignored By Internal Stack The total number of bad packets the bridge has transmitted to the internal stack Rx Classifier Drops Total number of received frames dropped due to the application of classifier rules Detailed Counters Page Refresh Period The statistics page refreshes automatically according to the setting entered here in seconds phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Managing performance Using the diagnostics plotter To plot diagnostics select menu option System Diagnostics Plotter The Diagnostics Plotter page is displayed Figure 178 Use the Diagnostics Selector drop down list to select
156. 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 3 5 Cambium Networks end user license agreement Chapter 3 Legal information Disclaimer CAMBIUM DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS IMPLIED STATUTORY OR IN ANY COMMUNICATION WITH YOU CAMBIUM SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILTY NONINFRINGEMENT OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION ARE PROVIDED AS IS CAMBIUM DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED CAMBIUM MAKES NO WARRANTY WITH RESPECT TO THE CORRECTNESS ACCURACY OR RELIABILITY OF THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties so the above exclusion may not apply to you Limitation of liability 3 6 IN NO EVENT SHALL CAMBIUM NETWORKS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PARTY FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL EXEMPLARY OR OTHER DAMAGE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS OR FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY EVEN IF CAMBIUM HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages
157. 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 5 29 Installing the PIDU Chapter 5 Installation To connect the PIDU to the cable from the ODU proceed as follows 1 4 5 5 30 Form a drip loop on the PIDU end of the LPU PIDU drop cable The drip loop ensures that any moisture that runs down the cable into the cabinet or enclosure cannot enter the PIDU This should be done first in order to avoid straining the RJ45 connector Fit an RJ45 connector but no gland to the PIDU end of the LPU PIDU drop cable Undo the retaining screw and hinge back the cover Plug in the cable from the LPU or PTP SYNC if installed ensuring that it snaps home Aa NOTE Depending upon the type of PIDU the cover may hinge either vertically or horizontally phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Installing the PIDU Preparing the PIDU to LAN cable Prepare the Cat5e cable that will connect the PIDU to the network equipment This cable must meet the following requirements e Use either foil screen FTP or braided screen STP cable e Use screened RJ45 connectors with metal shells at both ends e Ensure there is a continuous electrical connection between both screened connectors The connected network equipment must feature screened RJ45 connectors and must be connected to ground otherwise the PIDU will not be grounded The PIDU is not normally connected to the network equipment until antenna alignment is complete See Task 1
158. 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 75 Task 7 Setting up SNMP agent Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Figure 141 Confirm SNMP Configuration page for SNMPv1 2c Confirm SNMP Configuration SNMP State Enabled SNMP Version 1f2c SNMP Community String public SNMP Port Number 161 MIB II System Objects Sys Contact A Smith extn 3333 Sys Name domain node3 Sys Location Telephone closet 3rd floor Trap Configuration SNMP Trap Version 2c Cold Start Wireless Link Up Down DFS Channel Change DFS Impulse Interference SNMP Enabled Traps Enabled Diagnostic Alarms Authentication Failure Data Port Up Down Telecoms Channel Up Down Trap 1 Configuration SNMP Trap IP Address 10 130 1 44 SNMP Trap Port Number 162 Trap 2 Configuration SNMP Trap IP Address 0 0 0 0 SNMP Trap Port Number 162 lt lt Back atrites Value Units phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 8 Configuring alarms and messages Task 8 Configuring alarms and messages This task consists of the following procedures e Configuring generation of diagnostics alarms on page 6 77 e Configuring generation of email messages on page 6 79 Configuring generation of diagnostics alarms Select menu option Management Diagnostic Alarms The Diagnostic Alarms page is displayed Figure 142 To select which diagnostic alarms will be notified to the system administrator tick the boxes against the required alarms These alarms are descri
159. 3 User Security Banner Pag 6 asia aesesaseqessahe Rein anacsaedauadindsaraaseusebabersceaniateaa aes 6 28 Step 4 Login Information Settings Page cccccseccccsseccsecceeecceeeccceescesesceeseseeaeeees 6 29 Step 5 Random Number Entropy Input page cccccccsescccneeccceeeceeesecseececueseeeaeees 6 30 Step 6 Enter Wireless Link Encryption Key page ccccccesccceeeceeeeecueeeeseeeeeseeees 6 30 Step 7 HTTP and Telnet Settings Page iiccsisicsssscessssasssiscssscsssastsessdessseasacseecsadcesscseaeses 6 31 Step 8 Commit Security Configuration Page iiiicssisssisecsssiseveiastaccceseteredavdiaxseactertterave 6 33 User Accounts page identity based user accounts not SHOWN ccccseeeeeeeeeeees 6 35 Identity based user aCCOUMUS Jijcccreincesabocdjanasiandedeacaseasdees sea dracasighissaaiatataddoens aie 6 39 Change Password page System Administration example cccccsecceeseeeeeeeeeees 6 41 Webpage Properties Pade sicissisiscisicesainaaaiiacse an E EEA E Tii 6 42 RADIUS Configuration page c0 scc0ssscesssacssssacses scone sccdssansessansossenbsuasossenansstessdesenseress 6 43 Disarm Installation page when Unit is armed s ssics35 42ss0 28 sssecesisavseseseseeccousenaadeveoseesss 6 46 Current installation summary page sesisiscsescsssisedzssasesscsaaas dus EAEE AED rE Ear EART 6 47 Step 1 Interface Configuration Page sdisvsxs cevsvansacuenseverwsesiawsavacaveneeetveresdiaeateosseaeseeees 6 48 Step 1 I
160. 4 200 10 0 08 1 12 5 External 4ft Dish 0 00035 0 00028 2884 10 0 08 5 8 GHz Integrated 0 32 0 26 200 10 0 63 7 ame les External 2ft Flat 0 32 0 26 631 10 1 0 5 5 0 Plate External 6ft Dish 0 32 0 26 6310 10 3 07 10 3 25 External sectored 0 32 0 26 50 1 10 0 28 1 3 6 antenna 60 5 9 GHz Integrated 0 32 0 16 200 10 0 63 2 4 0 External 2ft Flat 0 32 0 16 631 10 1 0 5 5 0 Plate External 6ft Dish 0 32 0 16 6310 10 3 07 10 3 25 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 55 Compliance with safety standards Chapter 4 Reference information AX NOTE Gain of antenna in dBi 10 log G The regulations require that the power used for the calculations is the maximum power in the transmit burst subject to allowance for source based time averaging At 5 4 GHz and EU 5 8 GHz the products are generally limited to a fixed EIRP which can be achieved with the Integrated Antenna The calculations above assume that the maximum EIRP allowed by the regulations is being transmitted A NOTE If there are no EIRP limits in the country of deployment use the distance calculations for FCC 5 8 GHz for all frequency bands At FCC 5 8 GHz for antennas between 0 6m 2ft and 1 8m 6ft alter the distance proportionally to the antenna gain At 2 5 GHz for antennas between 1 2m 4ft and 3 6m 12ft the safe distance is increased to between 0 8m 2 6 ft and 2 4m 7 8 ft Hazardous location compliance The PTP600 ATEX Hazloc Series radio products h
161. 4QAM 0 75 dual 33 84 33 84 67 67 16 67 16 67 33 34 16QAM 0 87 dual 26 32 26 32 52 64 12 97 12 97 25 94 16QAM 0 63 dual 18 92 18 92 37 84 9 32 9 32 18 65 256QAM 0 81 24 57 24 57 49 14 12 11 12 11 24 21 single 64QAM 0 92 20 70 20 70 41 40 10 20 10 20 20 40 single 64QAM 0 75 16 92 16 92 33 83 8 34 8 34 16 67 single 16QAM 0 87 13 16 13 16 26 32 6 48 6 48 12 97 single 16QAM 0 63 9 46 9 46 18 92 4 66 4 66 9 32 single QPSK 0 87 single 6 58 6 58 13 16 3 24 3 24 6 48 QPSK 0 63 single 4 73 4 73 9 46 2 33 2 33 4 66 BPSK 0 63 single 2 36 2 36 4 73 1 16 1 16 2 33 4 78 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Data throughput tables Table 93 Throughput for PTP 600 Full link symmetry 2 1 link optimization IP Modulation 30 MHz 20 MHz 15 MHz Mode Tx Rx Both Tx Rx Both Tx Rx Both 256QAM 0 81 198 58 99 29 297 88 133 42 66 71 200 12 100 50 50 25 150 74 dual 64QAM 0 92 dual 167 31 83 66 250 97 112 41 56 20 168 61 84 67 42 33 127 01 64QAM 0 75 dual 136 73 68 36 205 09 91 86 45 93 137 78 69 19 34 59 103 79 16QAM 0 87 dual 106 37 53 18 159 55 71 46 35 73 107 19 53 83 26 91 80 74 16QAM 0 63 dual 76 47 38 23 114 70 51 37 25 68 77 06 38 70 19 35 58 04 256QAM 0 81 99 29
162. 5 Connecting link to the network on page 6 99 phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 5 31 Installing a PTP SYNC unit Chapter 5 Installation Installing a PTP SYNC unit If the chosen TDD synchronization method requires PTP SYNC see Configuration options for TDD synchronization on page 2 30 then perform this task to install a PTP SYNC unit This task consists of the following procedures e Preparing for PTP SYNC installation on page 5 32 e Mounting the PTP SYNC unit on page 5 33 e Connecting up the PTP SYNC unit on page 5 34 e Powering up the PTP SYNC installation on page 5 36 The PTP SYNC unit should not be installed in a domestic home environment as it is a Class A product In a domestic environment it may cause radio frequency RF interference in other appliances The PTP SYNC unit must be installed indoors in a non condensing environment otherwise it will be prone to water damage To protect the PTP SYNC from damage disconnect the power supply from the PIDU before connecting up the PTP SYNC Preparing for PTP SYNC installation Check that the correct components are available as described in Ordering components on page 2 53 5 32 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Installing a PTP SYNC unit Mounting the PTP SYNC unit Install the PTP SYNC unit in the equipment building either in a rack or on a wall Rack mounting If the PTP SYNC is to be in a rack fix it to the rack mount using the M3 screws
163. 5 139 7 136 5 134 8 133 4 131 7 eee 64 9 425 132 9 Not supported ee Not supported L 256QAM 0 81 dual 61 9 25 129 9 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 35 Wireless specifications Chapter 4 Reference information Table 65 PTP 48600 IP mode threshold power and link loss System Threshold dBm oupa Maximum link loss dB per channel bandwidth etl per channel bandwidth Modulation pr 5 10 15 20 Pi 20 5 10 15 20 MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz BPSK 0 63 single 98 6 95 5 93 3 91 9 27 27 169 6 166 5 164 3 162 9 QPSK 0 63 single 94 3 90 7 89 6 87 5 27 27 165 3 161 7 160 6 158 5 QPSK 0 87 single 90 8 87 3 85 9 84 0 27 26 161 8 158 3 156 9 154 0 16QAM 0 63 single 88 7 85 2 83 6 81 8 25 25 157 7 154 2 152 6 150 8 16QAM 0 63 dual 85 3 81 6 80 0 78 5 25 25 154 3 150 6 149 0 147 5 16QAM 0 87 single 84 4 80 6 78 8 77 3 25 25 153 4 149 6 147 8 146 3 16QAM 0 87 dual 81 0 77 2 75 9 74 5 25 25 150 0 146 2 144 9 143 5 64QAM 0 75 single 81 2 77 7 76 1 74 7 23 23 148 2 144 7 143 1 141 7 64QAM 0 75 dual 78 2 74 7 73 4 71 9 23 23 145 2 141 7 140 4 138 9 64QAM 0 92 single 77 0 73 9 72 7 71 0 21 21 142 0 138 9 137 7 136 0 64QAM 0 92 dual 74 0 70 9 69 7 67 6 21 21 139 0 135 9 134 7 132 6 ae 0 81 75 2 71 9 701 68 0 20 20 139 2 135 9 134 1 132
164. 512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Using recovery mode Using recovery mode The Cambium PTP 600 point to point wireless Ethernet bridges have a special mode of operation that allows the user to recover a unit from configuration errors or software image corruption This section describes how to enter recovery mode and how to recover the unit The following topics are described in this section e Entering recovery mode on page 7 53 e Selecting a recovery option on page 7 54 e Upgrading software image on page 7 56 e Resetting IP amp Ethernet configuration on page 7 57 e Erasing configuration on page 7 58 e Rebooting the unit on page 7 58 Entering recovery mode The unit may enter recovery mode automatically in response to some failures To enter recovery mode manually press the Recovery switch located on the underside of the PIDU while applying mains power Figure 182 hold the Recovery switch in for between 10 and 20 seconds then release it The Ethernet LED will double flash 10 times at power up Figure 182 PIDU recovery switch location Power Ethernet PIDU Plus PTP 300 500 600 Series phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 7 53 Using recovery mode Chapter 7 Operation Selecting a recovery option 7 54 To select a recovery option when the unit is in recovery mode access the web interface by entering the default IP address 169 254 1 1 The Recovery Image Warning page is displayed Figure 183 C
165. 5600 MHz to 5650 MHz These features must be implemented in all products able to operate outdoors in the band 5470 MHz to 5725 MHz Manufacturers must ensure that such radio products cannot be configured to operate outside of FCC rules specifically it must not be possible to disable or modify the radar protection functions that have been demonstrated to the FCC In order to comply with these FCC requirements Cambium supplies variants of the PTP 600 for operation in the USA or Canada These variants are only allowed to operate with license keys and region codes that comply with FCC IC rules In particular operation of radio channels overlapping the band 5600 5650 MHz is not allowed and these channels are permanently barred In addition other channels may also need to be barred when operating close to weather radar installations Aa NOTE To ensure compliance with FCC rules KDB 443999 Interim Plans to Approve UNII Devices Operating in the 5470 5725 MHz Band with Radar Detection and DFS Capabilities follow the instructions in Avoidance of weather radars USA only on page 2 5 Other variants of the PTP 600 are available for use in the rest of the world but these variants are not supplied to the USA or Canada except under strict controls when they are needed for export and deployment outside the USA or Canada Specific expertise and training required for professional installers To ensure that the PTP 600 is installed and configu
166. 6 12 78 38 34 256QAM 0 81 33 19 16 59 49 78 single 64QAM 0 92 27 96 13 98 41 94 single 64QAM 0 75 22 85 11 42 34 27 single 16QAM 0 87 17 78 8 89 26 66 single 16QAM 0 63 12 78 6 39 19 17 single QPSK 0 87 single 8 89 4 44 13 33 QPSK 0 63 single 6 39 3 19 9 58 BPSK 0 63 single 3 19 1 60 4 79 Chapter 4 Reference information Table 95 Throughput for PTP 600 Full link symmetry Adaptive link optimization IP This combination is not available with Channel Bandwidth 5 MHz phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Data throughput tables Range adjustment curves Use these curves to look up the link Range and find the Throughput Factor that must be applied to adjust the 0 km data throughput rates for the required combination of Channel Bandwidth Link Symmetry Link Optimization DFS and Link Range km Table 96 Range adjustment characteristics Channel Link sym Link opt DFS Curve See figure width 30 MHz 1 1 IP A Figure 79 TDM B Figure 80 2 1 IP C Figure 81 TDM D Figure 82 Adaptive IP E Figure 83 20 MHz 1 1 IP L Figure 88 TDM N Figure 89 2 1 IP L Figure 88 TDM O Figure 90 Adaptive IP C Figure 81 15 MHz 1 1 IP F Figure 84 TDM G Figure 85 2 1 IP None F Figure 84 FCC or ETSI C Figure 81 TDM None H Figure 86 FCC or ETSI C Figure 81 Adaptive IP A Figure 79 10 MHz 1 1 IP F Figure 84 TDM K F
167. 6 75 5 69 8 20 144 8 142 6 141 5 135 8 16QAM 0 87 dual 76 9 73 9 72 2 68 7 20 142 9 139 9 138 2 134 7 64QAM 0 75 single 74 7 72 2 71 8 66 6 18 138 7 136 2 135 8 130 6 64QAM 0 75 dual 73 0 70 4 68 8 65 6 18 137 0 134 4 132 8 129 6 64QAM 0 92 single 70 9 68 6 67 4 62 9 18 134 9 132 6 131 4 126 9 64 QAM 0 92 dual 68 2 65 6 64 2 60 5 18 132 1 129 6 128 2 124 5 256QAM 0 81 single N A N A N A 65 4 18 N A N A N A 126 9 256QAM 0 81 dual N A N A N A 60 5 18 N A N A N A 124 5 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 41 Wireless specifications Chapter 4 Reference information Table 71 PTP 58600 IP mode threshold power and link loss System threshold dBm eee Maximum link loss dB Modulation per channel bandwidth abe per channel bandwidth mode 5 10 15 30 All 5 10 15 30 MHz MHz MHz MHz bands MHz MHz MHz MHz BPSK 0 63 single 95 1 92 5 90 8 86 3 25 166 1 163 5 161 8 157 3 QPSK 0 63 single 91 9 90 0 87 7 83 0 24 161 9 160 0 157 7 153 0 QPSK 0 87 single 88 7 86 6 84 8 80 3 23 157 7 155 6 153 8 149 3 16QAM 0 63 single 86 0 84 3 82 4 78 3 22 154 0 152 3 150 4 146 3 16QAM 0 63 dual 83 5 80 4 78 5 75 3 22 151 5 148 4 146 5 143 3 16QAM 0 87 single 82 1 79 5 78 1 72 5 20 148 1 145 5 144 1 138 5 16QAM 0 87 dual 79 2 76 2 73 9 71 5 20 145 2 142 2 139 9 137 5 64QAM 0 75 single 78 8 76 7 75 2 69 2 18 142 8 140 7 139 2 133 2 64QAM 0 75 dual 76 1 73 1 71
168. 6 2 5 37 7 Y 37 7dBi RFS RFS 2 foot Parabolic SPF2 52AN or 27 9 Y SPFX2 52AN 27 9dBi RFS RFS 3 foot Parabolic SPF3 52AN or 31 4 Y SPFX3 52AN 31 4dBi RFS RFS 4 foot Parabolic SPF4 52AN or 33 9 Y SPFX4 52AN 33 9dBi RFS RFS 6 foot Parabolic SPF6 52AN or 37 4 Y SPFX6 52AN 37 4dBi RFS RFS 2 foot HP Parabolic SDF2 52AN or 31 4 Y SDFX2 52AN 31 4dBi phn 2512 007v000 Dec 2012 2 69 Ordering components Chapter 2 Planning considerations Manufacturer Antenna Type Gain Flat Parabolic dBi Plate Dish RFS RFS 4 foot HP Parabolic SDF4 52AN or 33 9 Y SDFX4 52AN 33 9dBi RFS RFS 6 foot HP Parabolic SDF6 52AN or 37 4 Y SDFX6 52AN 37 4dBi StellaDoradus StellaDoradus 45 inch Parabolic 33 8 Y Antenna 58PSD113 Table 36 Sectored antennas for deployment in USA Canada 5 8 GHz Manufacturer Antenna Type Gain Beamwidt dBi h RadioWaves SEC 55V 60 17 17 60 SEC 55H 60 17 SEC 55D 60 17 RadioWaves SEC 55V 90 16 16 90 SEC 55H 90 16 SEC 55D 90 16 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide UltraSync installations Ordering components UltraSync installations require the components listed in Table 37 Table 37 Additional inventory for UltraSync installations UltraSync kit Memorylink UltraSync GPS 100M for PTP 600 Cambium part number WB3001 The kit contains the following components GPS synchronization unit Three attached
169. 805 4008 4023 a086 a053 4068 4985 LCF 4718 LCF 4719 ari a734 a720 a764 4770 4794 a800 4828 4050 2054 4060 a854 3690 4074 4020 NORA MOBO 407A OGD a754 47685 4814 4620 4844 4650 4874 4860 4008 3019 Jaona aoao aoea 4079 4724 LCF 4720 a731 a7a6 476 4776 4791 4806 4821 4836 4851 4806 4881 4006 4011 2926 oat 4056 4071 4086 4657 4672 4667 4002 4017 4052 OAT 4062 MOTT A002 4727 4742 4757 4772 4787 4802 4817 4832 4847 4862 4877 4892 4907 4922 4937 4952 4967 4982 4732 4762 4777 4792 4807 4822 4837 4852 4867 4882 4897 4912 4927 4942 4957 4972 4987 LCF 4721 LCF 4722 Region Code 23 4940 MHz 4710 MHz Region Code 15 5000 MHz Figure 54 PTP 48600 available spectrum in the 10 MHz channel bandwidth LCF 4715 4715 4725 4735 4745 4755 4765 4775 4785 4795 4805 4815 4825 4835 4845 4855 4865 4875 4885 4895 4905 4915 4925 4935 4945 4955 4965 4975 4985 4995 4720 4730 4740 4750 4760 4770 4780 4790 4800 4810 4820 4830 4840 4850 4860 4870 4880 4890 4900 4910 4920 4930 4940 4950 4960 4970 4980 4990 LCF 4716 4716 4726 4736 4746
170. 89 June 1996 through 0 96 May 1997 are Copyright 1996 1997 Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng 0 88 with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors John Bowler Kevin Bracey Sam Bushell Magnus Holmgren Greg Roelofs Tom Tanner phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Cambium Networks end user license agreement libpng versions 0 5 May 1995 through 0 88 January 1996 are Copyright 1995 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat Group 42 Inc For the purposes of this copyright and license Contributing Authors is defined as the following set of individuals Andreas Dilger Dave Martindale Guy Eric Schalnat Paul Schmidt Tim Wegner The PNG Reference Library is supplied AS IS The Contributing Authors and Group 42 Inc disclaim all warranties expressed or implied including without limitation the warranties of merchantability and of fitness for any purpose The Contributing Authors and Group 42 Inc assume no liability for direct indirect incidental special exemplary or consequential damages which may result from the use of the PNG Reference Library even if advised of the possibility of such damage Permission is hereby granted to use copy modify and distribute this source code or portions hereof for any purpose without fee subject to the following restrictions 1 The origin of this source code must not be misrepresent
171. 92 dual 118 69 118 69 237 38 80 89 80 89 161 78 61 43 61 43 122 87 64QAM 0 75 dual 96 99 96 99 193 98 66 10 66 10 132 21 50 20 50 20 100 41 16QAM 0 87 dual 75 45 75 45 150 91 51 43 51 43 102 85 39 06 39 06 78 11 16QAM 0 63 dual 54 24 54 24 108 48 36 97 36 97 73 94 28 08 28 08 56 15 256QAM 0 81 70 43 70 43 140 87 48 00 48 00 96 01 36 46 36 46 72 91 single 64QAM 0 92 59 34 59 34 118 69 40 44 40 44 80 89 30 72 30 72 61 43 single 64QAM 0 75 48 49 48 49 96 99 33 05 33 05 66 10 25 10 25 10 50 20 single 16QAM 0 87 37 73 37 73 75 45 25 71 25 71 51 42 19 53 19 53 39 05 single 16QAM 0 63 27 12 27 12 54 24 18 48 18 48 36 97 14 04 14 04 28 07 single QPSK 0 87 single 18 86 18 86 37 72 12 85 12 85 25 71 9 76 9 76 19 52 QPSK 0 63 single 13 56 13 56 27 12 9 24 9 24 18 48 7 02 7 02 14 03 BPSK 0 63 single 6 78 6 78 13 56 4 62 4 62 9 24 3 51 3 51 7 02 At zero range All rates are in Mbit s phn 2512 007v000 Dec 2012 4 77 Data throughput tables Chapter 4 Reference information Table 92 Throughput for PTP 600 Full link symmetry 1 1 link optimization TDM continued Modulation 10 MHz 5 MHz Mode Tx Rx Both Tx Rx Both 256QAM 0 81 49 14 49 14 98 29 24 22 24 22 48 43 dual 64QAM 0 92 dual 41 41 41 41 82 81 20 40 20 40 40 80 6
172. Administrator or Read Only roles are permitted to review the locally logged event messages phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 1 55 System management Chapter 1 Product description AES license PTP 600 provides optional encryption using the Advanced Encryption Standard AES Encryption is not available in the standard PTP 600 system AES upgrades are supplied as an access key purchased from your Cambium Point to Point distributor or solutions provider The access key authorizes AES operation for one ODU Two access keys are needed to operate AES on a link The upgrade is applied by entering an access key together with the MAC address of the target ODU into the PTP License Key Generator web page which may be accessed from the support website see Contacting Cambium Networks on page 2 The License Key Generator creates a new license key that is delivered by email The license key must be installed on the ODU When the license key is installed the ODU must be rebooted before AES can be enabled Once applied the AES upgrade is bound to a single ODU and is not transferrable AES encryption may be used in the following ways e At the wireless port to encrypt data transmitted over the wireless link e Atthe SNMP management interface in the SNMPv3 mode e Atthe HTTPS TLS management interface e Atthe RADIUS interface when PEAP MS CHAPv2 is used as the authentication method Two levels of encryption are available to purchase e 128 bit Thi
173. Although the more complex modulations such as 256QAM 0 81 will transport data at a much higher rate than the less complex modulation modes the receiver requires a much higher signal to noise ratio The PTP 600 series provides an adaptive modulation scheme where the receiver constantly monitors the quality of the received signal and notifies the far end of the link of the optimum modulation mode with which to transmit In this way optimum capacity is achieved at all times This is one of a number of features which allows the PTP 600 to operate in challenging non line of sight radio channels Specifications of capacity for all channel bandwidths modulation modes and configurations are provided in Data throughput capacity on page 4 74 Specifications of receive level thresholds for each modulation mode assuming no interference are provided in the various system threshold tables in Chapter 4 Reference information Aa NOTE PTP LINKPlanner includes an estimate of mean data rate the data rate provided by each modulation and the percentage of time spent in each modulation mode MIMO Multiple Input Multiple Output MIMO techniques provide protection against fading and increase the probability that the receiver will decode a usable signal When the effects of MIMO are combined with those of OFDM techniques and a high link budget there is a high probability of a robust connection over a non line of sight path The PTP 600 transmits two si
174. CS4 Q4 v 01 av 17 aM 33 Qi v 02 av 18 AF21 Q3 v 34 AF41 Q4 v 03 a1 19 Q1 v 35 Q1 v 04 Q1 v 20 AF22 Q3 v 36 AF42 Q4 v 05 Q1 v 21 Q1 v 37 av 06 Qi wv 22 AF23 Q3 v 38 AF43 Q4 v 07 a1 B 23 Q1 v 39 Q1 v 08 CS1 Q0 v 24 C53 Q3 v 40 C55 Q5 v 09 Qi v 25 av 41 aiv 10 AF11 Q2 v 26 AF31 Q3 v 42 av 11 Q1 27 Q1 v 43 Q1 v 12 AF12 Q2 v 28 AF32 Q3 v 44 VA Q6 v 13 av 29 ai 45 ai 14 AF13 Q2 v 30 AF33 Q3 v 46 EF a6 wv 15 av 31 av 47 Qi v MPLS Traffic Class TCO Qo v TCI Q1 v TC2 Q2 v TC3 Q3v TC4 atv Tes Qs TC6 Q6 v TC7 Q7 wv phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 48 C56 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 CS7 63 Reset Default Priority Mappings Submit Updated Configuration av Q1 v Qi wv Q1 Q1 Q1 Q1 v Q1 v Q1 Q1 Q1 Q1 Q1 Q1 av Q1 6 97 Task 14 Configuring quality of service 6 98 Table 126 Layer 2 Control Protocols Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Attribute Meanin
175. DUCT phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Chapter 4 Reference information This chapter contains reference information and regulatory notices that apply to the PTP 600 Series products The following topics are described in this chapter Equipment specifications on page 4 2 contains specifications of the ODU PIDU and other equipment required for PTP 600 installations Wireless specifications on page 4 9 contains specifications of the PTP 600 wireless interface including RF bands channel width and link loss Data network specifications on page 4 46 contains specifications of the PTP 600 Ethernet interface Syslog message formats on page 4 48 describes the format and content of Syslog event messages Compliance with safety standards on page 4 51 lists the safety specifications against which the PTP 600 has been tested and certified It also describes how to keep RF exposure within safe limits Compliance with radio regulations on page 4 58 describes how the PTP 600 complies with the radio regulations that are in force in various countries Notifications on page 4 67 contains notifications made to regulatory bodies for the PTP 600 Data throughput tables on page 4 74 contains tables and graphs to support calculation of the data rate capacity that can be provided by PTP 600 configurations phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 1 Equipment specifications Chapter 4 Reference information Equipment specifications
176. Display Login Information O No Yes lt iq Back Next gt gt Below is a presentation of the Login Information as it will appear on the login page Successful login Time Of Last Login 02 Sep 2011 07 54 00 IP Address Of Last Login 10 130 1 175 Unsuccessful login attempts Number Of Unsuccessful Login Attempts 0 New Unsuccessful Login Attempts 0 Elapsed Time Since Last Unsuccessful Login Attempt IP Address Of Last Unsuccessful Login Attempt 0 0 0 0 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 29 Task 5 Configuring security Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Step 5 Random number entropy input The Step 5 Random Number Entropy Input page is displayed Figure 113 If valid entropy input exists then an SHA 1 thumbprint of the input is displayed If this input is correct then take no action Otherwise enter the generated input in the Entropy Input and Confirm Entropy Input fields Select Next Figure 113 Step 5 Random Number Entropy Input page Step 5 Enter Random Number Entropy Input Please enter 512 bits of entropy input to seed the internal random number algorithm Click next to keep the existing Entropy Input Thumbprint Algorithm SHA 1 d2 43 ef 35 Confirm Entropy Input lt lt Back Next gt gt Step 6 Enter the wireless link encryption key The Step 6 Enter The Wireless Link Encryption Key page is displayed Figure 114 The wireless link encryption key i
177. Ds Fault finding Cluster timing GPS LED on GPS LED on Diagnosis source master slave s GPS receiver Blink Blink OK oe ae Off Any Fault in GPS unit or aka GPS cable Blink Off Fault in daisy chain cable Alternative 1PPS Off Off OK DEA no NMEA Off On Fault in alternative ata 1PPS source One ODU is Off Off OK cluster timing master phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 8 15 Testing a telecoms link Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Testing a telecoms link If an E1 or T1 link has been installed it may be helpful to test the link by performing a loopback test This task consists of the following procedure e Performing a telecoms loopback test on page 8 16 Performing a telecoms loopback test The loopback test allows the telecoms data stream to be looped back at the copper or wireless interface A typical T1 or E1 installation test might include a Copper loopback on the local unit followed by a Wireless loopback on the remote unit ANOTE The Telecoms page is only available when the Telecoms Interface has been set to either T1 or E1 as described in Task 6 Configuring wireless and telecoms interfaces on page 6 45 To perform a loopback test proceed as follows 1 Select menu option System Configuration Telecoms The Telecoms page is displayed Figure 188 2 Select the Telecoms Loopback option Copper or Wireless for each channel to be tested A or B Tab
178. E 2 33 Mounting options for the PTP SYNC GPS reCeivel ccccccsesccceeseceeeeecaeeceseeeceeesceseeseeaeeeeeaes 2 34 GPS receiver location requirements s 12 sassesdeasesuseseversiavas ncdshovarsesesaseteassearavereesrseasdenaedsa anes 2 34 Mounting the GPS receiver module on the equipment building ccccecccceeeeeeeeees 2 35 Mounting the GPS receiver module on a metal tower OF mast ss ssseesssesssessserssersserss 2 36 Data network Planning ennonn or a A enemas aR eee E R 2 37 Management mode ss issiesvetscicisaceziegndaciiestaesescisisiicsh pedis hia Reed AA 2 37 VLAN MeO MDENS Mp saruri EEE O EAEN 2 38 Priority for Management ratites 214cnscsnssiaaswas AA A E guns pass eaneaens 2 38 IP STAC C i2s53 sadecdacvnasadyy eaaanoasesusoieusiaasaxcedeteussadessannoteasaesaahetaase iedniseos eas sae O 2 38 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Quality of service for bridged Ethernet tratticssiisssccscseniaetinessaavaseereseig pace uasweseecassicsveereeesiee 2 39 Back to back MMKS cipres a a S A ss 2 40 Green Ethernet SWwitehESsuercimienrenrecai e a a ania eiiie 2 40 BS 1 61 BA gl Fy kc 001110 e A A eo 2 41 Planning for SN TP OPeCratiOn fis stscensessis voces audicas aise iai a n EET 2 41 Planning tor MTIPS TCS Operation iss siasessceia ecsceneseitenased sae auacabanaaedaaeds eae att aauaetarpceseera davies 2 41 Planning for FIPS 140 2 operato oreert tiara sasiscdeaeaena Gee eS 2 42 Plannin
179. EEA 1 12 Redundancy and alternative powering configurations sssesssesssessserssersreesseersseesseesse 1 14 Remote LEDS and recovery SWitChoeenseniriino nies n Ea o E ARA 1 15 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 i Contents Further reading on the PIDU acssccasccassas nada nona a ecco Rene een wea ET 1 16 Cabling and lightning prove CtiOn wisi sesenacstea easiest Rainn 1 17 PIP and iontmng PrOtCCUOMs csssieaccasesisecusddehacvanstiecusrsetaaveneeaehiceseasalstacesoieameliiosehiieaweelise 1 17 Outdoor CONTECUIONS sis issisevess crassa vieadunsdcanamensuseaien E E E AREE OO AEE NS E EEDE 1 17 Indoor connections msemo a a a a ieee ania ageaatee 1 18 Cable grounding Kits lt aics sic sesescsestav ndinet E A ee 1 18 Lightning protection units LPUS ssissesssscssdesiscesdasa cea ssasadenssassnesbaaen cepa gad ENE EET 1 19 Further reading on cabling and lightning protection cc cece ceecccceeeceeeseeceeeeeaeeeeeneees 1 21 PTP2SY NG Wit icc ccsciaseeave azecavacnannse O AEA ES ENEE E ENE EEEE ES 1 22 PIP SYNC nit descriptio scicscgiscesjidi ziss iadasdbasadasine scsezdsasddasain EEEE 1 22 Model mmm DO i siasacresseatcaseresaes O TA E EE E E a 1 22 PTP SYNC Unit Interiaces sz ic 2ssesssiveseaiede eavcasneeaveegeceomions can vases EE E R 1 23 Purther reading on PPPSSY NG i scssaciccccsauiascteas E E tania EARE AS 1 24 Wareless Operation wchovsrezaoonstexs dere demvndisieemenssticenniis eee cemnentauendanenventensdevedenseevenenateysbonseenan
180. EIRP 10 MHz 31 dBm EIRP 5 MHz 28 dBm EIRP 1 Region codes 4 7 10 and 27 the 5795 MHz to 5815 MHz band is assigned for Road Transport and Traffic Telematics RTTT 2 Region code 1 reduced TX power at band edges 3 Region code 19 The PTP 59600 can be deployed instead of the PTP 58600 as it meets the requirements of the 5 8 GHz license for India Table 89 Licenses and region codes for 5 9 GHz Region License Frequencies DFS Channel Max power code regulation bandwidth 15 Unrestricted 5825 5925 5 10 15 30 25 dBm MHz MHz 16 Russia 5825 5925 5 10 15 30 25 dBm MHz MHz 17 India 5875 5925 10 15 30 MHz 36 dBm EIRP MEZ 5 MHz 33 dBm EIRP 19 India 5825 5875 10 15 30 MHz 36 dBm EIRP x ma ne 5 MHz 33 dBm EIRP 1 Region code 19 The PTP 58600 can be deployed instead of the PTP 59600 as it meets the requirements of the 5 8 GHz license for India phn 2512 007v000 Dec 2012 4 65 Compliance with radio regulations Chapter 4 Reference information Default and alternative region codes Table 90 lists the default and alternative region codes that are provided when PTP 600 products are shipped The terms default and alternative are defined as follows e The product is shipped with a factory installed license key for the default region code e The product is shipped with a document that contains a license key for the alternative region code
181. FITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Part 6 Cisco BUPTNIC copyright notice BSD Copyright 2004 Cisco Inc and Information Network Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications All rights reserved phn 2512 007v000 Dec 2012 3 11 Cambium Networks end user license agreement Chapter 3 Legal information Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met e Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer e Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution e Neither the name of Cisco Inc Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications nor the names of their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTAB
182. Figure 135 Step 4 SNMP User Accounts Configuration page for SNMPv3 Step 4 SNMP User Accounts Configuration username tole authriv Passphrase Passphrase Confirm 4 admin System Administrator V Auth Priv 2 readonly i Auth Priv 3 A 4 v 5 x 6 x 7 bisae 5 9 Cr 10 as A4 Back Next gt gt Table 116 Step 4 SNMP User Accounts Configuration attributes for SNMPv3 Attribute Meaning Name Name to be used by the SNMP user to access the system Role Selects which of the two web based security profiles are applied to this user System administrator or Read only Select Disabled to disable the SNMP account Auth Priv Indicates whether the Passphrase applies to authentication or privacy protocols 6 68 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 7 Setting up SNMP agent Attribute Meaning Passphrase The phrase to be entered by this SNMP user to access the system using an authentication or privacy protocol Length must be between 8 and 32 characters May contain spaces The Auth Passphrase is hidden when Security Level for this user s Role is set to No Auth No Priv The Priv Passphrase is hidden when Security Level for this user s Role is set to No Auth No Priv or Auth No Priv Passphr
183. Figure 176 contains eight diagnostic attributes the above six plus Signal Strength Ratio and Aggregate Data Rate These attributes are defined in Table 140 The element arrays represent the following e Max The maximum value measured over the last hour e Mean The mean ofa set of values recorded at one second intervals over the last hour e Min The minimum value measured the last hour e Latest The latest value measured If the link has been running for less than one hour then the values are calculated over the time that has elapsed since the link was established These attributes can be plotted against time downloaded and reset by using the Diagnostics Plotter page as described in Using the diagnostics plotter on page 7 45 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 7 47 Restoring upgrading and rebooting Chapter 7 Operation Restoring upgrading and rebooting This section describes how to restore the system configuration upgrade the software and reboot the unit This section contains the following procedures e Restoring the system configuration on page 7 48 e Upgrading software on page 7 49 e Rebooting or reviewing reboot reasons on page 7 52 Restoring the system configuration 7 48 Perform this procedure to restore a PTP 600 unit to a previously saved configuration Refer to Task 17 Saving the system configuration on page 6 110 for instructions on when and how to save the configuration 4a NOTE The restore is only guara
184. For more information refer to Compliance with radio regulations on page 4 58 USA only if the system designer has provided a list of channels to be barred for TDWR radar avoidance the affected channels must be barred during staging before the units are allowed to radiate on site otherwise FCC rules will be infringed Selecting configuration options Use the installation report to determine which configuration options are required Refer to PTP LINKPlanner on page 2 12 6 2 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 1 Connecting to the unit Task 1 Connecting to the unit This task consists of the following procedures e Configuring the management PC on page 6 3 e Connecting to the PC and powering up on page 6 5 e Logging into the web interface on page 6 5 Configuring the management PC To configure the local management PC to communicate with the PTP 600 proceed as follows 1 Select Properties for the Ethernet port 2 Select the Internet Protocol TCP IP item _4 _ Local Area Connection 2 Properties i 2 x General Authentication Advanced Connect using E Broadcom NetXtreme 57x Gigabit C This connection uses the following items File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks 3 Network Monitor Driver pm nternet Protocol TCP IP Description Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provi
185. GPSMPPS External Max Burst Duration 544 y us TDD Frame Duration 1196 Hs TDD Frame Offset 0 ys Slave Receive To Transmit Gap 39 ys TDD Holdover Mode Strict Best Effort TDD Holdover Duration 40 minutes lt lt Back Next gt Aa NOTE The data required to populate this screen is available in PTP LINKPlanner Table 112 Step 3 TDD Synchronization attributes Attribute Meaning TDD Sync Device Select the timing device that is to be used for TDD synchronization Cluster Master Only displayed when TDD Sync Device is set to PTPSYNC mee Cluster Master is the first ODU in the synchronization chain Cluster Slave is the second or subsequent ODU in the chain PTP SYNC Site Only displayed when TDD Sync Device is set to PTPSYNC pomycnee Internal means standalone operation with no external timing reference GPS 1PPS External means that an external GPS receiver will provide a 1 pps timing reference Max Burst The maximum duration of the burst opportunity Select a value in Duration the range 726 to 2176 microseconds phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 59 Task 6 Step 6 60 Configuring wireless and telecoms interfaces Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Attribute Meaning TDD Frame Select a value in the range 1730 to 6410 microseconds Duration TDD Frame Offset The delay of the start of the TDD frame from the epoch of the ex
186. HC 2 phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 2 57 Ordering components Chapter 2 Planning considerations Product Regional Integrated or Link or end Part variant variant connectorized complete number Full ETSI RoW_ Connectorized End Complete BP5830BHC 1 Full FCC IC Integrated Link Complete WB3860 Full FCC IC Integrated End Complete WB3861 Full FCC IC Connectorized Link Complete WB3864 Full FCC IC Connectorized End Complete WB3865 OOBM Integrated Link Complete WB3764 OOBM Integrated End Complete WB3765 OOBM Connectorized Link Complete WB3766 OOBM Connectorized End Complete WB3767 ATEX Hazloc ETSI RoW Integrated Link Complete WB3816 ATEX Hazloc ETSI RoW Integrated End Complete WB3817 ATEX Hazloc ETSI RoW_ Connectorized Link Complete WB3818 ATEX Hazloc ETSI RoW_ Connectorized End Complete WB3819 ATEX Hazloc FCC IC Integrated Link Complete WB3784 ATEX Hazloc FCC IC Integrated End Complete WB3785 ATEX Hazloc FCC IC Connectorized Link Complete WB3786 ATEX Hazloc FCC IC Connectorized End Complete WB3787 Table 30 PTP 59600 kit part numbers Integrated or Link or end Part connectorized complete number Integrated Link Complete WB3097 Integrated End Complete WB3102 Connectorized Link Complete WB3098 Connectorized End Complete WB3103 phn 2512 007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Ordering components Kit
187. Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields 3 kHz to 300 GHz Council recommendation of 12 July 1999 on the limitation of exposure of the general public to electromagnetic fields 0 Hz to 300 GHz 1999 519 EC and respective national regulations Directive 2004 40 EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 29 April 2004 on the minimum health and safety requirements regarding the exposure of workers to the risks arising from physical agents electromagnetic fields 18th individual Directive within the meaning of Article 16 1 of Directive 89 391 EEC phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Compliance with safety standards e US FCC limits for the general population See the FCC web site at http www fcc gov and the policies guidelines and requirements in Part 1 of Title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations as well as the guidelines and suggestions for evaluating compliance in FCC OET Bulletin 65 e Health Canada limits for the general population See the Health Canada web site at http www hc sc gc ca ewh semt pubs radiation 99ehd dhm237 limits limites_e html and Safety Code 6 e EN 50383 2002 Basic standard for the calculation and measurement of electromagnetic field strength and SAR related to human exposure from radio base stations and fixed terminal stations for wireless telecommunication systems 110 MHz 40 GHz e BS EN 50385 2002 Product standard to demonstrate the compliances of
188. ILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Part 7 Fabasoft R amp D Software GmbH amp Co KG copyright notice BSD Copyright Fabasoft R amp D Software GmbH amp Co KG 2003 oss fabasoft com Author Bernhard Penz Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met e Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer e Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution e The name of Fabasoft R amp D Software GmbH amp Co KG or any of its subsidiaries brand or product names may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission 3 12
189. IRP limit when the appropriate values for antenna gain and feeder cable losses are entered into the GUI Ethernet networking skills The installer must have the ability to configure IP addressing on a PC and to set up and control products using a web browser interface Lightning protection To protect outdoor radio installations from the impact of lightning strikes the installer must be familiar with the normal procedures for site selection bonding and grounding Installation guidelines for the PTP 600 can be found in Chapter 2 Planning considerations and Chapter 5 Installation Training The installer needs to have basic competence in radio and IP network installation The specific requirements applicable to the PTP 600 should be gained by reading Chapter 5 Installation and Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment and by performing sample set ups at base workshop before live deployments phn 2512 007v000 Dec 2012 V VI Safety and regulatory information phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Contents Safety and regulatory infOrmatiOn cccccceeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeaeeeeaeeseeeauageauaeeaeaseauaeeanageas l inportant safety INtOrMAlON dcasieered occas seennceoatbacssnaananmacsamanadnane im ceede a a aa a I Important regulatory informati n vsersscscsssiddasacesgasazessdesendssaasiaasareesiasdeiehonieeniei aaa MEO III About This User Guide ccccccceeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeuaeeeeaeeeuaeeeuee
190. MP Engine ID Only enabled when SNMP Engine ID Format is set to Text Text String Text used to generate the SNMP Engine ID SNMP Port Enter the port that the SNMP agent is listening to for commands Number from a management system Step 2 SNMP MIB II System Objects for SNMPv3 The Step 2 SNMP MIB II System Objects page is displayed Figure 133 Update the attributes Table 114 and select Next Figure 133 Step 2 SNMP MIB II System Objects page for SNMPv3 Step 2 SNMP MIB Il System Objects attributes vaue units Sys Contact Sys Name E Sys Location Ad Back Hext gt gt Table 114 Step 2 SNMP MIB II System Objects attributes for SNMPv3 Attribute Meaning Sys Contact The name of the contact person for this managed node together with information on how to contact this person Sys Name An administratively assigned name for this managed node By convention this is the fully qualified domain name of the node Sys Location The physical location of this node for example Telephone closet 3 floor The next step depends upon which SNMP Security Mode is selected in the Step 1 SNMP Configuration page e Ifitis Web based go to Step 3 SNMP user policy configuration for SNMPv3 on page 6 66 e Ifit is MIB based go to Confirming SNMP configuration for SNMPv3 on page 6 70 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 65 Task 7 Setting up SNMP
191. Managing performance on page 7 35 describes how to manage the performance of a PTP 600 link e Testing the radio link on page 8 11 describes what to do if the radio link is not working or it is unreliable or the data throughput rate is too low phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 1 37 Ethernet bridging Chapter 1 Product description Ethernet bridging This section describes how the PTP 600 controls Ethernet data in both the customer and system management networks Customer network Transparent Ethernet service The PTP 600 Series provides an Ethernet service between the Ethernet port at a local ODU and the Ethernet port at an associated remote ODU The Ethernet service is based on conventional layer two transparent bridging and is equivalent to the Ethernet Private Line EPL service defined by the Metro Ethernet Forum MEF The service is transparent to untagged frames standard VLAN frames priority tagged frames provider bridged frames Q in Q frames and provider backbone bridged frames In each case the service preserves MAC addresses VLAN ID Ethernet priority and Ethernet payload in the forwarded frame The maximum frame size for bridged frames in the customer network is 2000 octets Layer two control protocols The PTP 600 Series is transparent to layer two control protocols L2CP including e Spanning tree protocol STP rapid spanning tree protocol RSTP e Multiple spanning tree protocol MSTP e Link aggregation contro
192. Microsystems the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the U S and other countries Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met e Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer e Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution e Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Cambium Networks end user license agreement THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEO
193. O Ground cable Master Ground Bar MGB a To PIDU a External Ground Bar EGB Lightning Protection Unit Ground ring LPU To run the drop cable into the building proceed as follows 1 Make an entry point into the building and run the main drop cable into the building 2 Ground the drop cable to the external ground bar outside the building entry point as described in Making a drop cable ground point on page 5 23 3 Install the bottom LPU inside the building not more than 600 mm 24 in from the building entry point Mount the LPU with cable glands facing downwards 4 Ground the LPU to the master ground bar phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 5 27 Installing the drop cable and bottom LPU Chapter 5 Installation 5 Cut any surplus length from the bottom end of the main drop cable and fit an RJ45 connector and gland as described in Assembling an RJ45 connector and gland on page 5 18 6 Connect the main drop cable to the LPU as described in Connecting an RJ45 and gland to a unit on page 5 21 7 Connect the LPU PIDU drop cable to the other port of the LPU as described in Connecting an RJ45 and gland to a unit on page 5 21 8 Run the LPU PIDU drop cable to the location of the PIDU or PTP SYNC ANOTE If it is necessary to disconnect the drop cable refer to Disconnecting an RJ45 and gland from a unit on page 5 22 5 28 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Installing the PIDU Insta
194. Operation of HTTPS TLS is enabled by purchase of an optional AES upgrade as described in Task 3 Installing license keys on page 6 14 HTTPS TLS requires installation of a private key and a public key certificate where the common name of the subject in the public key certificate is the IP address or host name of the PTP 600 unit PTP 600 supports certificates with 1024 bit and 2048 bit key size HTTPS TLS operation is configured through the web based interfaces using the Security Wizard Details of the security material needed for HTTPS TLS are provided in Security planning on page 2 41 Aa NOTE The PTP 600 has no default public key certificate and Cambium is not able to generate private keys or public key certificates for specific network applications phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 1 49 System management Chapter 1 Product description User account management PTP 600 allows a network operator to configure a policy for login attempts the period of validity of passwords and the action taken on expiry of passwords See Configuring local user accounts on page 6 34 for further details Identity based user accounts The PTP 600 web based interface provides two methods of authenticating users e Role based user authentication allows the user on entry of a valid password to access all configuration capabilities and controls This is the default method e Identity based user authentication supports up to 10 users with individual use
195. P 600 product It describes in general terms the function of the product the main product variants and typical deployment It also describes the main hardware components The following topics are described in this chapter Overview of the PTP 600 on page 1 2 introduces the key features typical uses product variants and components of the PTP 600 Outdoor unit ODU on page 1 7 describes the ODU and its interfaces Powered indoor unit PIDU on page 1 12 describes the PIDU and its interfaces Cabling and lightning protection on page 1 17 describes the cabling and lightning protection components of a PTP 600 installation PTP SYNC unit on page 1 22 describes the optional PTP SYNC unit and its interfaces This unit may be used to implement TDD synchronization Wireless operation on page 1 25 describes how the PTP 600 wireless link is operated including modulation modes power control and security Ethernet bridging on page 1 38 describes how the PTP 600 controls Ethernet data in both the customer data and system management networks Telecoms circuits on page 1 46 describes how telecoms traffic E1 or T1 may be carried over PTP 600 links System management on page 1 48 introduces the PTP 600 management system including the web interface installation configuration alerts and upgrades FIPS 140 2 mode on page 1 60 describes the optional FIPS 140 2 a mode of operation Unified Capabilities Approved Product UC APL mode on page
196. P SYNC unit and the GPS receiver if used Ensure that the installation is correctly grounded Failure to do so may result in damage to the equipment 2 Connect the power supply to the PIDU 3 Within 90 seconds the PTP SYNC STATUS LED should blink once every second to show that satellite lock has been achieved 4 Ifthe system does not operate correctly refer to Testing PTP SYNC on page 8 13 5 36 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Installing a GPS receiver for PTP SYNC Installing a GPS receiver for PTP SYNC If PTP SYNC is to be installed with a GPS receiver as the timing reference source then perform this task to install a GPS receiver This task consists of the following procedures e Mounting the GPS receiver on page 5 37 e Preparing GPS drop cables on page 5 38 e Assembling an RJ45 plug and housing for GPS on page 5 39 e Assembling a 12 way circular connector on page 5 42 e Installing the GPS drop cable on page 5 46 e Grounding the GPS drop cable on page 5 47 e Installing the GPS drop cable at building entry on page 5 49 Prior to power up of equipment ensure that all cables are connected to the correct interfaces of the PTP SYNC unit and the GPS receiver module Failure to do so may result in damage to the equipment Mounting the GPS receiver Mount the GPS receiver following manufacturer s instructions upon either an external wall or a metal tower or mast For more information
197. PS validated software images are indicated by aF lPS prefix to the file name for example FI PS PTP600 09 01 DLD2 The general features of a FIPS validated software image are identical to those of the standard image with the same version number For example FI PS PTP600 09 01 DLD2 is equivalent to PTP600 09 01 DLD2 apart from the ability of the FIPS image to operate in FIPS mode phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 1 61 FIPS 140 2 mode Chapter 1 Product description Indication of FIPS 140 2 capability The FIPS 140 2 capability is indicated by a distinctive symbol displayed at the top of the navigation bar in the web based interface as shown in Figure 25 Figure 25 Indication of FIPS 140 2 capability FIPS 140 2 mode PTP 600 operates in the FIPS 140 2 mode when all of the following are true e The PTP 600 is FIPS 140 2 capable e The HTTPS TLS management interface is enabled e The HTTP management interface is disabled e AES encryption is enabled at the wireless interface e RADIUS authentication of web based users is disabled The Telnet management interface is automatically disabled in FIPS 140 2 mode SNMP control of HTTP and Telnet is automatically disabled in FIPS 140 2 mode Identity Based User Accounts are automatically enabled in FIPS 140 2 mode Secure mode alarm The secure mode alarm indicates that the unit is FIPS 140 2 capable but has not been configured correctly for FIPS 140 2 operation The secure mode alarm a
198. RA 5 38 Assembling an RJ45 plug and housing for GPS sss icccsasesecaceasabecusnaiacecnausaetasedtereitesiasaasSesess 5 39 Assembling a 12 way Circular Connector lt sc2iessedscse iadeaiee eee are eens a E 5 42 Installing the GPS aro pCa 6 35 jess ccsaics njosctesddeghics vaasieesiecouaadacctse aniatenaeet ee eee 5 46 Grounding the GPS drop CAD ss arsane aiis nen EREEREER AR ARNARS 5 47 Installing the GPS drop cable at building Ontry ii s cccsiccsccsseasacacscsaces tecssccassassscatecnsse cannes sacacs 5 49 Installing an E1 or T1 interface ccccccseccccseecceeseceeeceeaeceeseeeceesceeaeseeseecesseseeeeeeesseseeaeeeees 5 50 Preparing for Ed Or Ti imstallatiomsiccssse catetsssiastsseatsornemeeneare N A ee 5 50 Installing El Or Tl s2csczescassedexzassdeiescesaas pecestes cede saanbacns a a a aE NE R A aA 5 50 Testing the EL T L install tion ccsoncsdexnenssezshanswesnacceanawanhamnanoeasanennanesicetunvendonamtese abv eeesexaduendexte 5 53 Installing am OOBM interlace snoa an an E E ocean tra eauawan vere neaaanentma EEN 5 55 Preparing for OOBM installation ccc cccccccccccsesccceecccaeeeeseeecceeecesaeeceaeeceeueeeeaeseeseaseeseges 5 55 Installing OOBM ressmanni an E A A 5 55 Installing a Aber IMterla Ce aroraa nce Suussnesmetaunendaened dan banwe cnn AE RaR 5 57 Op calsatety Dre Cali lO sanss a a EEE AA EEEE 5 57 Inserting the SEP fiber Modules nnn N ANOT OON 5 58 Connecting the fiber Optic Cable c iiccivszsagsnctagadiausnsesssesasdodsebendagsa
199. RY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Part 5 Sparta Inc copyright notice BSD Copyright 2003 2008 Sparta Inc All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met e Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer e Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution e Neither the name of Sparta Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PRO
200. Recovery 02 01 Please select a new software image Browse Upload Software Image Next gt gt Select Browse Navigate to the folder containing the downloaded software image and select Open phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 4 Upgrading software version 5 Select Upload Software Image The Software Upgrade Confirmation page is displayed Software Upgrade Are You Sure The tables below compare the image stored in the primary software bank with the image that has just been downloaded Press the Program Software Image into Non Yolatile Memory button to accept the software upgrade Current software image description Software Version 56600 04 99 Uploaded software image description Software Version 56600 04 90 Program Software Image into Non olatile Memory lt lt Back Next D gt If the upgrade is taking the ODU into or out of FIPS mode an additional warning is displayed stating that the upgrade will cause automatic erasure of the critical security parameters CSPs 6 Select Program Software Image into Non Volatile Memory The Progress Tracker page is displayed Upgrade Progress Tracker Erasing FLASH memory banks Overall Upgrade Progress 15 The upgrade process should not be interrupted as this can result in a corrupt main software image which will result in the recovery image being booted at the next reset cycle p
201. Step 2 Wireless configuration on page 6 51 to slide the available channels up and down the 4 5 GHz band in steps of 1 MHz ODUs fitted with RF card version 2 or greater or 2 MHz ODUs fitted with RF card version 0 or 1 e Inthe 30 MHz Figure 44 and 20 MHz Figure 45 channel bandwidths the PTP 45600 operates on a 10 MHz channel raster e Inthe 15 MHz Figure 46 10 MHz Figure 47 and 5 MHz Figure 48 channel bandwidths the PTP 45600 variant operates on a 6 MHz channel raster e The channel raster is set to even center frequencies phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 13 Wireless specifications Chapter 4 Reference information Figure 44 PTP 45600 available spectrum in 30 MHz channel bandwidth RC 23 LCF 4415 4475 4505 4535 4565 4425 4455 4485 4515 4545 4575 4435 4465 4495 4525 4555 LCF 4416 4416 4446 4506 4536 4566 4426 4456 4516 4546 4576 4436 4466 4526 4556 4417 4507 4537 4567 LCF 4417 4517 4577 4497 4478 4508 4538 4568 4488 4548 4578 LCF 4419 4419 4449 4479 4509 4539 4569 4429 4459 4489 4519 4549 4579 4439 4469 4499 4529 4559 4420 4450 4480 4510 4540 4570 4430 4460 4520 4550 4580 4440 4470 4500 4530 4560 LCF 4421 4421 4451 4481 4511 4541 4571 4431 4461 4491 4521 4551 4581 4441 4471 4501 4531 4561 LOF 4422 4482 4572 443
202. System Administrator and Read Only together with a vendor specific attribute to indicate authentication roles of Security Officer System Administrator and Read Only Remote authentication can be used in addition to local authentication or can be used as a replacement for local authentication If remote and local authentications are used together PTP 600 checks log in attempts against locally stored user credentials before submitting a challenge and response for remote authentication Remote authentication is not attempted if the username and password match locally stored credentials RADIUS is only available when PTP 600 is configured for Identity based User Accounts For more information refer to Planning for RADIUS operation on page 2 50 PTP 600 supports Protected EAP with Microsoft Windows Server 2003 SNMP The management agent supports fault and performance management by means of an SNMP interface The management agent is compatible with SNMP v1 SNMP v2c and SNMPv3 using the following Management Information Bases MIBs e RFC 1493 BRIDGE MIB dot1dBase group e RFC 2233 IF MIB Interfaces group and ifXTable table e RFC 3411 SNMP FRAMEWORK MIB snmpEngine group e RFC 3412 SNMP MPD MIB snmpMPDStats group e RFC 3413 SNMP TARGET MIB snmpTargetObjects group and SNMP NOTIFICATION MIB snmpNotifyTable table e RFC 3414 SNMP USER BASED SM MIB usmStats group and usmUser group e RFC 3415 SNMP VIEW BASED ACM MIB vacmMIBO
203. TP 600 link has been purchased one unit will be factory configured as a Master unit with an IP address of 169 254 1 2 The other unit will be factory configured as a Slave unit with an IP address of 169 254 1 1 If a single PTP 600 unit has been purchased it will be factory configured as a Slave unit with an IP address of 169 254 1 1 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 5 Task 1 Connecting to the unit Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment To log into the web interface as a system administrator proceed as follows 1 Start the web browser from the management PC Type the IP address of the unit into the address bar The factory default IP address will be either 169 254 1 1 or 169 254 1 2 Press ENTER The web interface menu and System Summary page are displayed C Cambium Networks Home System Summary Status Installation Link Name Bolinas Ridge to Mount Tamalpais Management Elapsed Time Indicator 00 07 14 Security System Clock 18 Nov 2011 16 29 03 Change Password Logout 3 Select menu option System Administration The login page is displayed Q Cambium Networks Please login to gain access to the PTP wireless unit Username 4 Leave the Password blank and select Login 5 Check that the PIDU Ethernet LED blinks randomly as traffic passes through If it does not illuminate correctly refer to Testing link end hardware on page 8 2 6 6 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task
204. TP600 10 00 DLD2 The general features of a UC APL validated software image are identical to those of the FIPS 140 2 image with the same version number For example UC_APL PTP600 10 00 DLD2 is equivalent to PTP600 10 00 DLD2 apart from the ability of the UC APL image to operate in UC APL mode Indication of UC APL capability The UC APL capability is indicated by a distinctive graphic displayed at the top of the navigation bar in the web based interface as shown in Figure 27 Figure 27 Indication of UC APL capability Unified Capabilities Approved Product phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 1 65 Unified Capabilities Approved Product UC APL mode Chapter 1 Product description UC APL mode PTP 600 operates in the UC APL mode when all of the following are true e The PTP 600 is UC APL capable e The HTTPS TLS management interface is enabled e The HTTP management interface is disabled e AES encryption is enabled at the wireless interface e RADIUS authentication of web based users is enabled with PEAP MS CHAPv2 as the selected authentication method In the UC APL mode the Telnet interface is automatically disabled SNMP control of HTTP and Telnet is automatically disabled and identity based user accounts are automatically enabled Secure mode alarm The Secure mode alarm indicates that the unit is UC APL capable but has not been configured correctly for UC APL operation The Secure mode alarm appears as shown in Figure 26
205. User Guide Faxed Mequency operatio Meare onr anona e EAN se eare A A A ainda 1 46 Further reading on telecoms Circuits cc cece ceecccccesccceeeccneeecceesecceesceaeeceseseseeseeaeeseeaeneees 1 47 SYSlSM management aariaa a iaa 1 48 Management agent erorrarnar a EO 1 48 Wie SOLVER aage a a Ea 1 48 RADIUS authenticatioNreisresmannras arai E EN E E EE RE 1 50 SNMP aaa EER E aa Erara 1 51 Simple Network Time Protocol SN TP essre eessen eae OTEO E EREE ETERS 1 52 SNMPVS SOCI earan N E N NNT E E AA 1 52 System logging SySlOG vicsiisssssdstssdidiaiaxteaanisnseseaian E REEERE A 1 55 AEBS CENS Cozar ieoa EE i E E E E E A E 1 56 Critical security parameter S osen nenr annn A N T A E sea TO S 1 57 TOG WANE Fler bl ODN G5 gasps ce aaa sais esas sug E tase ee 1 57 Capacity Upgrades orison ER ERT ARTENE NETEN TRE 1 57 Sotware UPOTaAde i 5i isc 3 ac5 anane a EEEE OEE A A aA 1 57 Recovery MOGE cc sacississcans devacacsatanswanasaaiadsoavaneasasatonasnes eqedanieensadacas senda EERE ES 1 58 Further reading on system management 2 2 22 c320 55c03 sid r E neu ASI R EE ENRERE EE 1 59 PIPS 140 2 MOA Earias isai a EE EEEE N ae ena 1 60 FIPS 140 2 capa Wa ty ieres an AT OAE EEKEREN EE NEA 1 60 FIPS T40 2 O06 ccsa an a wens E EE E RN EN RNE ENEE ERA 1 62 Further reading on FIPS 140 2 ssssesseesseesssesseesssesssessseesserssersseesseeesreesseessersserssressrres 1 63 Unified Capabilities Approved Product UC APL MOd i ccssssisacevessaccssssava
206. Yes Hong Kong Yes India Yes Korea Yes Mexico Yes Norway Yes Singapore Yes Spain Yes Yes Taiwan Yes Thailand Yes UK Yes Yes 2 54 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Kit part numbers The following tables contain part numbers for all kit variants Table 24 PTP 25600 Table 25 PTP 45600 Table 26 PTP 48600 Table 27 PTP 49600 Table 28 PTP 54600 Table 29 PTP 58600 Table 30 PTP 59600 A NOTE Ordering components PTP 54600 and PTP 58600 units manufactured before the introduction of regional variants have the same part numbers as corresponding ETSI RoW units but are identified by an earlier part number suffix Table 24 PTP 25600 kit part numbers Integrated or Link or end Part connectorized complete number Integrated Link Complete WB2782 Integrated End Complete WB2784 Connectorized Link Complete WB2783 Connectorized End Complete WB2785 Table 25 PTP 45600 kit part numbers Integrated or Link or end Part connectorized complete number Integrated Link Complete WB3040 Integrated End Complete WB3041 Connectorized Link Complete WB3044 Connectorized End Complete WB3045 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 Ordering components Table 26 PTP 48600 kit part numbers Chapter 2 Planning considerations Integrated or Link or end Part connectorized complete number Integrated Link Complete WB3378 I
207. ZA Seale e Ee If this alarm is extant it is also displayed in the System Summary page 4 Ifthe alarm is Secure mode is configured but not active return to Step 7 HTTP and Telnet settings on page 6 31 and check that HTTP Access Enabled is set to No Secure Mode Alarm ESTA Sites items tiguee nia If this alarm is extant it is also displayed in the System Summary page Aa NOTE If it is necessary to exit from UC APL mode refer to Exiting FIPS 140 2 or UC APL mode on page 7 34 HTTPS key size warning If the HTTPS key size warning alarm is present in the Home page HTTPS Key Size Warning Less than 2048 bits no immediate action is necessary as this alarm does not block the transition to UC APL secure mode This alarm is produced because FIPS140 2 reference SP 800 131A recommends a TLS Private Key of at least 2048 bits but a 1024 bit key has been entered To clear this alarm generate a new TLS certificate with key length of at least 2048 bits then return to Step 2 TLS private key and public certificate on page 6 27 6 118 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Chapter 7 Operation This chapter provides instructions for operators of the PTP 600 web user interface The following topics are described in this chapter Web based management on page 7 2 Managing alarms and events on page 7 14 Managing spectrum on page 7 20 Managing security on pag
208. a Maximum Power Level dBm Allowed EIRP dBm Antenna Gain dBi Cable Loss dB Where Is Maximum Power the highest permissible setting of the Level dBm Maximum Power Level attribute in the Step 2 Wireless Configuration page Allowed EIRP the EIRP limit allowed by the regulations dBm Antenna Gain the gain of the chosen antenna dBi Cable Loss dB the loss of the RF cable connecting the ODU to the antenna As the PTP 54600 and PTP 58600 have an operating bandwidth from approximately 5 MHz to approximately 30 MHz then the maximum allowed EIRP depends on the operating bandwidth of the radio as shown in Table 13 2 18 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Planning for connectorized units Table 13 Normal EIRP limits with operating channel bandwidth Operating Allowed EIRP dBm Allowed EIRP dBm bandwidth MHz at 5 4 GHz at 5 8 GHz 5 24 30 10 27 33 15 28 8 34 8 30 30 36 The settings to be used for regions with the EIRP limits in Table 13 assuming short feeder cables are shown in Table 14 Table 14 Setting maximum transmit power to meet general EIRP limits Antenna Maximum Operating Set_Max_Transmit_Power size available bandwidth MHz parameter setting dBm antenna gain dBi 5 4 GHz 5 8 GHz 2ft dish 29 4 5 6 0 10 3 3 15 2 4 30 1 7 2 5ft dish 31 2 5 Not allowed 2 10 5 1 15
209. a minimal effect of the Top of the colored bar mean of means The arithmetic mean is the true power mean and not the mean of the values expressed in dBm Spectrum Management uses the 99 9 Percentile as the prime interference measurement All subsequent references to interference level refer to this percentile measurement 7 26 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Managing spectrum Spectrum management in fixed frequency mode When the link is operating in fixed frequency mode the Spectrum Management page uses two visual cues Figure 170 The main page title has the Fixed Frequency Mode suffix and the selected channels are identified by a red capital F Figure 170 Spectrum Management Fixed Frequency Mode page 40 50 60 70 Power dBm 80 90 100 40 50 60 70 Power dBm 80 90 100 Spectrum Management Fixed Frequency Mode Local Receive Channel Spectrum N N N N N N N N N Di a N wo pe oO D O N 0 i M m F Po o fia oO oO N N N N N N H Channel Center Frequency MHz Peer Receive Channel Spectrum Help N S N yN N N a nN N N t iD o he oO D N oO m p m o oO oO D D D D D D is i D D Channel Center Frequency MHz Attributes O PE Atributes vate funis Spectrum Management Page Refresh Period soo Seconds Interference Threshold fas dBm Local Channel 8 State ACTIVE CHANNEL Mean 92 dBm 99 9 91 dB
210. a throughput tables Chapter 4 Reference information Table 91 Throughput for PTP 600 Full link symmetry 1 1 link optimization IP continued Modulation 10 MHz 5 MHz Mode Tx Rx Both Tx Rx Both 256QAM 0 81 50 11 50 11 100 21 24 22 24 22 48 43 dual 64QAM 0 92 dual 42 22 42 22 84 43 20 40 20 40 40 80 64QAM 0 75 dual 34 50 34 50 69 00 16 67 16 67 33 34 16QAM 0 87 dual 26 84 26 84 53 68 12 97 12 97 25 94 16QAM 0 63 dual 19 29 19 29 38 59 9 32 9 32 18 65 256QAM 0 81 25 05 25 05 50 11 12 11 12 11 24 21 single 64QAM 0 92 21 11 21 11 42 21 10 20 10 20 20 40 single 64QAM 0 75 17 25 17 25 34 50 8 34 8 34 16 67 single 16QAM 0 87 13 42 13 42 26 84 6 48 6 48 12 97 single 16QAM 0 63 9 65 9 65 19 29 4 66 4 66 9 32 single QPSK 0 87 single 6 71 6 71 13 42 3 24 3 24 6 48 QPSK 0 63 single 4 82 4 82 9 64 2 33 2 33 4 66 BPSK 0 63 single 2 41 2 41 4 82 1 16 1 16 2 33 4 76 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Data throughput tables Table 92 Throughput for PTP 600 Full link symmetry 1 1 link optimization TDM Modulation 30 MHz 20 MHz 15 MHz Mode Tx Rx Both Tx Rx Both Tx Rx Both 256QAM 0 81 140 87 140 87 281 74 96 01 96 01 192 02 72 92 72 92 145 83 dual 64QAM 0
211. abled by license key Task 4 Upgrading software version on page 6 17 describes how to ensure that the installed software version is UC APL validated Task 5 Configuring security on page 6 21 describes how to configure the PTP 600 in accordance with the network operator s security policy Exiting FIPS 140 2 or UC APL mode on page 7 34 describes how to disable UC APL operation phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 1 67 Unified Capabilities Approved Product UC APL mode Chapter 1 Product description 1 68 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Chapter 2 Planning considerations This chapter provides information to help the user to plan a PTP 600 link The following topics are described in this chapter Regulatory planning on page 2 2 describes how to plan PTP 600 links to conform to the regulatory restrictions that apply in the country of operation Site planning on page 2 6 describes factors to be considered when choosing sites for the ODU PIDU and PTP SYNC unit if installed Link planning on page 2 12 describes factors to be taken into account when planning links such as range path loss and throughput Introduces the PTP LINKPlanner Planning for connectorized units on page 2 17 describes factors to be taken into account when planning to use connectorized ODUs with external antennas in PTP 600 links Grounding and lightning protection on page 2 21 describes the grounding and lightning protection requirement
212. ables on page 4 74 Receive Data Rate The data rate in the receive direction expressed in Mbps and presented as max mean min and latest in an histogram format The max min and latest are true instantaneous measurements the mean is the mean of a set of one second means Expected data rates can be found in Data throughput tables on page 4 74 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 7 37 Managing performance Chapter 7 Operation Attribute Meaning Aggregate Data The sum of the data rate in the directions expressed in Mbps and Rate presented as max mean min and latest in an histogram format The max min and latest are true instantaneous measurements the mean is the mean of a set of one second means Expected data rates can be found in Data throughput tables on page 4 74 Histogram The time over which the system histograms were collected Measurement Period Signal Strength Ratio is an aid to debugging a link If it has a large positive or negative value then investigate the following potential problems e An antenna coaxial lead may be disconnected e When spatial diversity is employed the antenna with the lower value may be pointing in the wrong direction e When a dual polar antenna is deployed the antenna may be directed using a side lobe rather than the main lobe When there is a reflection from water on the link and spatial diversity is employed then one expects large slow swings in Signa
213. above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 The origin of this software must not be misrepresented you must not claim that you wrote the original software If you use this software in a product an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required 3 Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original software 4 The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Julian Seward jseward bzip org USB library functions Atmel Corporation 2325 Orchard Parkway San Jose Ca 95131 Copyright c 2004 Atmel phn 2512_007v000 Dec
214. ad The Generate Downloadable Diagnostics page is displayed Generate Downloadable Diagnostics Diagnostics Selector Generate Diagnostics Use the drop down list to select a diagnostic type to download Select Generate Diagnostics The Generate Downloadable Diagnostics page is redisplayed with the name of the generated CSV file 4 Click on the CSV file name and select Save File Save the CSV file to the hard drive of the local computer 5 Open the CSV file in MS Excel and use it to generate reports and diagrams The CSV file contains at most 5784 entries recorded over a 32 day period 3600 entries recorded in the last hour 1440 entries recorded in the previous 24 hours 744 entries recorded in the previous 31 days 7 46 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Managing performance Diagnostics calculated over time The System Status page Figure 162 contains six diagnostic attributes that are calculated over time and presented as arrays of four elements Figure 179 These attributes are defined in Table 132 Figure 179 Diagnostic attributes calculated over time System Status page Max Mean Min Latest Vet Transmit Power 6 0 dBm Receive Power 55 8 56 0 56 1 56 1 dBm Vector Error 18 8 264 29 0 29 0 dB Link Loss 1081 108 0 107 8 1081 dB Transmit Data Rate 16 57 1654 1 96 16 57 Mbps Receive Data Rate 16 57 1260 063 16 57 Mbps The System Statistics page
215. aeeeeaeeeuaseeuaseeuaseeuaeeauaseeuaeeauanss 1 GONETal informatio insiren n a a a a E a 2 Version information ssicsreriarrortcrrs ur e ER anny cag E EEEa E O E EONS 2 Contacting Cambium Networksy szss2cissasedesvarsesesnaas Secsndos a EE a E E RTE 2 PU POSO E E ene E E EE E E E E EEA 3 Problems and Warranty enron E E A E N NN 4 SOCUMILY Advies ITa 6 Warnings cautions and NOLES ssiaccisssasese Sacasxsdatincudands ousiasdetnancaacea EEEE ti Caring for the environment ssnin a a E EE AEA AAAA 8 Chapter 1 Product description cccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeaseaeeeaeeauaeeauaeeaueneneaeees 1 1 Overview OF the PEP 600r E aE R R aR 1 2 PULPOSE orena EO a 1 2 Key features erore N A aS 1 2 Typicalbldeploym eMis a a E EES EE eee 1 3 OV SECM COMPOME NUS ccna arn N A TA ETO A 1 4 PLOGUCE VANIADES ssssesssnnarinn eiai E ER REENE A AE EAOa 1 5 Outdoor unit ODU uere nrinn r E N O A 1 7 ODU dESCrPHU ON ononon nuen a A E E E O O 1 7 ODU interfatE Sersan a E EER E E A E E 1 8 Connectorized ODU antenna IMLerbaCeS sesivscexsnensdecvsevteossesdohays Ea E EEE t 1 9 Motnting brackets svsisssessscisardsacsssagascdeidansesadaaasaed E REAA EEEE EEN EASA 1 9 Network CONME CHOM sann R a E 1 10 Further reading on the ODU noaee e N O E 1 11 Powered indoor unit PIDU siinses ianiai atrain anaa E E E Eai 1 12 PIDU deScriP ON na A EE A AE E O ENET E ETEA 1 12 PIDU Wt GThaCeS wes sicsaitanceatoeavaeaovsawossuutan canwunsausau E E E RREN E EEE E
216. age the page contains the following additional information e All channels marked with a no entry symbol with their associated statistics colored black are the prohibited channels These channels are never used to host the wireless link but CAC measurements are still taken so that adjacent channel biases can be calculated correctly and so the user can see if other equipment is in use Figure 171 Spectrum Management page with radar avoidance master Spectrum Management Radar Avoidance Local Channel 1 State ACTIVE CHANNEL Mean 90 dBm 99 9 90 dBm Peak 89 dBm Local Receive Channel Spectrum 40 50 5742 5752 5762 5772 5782 92 5802 5812 5822 5832 fid D enter Frequency MHz O Channel Peer Receive Channel Spectrum Active Channel History Help 40 50 J D Power dBm o o 100 N N N N N N N N N N a wo wo pe oO D O N oO m r im tf m o oO faa oO ip N N kgj N Kg N Channel Center Frequency MHz Attributes O Ot vawe funis Spectrum Management Page Refresh Period soo Seconds Interference Threshold s5 dBm Channel Bandwidth 30 MHZ Submit configuration changes Reset form phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Managing spectrum Figure 172 Spectrum Management page with radar avoidance slave
217. age 8 3 e Ethernet LED is off on page 8 4 e Ethernet LED blinks irregularly on page 8 5 for example there is a short blink followed by a long blink e Power LED is on Ethernet LED blinks randomly on page 8 5 If a fault is suspected in the ODU PIDU drop cable perform Test resistance in the ODU cable on page 8 8 8 2 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Testing link end hardware Power LED is off Meaning Either the PIDU is not receiving power from the AC DC outlet or there is a wiring fault in the ODU cable Action Remove the ODU cable from the PIDU and observe the effect on the Power LED e Ifthe Power LED does not illuminate confirm that the mains power supply is working for example check the plug and fuse if fitted If the power supply is working report a suspected PIDU fault to Cambium e Ifthe Power LED does illuminate perform Test resistance in the ODU cable on page 8 8 Power LED is blinking Meaning There is a short circuit in the ODU cable Action Remove the ODU cable from the PIDU Check that pins 4 amp 5 and 7 amp 8 are not crossed with pins 1 amp 2 and 3 amp 6 Check that the resistance between pins 1 amp 8 is greater than 100K ohms If either check fails replace or repair the ODU cable Ethernet LED did not blink 10 times Meaning There is an overloaded or short circuit in the power supply to the LPU and ODU Action 1 Remove the ODU cable from the PIDU Examine it for sign
218. age is installed during manufacture of the ODU and cannot be upgraded by operators For detailed instructions on using the recovery mode see Using recovery mode on page 7 53 Further reading on system management For more information on system management refer to the following e Security planning on page 2 41 describes how to plan for PTP 600 links to operate in secure modes including SNMP and SNMPv3 e Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment describes all configuration and alignment tasks that are performed when a PTP 600 link is deployed e Chapter 7 Operation provides instructions for operators of the PTP 600 web user interface phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 1 59 FIPS 140 FIPS 140 2 mode 2 mode Chapter 1 Product description This section describes the optional FIPS 140 2 cryptographic mode of operation PTP 600 provides an optional secure cryptographic mode of operation validated to Level 2 of Federal Information Processing Standards Publication 140 2 FIPS 140 2 capability A PTP 600 unit is capable of operating in the FIPS 140 2 mode when all of the following are true Hardware security The hardware security of the ODU is compatible with operation in the FIPS 140 2 mode The ODU license key has AES encryption enabled The ODU license key has FIPS operation enabled The ODU software image is validated for FIPS operation The ODU has compatible hardware security if the part number suffix on the exter
219. agement Web Local User Accounts and check that the current user s role is Security Officer 6 114 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Configuring for UC APL applications Perform Task 3 Installing license keys on page 6 14 and ensure that the installed license key meets all requirements including UC APL compatibility Check that Security Level is UC APL Check that Encryption Algorithm is AES If necessary generate and enter a new license key with the above settings Perform Task 4 Upgrading software version on page 6 17 and ensure that the installed software version is prefixed UC_APL If necessary upgrade to the latest UC APL validated image To confirm that the above steps have been completed check that the UC APL Validated logo is displayed in the Navigation Bar Unified Capabilities Approved Product Configuration procedures for UC APL To activate UC APL secure mode proceed as follows 1 Perform Using the Security Wizard on page 6 24 taking care to complete the following additional settings In Step 3 set Require Acknowledgement of Notices to Yes In Step 3 enter the standard security banner text defined for U S Government Information Systems The text reproduced in Security banner text for UC APL on page 6 117 is valid at the date of publication of this User Guide In Step 4 set Display Login Information to Yes Perform Configuring web based manage
220. agments Ethernet Rx Jabbers Ethernet Rx 64 Bytes Ethernet Rx 65 To 127 Bytes Ethernet Rx 128 To 255 Bytes Ethernet Rx 256 To 511 Bytes Ethernet Rx 512 To 1023 Bytes Ethernet Rx 1024 To Max Bytes Ethernet Tx Drops Ethernet Tx Packets Ethernet Tx Broadcasts Ethernet Tx Multicasts Ethernet Tx Collisions Ethernet Tx 64 Bytes Ethernet Tx 65 To 127 Bytes Ethernet Tx 128 To 255 Bytes Ethernet Tx 256 To 511 Bytes Ethernet Tx 512 To 1023 Bytes Ethernet Tx 1024 To Max Bytes Ethernet Tx Fifo Drops Ethernet Rx Pause Frames Ethernet Tx Pause Frames Ethernet Rx Classified Drops Ethernet Rx Frames Q0 Ethernet Rx Frames 1 Ethernet Rx Frames Q2 Ethernet Rx Frames Q3 Ethernet Rx Frames Q4 Ethernet Rx Frames Q5 Ethernet Rx Frames Q6 Ethernet Rx Frames Q7 Ethernet Tx Frames Q0 Ethernet Tx Frames 1 Ethernet Tx Frames Q2 Ethernet Tx Frames Q3 Ethernet Tx Frames Q4 Ethernet Tx Frames Q5 Ethernet Tx Frames Q6 Ethernet Tx Frames Q7 Internal Stack Packets To Internal Stack Packets From Internal Stack Packets Ignored By Internal Stack Detailed Counters Page Refresh Period 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 803 803 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 822 822 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 655 655 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
221. ail address that will be accepted by your SMTP Server SMTP Destination Email Address Send SMTP Test Email The email address to which the PTP 600 Series will send the alert messages Generate and send an email in order to test the SMTP settings The tick box will self clear when Submit is selected phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 9 Configuring syslog Task 9 Configuring syslog This task is only performed when system logging is required For more information on syslog refer to Managing event notification messages on page 7 19 Configuring system logging syslog Only users with Security Officer role are permitted to configure the syslog client To configure system logging select menu option Management Syslog Syslog configuration The Syslog Configuration page is displayed Figure 143 Update the attributes as required Table 122 and select Submit Updated Configuration Aa NOTE To record Coordinated Universal Time UTC time in syslog messages use the Time Configuration page to set Time Zone to GMT 00 00 and Daylight Saving to Disabled For more information see Setting the real time clock on page 6 100 Figure 143 Syslog Configuration page Syslog Configuration Syslog State O Disabled Enabled Syslog Client Disabled Enabled Syslog Client Port 514 Syslog Server 1 Syslog Server IP Address 0 fo fo fo Syslog Server Port
222. ailable in ATEX Hazloc variants for operation in selected regions in locations where gas hazards exist as defined by Hazloc USA and ATEX Europe OOBM The PTP 54600 and PTP 58600 are available in out of band management variants in selected regions To identify the available combinations of the above variants refer to PTP 600 kits on page 2 53 Table 1 PTP 600 Series frequency variants Variant Region Frequency Channel Channel Coverage Bandwidth Raster MHz MHz MHz PTP 25600 FCC BRS EBS Post 2496 2568 5 10 15 30 5 5 Transition Band 2572 2614 5 10 15 30 6 2618 2690 5 10 15 30 5 5 PTP 45600 US Federal 4404 4596 5 10 15 20 6 4404 4596 30 10 NTIA 4400 4600 10 20 6 PTP 48600 US Federal 4710 4940 5 10 15 20 5 phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 1 5 Overview of the PTP 600 Chapter 1 Product description Variant Region Frequency Channel Channel Coverage Bandwidth Raster MHz MHz MHz US Federal Extended 4710 5000 5 10 15 20 5 NTIA 4700 4940 10 20 5 PTP 49600 USA Canada Public Safety 4940 4990 5 10 20 5 UK License Required 4940 4990 5 10 20 5 Hong Kong Public Safety 4900 4950 5 10 20 5 EU Broadband Disaster 4900 4950 5 10 20 5 Recovery PTP 54600 ETSI 5 GHz Band B 5470 5725 5 10 15 6 FCC UNII Band 5470 5725 30 10 PTP 58600 ETSI 5 GHz Band C 5725 5850 5 10 15 6 FCC ISM Band
223. ailable spectrum in 15 MHz channel bandwidth RC 23 4 16 Figure 47 PTP 45600 available spectrum in 10 MHz channel bandwidth RC 23 4 16 Figure 48 PTP 45600 available spectrum in 5 MHz channel bandwidth RC 23 4 17 Figure 49 PTP 45600 available spectrum in 30 MHz channel bandwidth RC 24 4 18 Figure 50 PTP 45600 available spectrum in 20 MHz channel bandwidth RC 24 4 18 Figure 51 PTP 45600 available spectrum in 10 MHz channel bandwidth RC 24 4 18 Figure 52 PTP 48600 available spectrum in 20 MHz channel bandwidth cecccceeeeeeeees 4 19 Figure 53 PTP 48600 available spectrum in 15 MHz channel bandwidth ceecceeeeeeeeeee 4 20 Figure 54 PTP 48600 available spectrum in the 10 MHz channel bandwidth eee 4 20 Figure 55 PTP 48600 available spectrum in 5 MHz channel bandwidth cc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 21 Figure 56 PTP 48600 available spectrum in the 20 MHz channel bandwidth RC 24 4 21 Figure 57 PTP 48600 available spectrum in 10 MHz channel bandwidth RC 24 4 21 Figure 58 PTP 49600 available spectrum in 20 MHz channel bandwidth ceeeceeeeeeeeeee 4 22 Figure 59 PTP 49600 available spectrum in the 10 MHz channel bandwidth eee 4 22 Figure 60 PTP 49600 available spectrum in the 5 MHz channel bandwidth eee 4 22 Figure 61 PTP 54600 available spectrum in 30 MHz channel bandwidth 0 cc cecccceeeeeeeeeee 4 23 Figur
224. ain the minimum separation distances from all persons The minimum separation distances for each frequency variant are specified in Calculated distances and power compliance margins on page 4 54 Important regulatory information The PTP 600 product is certified as an unlicensed device in frequency bands where it is not allowed to cause interference to licensed services called primary users of the bands Radar avoidance In countries where radar systems are the primary band users the regulators have mandated special requirements to protect these systems from interference caused by unlicensed devices Unlicensed devices must detect and avoid co channel operation with radar systems The PTP 600 provides detect and avoid functionality for countries and frequency bands requiring protection for radar systems Installers and users must meet all local regulatory requirements for radar detection To meet these requirements users must set the correct license key and region code during commissioning of the the PTP 600 If this is not done installers and users may be liable to civil and criminal penalties Contact the Cambium helpdesk if more guidance is required phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 II Safety and regulatory information USA and Canada specific information The USA Federal Communications Commission FCC has asked manufacturers to implement special features to prevent interference to weather radar systems that operate in the band
225. al diversity proceed as follows 1 Connect the horizontal polarization antenna to the ODU disconnect the vertical polarization antenna then perform Aligning antennas on page 6 86 Connect the vertical polarization antenna to the ODU disconnect the horizontal polarization antenna then perform Aligning antennas on page 6 86 Re connect the horizontal polarization antennas The received signal level should increase Weatherproof the antenna connections at the H and V interfaces of the ODUs as described in Mounting and connecting antenna on page 5 10 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 87 Task 11 Aligning antennas Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Monitoring received signal level 6 88 The goal of antenna alignment is to find the center of the main beam This is done by adjusting the antennas while monitoring the receive signal level Choose one of two methods for monitoring receive signal level e Method 1 ODU installation tones on page 6 88 e Method 2 graphical install on page 6 90 Method 1 ODU installation tones This is the first of two methods that may be used to monitor receive signal level during antenna alignment The ODU emits audible tones during installation to assist with alignment The pitch of the alignment tone is proportional to the received power of the wireless signals Adjust the alignment of the unit in both azimuth and elevation until the highest pitch tone is achieved ANOTE W
226. al components listed in Table 33 Table 33 Additional inventory for connectorized ODUs Item Notes Antenna One required per link end or two per link end for spatial diversity Not supplied by Cambium For connectorized units operating in the USA or Canada choose external antennas from those listed in FCC and IC approved antennas on page 2 64 RF cable For connecting the ODU to the antenna May be cable of type LMR100 LMR200 LMR300 LMR400 or LMR600 LMR400 is supplied by Cambium 50 Ohm Braided Coaxial Cable 75 meter Cambium part number 30010194001 50 Ohm Braided Coaxial Cable 500 meter Cambium part number 30010195001 N type male connectors i Self amalgamating and PVC tape For connecting the RF cables to the ODU Two connectors required per ODU Use weatherproof connectors preferably ones that are supplied with adhesive lined heat shrink sleeves that are fitted over the cable connector interface RF CONNECTOR N MALE STRAIGHT FOR CNT 400 CABLE Cambium part number 09010091001 Aa NOTE For the antenna end of the RF cable refer to the antenna manufacturer s instructions To weatherproof the RF connectors Cable grounding kits One kit is required per antenna cable grounding point Refer to Table 32 for specifications and part numbers Lightning arrestor For protecting the antenna cable at building entry when the ODU is mounted indoors O
227. al request RADIUS Server Time in seconds the PTP 600 will wait for a response from a Timeout RADIUS server Authentication Method used by RADIUS to authenticate users Method PEAP MS CHAPv2 provides a secure tunnel using TLS and is approved for FIPS 140 2 Authentication Server 1 and 2 RADIUS Server Status The status of the RADIUS server This contains the time of the last test and an indication of success or failure If the Authentication Server attributes are incorrect the displayed status is server config not valid RADIUS Server IP Address IP address of the RADIUS server RADIUS Server Authentication Port Network port used by RADIUS server for authentication services RADIUS Server Shared Secret Shared secret used in RADIUS server communications May contain alphabetic numeric special characters or spaces but not extended unicode characters The maximum length is 127 characters RADIUS Server Shared Secret Confirm Shared secret confirmation phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 6 Configuring wireless and telecoms interfaces Task 6 Configuring wireless and telecoms interfaces The wireless and telecoms interfaces are configured using the installation wizard The installation wizard may also be used to re configure the Ethernet interface if required The installation wizard consists of the following procedures Starting ins
228. ality You acknowledge that all Software and Documentation contain valuable proprietary information and trade secrets and that unauthorized or improper use of the Software and Documentation will result in irreparable harm to Cambium for which monetary damages would be inadequate and for which Cambium will be entitled to immediate injunctive relief If applicable you will limit access to the Software and Documentation to those of your employees and agents who need to use the Software and Documentation for your internal business purposes and you will take appropriate action with those employees and agents to preserve the confidentiality of the Software and Documentation using the same degree of care to avoid unauthorized or improper disclosure as you use for the protection of your own proprietary software but in no event less than reasonable care You have no obligation to preserve the confidentiality of any proprietary information that i was in the public domain at the time of disclosure ii entered the public domain through no fault of yours iii was given to you free of any obligation to keep it confidential iv is independently developed by you or v is disclosed as required by law provided that you notify Cambium prior to such disclosure and provide Cambium with a reasonable opportunity to respond 3 4 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Cambium Networks end user license agreement Right to use Cambium s name E
229. an be reached from the data port PIDU at the local unit only If this is selected ensure that the same VLAN Management VID is configured at both ends of the link Only displayed when Use VLAN for Management Interfaces is enabled For more information see In band local Management on page 1 40 Table 101 Management port attributes Attribute Meaning Management Only displayed when Management Mode is set to Network Access Out of Band Enabled Yes means that the local out of band interface can be used to access the remote management network No means that the local management agent can still be accessed from the remote management network and the local Out of Band interface Management Port Auto Negotiation Enabled means that configuration of the out of band management Ethernet interface is automatically negotiated This is the default setting Disabled means that configuration is forced Use the same setting for both ends of the link phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 2 Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces Attribute Meaning Management Port Auto Neg Advertisement Only displayed when Management Port Auto Negotiation is set to Enabled Select the data rate that the auto negotiation mechanism will advertise as available on the the out of band management Ethernet interface Use the same setting for both ends of the link
230. annel bandwidth BOE per channel bandwidth Modulation mode dBm 5 10 20 All 5 10 20 MHz MHz MHz bands MHz MHz MHz BPSK 0 63 single 98 6 95 5 91 9 24 166 6 163 5 159 9 QPSK 0 63 single 91 4 88 8 85 7 24 159 4 156 8 153 7 QPSK 0 87 single 87 9 85 2 81 9 24 155 9 153 2 149 9 16QAM 0 63 single 85 4 82 7 79 6 24 153 4 150 7 147 6 16QAM 0 63 dual 81 9 79 5 76 5 24 149 9 147 5 144 5 16QAM 0 87 single 81 0 78 2 75 5 24 149 0 146 2 143 5 16QAM 0 87 dual 77 8 75 4 72 5 24 145 8 143 4 140 5 64QAM 0 75 single 77 9 75 2 72 6 23 144 9 142 2 139 6 64QAM 0 75 dual 75 0 72 6 69 3 23 142 0 139 6 136 3 64QAM 0 92 single 76 5 73 9 70 7 21 141 5 138 9 135 7 64QAM 0 92 dual 73 3 71 0 67 2 21 138 3 136 0 132 2 256QAM 0 81 single 75 1 72 3 69 3 20 139 1 136 3 133 3 256QAM 0 81 dual 71 7 69 3 65 4 20 135 7 133 3 129 4 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 39 Wireless specifications Chapter 4 Reference information Table 69 PTP 54600 IP mode threshold power and link loss System threshold dBm tes Maximum link loss dB Modulation per channel bandwidth dBm per channel bandwidth mode 5 10 15 30 All 5 10 15 30 MHz MHz MHz MHz bands MHz MHz MHz MHz BPSK 0 63 single 98 2 94 6 92 3 88 9 25 169 2 165 6 163 3 159 9 QPSK 0 63 single 93 0 90 0 88 5 82 9 24 163 0 160 0 158 5 152 9 QPSK 0 87 single 90 2 86 7 85 3 80 1 23 159 2 155 7 154 3 149 1 16QAM 0 63
231. any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the US FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with these instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment on and off the user is encouraged to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Increase the separation between the affected equipment and the unit e Connect the affected equipment to a power outlet on a different circuit from that which the receiver is connected to e Consult the dealer and or experienced radio TV technician for help phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Notifications Industry Canada IC This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada RSS GEN issue 3 7 1 3 Licence Exempt Radio Apparatus This device complies with Industry Canada license exempt RSS standard s Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 th
232. ap 2 Configuration SNMP Trap IP Address SNMP Trap Port Number SNMP Trap User Account lt lt Back Confirm SNMP Configuration tributes value nits Enabled v3 Web based MAC Address 161 Auth Priv MDS DES Auth Priv MDS DES admin System Administrator readonly Read Only Cold Start Wireless Link Up Down DFS Channel Change DFS Impulse Interference Enabled Diagnostic Alarms Authentication Failure Data Port Up Down Telecoms Channel Up Down 10 130 1 44 162 Not Set 0 0 0 0 162 Not Set phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 Task 7 Setting up SNMP agent 6 71 Task 7 Setting up SNMP agent Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Configuring SNMPv1 2c agent 6 72 Perform this task to enable the PTP 600 to generate Simple Network Management Protocol version 1 or 2c SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c traps Start SNMP wizard To start the SNMP wizard select menu option Management SNMP The Current SNMP Summary page is displayed Figure 131 Review the summary If any updates are required select Continue to SNMP Wizard Step 1 SNMP Configuration for SNMPv1 2c When the Step 1 SNMP Configuration page is displayed set SNMP State to Enabled and set SNMP Version to v1 2c The page is redisplayed with SNMPv1 2c attributes Figure 138 Update the attributes Table 118 and select Next Figure 138 Step 1 SNMP Configuration page for SNMPv1 2c Step 1 SNMP Configuration SNMP Minim
233. apter 4 Reference information Table 63 PTP 45600 IP mode threshold power and link loss Outpu System threshold dBm t Maximum link loss dB per channel bandwidth power per channel bandwidth Modulation dBm mode 30 5 10 15 20 MH All 5 10 15 20 30 MHz MHz MHz MHz gt bands MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz BPSK 0 63 single 96 6 93 7 92 0 90 4 88 0 27 166 6 163 7 162 0 160 4 158 0 QPSK 0 63 single 92 0 91 4 89 3 88 5 85 8 27 160 5 159 9 159 3 158 5 155 8 QPSK 0 87 single 90 0 87 6 85 7 84 9 82 2 27 160 0 157 6 155 7 154 9 152 2 16QAM 0 63 single 88 3 85 5 83 3 82 5 80 1 27 158 3 155 5 153 3 152 5 150 1 16QAM 0 63 dual 85 5 81 9 79 5 78 9 77 1 27 155 5 151 9 149 5 148 9 147 1 16QAM 0 87 single 84 6 80 7 78 6 77 8 75 5 27 154 6 150 7 148 6 147 8 145 5 16QAM 0 87 dual 81 3 77 3 75 0 74 3 72 3 27 151 3 147 3 145 0 144 3 142 3 64QAM 0 75 single 81 2 77 6 75 5 74 7 72 4 25 149 2 145 6 143 5 142 7 140 4 64QAM 0 75 dual 78 2 74 2 71 8 71 1 69 3 25 146 2 142 2 139 8 139 1 137 3 64QAM 0 92 single 76 8 73 1 71 3 70 0 67 7 25 144 8 141 1 139 3 138 0 135 7 64QAM 0 92 dual 73 2 69 4 67 6 66 9 65 0 25 141 2 137 4 135 6 134 9 133 0 256QAM 0 81 65 3 25 133 2 single Not supported Not
234. ar avoidance e Link planning on page 2 12 describes factors to be taken into account when planning links such as range path loss and data throughput and introduces PTP LINKPlanner e Wireless specifications on page 4 9 contains specifications of the PTP 600 wireless interface such as RF bands channel width spectrum settings maximum power and link loss e Compliance with safety standards on page 4 51 lists the safety specifications against which the PTP 600 has been tested and describes how to keep RF exposure within safe limits e Compliance with radio regulations on page 4 58 describes how the PTP 600 complies with the radio regulations that are in force in various countries e Notifications on page 4 67 contains notifications of compliance with the radio regulations that are in force in various regions e Data throughput tables on page 4 74 contains tables and graphs to support calculation of the data rate capacity that can be provided by PTP 600 configurations phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Wireless operation For information on configuring and operating the wireless link refer to the following e Task 6 Configuring wireless and telecoms interfaces on page 6 45 describes how to configure the wireless interface using the installation wizard e Comparing actual to predicted performance on page 6 95 describes how to check that a newly installed link is achieving predicted levels of performance e
235. ar to that described in Installing and grounding the drop cable at building entry on page 5 27 except that the short drop cable is run to the site of the OOBM network terminating equipment Drop cable to OOBM link Management network cable O0 Ground cable Lightning Protection Unit LPU OOBM network terminating equipment OOBM drop cable from ODU DN OOBM network A NOTE If it is necessary to disconnect the OOBM cable from the ODU refer to Disconnecting an RJ45 and gland from a unit on page 5 22 5 56 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Installing a fiber interface Installing a fiber interface Perform this task to install an optional fiber optic interface Optical safety precautions A WARNING The kit contains a Class 1 Laser product When installing this product observe the safety precautions in this section Do not look into the laser beam Do not look into the source of the laser beam fiber receptacle directly or through a fiber system as this is highly likely to damage vision Remove the power supply Always remove power from the system before the fiber optic connection is made or unmade Cap the connector When installing the Fiber interface take either of the following precautions e Cap the fiber connector or e Mate the connector to an appropriate equipment connector Label the indoor end Ensure that the indoor end of the fiber is appropriately labeled
236. aring for OOBM installation on page 5 55 e Installing OOBM on page 5 55 Preparing for OOBM installation Check that the correct components are available as described in Ordering components on page 2 53 To prevent damage to the ODU while making or breaking the connections ensure that power is removed from the system at the PIDU Aa NOTE The maximum permitted lengths of OOBM cables are specified in Maximum cable lengths on page 2 7 Installing OOBM To install an OOBM interface proceed as follows 1 Mount the top LPU for the OOBM interface close to the ODU using the U bolt bracket supplied with the PTP LPU kit Drop cable to PIDU Drop cable to OOBM link PTP 600 ground cable Top LPU direct ground cable if mandated by regulations phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 5 55 Installing an OOBM interface Chapter 5 Installation 2 Connect and ground the top LPU for OOBM The procedure is similar to that described in Connecting and grounding the ODU and top LPU on page 5 8 with the following differences Connect the OOBM back to back cable to the AUX port of the ODU Connect a ground cable from the ODU to the OOBM top LPU If mandated by local regulations then connect a ground cable from the OOBM top LPU to the grounding system 3 Install the main drop cable for OOBM by following the procedure described in Installing the drop cable and bottom LPU on page 5 16 4 Install the bottom LPU for OOBM The procedure is simil
237. arning 4 sys software Software upgraded from software version _upgrade to software version SC software version 25600 45600 48600 49600 54600 58600 59600 digit digit digit digit FIPS UCAPL SC local6 22 warning 4 telnet idle local6 22 info 6 telnet login Telnet user user name SC SP from IP address SC SP local6 22 warning 4 telnet_login failed port port number SC local6 22 info 6 telnet logout local6 22 info 6 tftp complete TFTP software upgrade finished SC local6 22 info 6 tftp failure TFTP software upgrade failed reason reason SC local6 22 info 6 tftp start TFTP software upgrade started SC NTP 12 info 6 time_auth SNTP authentication succeeded at IP address IP address SC SP port number port SC NTP 12 warning 4 time auth failed SNTP authentication failed at IP address IP address SC SP port number port SC NTP 12 warning 4 time conn failed SNTP connection failed at IP address IP address SC SP port number port SC SP reason reason SC 4 50 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Compliance with safety standards Compliance with safety standards This section lists the safety specifications against which the PTP 600 has been tested and certified It also describes how to keep RF exposure within safe limits Electrical safety compliance The PTP 600 hardware has been tested for complianc
238. ase Passphrase must be reentered to confirm it has not been mis Confirm keyed Step 5 SNMP trap configuration for SNMPv3 The Step 5 SNMP Trap Configuration page is displayed Figure 136 Update the attributes Table 117 and select Next Figure 136 Step 5 SNMP Trap Configuration page for SNMPv3 Step 5 SNMP Trap Configuration Attributes Value CT Cold Start M Wireless Link Up Down DFS Channel Change DFS Impulse Interference SNMP Enabled Traps Enabled Diagnostic Alarms Authentication Failure d Data Port Up Down F Telecoms Channel Up Down Trap 1 Configuration SNMP Trap IP Address ho 130 h la SNMP Trap Port Number 162 SNMP Trap User Account Not Set v Trap 2 Configuration SNMP Trap IP Address 0 o o jo SNMP Trap Port Number 162 SNMP Trap User Account Not Set v lt lt Back Hext gt gt phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 69 Task 7 Setting up SNMP agent Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Table 117 Step 5 SNMP Trap Configuration attributes for SNMPv3 Attribute Meaning SNMP Enabled Traps Select the events that will generate SNMP traps SNMP Trap IP Address 1 SNMP Trap Port Number 1 The IP address of the first SNMP server trap receiver This will normally be the network management system but it may be a separate trap receiver Enter zeros to disable logging on the first SNMP server The server
239. asic requirements The following basic protection requirements must be implemented e The equipment ODU or GPS receiver for PTP SYNC must be in Zone B see Lightning protection zones on page 2 22 e A lightning protection unit must be installed close to the ODU the top LPU The distance between the ODU and top LPU should be kept to a minimum e The drop cable length between the ODU and top LPU must not exceed 600 mm e The ODU and top LPU must be bonded in the following ways top LPU to ODU ODU to grounding system e An LPU must be installed within 600 mm 24 in of the point at which the drop cable enters the building or equipment room e The drop cable must not be laid alongside a lightning air terminal e The drop cable shield must be bonded to the grounding system in order to prevent lightning creating a potential between the structure and cable which could cause arcing resulting in fire risk and damage to equipment e The drop cable shield must be grounded at the building entry point e All grounding cables must be a minimum size of 10 mm csa 8AWG preferably 16 mm csa 6AWG or 25 mm csa 4AWG Grounding cable requirements When routing fastening and connecting grounding cables the following requirements must be implemented e Grounding conductors must be run as short straight and smoothly as possible with the fewest possible number of bends and curves e Grounding cables must not be installed with
240. aster and Slave sites At each site connect the OOBM drop cable to a router port switch port or other network equipment in the management network The OOBM drop cable was prepared for this purpose in Installing OOBM on page 5 55 Check that the Master and Slave units are reachable from the network management system by opening the web interface to the management agents or by requesting ICMP echo response packets using the Ping application The network management system will normally be geographically remote from the sites so it may be necessary to request that this action is completed by co workers at the management center Alternatively it may be possible to use remote login to the management system At each site connect the PIDU LAN ports to a router port switch port or other network equipment in the customer data network using the Cat5e cable that was prepared for this purpose in Preparing the PIDU to LAN cable on page 5 31 Check the data network for correct operation across the wireless link This may be by requesting ICMP echo response packets between hosts in the connected network segments or by some more structured use of network testing tools Select menu option Home or Status and check that the Wireless Link Status is Up on both units If it is not Up refer to Managing alarms and events on page 7 14 Setting the real time clock 6 100 Perform this task to set the real time clock of the PTP 600 Setting the
241. at 4 Characters That must change every time a password is updated Must Change Password Reuse Permitted means that a user may reuse a Prohibited previous password Prohibited means that a user must not reuse a previous password phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 5 Configuring security Attribute Meaning Best practice Special Characters User defined set of special characters used in I HE password construction The only characters d lt gt permitted in a password are a z A Z 0 9 and any of the special characters entered here Creating or updating identity based users Perform this procedure to allow multiple users from one to ten to access the ODU with different levels of access There are three defined levels of access Security Officer System Administrator and Read Only If identity based user accounts are already enabled this task may only be performed by a user with role set to Security Officer To create or update identity based user accounts select menu option Management Web Local User Accounts The User Accounts page is displayed Figure 117 Set the Identity Based User Accounts attribute to Enabled if it is not already set The identity based user account attributes are enabled for update Figure 118 Create or update up to 10 user accounts Table 108 and select Submit User Account Updates Figure 118 Identity based
242. ated from Force in kilogrammes 0 1045aV Where Is a surface area in square meters V wind speed in meters per second The lateral force produced by a single PTP 600 ODU integrated or connectorized model at different wind speeds is shown in Table 9 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 2 9 Site planning Chapter 2 Planning considerations Table 9 Lateral force metric Type of ODU Largest Lateral force Kg at wind speed surface area meters per second square meters 30 40 50 60 70 Integrated 0 130 12 22 34 49 66 Connectorized 0 093 9 16 24 35 48 Calculation of lateral force US The magnitude of the lateral force can be estimated from Force in pounds 0 0042Av Where Is A surface area in square feet v wind speed in miles per hour The lateral force produced by a single PTP 600 ODU integrated or connectorized model at different wind speeds is shown in Table 10 Table 10 Lateral force US Type of ODU Largest Lateral force Ib at wind speed surface area miles per hour quare teen 60 100 120 140 150 Integrated 1 36 36 6 57 1 82 3 146 2 228 5 Connectorized 1 00 26 9 42 60 5 107 5 168 0 ANOTE When the connectorized ODU is used with external antennas the figures from the antenna manufacturer for lateral force should be included to calculate the total loading on the mounting structure Capabilities of the PTP 600 Series The structur
243. auses sens aa a a a EE E EEA 7 14 Figure LOG Syslog local log ennn A nse caen amet 7 19 Figure 167 Spectrum Management as seen from the Master s sssesssessseesseessersserssersssessseese 7 21 Figure 168 Spectrum Management as seen from the Slave ccecccceeseeceeceaeeeeceeneeeeceeeseeeeeeeaes 7 23 Figure 169 Example spectrum management plot yeccissceacevesiaccsstasvacacwemaacenensndeansdsnastecnsbans E ea 7 24 Figure 170 Spectrum Management Fixed Frequency Mode page sssesssesssessseesssrssersssesssessse 7 27 Figure 171 Spectrum Management page with radar avoidance master sssssesseerresseeressee 7 28 Figure 172 Spectrum Management page with radar avoidance Slave sessesreseseeressseressse 7 29 Figure 173 PTP 25600 example of Spectrum Management Ppage ccceccccsecccseeceeeeeceeeneeeneeees 7 31 Figure 174 Active channel history screen esssesssserssssscessseecosssecrossecetssssetosererosereroseseerosereressse 7 32 Figure 175 Spectrum management time series plot essseeesesseeessssersssseressseresssseressseressseeeessse 7 33 Figure 176 System Statistics Page siecia nape a A AEA E 7 36 Figure 177 Detailed Counters Pag eC resserrer ae ARTE TS REESE ENESES 7 42 Figure 178 Diagnostic Plotter Page srerearnriirin annn veneaieia cocasietaateaweeaacestunreieeswarvueenee 7 45 Figure 179 Diagnostic attributes calculated over time System Status page cccccseeceeeeeees 7 47 ph
244. ave been certified for operation in the following hazardous locations ATEX The products have been approved under an Intrinsic Safety assessment as defined in EN60079 11 2007 The approval is given by certificate number TRACO9ATEX31224X issued by TRaC Global with the specific level of coverage shown below II 3 G Ex ic IIC T4 II Equipment group surface applications 3 Equipment category infrequent exposure G Atmosphere Gas ic Protection concept intrinsic safety IIC Gas group up to and including Hydrogen and Acetylene T4 Temperature class 135 C phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Compliance with safety standards Hazloc The products have been assessed and found compliant with the requirements of UL1604 and CSA C22 2 No 213 for the following conditions The approval is given by MET Labs under File Reference E113068 with the specific level of coverage shown below Complies with UL1604 and CSA C22 2 No 213 Class I Gases Vapors and Liquids surface applications Div 2 Infrequent Exposure Gas Groups A B C D up to and including Hydrogen and Acetylene Operating Temperature Code T4 135 C phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 4 57 Compliance with radio regulations Chapter 4 Reference information Compliance with radio regulations This section describes how the PTP 600 complies with the radio regulations that are in force in various countrie
245. ayed Figure 139 Update the attributes Table 119 and select Next Figure 139 Step 2 SNMP MIB II System Objects page for SNMPv1 2c Sys Contact Step 2 SNMP MIB II System Objects attributes vaue funis Sys Name Sys Location lt lt Back Hext gt gt phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 73 Task 7 Setting up SNMP agent Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Table 119 Step 2 SNMP MIB II System Objects attributes for SNMPv1 2c Attribute Sys Contact Sys Name Meaning The name of the contact person for this managed node together with information on how to contact this person An administratively assigned name for this managed node By convention this is the fully qualified domain name of the node Sys Location 3 floor The physical location of this node for example Telephone closet Step 3 SNMP Trap Configuration for SNMPv1 2c The Step 3 SNMP Trap Configuration page is displayed Figure 140 Update the attributes Table 120 and select Next Figure 140 Step 3 SNMP Trap Configuration page for SNMPv1 2c SNMP Trap Version SNMP Enabled Traps Trap 1 Configuration SNMP Trap IP Address SNMP Trap Port Number Trap 2 Configuration SNMP Trap IP Address Ad Back Step 3 SNMP Trap Configuration Attributes value its Ow v2e Cold Start Vv Wireless Link Up Down DFS Channel Change DFS Impulse Interf
246. bed in Managing alarms on page 7 14 Select Submit Updated Configuration phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 77 Task 8 Configuring alarms and messages 6 78 Figure 142 Diagnostic Alarms page Diagnostic Alarms Region Code install Status install Arm State Unit Out Of Calibration Incompatible Region Codes Incompatible Master And Slave Data Port Configuration Mismatch No Wireless Channel Available SNTP Syncronisation Failed Wireless Link Disabled Warning Data Port Disabled Warning Data Port Status Enabled Diagnostic Alarms V Data Port Fiber Status Telecoms Channel A Status Telecoms Channel B Status Telecoms Channel A Loopback Telecoms Channel B Loopback TDD Synchronization Alarm Link Mode Optimization Mismatch Syslog Disabled Warning Syslog Local Nearly Full Syslog Local Wrapped Syslog Client Disabled Warning Secure Mode Ethernet Bridging Status Submit Updated Configuration Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 8 Configuring alarms and messages Configuring generation of email messages To enable the PTP 600 to generate Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP email messages to notify the system administrator when certain events occur proceed as follows 1 Select menu option Management Email The Email Configuration page is displayed Email Configuration Attributes alu nits SMTP Email Alert Disabled Enabled Vv Wireless Link Up Down DFS Cha
247. bjects group e RFC 3418 SNMPv2 MIB System group SNMP group and set group e RFC 3826 SNMP USM AES MIB usmAesCfb128Protocol OID e PTP 600 Series proprietary MIB phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 1 51 System management Chapter 1 Product description Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP The clock supplies accurate date and time information to the system It can be set to run with or without a connection to a network time server SNTP It can be configured to display local time by setting the time zone and daylight saving in the Time web page If an SNTP server connection is available the clock can be set to synchronize with the server time at regular intervals For secure applications the PTP 600 can be configured to authenticate received NTP messages using the DES protocol SNMPv3 security 1 52 SNMP Engine ID PTP 600 supports three different formats for SNMP Engine ID e MAC address e IP address e Configurable text string SNMPv3 security configuration is re initialized when the SNMP Engine ID is changed User based security model PTP 600 supports the SNMPv3 user based security model USM for up to 10 users with MD5 SHA 1 DES and subject to the license key AES protocols in the following combinations e No authentication no privacy e MDb5 no privacy e SHA 1 no privacy e MD5 DES e SHA 1 DES e MD5 AES e SHA 1 AES Use of AES privacy requires the PTP 600 AES upgrade described in AES li
248. ble 69 PTP 54600 IP mode Table 70 PTP 54600 TDM mode Table 71 PTP 58600 IP mode Table 72 PTP 58600 TDM mode Table 73 PTP 59600 IP mode Table 74 PTP 59600 TDM mode phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 31 Wireless specifications Chapter 4 Reference information Table 61 PTP 25600 IP mode threshold power and link loss Output 7 System threshold dBm ae Maximum link loss dB Modulation per channel bandwidth Eas per channel bandwidth mode 5 10 15 20 All 5 10 15 20 MHz MHz MHz MHz bands MHz MHz MHz MHz BPSK 0 63 single 97 6 95 1 93 0 90 4 23 156 6 154 1 152 0 149 4 QPSK 0 63 single 93 9 90 7 90 5 86 7 23 152 9 149 7 146 6 145 7 QPSK 0 87 single 90 7 87 6 87 5 83 9 23 149 7 146 6 146 5 142 9 16QAM 0 es es 89 1 86 0 86 0 82 1 23 148 0 145 5 145 0 140 4 single 16QAM 0 63 dual 86 7 83 9 84 0 79 4 23 145 7 142 9 143 0 138 4 16QAM 0 87 i 84 2 82 5 80 5 76 5 23 143 2 141 4 139 5 135 5 single 16QAM 0 87 dual 81 0 77 7 77 4 72 9 23 140 0 136 6 136 4 131 9 64QAM 0 75 81 6 79 2 77 4 73 5 23 140 6 138 2 136 4 132 4 single 64QAM 0 75 dual 77 8 74 7 74 3 69 8 23 136 8 133 7 133 3 128 8 64QAM 0 92 1 78 8 76 3 74 4 70 3 23 137 8 135 2 133 4 129 3 single 64QAM 0 92 dual 75 5 71 3 71 9 66 5 23 134 5 130 3 130 9 125 5 256QAM 0 81 i 77 2 74 9 72 9 68 8 23 136 2 133 9 131 9 127 8 single 256QAM 0 81 dual 73 5 70 1 69 7 65
249. ble Account Password Complexity Configuration Minimum Password Length Off characters Password Can Contain User Name Ono Yes Minimum Mandatory Characters of Lowercase Of Uppercase oy Numeric Off Special Maximum Repeated Characters Off Alphabetic Off Numeric Off Special Maximum Consecutive Characters Of Lowercase Of Uppercase of Numeric Maximum Sequential Characters Off Alphabetic Off Numeric Maximum Repeated Pattern Length Off characters Match Reversed Patterns No Oves Minimum Characters That Must Change Off Y characters Password Reuse permitted O Prohibited ESAO lt N A Set Default Complexity Set Best Practice Complexity Special Characters phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 35 Task 5 Configuring security Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Table 106 User account management attributes Attribute Identity Based User Accounts Meaning When this is disabled access to the web interface is controlled by a single system administration password When this is enabled the identity based user account attributes are enabled For more information refer to Creating or updating identity based users on page 6 39 Auto Logout The time without user activity that elapses before a user is Period automatically logged out minutes Minimum The minimum time that elapses before a user is allowed
250. bles Table 91 Throughput for PTP 600 Full link symmetry 1 1 link optimization IP Modulation 30 MHz 20 MHz 15 MHz Mode Tx Rx Both Tx Rx Both Tx Rx Both 256QAM 0 81 150 01 150 01 300 02 100 06 100 06 200 12 75 37 75 37 150 74 dual 64QAM 0 92 dual 126 39 126 39 252 78 84 30 84 30 168 61 63 50 63 50 127 01 64QAM 0 75 dual 103 28 103 28 206 57 68 89 68 89 137 78 51 89 51 89 103 79 16QAM 0 87 dual 80 35 80 35 160 70 53 60 53 60 107 19 40 37 40 37 80 74 16QAM 0 63 dual 57 76 57 76 115 52 38 53 38 53 77 06 29 02 29 02 58 04 256QAM 0 81 75 00 75 00 150 01 50 03 50 03 100 06 37 69 37 69 75 37 single 64QAM 0 92 63 19 63 19 126 39 42 15 42 15 84 30 31 75 31 75 63 50 single 64QAM 0 75 51 64 51 64 103 28 34 45 34 45 68 89 25 95 25 95 51 89 single 16QAM 0 87 40 17 40 17 80 35 26 80 26 80 53 59 20 18 20 18 40 37 single 16QAM 0 63 28 88 28 88 57 76 19 26 19 26 38 53 14 51 14 51 29 02 single QPSK 0 87 single 20 09 20 09 40 17 13 40 13 40 26 79 10 09 10 09 20 18 QPSK 0 63 single 14 44 14 44 28 88 9 63 9 63 19 26 7 25 7 25 14 51 BPSK 0 63 single 7 22 7 22 14 44 4 81 4 81 9 63 3 63 3 63 7 25 At zero range All rates are in Mbit s phn 2512 007v000 Dec 2012 4 75 Dat
251. briel 4 foot Standard QuickFire Parabolic 34 8 Y QF4 52 N RK Gabriel Gabriel 2 foot Standard Dual QuickFire 28 4 Y Parabolic QFD2 52 N Gabriel Gabriel 2 5 foot Standard Dual QuickFire 31 1 Y Parabolic QFD2 5 52 N Gabriel Gabriel 2 foot Standard Dual QuickFire 28 4 Y Parabolic QFD2 52 N RK Gabriel Gabriel 4 foot Standard Dual QuickFire 34 7 Y Parabolic QFD4 52 N Gabriel Gabriel 4 foot Standard Dual QuickFire 34 7 Y Parabolic QFD4 52 N RK RadioWaves Radio Waves 2 foot Dual Pol Parabolic SPD2 28 1 Y 5 2 28 1dBi RadioWaves Radio Waves 2 foot Parabolic SP2 5 2 29 Y 29 0dBi RadioWaves Radio Waves 3 foot Dual Pol Parabolic SPD3 31 1 Y 5 2 31 1dBi phn 2512 007v000 Dec 2012 2 65 Ordering components 2 66 Chapter 2 Planning considerations Manufacturer Antenna Type Gain Parabolic dBi Dish RadioWaves Radio Waves 3 foot Parabolic SP3 5 2 31 4 Y 31 4dBi RadioWaves Radio Waves 4 foot Dual Pol Parabolic SPD4 34 4 Y 5 2 34 4dBi RadioWaves Radio Waves 4 foot Parabolic SP4 5 2 34 8 Y 34 8dBi RadioWaves Radio Waves 2 foot Parabolic SP2 2 5 28 3 Y 28 3dBi RadioWaves Radio Waves 3 foot Parabolic SP3 2 5 31 4 Y 31 4dBi RadioWaves Radio Waves 4 foot Parabolic SP4 2 5 34 6 Y 34 6dBi RFS RFS 2 foot Parabolic SPF2 52AN or SPFX2 27 9 Y 52AN 27 9dBi RFS RFS 3 foot Parabolic SPF3 52AN or SPFX3 31 4 Y 52AN 31 4dBi RFS RFS 4 foot Pa
252. bute name suggests it displays the current status of the wireless link A state of Up on a green background indicates that a point to point link is established A state of Down on a red background indicates that the wireless link is not established Maximum Transmit Power The maximum transmit power that the local wireless unit is permitted to use to sustain a link Remote Maximum Transmit Power The maximum transmit power that the remote wireless unit is permitted to use to sustain a link phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 7 9 Web based management Chapter 7 Operation Attribute Meaning Transmit Power The maximum mean minimum and latest measurements of Transmit Power dBm See Diagnostics calculated over time on page 7 47 Receive Power The maximum mean minimum and latest measurements of Receive Power dBm See Diagnostics calculated over time on page 7 47 Vector Error The maximum mean minimum and latest measurements of Vector Error dB See Diagnostics calculated over time on page 7 47 Vector Error compares the received signal s In phase Quadrature IQ modulation characteristics to an ideal signal to determine the composite error vector magnitude The expected range for Vector Error is approximately 2 dB NLOS link operating at sensitivity limit on BPSK 0 67 to 33 dB short LOS link running 256 QAM 0 83 Link Loss Transmit Data Rate T
253. capsulated within a lightweight MAC layer for transmission over the wireless link 1 42 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Ethernet bridging In out of band local mode Figure 18 and out of band mode Figure 19 the management network shown in red is isolated from the customer data network shown in blue In out of band mode the management network is isolated from the customer data at the wireless port by use of a separate service access point and associated dedicated logical channel Ethernet frames will not leak between management and data networks even in the presence of configuration errors Figure 18 Forwarding behavior in out of band local management mode Wireless MAC Bridge Protocol layers involved in bridging between Ethernet and wireless interfaces are shown in Figure 20 Protocol layers involved in bridging between external interfaces and the management agent are shown in Figure 21 In these figures the layers have the meanings defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2005 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 1 43 Ethernet bridging Chapter 1 Product description Figure 20 Protocol layers between Ethernet and wireless interfaces Ethernet Port Wireless Port MAC Relay Entity Media Access Method Independent Functions Media Access Method Dependent Convergence Functions PTP Medium Access Method PTP Security Media Access Method Optional Specific Functions PTP Physical Layer 1 44 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012
254. ccess 00 04 56 30 16 65 Enabled Master DFS IP Traffic Disabled 25 Auto 0 to 40 km Conne ctorized 23 0 0 0 48 0 15 MHz 1to1 5482 A A 64QAM 0 92 BPSK 0 63 Arm Without Tones y dBm dBi dB dBm MHz phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 61 Task 6 Configuring wireless and telecoms interfaces Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Figure 130 Reboot confirmation pop up http 169 254 1 1 x 9 j re you sure you want to REBOOT this unit Cancel Barring channels For units operating within the FCC certain channels may need to be barred from operation To comply with FCC rules bar any channels that may interfere with TDWR radars This must be done before the units are allowed to radiate on site The system designer will have provided a list of any affected channels based on the instructions in Avoidance of weather radars USA only on page 2 5 To bar channels log into the master unit and select menu option System Spectrum Management The Spectrum Management page is displayed Figure 167 Click on the appropriate channel center frequencies on the Local or Peer channel spectrum plots When the confirmation dialog is displayed select OK 6 62 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 7 Setting up SNMP agent Task 7 Setting up SNMP agent If SNMP is enabled when an event occurs the SNMP agent on the PTP 600 sends a trap to whatever SNMP trap receivers hav
255. ce between pins 7 and 8 Ohms 5 Ensure that all the results of steps 1 to 4 are within 10 of each PASS or other as follows FAIL Take the minimum result and multiply by 1 1 If any of the remaining steps 1 to 4 results are greater than this the test has failed 6 Measure the resistance between pins 1 and 3 Subtract 0 2 Ohms Ohms 7 Measure the resistance between pins 4 and 7 Subtract 0 8 Ohms Ohms 8 Compare the results of steps 1 to 4 and steps 6 to 7 to the PASS or maximum allowed FAIL If the cable is carrying Ethernet then the maximum allowed is 20 Ohms If the cable is carrying only power to the ODU Ethernet over Fiber only then the maximum allowed is 60 Ohms If any of the steps 1 to 6 results are greater than the maximum allowed the test has failed 9 Measure the resistance between pin 1 and the screen ODU K Ohms ground If it is less than 100K ohms regardless of cable PASS or length the test has failed FAIL 10 Measure the resistance between pin 8 and the screen ODU K Ohms ground If it is less than 100K ohms regardless of cable PASS or length the test has failed FAIL phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 8 9 Testing link end hardware Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Step 11 Test Result Measure the resistance between pin 1 and pin 8 K Ohms If UltraSync GPS is not fitted and the resistance is less PASS or than 100K Ohms regardless of cable length the test has FAIL failed If UltraSync GPS is fitted
256. cense key data entry License Key a667 Gbca 922 6399 019a ebc9 1 066 6988 Validate license key Reset Form Capability summary Product Name Cambium PTP 49600 Full MAC Address 00 04 56 80 5a 1a Security Level UC APL Encryption Algorithm AES 128 bit Rijndael Frequency Variant 4900 MHz Bandwidth Variant 20 MHz A valid software license key is required before installation of the PTP Point to Point wireless link can commence If you do not have a valid license key please 6 14 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 3 Installing license keys Table 104 Capability summary attributes Attribute Product Name Meaning The name of the PTP 600 product variant MAC Address The MAC address of the PTP 600 Region Code The region code prohibits the wireless unit from operating outside the regulated limits An invalid region code indicates a corrupted license key Security Level The maximum configurable security level If FIPS 140 2 capability is required ensure that the Security Level is set to FIPS If UC APL capability is required ensure that the Security Level is set to UC APL Encryption Algorithm The encryption algorithms available for use at the wireless interface of the ODU Encryption algorithm and keys must be the same at BOTH ends of the link for it to function correctly This attribute is only displayed if the current license key perm
257. cense on page 1 56 The ODU will allow the creation of users configured with AES privacy protocol regardless of license key However a user configured to use AES privacy protocol will not be able to transmit and receive encrypted messages unless the license key enables the AES capability phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide System management View based access control model PTP 600 supports the SNMPv3 view based access control model VACM with a single context The context name is the empty string The context table is read only and cannot be modified by users Access to critical security parameters The SNMPv3 management interface does not provide access to critical security parameters CSPs of PTP 600 It is not possible to read or modify AES keys used to encrypt data transmitted at the wireless interface Neither is it possible to read or modify security parameters associated with TLS protection of the web based management interface The recovery mode option to zeroize CSPs does not affect SNMPv3 configuration MIB based management of SNMPv3 security PTP 600 supports a standards based approach to configuring SNMPv3 users and views through the SNMP MIB This approach provides maximum flexibility in terms of defining views and security levels appropriate for different types of user PTP 600 provides a default SNMPv3 configuration This initial configuration is not secure but it provides the means by which a secu
258. cing the more robust option of single payload Intelligent dynamic frequency selection The PTP 600 series uses an interference mitigation technique known as Intelligent Dynamic Frequency Selection i DFS not available in the 2 5 GHz band Both the Master and Slave continually monitor for interference on all channels and then select the best frequency of operation This is a dynamic process where the PTP 600 can continually move channels in response to changes in interference Two modes of operation are available e First mode the two link directions are forced to select the same frequency determined by the Master e Second mode the frequency of operation can be determined independently for each direction This mode is not permitted in radar regions Radar avoidance In regions where protection of radars is part of the local regulations the PTP 600 must detect interference from radar like systems and avoid co channel operation with these systems To meet this requirement the PTP 600 implements the following features e The equipment can only transmit on available channels of which there are none at initial power up The radar detection algorithm will always scan a usable channel for 60 seconds for radar interference before making the channel an available channel e This compulsory channel scan will mean that there is at least 60 seconds service outage every time radar is detected and that the installation time is extended by at
259. cnamedsarntanesacneesssnanton s 1 65 UC APL capability seinar naran A E A EAA ANA 1 65 UGAPLE MOG perreerrrereerery Corer rrr rece rrr err rarer errr terr crrrrrerre rer errr terre et Ty 1 66 Further reading On WGA PW eerren e N A R pease ers AOE RA 1 67 Chapter 2 Planning CONMSIAerations cceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeseeeaeaeeauaseauaeeouageas 2 1 Regulatory planning assire ies tact hiesadacnseediaekee eed Se ie 2 2 Regulatory MUS 235 sas ios Seana seen cide a co sacetaa Seatac ea A ieee eee 2 2 COntorming to temi S 53 1 5 26 ana vecascscaasenenscenatan aus a aaa epg aaa taa a eee ncaa 2 2 Available SpE Ctr wisi siszhedstiassasassnnncs an nA cangdced nace cieaiaes eanae ETETE E A E 2 3 Channel ame Width sciscsvesaascesvsvnnsn veimet E E N E Vane E 2 4 Frequency SClECHON42 2 s2 4 sies8 ede ascnaanuasaatany oe aesabaescasudane tee E eis Ste eenE aR 2 4 Avoidance of weather radars USA ONLY sisisssicsaxscdcassvassaGobacssdaseedasdaadads i SEREEN ERINE NIR RET EENT 2 5 Site planning reren eani E OEE AE EE EE E E E AAEREN 2 6 ODU Site selection i c2isccnchsivdacdeinn cachsaseaeongtansesasestedel sasnaddeateaudadadanatsacoli R A AS 2 6 PIDU Site selectiom surrena R ci tuetaaadesuateae gets 2 6 PTP SYNC Site Sele CHO 3 s3s2s2stsaccaneassanepestedecnteaecadseea gece A E A EOR O A A R E 2 7 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 iii Contents MaximiumuGable lengths scs tsesiecacsansenicaeseascarencnseipadeaetays eee wear a ees scanee
260. cscsisessinaiestascascauaseaes R E AE AR EOTS 6 81 Task 10 Configuring remote ACCESS asserire ia A Enr ENE EAE Roti eS 6 83 Configuring web based management attributes sssssseesssserssseerssssseresseeressssersssseressss 6 83 Task T ALgnng antennid ko ee eet ae ana a E O OEA 6 85 Startno UP tie WMS sra e E a tense catadtaneensad seas demeneaneendans 6 85 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 ix Contents Checking that the units are armed sc2scsecscatiseaia st esqseaouanensecbagnecapeatecas scars easmesan cu seatauseeindia ys 6 85 Aligning antennas creian sans a EEEE PAE EN R 6 86 Aligning separate antennas for spatial diversity s nesessersessserrssserrsssseressseeressseresssere 6 87 Monitoring received signal level rrarreornn enn nara E TE A NEOR 6 88 DIS AMIN GE NITS assin a a raad 6 91 Task 12 Updating system conngu ra tom veces scseceseresagenaceshaandeasvagsasdietanedea iver EE E NEA 6 92 Reviewing system configuration attributes s sssessseesseersserssersserssersserssersserssersseesseess 6 92 Task 13 Checking wireless performance ssessseesssesssesssresseessresseessresseesssesseerseerssersseesseesss 6 95 Comparing actual to predicted Performance 62s25cccsaecswisangesncoseveannawatas nacawves RAR 6 95 Task 14 Configuring quality Of SEGIWVICG igs ssssicsssissdacs aaner R shacsdsaudsadeoaaagdedds EEEREN 6 96 Conhguring quality Of Service waxsae2ecsaieqcceceanndeave ssaacheeasudsatansndavess eate
261. ct Reboot Wireless Unit and select OK to confirm On completion the unit restarts with the new license key 6 16 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 4 Upgrading software version Task 4 Upgrading software version This task consists of the following procedures e Checking the installed software version on page 6 17 e Upgrading to a new software version on page 6 18 Ensure that the correct units are upgraded as units cannot easily be downgraded afterwards If the link is operational ensure that the remote end of the link is upgraded first using the wireless connection and then the local end can be upgraded Otherwise the remote end may not be accessible Checking the installed software version To check the installed software version proceed as follows 1 Select menu option Status The System Status page is displayed 2 Note the installed Software Version near the top of the page System Status Master Equipment Attributes vas its Link Name Do not use Site Name Antony Software Version 58600 51806 wdog 3 If FIPS capability is required check that the installed software is FIPS validated as indicated by aF PS prefix to the Software Version for example FIPS PTP600 10 01 4 IfUC APL capability is required check that the installed software is UC APL validated as indicated by a UC_ APL prefix to the Software Version for example UC_APL PTP600 10 00 DLD2 5 Go to the
262. cted faults phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Cabling and lightning protection Cabling and lightning protection This section describes the cabling and lightning protection components of a PTP 600 installation PTP and lightning protection The PIDU meets the low level static discharge specifications identified in Electromagnetic compatibility EMC compliance on page 4 51 but does not provide lightning or surge suppression The amount of lightning protection is dependent on regulatory requirements and the end user requirements The standard ODU for the PTP 600 Series is fitted with surge limiting circuits and other features to minimize the risk of damage due to nearby lightning strikes To be fully effective these standard features require some additional equipment to be configured as part of the system installation A WARNING The units are not designed to survive direct lightning strike For this reason they must not be installed in Zone A as defined in Grounding and lightning protection on page 2 21 Mounting in Zone A may put equipment structures and life at risk Outdoor connections The term drop cable refers to the cable that is used for all connections that terminate outside the building for example connections between the ODU LPUs if installed GPS receiver if installed and the ODU port of the PIDU For outdoor connections always use Cat5e cable that is gel filled and shielded
263. ction e Copper Media Only means that the Ethernet service connects through the copper port only and the Fiber SFP interface is disabled e Fiber Media Only means that the Ethernet service connects through the Fiber SFP interface only and the copper port is disabled The remaining attributes contain information read from the SFP fiber module phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 109 Task 17 Saving the system configuration Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Task 17 Saving the system configuration Save the system configuration in the following situations e After a new unit has been fully configured as described in this chapter e After any change has been made to the configuration e Before upgrading the unit to a new software version e After upgrading the unit to a new software version Aa NOTE The process for restoring a unit to a previously saved configuration is described in Restoring the system configuration on page 7 48 Saving the system configuration To save the current configuration select menu option System Configuration Save And Restore The Save amp Restore Configuration page is displayed Figure 158 Select Save Configuration File and save the configuration file to a PC hard drive The configuration file format is MAC mm mm mm_IP iii iii iii iii cfg Where m mm mm is MAC address of unit iii iii iii iii IP address of unit Figure 158 Save amp Restore Configuration page Save amp
264. ctor 1 000 0 950 0 900 0 850 0 800 0 750 0 700 0 650 0 600 0 550 1 000 0 950 0 900 0 850 0 800 0 750 0 700 0 650 0 600 0 550 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Range km Figure 88 PTP 600 range adjustment for data rates curve L 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Range km phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Data throughput tables Figure 89 PTP 600 range adjustment for data rates curve N 1 00 0 95 0 90 0 85 Throughput Factor o o tt pel a 0 70 0 65 0 60 0 55 100 120 140 160 180 200 Range km o N p3 D a oO a Figure 90 PTP 600 range adjustment for data rates curve O 1 00 0 95 0 90 0 85 Throughput Factor o o o o pr a 0 70 0 65 0 60 0 55 100 120 140 160 180 200 Range km o N D a co i phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 91 Data throughput tables Chapter 4 Reference information 4 92 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Chapter 5 Installation This chapter describes how to install and test the hardware for a PTP 600 link This chapter is arranged as follows Preparing for installation on page 5 2 Describes the precautions to be observed and checks to be performed before proceeding with the installatio
265. curity 4 info 6 auth logout kernel 0 warning 4 cold start PTP wireless bridge has reinitialized reason reset reason SC security 4 warning 4 License update License Key updated SC syslog 5 warning 4 log full Syslog local flash log is 90 full SC syslog 5 warning 4 log wrap Syslog local flash log has wrapped SC security 4 info 6 radius auth RADIUS user user name SC SP server 1 2 at IP address SP succeeded SC security 4 warning 4 radius auth fail RADIUS user user name SC SP server 1 2 at IP address SP failed succeeded failed no response SC security 4 alert 1 resource low Potential DoS attack on packet ingress warning cleared SC security 4 warning 4 sec_zeroize Critical Security Parameters CSPs zeroized SC local6 22 warning 4 snmpv3_asn1 ASN 1 parse error SC security 4 warning 4 snmpv3 auth Authentication failure SC phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 49 Syslog message formats Chapter 4 Reference information Facility Severity I dentifier Message content local6 22 warning 4 sampv3_decryption Decryption failure SC local6 22 warning 4 snmpv3 engine id Unknown engine ID SC local6 22 warning 4 snmpv3 sec level Unknown security level SC kernel 0 warning 4 sys reboot System Reboot reason reset reason SC security 4 w
266. d at both ends of the link Out of band modes In the out of band management modes management traffic is segregated using a physically separate network interface connected to the AUX port of the ODU Out of band management is available only in the PTP 45600 PTP 54600 OOBM and PTP 58600 OOBM variants In out of band local management mode the management agent can be reached only from the AUX port of the local ODU This mode is appropriate during installation when the equipment is managed using a locally connected PC at each end of the link It may additionally be useful where network management communication is based on a completely independent data network for example one based on a 3G cellular wireless terminal at each site phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 2 37 Data network planning Chapter 2 Planning considerations In the out of band management mode the management agent can be reached from the AUX port at the local ODU and assuming that the wireless link is established the AUX port at the remote ODU End to end out of band management is possible only when the network management mode is configured to out of band at every ODU Aa NOTE The capacity of the out of band network is approximately 500 kbit s at the wireless interface Use in band management where the loading of the management network is likely to exceed this capacity VLAN membership Decide if the IP interface of the ODU management agent will be connected i
267. d in Grounding and lightning protection on page 2 21 To provide effective protection against lightning induced surges grounding cables must be installed without drip loops and pointing down towards the ground To avoid damage to the installation do not connect or disconnect the drop cable when power is applied to the PIDU phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Installing the drop cable and bottom LPU Preparing drop cables Perform this task to prepare the Cat5e cables that connect the ODU to the PIDU Always use Cat5e cable that is gel filled and shielded with copper plated steel Alternative types of cable are not supported by Cambium Aa NOTE The maximum permitted lengths of Cat5e cables are specified in Maximum cable lengths on page 2 7 For details of supported cables and recommended connectors refer to Ordering components on page 2 53 Main drop cable To prepare a long section of drop cable to connect the top LPU to the bottom LPU 1 Cut off the approximate length required allowing a bit of surplus or leave it on the drum so that it can be unwound as the cable is hoisted 2 Slide one or more hoisting grips onto to the top end of the main drop cable a handle Grip heel To determine the number of hoisting grips required consult the grip manufacturer 3 Secure the hoisting grip to the cable using a special tool as recommended by the manufacturer 4 Fit an RJ45 connecto
268. d to indicate that a channel is barred phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 7 25 Managing spectrum Key metrics Chapter 7 Operation The I bar and top of the colored bar represent three key metrics Table 137 The vertical part of the I bar represents the statistical spread between the peak and the mean of the statistical distribution Table 137 Key metrics represented in the spectrum management plot Metric Peak of Means Description encountered during the quantization period The peak of means is useful for detecting slightly longer duration spikes in the interference environment How represented The largest mean interference measurement Upper horizontal bar Mean of Means The arithmetic mean of the measured means during a quantization period The mean of means is a coarse measure of signal interference and gives an indication of the average interference level measured during the quantization period The metric is not very good at predicting intermittent interference and is included to show the spread between the Mean of Means the 99 9 Percentile and the Peak of Means Lower horizontal bar 99 9 Percentile of the Means Aa NOTE The value of mean interference measurement which 99 9 of all mean measurements fall below during the quantization period The 99 9 percentile metric is useful for detecting short duration repetitive interference that by its very nature has
269. dd sane aE 8 14 ODU LED does not illuminate within 90 seconds cc eeeseeseeceeeecceeeeceeteceerereeenaeoones 8 14 ODU LED DUNKS Ped ies cssecesesscacasicascstsgape ie noer pecsacanseus bangs eeead E E eeetae 8 15 GPS LED does not illuminate or blink on clustered UNItS cc eeececceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 8 15 Testing atelecomis ME sitoxssexabonsdtevnenrs canaectivenentwseervaneswasuaaucenaheansenanaanged saeeredenatexvecabearshexsaenenent 8 16 Performing at lecoms loopback test oii cascscccueiasesicnosaviaetgvawssqussriedotavamand R OEY 8 16 Troubleshooting a fiber interface cccccccccccesccceeeecceeeeceeeceeeeeceaeeeesseseeaeecesseeceseeesseseeseeeenaes 8 18 No response from the unit via 1 O00 BAST isi csisssxeczensdaccstdeasanceessancstwanvanctnadaearmiooseacsiceeeaians 8 18 N response from the Unit via HDG sesser ai e EEE EEEE eae 8 18 License key is incorrect for optical Jcsss 625 de5iscaseeeseacseecasceseeassagntc ca ARAO REEERE TESEN ees 8 18 Fiber alarms are Talsed csicvicsecrcastesevivaccchanmndteawees n E R E E E E EENE OIRRE 8 19 T l xii phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide List of Figures Figure 1 Typical bridge deployment grounding not SHOWN csccccseeeeesesecceeeeeaeeeeseeeeeaseeeaes 1 4 Figure 2 PTP 600 Series integrated ODU front and rear views cccecceseeeececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaeees 1 7 Figure 3 PTP 600 Series connectorized ODU fro
270. ddasdiaceseaetd easdendd dentedeannsiesads 8 9 PTP SYNC indicator LED States von siccvesavevenecs sammawanesayanes EER E EER NES 8 13 Clustered PTP SYNC units GPS LEDs Fault finding ssseesseesssesssesseesssessserssersse 8 15 Telecoms AttmDULe Sisters sae coeese nearssaeaacbwsasadegweadaudnass E A A E AE E E OA 8 17 xxiii List of Tables xxiv phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide About This User Guide This guide describes the planning installation and operation of the Cambium PTP 600 Series of point to point wireless Ethernet bridges It is intended for use by the system designer system installer and system administrator Users of this guide should have knowledge of the following areas e Radio network design e Outdoor radio equipment installation e System installation configuration monitoring and fault finding System designers should refer to the following chapters e Chapter 1 Product description e Chapter 2 Planning considerations e Chapter 3 Legal information e Chapter 4 Reference information Installers should refer to the following chapters e Chapter 5 Installation e Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment e Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Operators should refer to the following chapters e Chapter 1 Product description e Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment e Chapter 7 Operation e Chapter 8 Troubleshooting phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 General information General inf
271. des communication across diverse interconnected networks J Show icon in notification area when connected IV Notify me when this connection has limited or no connectivity 3 Click on Properties phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 3 Task 1 Connecting to the unit Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Ea Enter an IP address that is valid for the 169 254 X X network avoiding 169 254 0 0 and 169 254 1 1 and 169 254 1 2 A good example is 169 254 1 3 Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Obtain DNS server address automatically fe 3 Enter a subnet mask of 255 255 0 0 Leave the default gateway blank 6 4 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 1 Connecting to the unit Connecting to the PC and powering up To connect the PTP 600 to the PC and power up the unit proceed as follows 1 Check that the ODU and PIDU are correctly connected 2 Connect the PC Ethernet port to the LAN port of the PIDU using a standard not crossed Ethernet cable 3 Apply mains or battery power to the PIDU The green Power LED should illuminate continuously 4 After about 45 seconds check that the orange Ethernet LED starts with 10 slow flashes 5 Check that the Ethernet LED then illuminates continuously Aa NOTE If the Power and Ethernet LEDs do not illuminate correctly refer to Testing link end hardware on page 8 2 Logging into the web interface Aa NOTE If a P
272. described in Performing a telecoms loopback test on page 8 16 Before connecting the E1 T1 source check the following resistances e Check the cable resistance between pins 3 amp 6 Green White amp Green and 7 amp 8 Brown White amp Brown Check against Table 99 column 2 e Check the cable resistance between pins 1 amp 2 Orange White amp Orange and 4 amp 5 Blue amp Blue White Check against Table 99 column 3 Table 99 Resistance referenced to the E1 T1 source CAT 5 Length Resistance between pins 3 amp Resistance between pins 1 amp Meters 6 and pins 7 amp 8 ohms 2 and pins 4 amp 5 ohms 0 0 8 1 3 10 2 5 3 0 20 4 2 4 7 30 5 9 6 4 40 7 6 8 2 50 9 3 9 8 60 11 0 11 5 70 12 7 13 2 phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 5 53 Installing an E1 or T1 interface Chapter 5 Installation CAT 5 Length Resistance between pins 3 amp Resistance between pins 1 amp Meters 6 and pins 7 amp 8 ohms 2 and pins 4 amp 5 ohms 80 14 4 14 9 90 16 1 18 2 100 17 8 18 3 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Installing an OOBM interface Installing an OOBM interface Perform this task to install an optional out of band management OOBM interface Out of band management is only available in the PTP 45600 PTP 54600 OOBM and PTP 58600 OOBM product variants This task consists of the following procedures e Prep
273. description The PIDU generates the ODU supply voltage from the mains supply or from an external DC source and injects this supply voltage into the ODU The PIDU is connected to the ODU and network equipment using Cat5e cable with RJ45 connectors The ODU should only be deployed using the supplied PIDU Plus PTP 300 500 600 Series The PIDU ODU port is designed to connect only to PTP 300 PTP 500 or PTP 600 ODUs LPUs or PTP SYNC units Do not connect any other equipment as damage may occur The PIDU Plus PTP 300 500 600 Series is not interchangeable with the PIDU Plus PTP 400 Series PIDU interfaces The PIDU interfaces are illustrated in Figure 7 and described in Table 3 and Table 4 Figure 7 PIDU interfaces Power Ethernet PIDU Plus PTP 300 500 600 Series 1 12 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Powered indoor unit PI DU Table 3 PIDU interface functions Interface Function 100 240V 47 63Hz 1 8A Mains power input DC In Alternative DC power supply input Refer to Redundancy and alternative powering configurations on page 1 14 DC Out DC power output to a second PIDU Used to provide power supply redundancy Refer to Redundancy and alternative powering configurations on page 1 14 ODU RJ45 socket for connecting Cat5e cable to ODU LAN RJ45 socket for connecting Cat5e cable to network Recovery Used to recover the unit from configuration errors or software i
274. detenetecs 5 33 Figure 101 Inserting RJ45 pins into the 12 way circular CONNECTOT ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 43 Figure 102 Grounding and weatherproofing requirements for GPS adapter cable 5 48 Figure 103 Wrapping self amalgamating tape around the GPS adapter cable joint 5 48 Figure 104 Wrapping PVC tape around the GPS adapter cable joint cccccccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeenees 5 49 Figure 105 Grounding and weatherproofing example for GPS adapter cable ccee 5 49 phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 xv Figure 106 Figure 107 Figure 108 Figure 109 Figure 110 Figure 111 Figure 112 Figure 113 Figure 114 Figure 115 Figure 116 Figure 117 Figure 118 Figure 119 Figure 120 Figure 121 Figure 122 Figure 123 Figure 124 Figure 125 Figure 126 Figure 127 Figure 128 Figure 129 Figure 130 Figure 131 Figure 132 Figure 133 Figure 134 Figure 135 Figure 136 Figure 137 Figure 138 Figure 139 Figure 140 Figure 141 Figure 142 List of Figures BPxamplerof a Dalii enaos nA e oes sesce a OE 5 53 Software License Key Page eiiiscssssscsiseedsistdess ses dsasasastaessnesgiciea ne ela eae 6 14 Security Configuration Wizard PAGE vexsscesesiseceadishsovsaceiecderielavavneasondcrauasetataeaseateeessetei lt 6 25 Step Bunter Key Of Keys Pag Erenin ara a r AAA EEA 6 26 Step 2 TLS Private Key and Public Certificate page s essoessoesssesssesssersserssersseess 6 27 Step
275. device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules in the USA and appropriate European ENs These limits have been designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference However the equipment can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to other radio communications There is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation ANOTE A Class B Digital Device is a device that is marketed for use in a residential environment notwithstanding use in commercial business and industrial environments AX NOTE Notwithstanding that Cambium has designed and qualified the PTP 600 products to generally meet the Class B requirement to minimize the potential for interference the PTP 600 product range is not marketed for use in a residential environment FCC and ETSI compliance testing with PTP SYNC With PTP SYNC installed this equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS GEN of Industry Canada These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communicatio
276. diadscnesanacaaane E Ai 5 59 Removing the Aper optic Calle yssivccceseaandees shanecicegsaasdes E E EEAO 5 61 Removing the SPE Tiber Module acs x coscsecisacisasscemarnsce seas a A OIG 5 61 Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment s ssssssssss 5 5 255522252 2555uu 0uuu00nn 6 1 Preparing for configuration and alignment is i s issecsseszsccasasaced sgasdsda baasaces aiai 6 2 Safety precautions during configuration and alignMeNnt cccsseccccceeeesccceeeeseeceeeeeeees 6 2 Regulatory compliance during configuration and alignment ccccceeeccceeecceeeeneeeees 6 2 Selecting configuration OPO scsi sic scndasaesenadutacs ves yeaccatus acs seetab idee hte ania ee EENAA EAEE 6 2 Task 1 Connecting tO the Wnt si sexcoonssexnnescawewnessieswvaseainwennsanean eceameneanennadebunenaiadanesenaetnadennierveeseess 6 3 Configuring the management PC ix sics cc cscssadashessgandccnaadbadeddsesaccaagasaaceddanandanscnsacsnaceenteasiegetentee 6 3 Connecting to the PC and powering UP ceccccsecccsescceseecceeeeeeeeeecseececseeseeseeeeaeeeeseeseeseeeees 6 5 hogging into the web interlace s ss cc1esecenctssidatise mans nesteease Ra T a a E 6 5 viii phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 2 Configuring IP and Ethernet ImtGriaCesscccssjacscatsanigestseacsseane eae EN EARE cua seas 6 7 Configuring the IP interface and management mode nesssssesssssersesseeresseeresseeressssersssser
277. dio channel When selecting a modulation mode the system is influenced by the parameters listed in Table 12 Table 12 Parameters that influence modulation mode selection Parameter Meaning Sensitivity The combined receive input signal level on both horizontal and vertical inputs that produces a Null BER Error ratio of 3x107 Output Power The output power defaults to the region code limit selected for the link in question The output power will be reduced on the edge channels and may vary if different region codes are selected AMOD Threshold The AMOD threshold is the combined receive input signal level on both horizontal and vertical inputs that results in the link consistently entering the receive modulation mode under consideration as the signal level is increased System Threshold Thresholds for all modes except BPSK are for the relevant link optimization AMOD thresholds System threshold for BPSK is the RPSK receive sensitivity Max Link Loss The maximum link loss for each modulation mode is derived from the AMOD threshold for that mode sensitivity threshold for BPSK and the maximum Region 1 center channel output power The figures assume integral antennas are used with gain depending upon frequency band as follows 23 dBi 5 9 GHz 5 8 GHz and 5 4 GHz 22 dBi 4 8 GHz and 4 9 GHz 21 5 dBi 4 5 GHz 18 dBi 2 5 GHz 2 14 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Link planning S
278. down before servicing Always power down and unplug the equipment before servicing Lightning protection unit LPU Do not remove the LPU printed circuit board when the LPU is connected to the power supply as high voltages are present Drop cable tester The drop cable tester must NEVER be used at the ODU end connected to power from the PIDU It must only be used with a multimeter to test a cable with an ODU attached nota cable with a PIDU attached This is because the PIDU voltage exceeds the limit allowed in some countries for safe handling in wet conditions and therefore may create a safety hazard Primary disconnect device The main power supply is the primary disconnect device External cables Safety may be compromised if outdoor rated cables are not used for connections that will be exposed to the outdoor environment Grounding PTP SYNC In order to meet the safety requirements for deployment in Australia and New Zealand AS NZS 60950 1 the PTP SYNC unit if deployed must be grounded to a Protective Ground in accordance with Local Electrical Regulations phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide RF exposure near the antenna Strong radio frequency RF fields will be present close to the antenna when the transmitter is on Always turn off the power to the ODU before undertaking maintenance activities in front of the antenna Minimum separation distances Install the ODUs so as to provide and maint
279. ds of the link Calculating path loss The path loss is the sum of the attenuation of the path if there were no obstacles in the way Free Space Path Loss the attenuation caused by obstacles Excess Path Loss and a margin to allow for possible fading of the radio signal Fade Margin The following calculation needs to be performed to judge whether a particular link can be installed L free _ space Lis L fade T Dees lt L apami Where Is lioi Saci Free Space Path Loss dB Dois Excess Path Loss dB L rae Fade Margin Required dB ene Seasonal Fading dB Leapabitity Equipment Capability dB phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 2 13 Link planning Chapter 2 Planning considerations Adaptive modulation Adaptive modulation ensures that the highest throughput that can be achieved instantaneously will be obtained taking account of propagation and interference When the link has been installed web pages provide information about the link loss currently measured by the equipment both instantaneously and averaged The averaged value will require maximum seasonal fading to be added and then the radio reliability of the link can be computed For minimum error rates on TDM links the maximum modulation mode should be limited to 64QAM 0 75 The values for BPSK are static receive sensitivity measurements The other values are static receive sensitivity measurements with an AMOD threshold applied The AMOD threshold applied is for a benign ra
280. duct Name Cambium PTP 58600 Full MAC Address 00 04 56 80 16 a7 Ethernet Fiber Support Enabled Radar Avoidance Enabled Frequency Variant 5800 MHz Bandwidth Variant 30 MHz If the attribute Ethernet Fiber Support is not present then it will be necessary to install the new license key Proceed as follows 1 Make a note of the current license key as it may be needed to reset the wireless unit to its current configuration phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 Fibre Link Warning An SFP is installed but has been disabled because your licence key does not include fibre support PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 16 Configuring the fiber interface 2 Enter the new license key exactly as it is written in the email sent as a result of registering the unique ID code and MAC address on the Cambium website Select Validate license key If the message ERROR Invalid License Key is displayed then use the back button and re enter the license key string If this is still rejected then contact Cambium support 5 Ifthe license key is accepted a prompt to reboot the wireless unit is displayed Select Reboot Wireless Unit and OK to confirm the reboot Connecting to the fiber network When the unit has rebooted check the System Summary page The SFP alarm described in Connecting to the unit and checking for fiber support on page 6 105 should no longer be displayed Disconnect the Cat5e cable from the PIDU port of the ODU Connect the
281. e UltraSync receiver The UltraSync GPS receiver replaces the back to back cable between the ODU and the top LPU Figure 94 Figure 94 UltraSync deployment diagram PTP 600 Ultra ODU Sync Top Unit LPU Aux FIBER _PIDU Refer to the UltraSync user manual for details of the lengths and types of cable required to connect the UltraSync unit to the ODU and LPU Mount the UltraSync unit on the supporting structure Connect the UltraSync unit to the Aux and PIDU ports of the ODU and to the top LPU Figure 95 Figure 95 UltraSync unit connections To PIDU port of ODU To AUX port of ODU To top LPU SYNC Pass Through Port 1 Pot2 Pot3 toODU Ethernet Ethernet phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 5 9 Installing connectorized antennas Chapter 5 Installation Installing connectorized antennas If the ODU is connectorized perform this task to install separate antenna s Preparing for connectorized installations Before proceeding with the installation perform the following checks e Check that the correct components are available as described in Ordering components on page 2 53 e Check that the selected antenna conforms to the applicable regulatory restrictions as described in FCC and IC approved antennas on page 2 64 and Compliance with radio regulations on page 4 58 e Check that the correct tools are available The tools req
282. e 123 Web Based Management attributes 0 0 cceccccsesecceeecneecceneceeesceeasceaeeceseeeeeseseees 6 83 Table 124 ODU installation TOMES cis scisonssinanexs seeahstewnananccwnawadhamesaeecemnonaasesieskuneueduaaenaesabvexsserseeen nates 6 88 Table 125 System Conf guration atin DUbe S s 43 casi ocasiesesitacaipess phnainces EAA EERE 6 93 Table 126 Layer 2 Control Protocols ssiississcassdccsesisasssccassadesecdeaasccesacdossesnosedeasonedooegnoesseesasencoadeeas cone 6 98 Table 127 Ethernet Priority Queue Settings is dissedesaseseaneciseatessatocasadiowscassaecatensendeearttaseaeaeeia 6 98 Table 128 Manual Clock attributes sssicsccesscstacasacsaccasacssnes sacs ndessacesccned a E aN 6 101 Table 129 SNTP Clock att IDutoS ansann A E E a RA 6 103 Table 130 Procedures performed from each menu Option sssssessssesssesseesssesssessserssresseesseesseess 7 3 Table 131 System Summary attributes srini iania ia E AEE NEE 7 5 Table 132 System Status attribute Skareneson innn n E aa 7 7 Table 133 SY Stem alar MS cicsessaace none E E A E ENOTE 7 15 Table 134 Emailalerts ensena a eens astra A E 7 18 Table 135 Spectrum Management attributes sssr riesen narn AEN EEE EEEE 7 21 Table 136 Channel states represented in the spectrum management PlOt cccccceeeeee seen 7 25 Table 137 Key metrics represented in the spectrum management PlOt cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 26 Table 138 Channel states in the spectrum management plot radar a
283. e 6 7 Reconnecting to the management PC cssssescosasiigecssssidanwaresisaveadels wedasagiaagvenadidencaditaansnisios 6 13 Task 3 Installing Cense Key sr 322 sons veccsgse scan anton ecminces ean eases ns ae ce A ee ea eT 6 14 Checking licensed capabilities csssssccsssczeacsdassndenanaesaascadecaesageddeasssasdecaseesswasooaemsagaeaeneed fea eveds 6 14 Generating a new license Key assy s2sesnus nace iiine eo aoea E EN E E ia 6 15 Entering a new license Key eruiiirniiar rnirar h aE EO EO EA O E E 6 16 Task 4 Upgrading software Version iss accssecesisseessdesaedessarves idea a ca sdasacaddenonssavedseesaveeseeeneaeseeniees 6 17 Checking the installed software VeTSlOMg ibis i5icessccsawocs vecaenesanasarsanetaeuss E ARRE 6 17 Upgrading to anew Software Version cisisissssiccasiassagsadensestaaad sasagdeesesbsaseacsacienaiacassdeesatoaasaace 6 18 Task or ConnGuring Securty esien a EAE Sadateias teeter E E stain 6 21 Configuring AES encIyp Ocana anr a EN N A E N E R 6 22 Connganng MV EP S T Se uea eae rE E NEE 6 23 Using the Security WAZATG sser i sneen ie Ean RER ORT OERTOAN ONENE 6 24 Configuring local user ACCOUNTS sessioni E EEA REEERE ERETI 6 34 Changing own user password s sssesssessseesseessersssrsssesssersrersserssersssreseressresseesseenseenseenss 6 41 Protecting access to the summary and Status pages sssssissensrsiricriisicsrisessie isoine iisa 6 41 Configuring RADIUS authentication jiivss sesassscesscevecseses caess seshsassdes eae
284. e 62 PTP 54600 available spectrum in 15 MHz channel bandwidth ceeeceeeeeeeeees 4 24 Figure 63 PTP 54600 available spectrum in 10 MHz channel bandwidth ecceeeeeeeees 4 24 Figure 64 PTP 54600 available spectrum in 5 MHz channel bandwidth cc eeececeeeeeeeeees 4 24 Figure 65 PTP 58600 available spectrum in 30 MHz channel bandwidth ceececeeeeeeeeees 4 25 Figure 66 PTP 58600 available spectrum in 15 MHz channel bandwidth cc ceeceeeeeeeeees 4 26 Figure 67 PTP 58600 available spectrum in the 10 MHz channel bandwidth eee 4 26 Figure 68 PTP 58600 available spectrum in 5 MHz channel bandwidth cc ceeeececeeeeeeeeees 4 27 xiv phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Ser ies User Guide Figure 69 PTP 59600 available spectrum in 30 MHz channel bandwidth cccceeeeeeeeeeeee 4 29 Figure 70 PTP 59600 available spectrum in 15 MHz channel bandwidth ccceeeeeeeeeeees 4 30 Figure 71 PTP 59600 available spectrum in 10 MHz channel bandwidth ccceeeeeeeeeeees 4 30 Figure 72 PTP 59600 available spectrum in 5 MHz channel bandwidth ceeeeeeeeee eee 4 31 Figure 73 FCC certifications on 2 5 GHz product label 00 0 eeccccccnesseecceeeeseeceseeseccenseeeesenen 4 67 Figure 74 FCC and IC certifications on 4 9 GHz product label ceccccssssscccneessecceeesescenens 4 68 Figure 75 FCC and IC certifications on 5 4 GHz product
285. e 7 34 Managing performance on page 7 35 Restoring upgrading and rebooting on page 7 48 Using recovery mode on page 7 53 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 7 1 Web based management Chapter 7 Operation Web based management This section describes the layout and the main menu options of the PTP 600 web based management interface The following topics are covered e Accessing the web interface on page 7 2 e Using the menu options on page 7 3 e Viewing the system summary on page 7 5 e Viewing the system status on page 7 6 Accessing the web interface 7 2 The web interface is best viewed using a screen resolution of at least 1024 x 768 pixels The web pages have been tested with Internet Explorer 7 Internet Explorer 8 Firefox 3 and Firefox 3 5 Other browsers have not been tested To access the web interface type the IP address of the unit into the browser address bar and press ENTER The login page is displayed Figure 160 Enter Username if requested and Password if set and select Login Figure 160 Login page with username C Cambium Networks Please login to gain access to the PTP wireless unit Username phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Using the menu options Web based management All web pages contain the menu navigation bar on the left hand side The menu is used to navigate to other web pages The currently selected option is always highlighted with a light blue background
286. e Installing the drop cable and bottom LPU Figure 96 Correct cable preparation for drop cable of the supported type Note Fit Gland to cable before fitting RJ45 nnector Housing re Ah 15mm 1 5mm a N Connector load bar 8 Brown 7 Light Broan m 6 Green 5 Light Biue 4 Blue 3 Light Green 2 Orange 4 Light Orange Trim to 5mm start with tails over length to assist insertion into load bar 36mm min email iii i max Check that the crimp tool matches the RJ45 connector being used otherwise the cable or connector may be damaged Solid screen The cable inner sheath must be located correctly under the connector housing tang If this is not done correctly there is no strain relief on the cable terminations Figure 97 shows the end of a drop cable fitted with an RJ45 plug and a gland phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 5 19 Installing the drop cable and bottom LPU Chapter 5 Installation Figure 97 Drop cable with RJ 45 and gland Installing and grounding the main drop cable Perform this procedure to install the main drop cable connect it to the top LPU and ground it to the supporting structure A WARNING Follow all instructions provided by the hoisting grip manufacturer Failure to do so may result in injury or death To install and ground the main drop cable proceed as follows 1 Hoist the main drop cable up to the top LPU using the hoisting grip and a hoist
287. e PTP 45600 variant operates on a 10 MHz channel raster Figure 49 PTP 45600 available spectrum in 30 MHz channel bandwidth RC 24 B1 B2 B3 B4 BS B6 4415 4445 4475 4505 4535 4565 Figure 50 PTP 45600 available spectrum in 20 MHz channel bandwidth RC 24 C1 C2 C3 C4 cS C6 c7 C8 cg C10 4410 4450 4470 4510 4530 4550 4570 4590 4400 MHz 4600 MHz Figure 51 PTP 45600 available spectrum in 10 MHz channel bandwidth RC 24 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 pg D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 4405 4475 4485 4495 4505 4515 4525 4595 4400 MHz 4600 MHz 4 18 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Wireless specifications PTP 48600 available spectrum settings Region codes 15 and 23 Use the Lower Center Frequency attribute see Step 2 Wireless configuration on page 6 51 to slide the available channels up and down the 4 8 GHz band in steps of 1 MHz In the 20 MHz Figure 52 channel bandwidth the PTP 48600 variant operates on a 10 MHz channel raster In the 15 MHz Figure 53 10 MHz Figure 54 and 5 MHz Figure 55 channel bandwidths the PTP 48600 variant operates on a 5 MHz channel raster The default channel raster is set to even frequencies as that optimizes radio performance Figure 52 PTP 48600 available spectrum in 20 MHz channel bandwidth ise E 4930 4950 4970 Lor 4721 72 erat are aren 2801 4621 4841 4861 2061 2001 4021 MBAR MO aOR a731 475 4771 479 461
288. e and mounting brackets of the ODU are capable of withstanding wind speeds up to 242 kph 151 mph Ensure that the structure to which the ODU is fixed to is also capable of withstanding the prevalent wind speeds and loads 2 10 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Wind speed statistics Site planning Contact the national meteorological office for the country concerned to identify the likely wind speeds prevalent at the proposed location Use this data to estimate the total wind loading on the support structures Sources of information e US National Weather Service http www nws noaa gov e UK Meteorological Office www meto gov uk Hazardous locations Check that the ODUs will not be exposed to hazardous gases as defined by Hazloc USA and ATEX Europe If there is a risk of such exposure then order the PTP 54600 or PTP 58600 ATEX Hazloc product variants as these are intended for operation in locations with gas hazards The ATEX and Hazloc standards limit the EIRP as shown in Table 11 Table 11 EIRP limits from ATEX and Hazloc standards ATEX gas group Hazloc gas group Typical gas type Maximum EIRP Watt IIA D Propane 6 IIB C Ethylene 3 5 IIC B Hydrogen 2 IIC A Acetylene 2 For more information refer to e PTP 600 kits on page 2 53 e Hazardous location compliance on page 4 56 e The PTP 600 Series Hazardous Location Guide phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012
289. e been configured Depending upon which SNMP version is required choose one of the following procedures e Configuring SNMPv3 agent on page 6 63 e Configuring SNMPv1 2c agent on page 6 72 Configuring SNMPv3 agent Perform this task to enable the PTP 600 to generate Simple Network Management Protocol version 3 SNMPv3 traps Starting SNMP wizard Select menu option Management SNMP The Current SNMP Summary page is displayed Figure 131 Review the summary if any updates are required select Continue to SNMP Wizard Figure 131 Current SNMP Summary page when SNMP is disabled Current SNMP Summary This page shows a summary of the current SNMP configuration Press the Continue to SNMP Wizard button below to change this configuration SNMP configuration SNMP Minimum Privilege Level Security Officer SNMP State Disabled Continue to SNMP Wizard phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 63 Task 7 Setting up SNMP agent Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Step 1 SNMP configuration for SNMPv3 When the Step 1 SNMP Configuration page is displayed set SNMP State to Enabled and set SNMP Version to v3 The page is redisplayed with SNMPv3 attributes Figure 132 Update the attributes Table 113 and select Next Figure 132 Step 1 SNMP Configuration page for SNMPv3 SNMP State SNMP Access Control SNMP Version SNMP Security Mode SNMP Engine ID Format SNMP Engine ID Text SNMP Port Number
290. e copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer e Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution e The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Part 4 Sun Microsystems Inc copyright notice BSD Copyright 2003 Sun Microsystems Inc 4150 Network Circle Santa Clara California 95054 U S A All rights reserved Use is subject to license terms below This distribution may include materials developed by third parties Sun Sun
291. e dealer and or experienced radio TV technician for help FCC IDs and Industry Canada Certification Numbers are reproduced on the product label Figure 75 Figure 75 FCC and IC certifications on 5 4 GHz product label This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rales FCC 1D QWP54100 Operation is subject to the foRowing two cosditions 4 This Gevice may not cause hannitet interfereece and C IC OS9A0 541 00 2 Ths device mest accept any Imerterence recetved lacioding Inmerference that may cause undesired operation Where necessary the end user is responsible for obtaining any National licenses required to operate this product and these must be obtained before using the product in any particular country Contact the appropriate national administrations for details on the conditions of use for the bands in question and any exceptions that might apply PTP 54600 European Union notification The PTP 54600 product is a two way radio transceiver suitable for use in Broadband Wireless Access System WAS Radio Local Area Network RLAN or Fixed Wireless Access FWA systems It is a Class 1 device and uses operating frequencies that are harmonized throughout the EU member states The operator is responsible for obtaining any national licenses required to operate this product and these must be obtained before using the product in any particular country Hereby Cambium declares that the PTP 54600 product complies with the essential requirements a
292. e end of the ranging period the Registered state is not achieved due to interference or other reasons the Master unit will retry twice more on the same channel before moving to another available channel Should this occur it might take a number of minutes to establish a link in the Registered state phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 89 Task 11 Aligning antennas Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Method 2 graphical install This is the second of two methods that may be used to monitor receive signal level during antenna alignment Select menu option Installation Graphical Install The Graphical Install page is displayed Figure 146 Figure 146 Graphical installation page Wireless Install Metric 26 Up Wireless Link Status Permissh le values are Up Registering Searching and Acquiring Recewe Power Bar instantaneous recewe power The colour of is Trace of receve power over green when the wireless the previous three minutes Ink status is up otherwise it is red The screen displays the receive power over the last three minutes This will allow the installer to slowly sweep the antenna during installation and monitor the variation in signal strength with angular position The screen automatically refreshes every three seconds The screen also displays the current state of the wireless link in two ways First the actual state of the wireless link is written in the top left corner
293. e for Cambium its licensors and other 3 Party supplied software certain exclusive rights for copyrighted material including the exclusive right to copy reproduce in any form distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material Accordingly any copyrighted material of Cambium its licensors or the 3 Party software supplied material contained in the Cambium products described in this document may not be copied reproduced reverse engineered distributed merged or modified in any manner without the express written permission of Cambium Furthermore the purchase of Cambium products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication estoppel or otherwise any license under the copyrights patents or patent applications of Cambium or other 3rd Party supplied software except for the normal non exclusive royalty free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product Restrictions Software and documentation are copyrighted materials Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law No part of the software or documentation may be reproduced transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language in any form or by any means without prior written permission of Cambium License Agreements The software described in this document is the property of Cambium and its licensors It is furnished by express license agreement only and may be used only in
294. e over which the system counters were collected Other attributes The System Statistics page contains two other attributes Table 144 After updating the Statistics Page Refresh Period field select Submit Page Refresh Period Attribute Table 144 Other attributes in the System Statistics page Meaning Elapsed Time Indicator Elapsed time since the last system reboot Statistics Page Refresh Period The statistics page refreshes automatically according to the setting entered here in seconds phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Managing performance Checking detailed counters The Detailed Counters page displays detailed statistics of the Ethernet Bridge and the underlying wireless performance The Detailed Counters page is subdivided into two columns Ethernet interface and wireless interface To check detailed counters select menu option System Statistics Detailed Counters The Detailed Counters page is displayed Figure 177 Review the detailed counters Table 145 phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 7 41 Managing performance 7 42 Figure 177 Detailed Counters page Chapter 7 Operation Detailed Counters Ethernet irutes E atiriutes A nts Ethernet Rx Octets Ethernet Tx Octets Ethernet Rx Drops Ethernet Rx Packets Ethernet Rx Broadcasts Ethernet Rx Multicasts Ethernet Rx Cre And Align Ethernet Rx Undersize Ethernet Rx Oversize Ethernet Rx Fr
295. e specified channel center frequencies may not be available in other region codes Figure 61 PTP 54600 available spectrum in 30 MHz channel bandwidth 5516 5576 5606 5636 5666 5696 LCF 5486 5526 5556 5586 5646 5506 5536 5566 5596 5626 5656 5686 Lor 54gg 248 5518 5578 5608 5638 5668 5698 5498 5528 5558 5588 5618 5678 5708 5508 5538 5568 5598 5628 5658 5688 LCF 5490 5520 5550 5580 5610 5640 5670 5700 5500 5530 5560 5590 5620 5650 5680 5600 5660 5690 5522 5552 5582 5642 ee ee 5502 5532 5562 5592 5622 5652 5682 5512 5542 5572 5602 5632 5662 5692 LCF 5494 5494 5524 5584 5614 5674 5704 5504 9594 5624 5514 5574 5604 5604 5470 MHz 5725 MHz phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 23 Wireless specifications Chapter 4 Reference information Figure 62 PTP 54600 available spectrum in 15 MHz channel bandwidth 5470 MHz 5725 MHz Figure 63 PTP 54600 available spectrum in 10 MHz channel bandwidth Lcr 5476 154761 5488 5500 5512 5524 5536 5548 5560 5572 5584 5596 5608 5620 5632 5644 5656 5668 5680 5692 5704 5716 5482 5496 5506 5513 5566 5602 5650 5662 LCF 5478 Lor 54go 5480 5492 5504 5516 5528 5540 5552 5564 5576 5588 5600 5612 5624 5636 5648 5660 5684
296. e to the electrical safety specifications listed in Table 79 Table 79 PTP 600 safety compliance specifications Region Specification USA UL 60950 Canada CSA C22 2 No 60950 International CB certified amp certificate to IEC 60950 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC compliance The PTP 600 complies with European EMC Specification EN301 489 1 with testing carried out to the detailed requirements of EN301 489 4 Aa NOTE For EN 61000 4 2 1995 Electro Static Discharge ESD Class 2 8 kV air 4 kV contact discharge the PTP 600 has been tested to ensure immunity to 15 kV air and 8 kV contact phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 4 51 Compliance with safety standards Chapter 4 Reference information Table 80 lists the EMC specification type approvals that have been granted for PTP 600 frequency variants Table 80 EMC emissions compliance Variant Region Specification Type Approvals PTP 25600 USA FCC Part 15 Class B PTP 45600 US Federal PTP 48600 US Federal PTP 49600 USA FCC Part 15B PTP 54600 USA FCC Part 15 Class B Canada RSS Gen and RSS 210 Europe EN55022 CISPR 22 PTP 58600 USA FCC Part 15 Class B Canada RSS Gen and RSS 210 Europe EN55022 CISPR 22 Human exposure to radio frequency energy 4 52 Standards Relevant standards USA and EC applicable when working with RF equipment are ANSI IEEE C95 1 1991 IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to
297. e you sure pop up box is displayed select OK The unit will now reboot The unit should now start up in normal mode but with all configuration erased 5 Ifthe unit fails to start up refer to Testing link end hardware on page 8 2 Rebooting the unit To reboot the unit from the Recovery Options page Figure 184 select Reboot When the Are you sure pop up box is displayed select OK The unit will now reboot The unit should now start up in normal operational mode If the unit fails to start up refer to Testing link end hardware on page 8 2 7 58 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Chapter 8 Troubleshooting This chapter contains procedures for identifying and correcting faults in a PTP 600 link These procedures can be performed either on a newly installed link or on an operational link if communication is lost or after a lightning strike The following topics are described in this chapter Testing link end hardware on page 8 2 describes how to test the link end hardware either when it fails on startup or after a lightning strike Testing the radio link on page 8 11 describes how to test the link when there is no radio communication or when it is unreliable or when the data throughput rate is too low Testing PTP SYNC on page 8 13 describes how to test the PTP SYNC unit and its connections when the PTP SYNC LEDs do not illuminate correctly or when a synchronization fault is suspected Tes
298. easurements The PTP 600 Series performs two mean signal measurements per TDD cycle per channel This mean measurement represents the mean received signal power for the 40 microsecond measurement period The Spectrum Management algorithm collects measurements equally from all channels This process is called the Channel Availability Check hereafter referred to by the acronym CAC The CAC uses a round robin channel selection process to collect an equal amount of measurements from each channel The CAC measurement process is not altered by the channel barring process Measurements are still collected for all channels irrespective of the number of barred channels Measurement analysis Spectrum Management uses statistical analysis to process the received peak and mean measurement The statistical analysis is based on a fixed one minute measurement quantization period Spectrum Management collects data for the specified quantization period and only at the end of the period is the statistical analysis performed The analysis produces three key metrics for each channel e Peak of Means e 99 9 Percentile of the Means e Mean of Means These metrics are defined in Interpreting the spectrum management plots on page 7 24 Statistical summary The display of statistical measurement on the spectrum management page always shows a statistical summary of all channel measurement The statistical summary is controlled by the Statistics Window attribute
299. ecoms Channel A Loopback e Telecoms Channel B Loopback e TDD Synchronization Alarm e Link Mode Optimization Mismatch e Syslog Disabled Warning e Syslog Local Nearly Full e Syslog Local Wrapped e Syslog Client Disabled Warning e Secure Mode phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 2 45 Security planning Chapter 2 Planning considerations The web based interface may be used to enable or disable generation of each supported SNMP notification or diagnostic alarm Enabling SNMP Enable the SNMP interface for use by configuring the following attributes in the Remote Management page e SNMP State default disabled e SNMP Version default SNMPv1 2c e SNMP Port Number default 161 When the SNMP Version is set to SNMPv1 2c the interface must be additionally configured by entering the following attributes e SNMP Trap IP Address e SNMP Trap Port Number e SNMP Community String Planning for SNMPv3 operation SNMP security mode Decide how SNMPv3 security will be configured MIB based security management uses standard SNMPv3 MIBs to configure the user based security model and the view based access control model This approach provides considerable flexibility allowing a network operator to tailor views and security levels appropriate for different types of user MIB based security management may allow a network operator to take advantage of built in security management capabilities of existing network managers Web based security manag
300. ect Reset System Histograms and Measurement Period Table 140 System Histograms attributes in the System Statistics page Attribute Meaning Transmit Power Receive Power The transmit power histogram calculated over a one hour period The receive power histogram calculated over a one hour period Vector Error The vector error measurement compares the received signal IQ modulation characteristics to an ideal signal to determine the composite vector error magnitude The histogram is calculated over a one hour period Link Loss The link loss measurement is calculated as follows Peer Tx Power dBm Local Rx Power dBm 2 x Antenna Pattern dBi The histogram is calculated over a one hour period Signal Strength Ratio Transmit Data Rate The Signal Strength Ratio is Power received by the vertical antenna input dB Power received by the horizontal antenna input dB This ratio is presented as max mean min and latest in an histogram format The max min and latest are true instantaneous measurements the mean is the mean of a set of one second means See Diagnostics calculated over time on page 7 47 The data rate in the transmit direction expressed in Mbps and presented as max mean min and latest in an histogram format The max min and latest are true instantaneous measurements the mean is the mean of a set of one second means Expected data rates can be found in Data throughput t
301. ecurity and check the Secure Mode Alarm value 2 Ifthe alarm is Secure mode is active the unit is in FIPS 140 2 secure mode and no further action is needed 3 Ifthe alarm is Secure mode is not configured return to Using the Security Wizard on page 6 24 and check that all Security Wizard settings are correct for FIPS 140 2 Secure Mode Alarm P nr Aue AEREO Le Te If this alarm is extant it is also displayed in the System Summary page 4 Ifthe alarm is Secure mode is configured but not active return to Step 7 HTTP and Telnet settings on page 6 31 and check that HTTP Access Enabled is set to No Secure Mode Alarm E nr AO AE L ae TE If this alarm is extant it is also displayed in the System Summary page A NOTE If it is necessary to exit from FIPS 140 2 mode refer to Exiting FIPS 140 2 or UC APL mode on page 7 34 6 112 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Configuring for FIPS 140 2 applications HTTPS key size warning If the HTTPS key size warning alarm Figure 159 is present in the Home page no immediate action is necessary as this alarm does not block the transition to FIPS 140 2 secure mode This alarm is produced because FIPS 140 2 recommends a TLS Private Key of at least 2048 bits but a 1024 bit key has been entered To clear this alarm generate a new TLS certificate with key length of at least 2048 bits then return to Step 2 TLS priva
302. ed 2 Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source 3 This Copyright notice may not be removed or altered from any source or altered source distribution The Contributing Authors and Group 42 Inc specifically permit without fee and encourage the use of this source code as a component to supporting the PNG file format in commercial products If you use this source code in a product acknowledgment is not required but would be appreciated A png_ get copyright function is available for convenient use in about boxes and the like printf s png_ get _copyright NULL Also the PNG logo in PNG format of course is supplied in the files pngbar png and pngbar jpg 88x31 and pngnow png 98x31 Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark of the Open Source Initiative Glenn Randers Pehrson glennrp at users sourceforge net February 14 2009 phn 2512 007v000 Dec 2012 3 17 Cambium Networks end user license agreement Chapter 3 Legal information Bzip2 This program bzip2 the associated library libbzip2 and all documentation are copyright C 1996 2007 Julian R Seward All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the
303. ed for HTTPS TLS operation using FIPS approved cipher specifications 4 Select menu option Management Web Local User Accounts and check that the current user s role is Security Officer 5 Perform Task 3 Installing license keys on page 6 14 and ensure that the installed license key meets all requirements including FIPS 140 2 compatibility Check that Security Level is FIPS Check that Encryption Algorithm is AES If necessary generate and enter a new license key with the above settings 6 Perform Task 4 Upgrading software version on page 6 17 and ensure that the installed software version is prefixed F PS If necessary upgrade to the latest FIPS validated image 7 To confirm that the above steps have been completed check that the FIPS 140 2 Validated logo is displayed in the Navigation Bar phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 111 Configuring for FIPS 140 2 applications Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Configuration procedures for FIPS 140 2 To activate FIPS 140 2 secure mode e Perform Using the Security Wizard on page 6 24 e Perform Configuring local user accounts on page 6 34 taking care to complete the following additional settings o Select Set Best Practice Complexity o Configure appropriate identity based user names and passwords Checking that the unit is in FIPS 140 2 secure mode To confirm that the unit is now in FIPS 140 2 secure mode proceed as follows 1 Select menu option S
304. ed on a wall or a shelf or using an optional rack mounting adaptor in a standard 19 inch rack It is powered using standard power over Ethernet from the PIDU One PTP SYNC unit is required for each synchronized link Figure 15 PTP SYNC kit aa Cambium Networks oa PTP SYNC eee Model number The PTP SYNC model number for example WB3665BB or WB3665AA is located underneath the unit on the bar code label AX NOTE Legacy installations may incorporate PTP SYNC model number WB3665AA This model does not provide all of the LED states that are available in later models Installations with this model are subject to shorter maximum cable lengths see Maximum cable lengths on page 2 7 1 22 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide PTP SYNC unit PTP SYNC unit interfaces The PTP SYNC front panel is illustrated in Figure 16 The annotated interfaces are described in Table 5 and Table 6 Figure 16 PTP SYNC front panel A Cambium Networks ar PTP SYNC a c oo Table 5 PTP SYNC interface functions Number Description Function 1 GPS SYNC IN Input from GPS receiver or from the daisy chained SYNC OUT signal of another PTP SYNC 2 SYNC OUT Output to daisy chained PTP SYNC units 3 USB Input for software upgrades Contact Cambium for instructions 4 1PPS IN Coaxial alternative to GPS SYNC IN Peak input voltage must not exceed 5 V 5 LED bank LEDs and their functi
305. ed over the wireless link The encryption algorithm used is the Advanced Encryption Standard AES with 128 bit and 256 bit key size AES is a symmetric encryption algorithm approved by U S Government organizations and others to protect sensitive information The AES implementation in PTP 600 is approved to FIPS 197 Encryption is enabled through the purchase of an upgrade Region codes 1 32 Some aspects of wireless operation are controlled enforced or restricted according to a region code PTP 600 region codes represent individual countries for example Denmark or regulatory regions for example FCC or ETSI Region codes affect the following aspects of wireless operation e Maximum transmit power e Radar avoidance e Transmit power reduction in edge channels e Frequency range phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Wireless operation e Channel plan A region code is encoded in the PTP 600 license key The region code can be changed by generating and entering a new license key A NOTE Some units are supplied with two alternative license keys for different region codes one of which is factory configured To avoid possible enforcement action by the country regulator always operate links in accordance with local regulations PTP networks Using Intelligent Dynamic Frequency Selection The Intelligent Dynamic Frequency Selection i DFS feature allows a PTP 600 unit to select wireless channels f
306. ed to operate in FIPS 140 2 secure mode password complexity configuration must be set to Best Practise Values To set these options proceed as follows 1 Select menu option Management Web Local User Accounts The User Accounts page is displayed Figure 117 Review and update the password complexity configuration attributes Table 107 To reset all attributes to the best practice values as shown in Table 107 select Set Best Practice values This is required for FIPS 140 2 4 To return to default values select Set Default Complexity If any attributes have been updated select Submit User Account Updates Table 107 Password complexity configuration attributes Attribute Meaning Best practice Minimum Password The minimum number of characters required in 10 Length passwords Password Can No means that passwords must not contain the No Contain User Name user name Yes means that passwords may contain the user name Minimum The minimum number of lowercase uppercase 2 Mandatory numeric and special characters required in Characters passwords For example if all values are set to 2 then FredBloggs will be rejected but FredBloggs 25 will be accepted phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 37 Task 5 Configuring security Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Attribute Meaning Best practice Maximum Repeated The maximum nu
307. eed as follows 1 5 8 Check that the LPU kit includes a back to back cable with RJ45 connectors and glands at both ends Figure 13 This is a short length not more than 600 mm to connect the ODU to the top LPU Connect one end of the back to back cable to the PIDU port of the ODU as described in Connecting an RJ45 and gland to a unit on page 5 21 Connect the other end of the back to back cable to the top LPU either port as described in Connecting an RJ45 and gland to a unit on page 5 21 Connect one ODU ground cable small lug to the top LPU Connect the other ODU ground cable large lug to the to the supporting structure grounding point within 0 3 meters 1 ft of the ODU bracket and on the same metal if necessary remove paint and apply anti oxidant compound first Do not attach grounding cables to the ODU mounting bracket bolts as this arrangement will not provide full protection If local regulations mandate the independent grounding of all devices then connect a third ground cable from the top LPU to the grounding system To prevent corrosion and possible loss of ground continuity weatherproof the grounding points phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Installing the ODU and top LPU Installing an UltraSync GPS receiver If the chosen TDD synchronization method requires UltraSync GPS see Configuration options for TDD synchronization on page 2 30 then perform this task to install th
308. eegs bigddage cient eeimetiants 2 7 Wind loading ssccsezssecsacesdscuspasa nes iceesdedaccta nesaaatwaiwadenceapeneannanancea nas Qunneuaed iuaeude tdeaa deed aapanebaaastecebes 2 9 Hazardous locations iic ss0 lt vveiltccusctasnccsbeseecnsedatecunasanseustaneratubacershiaster icleasselaieanunbedraysotiseraensite 2 11 Link plana 3 jeep ee ae oe ro OO oe ee eee 2 12 PUP LIN KR PODNO cio 0s22455 aneseaseecesadgyesagsannaceuieoaavansaupossauneaaanssaasetecanteos ataatasiad E 2 12 RanGecandObstaclessssiyscsz ses asect na no inet acces eau aauae ae once ean Sateen ete 2 12 PTP LINKPlanner for synchronized networks cccsssesccccesessecceseeeecccsenseccenseeseeceseeseeees 2 13 Path LOSS COnSIM SP AULOMS 23 ys ind cwssispadsassice x ioe tances oases can arace haeaisbeditesce aah Giese eee eaa ater eeedaa aie 2 13 System threshold output power and link lOSS ccs siceissaseseecsvessexsoanasancavsrawsies seasseosonsenerevecews 2 15 Calculating data Pate Capacity cisc ciecisiissagdaconiadd sine desagdsasasasaseaced aan aasasaaaacee EAE KEETE 2 15 Planning Tor cOnnmectori zed UNITS irmas A Soe ease eR Ss eee 2 17 When to install Connectorized WHits icc s s2scisecesscasssasedeeiversanacarunne a eespauetec aber ERARE 2 17 Choosing external antennas sssr nene e eaaa Ea eE RE Gadsteon anaes 2 17 Calculating maximum power level for connectorized units ssssessseressseeressseressseresss 2 18 Calculating RF cable length 5 8 GHZ FCC Only sicsssi
309. eenessenses 6 101 Figure 152 Time Configuration page SNTP enabled ccc cccseeseccceeeeseccneeseeeceeeeeeeeceseeeseees 6 102 Figure 153 Fiber license key InStru Gio nS 4cacsaevics oniedice sanatasnacaws Ne E A A taveaseareseniadiat 6 105 Figure 154 Fiber license key alarm yic2 ciessscenis iaedicansadeesan cease eancauo sian cen we A een AR O 6 106 Figure 155 Ethernet fiber support Cmabled iicseicsacsssecssisssnassvicsseesdaasscasveceseeassssaGedatassoecasessaaansecees 6 106 Figure 156 Ethernet fiber link enabled sss scssesssscebosswnwsnnsaneanensaweanieecebnedenunanes baneetedawevedeantereyces 6 108 Figure 157 SPP Configuration Page csiscssicszisstasdactanistacasceosscangessacauddesadgsnaddsanencs OAR EEEE 6 109 Figure 158 Save amp Restore Configuration page sssesssessseesseessersseesssrssserssersseresersseresereseese 6 110 Figure 159 HTTPS key size warning alari siccs c2e3ser dsgenedeadeces innne AE R T 6 113 Figure 160 Login page with username seciisss iiare ian EEEE Er EEEE 7 2 Figure 161 System Summary Pag 6 srrsrciiserresisceik Eirne ran ENNEN ENEE EEEE E 7 5 Figure 1602 System Status Pag 6 rerna a E N EE ON E A 7 6 Figure 163 Status page TDD enabled and synchronized nsssseresesseressseeessssersssseresssseressse 7 13 Figure 164 Status page TDD enabled and not synchronized ssssssressssseressseressseresseeersssse 7 13 Figure 165 Alarm warning triangle s 2ic ssdissecstacsed c
310. efresh is always initiated by the local browser and not by the PTP 600 Series at this interval 7 6 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Web based management The two PTP 600 Series units are arranged in a master and slave relationship The roles of the units in this relationship are displayed in the page title The master unit will always have the title Master and the slave will always have Slave appended to the Systems Status page title The status page attributes are defined in Table 132 Table 132 System Status attributes Attribute Meaning Link Name The link name is allocated by the system administrator and is used to identify the equipment on the network The link name attribute is limited to a maximum size of 63 ASCII characters Site Name The site name is allocated by the system administrator and can be used as a generic scratch pad to describe the location of the equipment or any other equipment related notes The site name attribute is limited to a maximum size of 63 ASCII characters Software Version The attribute describes the version of software installed on the equipment The format of the attributes is FFSSS XX YY where FF is the frequency variant 2 5 4 5 5 4 5 8 or 5 9 GHz SSS is the System Release XX is the major release version and YYis the minor release version Hardware Version The hardware version attribute contains all the combined hardware ve
311. el CE 10889 PTP 58600 operation in the UK The PTP 58600 connectorized product has been notified for operation in the UK and when operated in accordance with instructions for use it is compliant with UK Interface Requirement IR2007 For UK use installations must conform to the requirements of IR2007 in terms of EIRP spectral density against elevation profile above the local horizon in order to protect Fixed Satellite Services The frequency range 5795 5815 MHz is assigned to Road Transport amp Traffic Telematics RTTT in the U K and shall not be used by FWA systems in order to protect RTTT devices UK Interface Requirement IR2007 specifies that radiolocation services shall be protected by a Dynamic Frequency Selection DFS mechanism to prevent co channel operation in the presence of radar signals PTP 59600 regulatory compliance Russia This system has been tested for type approval in Russia of fixed link equipment under the heading of BPD TZS 12 CeptudukaT COOTBETCTBHA Cpok jleiicTBua OC 1 PJI 0241 c 28 oxtaOpa 2008 r 4 72 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Notifications Thailand notification Aa NsaANUiANLAcaUNIMu NAMNADAAADIOINGANINUAUAY ANY This telecommunication equipment conforms to the requirements of the National Telecommunications Commission phn 2512 007v000 Dec 2012 4 73 Data throughput tables Chapter 4 Reference information Data throughput tables This section c
312. el B Cable Length 133 O26 O399 Os33 O655 feet Lowest Telecoms Modulation Mode BPSK 0 63 i Submit Interface Configuration Next gt Table 110 Step 1 Interface Configuration standard attributes Attribute Meaning IP Address Updated in Configuring the IP interface and management mode on page 6 7 Subnet Mask Updated in Configuring the IP interface and management mode on page 6 7 Gateway IP Updated in Configuring the IP interface and management mode on Address page 6 7 Use VLAN For Updated in Configuring the IP interface and management mode on Management page 6 7 Interfaces VLAN Only displayed when Use VLAN for Management Interfaces is Management VID enabled Updated in Configuring the IP interface and management mode on page 6 7 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 49 Task 6 6 50 Configuring wireless and telecoms interfaces Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Attribute Meaning VLAN Only displayed when Use VLAN for Management Interfaces is Management enabled Updated in Configuring the IP interface and management Priority mode on page 6 7 Management Only displayed when Use VLAN for Management Interfaces is Mode enabled Updated in Configuring the IP interface and management mode on page 6 7 Telecoms This allows the activation of the telecoms interface The selection Interface options are None E1 or T1 Telecoms Channel Selection Only displayed w
313. elnet port Yes means that the unit will respond to requests on the Telnet port Telnet Port Number Access Control Access Control IP Address 1 2 3 The port number for Telnet access A value of zero means the wireless unit uses the default port Enables or disables access control to web based management by IP address A list of up to three IP addresses permitted to perform web based management Only displayed when Access Control is Enabled SNMP Control of HTTP And Telnet Disabled means that neither HTTP nor Telnet can be controlled remotely via SNMP Enabled means that both HTTP and Telnet can be controlled remotely via SNMP TFTP Client Disabled means that the unit will not respond to any TFTP software download requests Enabled means that software can be downloaded via TFTP as described in Upgrading software on page 7 49 Debug Access Enabled Yes means that Cambium Technical Support is allowed to access the system to investigate faults Cross Site Request Forgery Protection Enabled means that the system is protected against cross site request forgery attacks at the web based interface phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 11 Aligning antennas Task 11 Aligning antennas Before performing this task check that hardware installation is complete apart from the network connections at both the Master
314. ement allows an operator to configure users security levels privacy and authentication protocols and passphrases using the PTP 600 web based management interface The capabilities supported are somewhat less flexible than those supported using the MIB based security management but will be sufficient in many applications Selection of web based management for SNMPv3 security disables the MIB based security management PTP 600 does not support concurrent use of MIB based and web based management of SNMPv3 security 2 46 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Security planning Web based management of SNMPv3 security Initial configuration of SNMPv3 security is available only to HTTP or HTTPS TLS user accounts with security role of Security Officer Identify the minimum security role of HTTP or HTTPS TLS user accounts that will be permitted access for web based management of SNMPv3 security Two roles are available e System Administrator e Security Officer Identify the format used for SNMP Engine ID Three formats are available e MAC address default e IP address e Text string If SNMP Engine ID will be based on a text string identify the text string required by the network management system This is often based on some identifier that survives replacement of the PTP hardware Identify the user names and security roles of initial SNMPv3 users Two security roles are available e Read Only e System Administrator
315. ent of SNMPv3 security allows for two security roles e Read Only e System Administrator Read Only and System Administrator users are associated with fixed views allowing access to the whole of the MIB excluding the objects associated with SNMPv3 security System Administrators have read write access as defined in the standard and proprietary MIBs Web based management of SNMPv3 security allows an operator to define the security levels and protocols for each of the security roles all users with the same role share a common selection of security level and protocols Web based security configuration is re initialized when any of the following occurs e All ODU configuration data is erased e The SNMP Engine ID Format has been changed e The SNMP Engine ID Format is IP Address and the IP Address has been changed e The SNMP Engine ID Format is Text String and the text string has been changed phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide System management e The SNMP Engine ID Format is MAC Address and configuration has been restored using a file saved from a different unit e SNMPv3 Security Management is changed from MIB based to web based Additionally all SNMP user accounts are disabled when the authentication protocol the privacy protocol or the security level is changed Downgrade of the license key A possible lockout condition exists if a user downgrades the PTP 600 license key so as to disable the AES
316. entaeteeeees 1 25 Time division duplexing isnin adea aa ina EE RA EAE EEE EEEE 1 25 Link mode optimization soeces a a A EAER EORNA ERNES 1 27 EINK Sy MEY eeen nE E O N E E 1 27 OFDM and channel bandwidth eiciceiio cineri a Ear teats 1 28 Spe irum manageme Di aerar NOIN EEEE E TE EEEE 1 28 Adapuve modulatio esserne na E E EA EO 1 30 MIMO E E a ie senccerdes 1 30 Intelligent dynamic frequency Selection sssiescctesavnczessdancsacansadsgned i a EN kai 1 31 Radar avoidanC Escini ne a a OS AE 1 31 ECTO O n aA N NNR 1 32 RETON Od Onna E E A oa eee E TAA O 1 32 PIP NECWOLK S ciin a E E 1 33 TOD syncOronizatio Missers aa EE E E E E aa 1 34 installation armed State sscricsnosisnenesnrs ne a e A cup E EE E EE A E E ETIE 1 36 Further reading on wireless operation sseesseesseesseesseesseessscssscesscessressressressressressreessees 1 36 Ethernet DEG GIN eresas npea EAA EE OER ONGS 1 38 Customer MELWOL KK venasini a a EA E E 1 38 Management netWork erener a ET 1 40 Back to back LINKS sos czssesseaicsanstscednasangaie neris e ea E gan EE E O E RE E TERENI 1 42 Protocol model seszcesscssdeshstesdenasenvens blesses sosnaeskd eee dade r a AS 1 42 Further reading on Ethernet Dridging scessisessdevsezisesusdectaavinceshewseieieeusacsassaneavesess aces aeteerereats lt 1 45 Telecoms CIPCUIUS wsissecs venessasedsddecacrsna ean veseavdss a A R RVE EE E EENE GEN 1 46 Lowest telecoms modulation MOG siginn E 1 46 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series
317. ep 1 Enter Key of Keys page Step 1 Enter Key of Keys The wireless unit uses a key of keys strategy to encrypt all CSPs before they are stored in non volatile memory If the key of keys is erased or updated all previous archived encrypted CSPs will be rendered inaccessible Key Of Keys seewccc cece cece reece eee SSE E SESS E SESE SESE ESSE E SEES Confirm Key Of Keys Hext gt gt phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 5 Configuring security Step 2 TLS private key and public certificate If the certificates expire the unit will be unreachable If this occurs put the unit into recovery mode and erase all configuration For more information refer to Using recovery mode on page 7 53 The Step 2 TLS Private Key and Public Certificate page is displayed Figure 110 If a valid TLS private key exists then an SHA 1 thumbprint of the key is displayed If this key is correct then take no action Otherwise select Browse and select the generated private key file der If a valid TLS public certificate exists then an SHA 1 thumbprint of the certificate is displayed If this certificate is correct then take no action Otherwise select Browse and select the generated certificate file der Select Next Figure 110 Step 2 TLS Private Key and Public Certificate page Step 2 Enter TLS Private Key and Public Certificate Please select the TLS private key and public ce
318. er A NOTE These tables contain data for one typical region code The specified channel center frequencies may not be available in other region codes The PTP 49600 product variant does not apply any band edge power reduction Figure 58 PTP 49600 available spectrum in 20 MHz channel bandwidth ra 4950 4970 4980 4955 4965 4975 4940 MHz 4990 MHz Figure 59 PTP 49600 available spectrum in the 10 MHz channel bandwidth LCF 4945 4945 4955 4965 4975 M 4950 4960 4970 I 4940 MHz 4990 MHz Figure 60 PTP 49600 available spectrum in the 5 MHz channel bandwidth LCF 4942 5 49425 4952 5 4962 5 4972 5 4982 5 4947 5 4957 5 4967 5 4977 5 4987 5 4940 MHz 4990 MHz 4 22 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Wireless specifications PTP 54600 available spectrum settings Use the Lower Center Frequency attribute see Step 2 Wireless configuration on page 6 51 to slide the available channels up and down the 5 4 GHz band in steps of 2 MHz In the 30 MHz channel bandwidth Figure 61 the PTP 54600 variant operates on a 10 MHz channel raster In the 15 MHz Figure 62 10 MHz Figure 63 and 5 MHz Figure 64 channel bandwidths the PTP 54600 variant operates on a 6 MHz channel raster The channel raster is set to even center frequencies The PTP 54600 product variant does not apply any band edge power reduction Aa NOTE These tables contain data for one typical region code Th
319. er to maintain accurate clock synchronization The relay of telecoms data resumes automatically when the link reaches a suitable modulation mode Links that are able to operate consistently in a high modulation mode can take advantage of lower link latency This option is configured by setting the Lowest Telecoms Modulation Mode during installation Appropriate settings for this control may be determined by using the PTP LINKPlanner tool The reduction in latency is achieved by disabling the relay of telecoms data in lower modulation modes and this necessarily results in somewhat lower availability for the telecoms circuit The loss of availability can be estimated using the Link Planner The unit will override the user setting of Lowest Telecoms Modulation Mode if the selected mode has insufficient capacity to carry the telecoms data or if the mode demands very high latency and requires more buffering than the link can provide When the effective mode differs for Single and Dual Payload operation two modes will be displayed Lowest Dual Payload Modulation Mode and Lowest Single Payload Modulation Mode Fixed frequency operation 1 46 In the PTP 600 link data errors may occur during channel changes on an operational link It may be appropriate to minimize channel change related errors in a link carrying Telecoms traffic by preventing channel changes initiated by i DFS This can be achieved by barring all channels except one in the Spectrum
320. eration other channel bandwidths are similar The width of the vertical green bar represents the channel width Figure 168 Spectrum Management as seen from the Slave 40 50 60 90 100 Local Receive Channel Spectrum E ao v T 70 2 80 90 100 wo N ao at D wo N oO at D wo N ao a o wo N oO oO a a N wo wo p p oO D D D oO N N oO 0 rt r r r M o oO oo oO oO oO oO el N N N p N p N N N ed wy wy wy Ww wy N wy Channel Center Frequency MHz Peer Receive Channel Spectrum Active Channel History Help 40 50 60 E a 2 5 70 2 80 C E atrinutes vate units Spectrum Management Page Refresh Period 3600 g Seconds Channel Bandwidth 15 MHz Tx Color Code B Rx Color Code A 5736 5742 5748 5754 5760 5766 5772 5778 5784 5790 5796 5802 5808 5820 5826 5832 5838 5814 Channel Center Frequency MHz Submit configuration changes phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 7 23 Managing spectrum Chapter 7 Operation Interpreting the spectrum management plots The Spectrum Management pages at the master and slave Figure 167 and Figure 168 display two graphical plots e Local Receive Channel Spectrum e Peer Receive Channel Spectrum A more detailed example of one of these plots is shown in Figure 169 Figure 169 Example spectrum management plot 40 50 60 70 Power dBm 80 a T E aie i 100 5742 5752 5762 5772 782 792 5802 582
321. erence C Enabled Diagnostic Alarms Authentication Failure E Data Port Up Down E Telecoms Channel Up Down SNMP Trap Port Number 10 az ln laa 162 e Mo fe i 162 Hext gt gt phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 7 Setting up SNMP agent Table 120 Step 3 SNMP Trap Configuration attributes for SNMPv1 2c Attribute Meaning SNMP Trap Select the SNMP protocol version to use for SNMP traps v1 or Version v2c SNMP Enabled Select the events that will generate SNMP traps Traps SNMP Trap IP The IP address of the first SNMP server trap receiver This will Address 1 normally be the network management system but it may be a separate trap receiver Enter zeros to disable logging on the first SNMP server SNMP Trap Port The server 1 port at which SNMP traps are received Number 1 SNMP Trap IP The IP address of the second SNMP server trap receiver This will Address 2 normally be the network management system but it may be a separate trap receiver Enter zeros to disable logging on the second SNMP server SNMP Trap Port The server 2 port at which SNMP traps are received Number 2 Confirm SNMP Configuration for SNMPv1 2c When the Confirm SNMP Configuration page Figure 141 is displayed review the settings and select either Back or Confirm SNMP Configuration and Reboot When the settings are confirmed the unit reboots phn
322. erfaces Interface Function Ground studs For grounding the ODU to the supporting structure The ground cables supplied with the ODU may be connected to either ground stud E1 T1 RJ45 socket for optional E1 or T1 network connection not via the PIDU AUX Auxiliary RJ45 socket In OOBM product variants this may be used for connection to a management network for out of SYNC band management In all product variants it may be used for connection to an UltraSync GPS timing reference source This is labeled SYNC on older ODUs FIBER Fiber optic socket for optional network connection not via the PIDU using a 1000BaseSX Fiber Optic cable PIDU RJ45 socket for connecting to power supply and network via the PIDU phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Outdoor unit ODU Connectorized ODU antenna interfaces The connectorized ODU also has interfaces to connect to an external antenna Figure 5 via an N type connector with cable of type LMR100 LMR200 LMR300 LMR400 or LMR600 The V interface is for vertical polarization and the H interface is for horizontal polarization Figure 5 Connectorized ODU antenna interfaces Vv H Mounting brackets The ODU is supplied with a bracket for mounting it to a pole of 50mm 2 to 75mm 3 in diameter The bracket allows for adjustment in both azimuth and elevation The bracket may be split to allow the pole mount secti
323. es Step 2 Wireless configuration Step 2 of the Installation wizard is for updating the wireless configuration Figure 126 shows a typical example of the Wireless Configuration page The actual contents of the page vary depending upon frequency variant region code and the options selected The attributes are described in Table 111 Update the attributes as required and select Next Figure 126 Step 2 Wireless data entry Access Method Target MAC Address Dual Payload Master Slave Mode Link Mode Optimization TDD Synchronization Mode Tx Max Power Ranging Mode Target Range Platform Variant Antenna Gain Cable Loss Channel Bandwidth Link Symmetry Spectrum Management Control Lower Center Frequency Tx Color Code Rx Color Code Max Receive Modulation Mode Lowest Ethernet Modulation Mode Installation Mode 44 Back Wireless Configuration page example Step 2 Wireless Configuration Please enter the following wireless configuration parameters ink Access O Link Name Access 00 04 56 ao fe les O disabled Enabled Master O Slave P Traffic O TDM Traffic Disabled O Enabled 25 Auto 0 to 40 km O Auto 0 to 100 km o Auto 0 to 200 km O Target Range O Integrated Antenna connectorized 23 0 0 0 30 mHz O 15 MHz 10 MHz O 5 MHz O2t01 1t01 O1t02 prs Ors with i_DFS A v Av 64QAM 0 92 BPSK 0 63 v
324. es Refer to blink STATUS LED double blinks on page 8 14 ODU Off No signal being received from the ODU Refer to ODU LED does not illuminate within 90 seconds on page 8 14 On Communication with the ODU is established Blink red Error in communication with ODU Refer to ODU LED blinks red on page 8 15 These states are not available in PTP SYNC model number WB3665AA The model number is located underneath the unit on the bar code label phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 Testing PTP SYNC Chapter 8 Troubleshooting LEDs do not illuminate Meaning The PTP SYNC unit is not powered up Action Ensure that there is a cable connection between the PIDU ODU interface and the PIDU IN interface of the PTP SYNC unit Confirm that the PIDU is powered up STATUS LED is on steady Meaning There is power but no satellite lock This probably indicates that a 1PPS synchronization pulse is not detected by the PTP SYNC unit Action Depending on system configuration take one of the following actions e System using a GPS receiver module Ensure that there is a cable connection between the PTP SYNC GPS SYNC IN interface and the LPU also that there is a cable connection between the LPU and the GPS receiver module Check that the GPS receiver module has an uninterrupted view of the sky e System using an alternative 1PPS timing source Ensure that there is a cable connection between the PTP SYNC GPS SYNC IN or
325. es curve Lun lee cceeeececeeeeeeeecceeeseecenseeeeesenen 4 90 Figure 89 PTP 600 range adjustment for data rates curve No 0 eeeeecceeeeececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceenaeeeeeeenea 4 91 Figure 90 PTP 600 range adjustment for data rates CUIVE O ceeeccceseeccccceeesececeeeeseecenaeeeeeenen 4 91 Figure 91 Do not reverse the rear bracket strap c scssscssssscscadscssssaeses sdeasnanssas ssasaeescaceieasddneaeanacnssies 5 4 Figure 92 ODU with mounting bracket and earth bonding leads eecccecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 5 5 Figure 93 Top LPU mounting OPUONS wiseviieeidacencveta veemwseadeasavedn teamed R OAE AE EN ROEE ETE 5 6 Figure 94 Ultrasyne deployment diagrami cic cscsscssssssecsascasscsacdasgesancassesardodddeacdoasassacoehdanaceaneseedeanies 5 9 Figure 95 UliraSyne Umit COMME CHODS tsizssitsacchereasdenestioaupanssestasasdasaaadsanndangeganetaunamennacn bans Heetenaae tens 5 9 Figure 96 Correct cable preparation for drop cable of the supported type cccceceeeeeeeeeees 5 19 Figure 97 Drop cable with RJ 45 and Glan Gisises ix scetentteaacpceeceades veered A aE AAEE 5 20 Figure 98 Grounding at Du ilding Entry od sesiu descossacexavansiens eossacwannerscussendasastwendanaarencenadeaevenmteonesion 5 27 Figure 99 Rack mount securing screws for PTP SYNC ccccecccsseseececeeeeeceeseeeceenseneeceeeaueeeeeeaes 5 33 Figure 100 PTP SYNC mounted on a Walll oii sassssstacsnssetagicasssaeecaadenacseasedaesiogssnacdeaaaeacatesaveccae
326. es before transmission over the wireless link The fragment size is selected automatically according to channel bandwidth and modulation mode of the wireless link Fragments are reassembled on reception and incomplete Ethernet frames are discarded Lowest Ethernet Modulation Mode The PTP 600 ODU can be configured to discard Ethernet frames when the modulation mode is lower than the configured Lowest Ethernet Modulation Mode This feature is likely to be useful in networks that have alternate routes for example in a ring or mesh topology where EAPS or RSTP is used to resolve loops In this application Lowest Ethernet Modulation Mode should be set to ensure that an active link will provide at least the minimum necessary capacity for high priority constant bit rate traffic such as voice over IP or TDM pseudo wire An active link will be blocked when the capacity falls below the minimum required triggering a routing change in associated Ethernet switches to bring alternate links into use Lowest Ethernet Modulation Mode should normally be set to BPSK 0 63 Single in simply connected tree networks or other topologies that do not have alternative routes phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 1 39 Ethernet bridging Chapter 1 Product description Management network 1 40 IP interface The PTP 600 ODU contains an embedded management agent with a single IP interface Network management communication is exclusively based on IP and associated higher laye
327. es plot is displayed Figure 175 This plot displays the results of all previous measurement quantization periods up to a maximum of 132 periods The colored lines represent interference measurements Table 139 Figure 175 Spectrum management time series plot wvv v v Power dBm 25h 22h 19h 16h 13h 10h 7h 4h 60m 50m 40m 30m 20m 10m Om Quanrtisation Interval History Table 139 Interference represented in the time series plot Color Meaning Peak of Means interference measurement 99 9 percentile of means interference measurement Mean of Means interference measurement phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 7 33 Managing security Chapter 7 Operation Managing security This section contains the following procedures e Exiting FIPS 140 2 or UC APL mode on page 7 34 e Zeroizing critical security parameters on page 7 34 Other security configuration procedures are described in Task 5 Configuring security on page 6 21 Exiting FIPS 140 2 or UC APL mode To exit from the FIPS 140 2 or UC APL mode load PTP 600 software that is not FIPS 140 2 or UC APL validated ANOTE The critical security parameters CSPs are zeroized when the unit is no longer FIPS 140 2 Capable Zeroizing critical security parameters Critical security parameters CSPs are as follows e Key of keys e AES encryption keys for the wireless interface e Private key for the HTTPS TLS interface e Entropy
328. ets have been lost This is reported by Command Prompt on completion of the test The test has passed if the number of lost packets is less than 2 Test resistance in the ODU cable Perform this task to test the resistances between the RJ45 pins at the PIDU end of the ODU cable Use the PTP drop cable tester Figure 186 to make testing easier This can be ordered from the support website see Contacting Cambium Networks on page 2 by completing the order form Aa NOTE The values printed on the PTP drop cable tester are example values and should only be used for guidance Figure 186 Drop cable tester front and back views in G PO NOT USE BOARD WHERE S PLUGGED INTO PIOU Hi E DEPLOYMENT R INSTRUCTIONS 8 8 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Testing link end hardware If PTP SYNC is not installed unplug the drop cable from the ODU port of the PIDU If PTP SYNC is installed unplug the drop cable from the ODU OUT port of the PTP SYNC unit Connect the drop cable tester to the end of the drop cable Then perform the tests described in Table 150 Record the results in the Result column if this is helpful Table 150 Rj 45 cable resistance tests at the PIDU end Step Test Result 1 Measure the resistance between pins 1 and 2 Ohms 2 Measure the resistance between pins 3 and 6 Ohms 3 Measure the resistance between pins 4 and 5 Ohms 4 Measure the resistan
329. evision reception this can be determined by turning the equipment off and on attempt the following corrective actions Realign or relocate the antenna Increase the separation between the affected equipment and antenna Connect the ODU and PoE power supply into a power outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Contact Cambium Point to Point for assistance phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Testing PTP SYNC Testing PTP SYNC Checking the PTP SYNC LEDs If a fault is suspected in the PTP SYNC or GPS hardware check the PTP SYNC LED states and use Table 151 to choose the correct test procedure Table 151 PTP SYNC indicator LED states LED State Description and test procedure GPS Off No GPS satellite data being received at the GPS SYNC IN port Refer to GPS LED does not illuminate or blink on clustered units on page 8 15 On steady GPS satellite data being received or blink SYNC Off No data being received at the SYNC OUT port On steady Data being received at the SYNC OUT port oe The SYNC LED does not normally illuminate even in cluster configurations STATUS Off No power Refer to LEDs do not illuminate on page 8 14 On steady Power but no satellite lock Refer to STATUS LED is on steady on page 8 14 Blink Power and satellite lock at either the GPS SYNC IN or 1PPS IN port Double Possible fault in GPS SYNC IN or 1PPS IN cabl
330. existence with other users of the band using a combination of Automatic Transmit Power Control ATPC Spectrum Management functionality and Antenna beam shape e High link availability through the use of adaptive modulation techniques that dynamically reduce the data throughput in severe or adverse conditions e High system gain through high sensitivity antennas for improved signal recovery e A radio system that operates on ultra fast digital signal processors but is controlled by updateable firmware e A built in web server for advanced management capabilities including detailed radio signal diagnosis phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Overview of the PTP 600 e Acomprehensive range of security features to prevent unauthorized access to data Optional AES encryption for data transmitted over the wireless with 128 bit or 256 bit encryption keys Optional HTTPS TLS security on the web based management interface SNMPv3 with optional AES privacy and SHA1 authentication Remote authentication using RADIUS Benefit of the chosen bands The PTP 600 operates in bands that offer the dual benefits of high data throughput and good radio propagation characteristics The wide band of spectrum available is subdivided into several channels such that multiple systems can operate in the vicinity without causing interference to one another Similarity to 802 11a devices The PTP 600 Series products are not 802 11a devices Alth
331. f there is no wireless activity proceed as follows 1 vn oOo UOU F amp F WUN 10 11 Check for Alarm conditions on Home page Check that the software at each end of the link is the same version Check that the Target Mac address is correctly configured at each end of the link Check Range Check Tx Power Check License keys to ensure that both units are the same product variant Check Master Slave status for each unit and ensure that one unit is Master and the other unit is slave Check that the link is not obstructed or the ODU misaligned Check the DFS page at each end of the link and establish that there is a quiet wireless channel to use If there are no faults found in the configuration and there is absolutely no wireless signal retry the installation procedure If this does not work then report a suspected ODU fault to Cambium Some activity If there is some activity but the link is unreliable or does not achieve the data rates required proceed as follows 1 2 3 4 Check that the interference has not increased using the i DFS measurements If a quieter channel is available check that it is not barred Check that the path loss is low enough for the communication rates required Check that the ODU has not become misaligned phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 8 11 Testing the radio link Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Radio and television interference 8 12 If a PTP 600 unit is interfering with radio or tel
332. facturing Corp MH860 86 5 Insertion extraction tool Adaptor Deutsch Deutsch 6757 201 2201 IMC2AD Self amalgamating tape E1 or T1 installations E1 or T1 installations require the components listed in Table 41 Table 41 Additional inventory for E1 or T1 or OOBM installations Item Notes Outdoor drop cable Refer to Table 32 for specifications and part numbers RJ45 connectors Refer to Table 32 for specifications and part numbers Cable grounding kits Refer to Table 32 for specifications and part numbers Lightning Protection Unit LPU kit One kit is required per E1 or T1 link total two LPUs For installations not in hazardous locations use LPU End Kit PTP600 Cambium part number WB2907D For installations in hazardous locations use LPU End Kit PTP400 600 Atex Hazloc Compliant Cambium part number WB3938A Kit contents two LPUs grounding cables 600mm ODU to LPU cable nuts bolts and glands 2 74 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Ordering components Item Notes Telecoms network cable Purchase separately Fiber installations Fiber optic installations require the additional components listed in Table 42 Table 42 Additional inventory for fiber installations Item Notes PTP 600 fiber upgrade kit Either 1000BaseSx Extension tube Weatherproofi
333. fiber optic cable from the ODU to the network If the fiber interface becomes active the PTP 600 unit will automatically switch to the fiber interface and will no longer communicate over the copper interface Connect the management PC to the network and log into the ODU Select menu option Status and confirm that the Ethernet Link Status attribute is set to Fiber Link Up Figure 156 phn 2512 007v000 Dec 2012 6 107 Task 16 Configuring the fiber interface Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Figure 156 Ethernet fiber link enabled System Status Master Equipment Wireless Pawrinutes vate unt i tiibutes value tts Link Name Tower of London Wireless Link Status Pi Link Location London England Maximum Transmit Power 2 dBm Software Version 58600 B1 066 wdog Remote Maximum Transmit Power 10 dBm Hardware Version DO4 RO2 Transmit Power 25 0 188 18 0 18 0 dBm Region Code 1 Receive Power 46 4 57 3 110 0 50 5 dBm Elapsed Time Indicator 00 03 13 Vector Error 7 2 226 351 293 dB Ethernet Internet Link Loss 107 5 87 9 0 0 107 5 dB Ethernet Link Status FiberLinkup J Transmit Data Rate 14113 108 57 0 00 141 13 Mbps Ethernet Speed And Duplex 1000 Mbps Full Duplex Receive Data Rate 141 13 108 90 0 00 141 13 Mbps MAC Address 00 04 56 80 0f ff Link Capacity 300 16 Mbps Telecoms Transmit Modulation Mode 256Q4M 0 81 Dual Channel A Disabled Receive Modulation Mode 25604M 0 81 Dual Channel B Disab
334. frames of the same priority for transmission at the wireless port In band local management In the in band local management mode the management agent can be reached from the PIDU port at the local ODU but not from the PIDU port at the remote ODU phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Ethernet bridging Management frames in the customer network are processed by the management agent if a destination MAC address in the frame matches the ODU MAC address and b the VLAN ID in the frame matches the VLAN configuration of the management agent All Ethernet frames in the management VLAN regardless of destination address are filtered discarded at the wireless port In band local management mode is useful in networks that require only local access for network management For correct operation of in band local management mode ensure that the same management VLAN ID is configured at both ends of the link Out of band management PTP 600 supports an end to end out of band management mode in which the management agent can be reached from the AUX port at the local ODU and assuming that the wireless link is established the AUX port at the remote ODU This management mode allows communication from the ODU management port to Ethernet end stations reached through the remote ODU supporting construction of an extended management network that is isolated from the customer network The capacity of the out of band management netwo
335. from the rack mount installation kit Figure 99 Figure 99 Rack mount securing screws for PTP SYNC Rack mount screws Wall mounting If the PTP SYNC is to be on a wall mount it vertically with interfaces and cabling facing downwards Figure 100 Figure 100 PTP SYNC mounted on a wall phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 5 33 Installing a PTP SYNC unit Chapter 5 Installation Connecting up the PTP SYNC unit To connect the PTP SYNC to the PIDU ODU GPS receiver if fitted and LPU if fitted proceed as follows 1 Disconnect the power supply from the PIDU 2 wna 3 To link clustered PTP SYNC units connect the SYNC OUT port of the first PTP SYNC to the GPS SYNC IN port of the second PTP SYNC in the chain Repeat for subsequent PTP SYNC units in the chain 5 34 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Installing a PTP SYNC unit 4 Connect the cable from the PIDU to the PIDU IN port A suitable 1 meter cable is included in the PTP SYNC kit 5 Connect the cable from the ODU to the ODU OUT port 6 Use a grounding cable to connect the ground stud of the PTP SYNC to the master ground bar of the building or to the rack ground bar phn 2512 007v000 Dec 2012 5 35 Installing a PTP SYNC unit Chapter 5 Installation Powering up the PTP SYNC installation To power up the installation proceed as follows 1 Ensure that all cables are connected to the correct interfaces of the PT
336. fter the changes are confirmed and the reboot occurs If it is necessary to make further configuration changes using the local management PC modify the network configuration of the PC Ethernet port to match the new IP and VLAN configuration of the unit phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Figure 129 Step 3 Confirm Installation Configuration page Task 6 Configuring wireless and telecoms interfaces Step 3 Confirm Installation Configuration Please review your entered configuration If any of the configuration items are incorrect please use the back button to apply the corrections Once you re happy with the configuration press the Confirm Configuration and Reboot button this will commit the parameters to non volatile memory and reboot this wireless unit Installation configuration IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Use VLAN For Management Interfaces DSCP Management Priority Telecoms Interface Access Method Target MAC Address Dual Payload Master Slave Mode Spectrum Management Control Link Mode Optimization TDD Synchronization Mode Tx Max Power Ranging Mode Platform Variant Antenna Gain Cable Loss EIRP Channel Bandwidth Link Symmetry Lower Center Frequency Tx Color Code Rx Color Code Max Receive Modulation Mode Lowest Ethernet Modulation Mode Installation Mode 44 Back 1 1 100 3 255 255 0 0 1 1 1 254 No VLAN Tagging 00 DF None Link A
337. g Bridge The classification of each layer 2 control protocol L2CP to an MRP egress queue at the wireless port CFM R APS EAPS Priority Scheme Unknown Protocol Classification is based on fields in the Ethernet header Layer 2 or in the Network header Layer 3 The unit recognizes two network layer protocols IP and MPLS The classification of unknown network protocols not IP or MPLS to an egress queue at the wireless port Only displayed when Priority Scheme is IP MPLS Table 127 Ethernet Priority Queue settings VLAN Priority QoS default traffic class EEE802 1Q traffic class PO QO Q1 P1 Q1 QO P2 Q1 Q2 P3 Q1 Q3 P4 Q1 Q4 P5 Q1 Q5 P6 Q1 Q6 P7 Q1 Q7 Untagged QO Q1 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 15 Connecting link to the network Task 15 Connecting link to the network Perform this task to connect to the network and set the system clock Depending upon the chosen management mode perform one of the following procedures e Connecting to the network with in band management on page 6 99 e Connecting to the network with out of band management on page 6 100 When network connection is successful perform this procedure e Setting the real time clock on page 6 100 Connecting to the network with in band management To connect to the network when in band management has been configured proceed as follows 1 Disconnect the local PC fr
338. g for WAR LO per ao mii a5csscssssaseceancdh eis raa EER N ERE EO eee 2 43 Planning for SIN MiP Operati mss 1os5cs cessed esamenaaus E I A 2 44 Planning for SNMPV3 OPETAatlON ss sss siacsccsetsadacescsacas sgebasacksend EEEN ERE IAEE TEREE 2 46 Planning for RADIUS Opera toms ce s2iesace nacesncs heenies agansde Parada eens caasegasalennas E N E a 2 50 Ordering COmMPOMentS enren an A aapy arenes E ge Ges Sea eal A peg pe 2 53 PTP 60O Kil Siusi aenn fetes vaeh Padus Oa conan read enue eae ea 2 53 Other StandardscOmpone nts veionesscxevexsqeaassngueanenstunasessamemaanensconamnsnnatatwenenuasnesderse reeserzeueeveneel 2 60 Components required with connectorized ODUS cccccccssesceccceeesecccneeeeceeneeceeeceseeseseenaes 2 63 UltraSyne installations 5 i20 iscsacisaeryseisaacasaadoraccasaadddaagasdegecasse bonadvoantaadanessoeeeoesiuemeeaeaneaes 2 71 PTP SY NG installations sec secsasseessivecdaqene meras nri vended eeseus E EE AEE E R ME 2 72 GPS receiver installato S sec ssisedes vateeacsvacavecaseanseaanins sdens aE AER 2 73 BLOF Tl INStawlatiOns 75 dcvnee sccananssenvanssweawepdamnantegnnmean yangecoenenteontanancctiodarecerstuevectbeweevertdexenendes 2 74 Fiber installati n Se vcseedsecaeseseveecsansannnviag uss wanes venweenwadanwsnsauavctanadanune veearveesatie ENS ERREA 2 75 Chapter 3 Legal information ccecsceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaseaeeseaeaseeeaeaeeauaseauageauaseauageas 3 1 Cambium Networks end user license agreement
339. g license keys on page 6 14 describes how to ensure that FIPS 140 2 operation is enabled by license key phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 1 63 FIPS 140 2 mode Chapter 1 Product description 1 64 Task 4 Upgrading software version on page 6 17 describes how to ensure that the installed software version is FIPS 140 2 validated Task 5 Configuring security on page 6 21 describes how to configure the PTP 600 in accordance with the network operator s security policy Exiting FIPS 140 2 or UC APL mode on page 7 34 describes how to disable FIPS 140 2 operation phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Unified Capabilities Approved Product UC APL mode Unified Capabilities Approved Product UC APL mode PTP 600 must be operated in the Unified Capabilities Approved Product List UC APL secure mode when it is deployed as part of a Unified Capabilities network UC APL capability A PTP 600 unit is capable of operating in the UC APL mode when all of the following are true e The hardware security of the ODU is compatible with operation in the FIPS 140 2 mode e The ODU license key has AES encryption enabled e The ODU license key has UC APL operation enabled e The ODU software image is validated for UC APL operation Hardware security Please refer to Hardware security on page 1 60 Validated software image UC APL validated software images are indicated by a UC_APL prefix to the file name for example UC_APL P
340. ge 0 to 4094 that will be included in Ethernet frames generated by the management interfaces VLAN Only displayed when Use VLAN for Management Interfaces is Management enabled Priority Enter the VLAN priority range 0 to 7 that will be included in Ethernet frames generated by the management interfaces phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 9 Task 2 Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Attribute Meaning Management Out of Band Local means that the web interface can be reached Mode from the management port AUX at the local unit only This mode allows the construction of a management network that is isolated from the customer network For more information see Out of band local management on page 1 41 Out of Band means that the web interface can be reached from the management port AUX at both the local and remote units assuming that the wireless link is established For more information see Out of band management on page 1 41 4a NOTE Out of Band Local and Out of Band are only available when the unit is an OOBM hardware variant In Band means that the web interface can be reached from the data port PIDU at both the local and remote units assuming that the wireless link is established This is the default mode For more information see In band management on page 1 40 In Band Local means that the web interface c
341. ge 7 45 CSV Download k Y v 5 m lt E os cf f 5 Downloading diagnostic data on page 7 46 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 7 3 Web based management 7 4 Chapter 7 Operation Procedures License Key Software Upgrade Checking licensed capabilities on page 6 14 Entering a new license key on page 6 16 Upgrading to a new software version on page 6 18 Reboot Rebooting or reviewing reboot reasons on page 7 52 Installation Graphical Install Starting installation wizard on page 6 45 Disarming the units on page 6 91 Method 2 graphical install on page 6 90 Web Configuring web based management attributes on page 6 83 Local User Accounts Configuring local user accounts on page 6 34 Setting password complexity on page 6 37 Creating or updating identity based users on page 6 39 RADIUS Configuration Configuring RADIUS authentication on page 6 42 Web Properties Protecting access to the summary and status pages on page 6 41 Checking system statistics on page 7 35 SNMP Email Configuring SNMPv3 agent on page 6 63 Configuring SNMPv1 2c agent on page 6 72 Configuring generation of email messages on page 6 79 Diagnostic Alarms Configuring generation of diagnostics alarms on page 6 77 Time Setting the real time clock on page 6 100 R 3 g F lt i e F E ci 5 Syslog Managing event notification
342. gn linked antennas master and slave whether integrated or connectorized Prior to alignment ensure that the following parameters are available e Location of both sites latitude and longitude e Bearing to the other end of the link for both sites e Prediction of receive signal level for both ends of the link e Prediction of link loss PTP LINKPlanner provides all of these parameters in the form of an installation report If a connectorized ODU is installed at either site with two separate antennas for spatial diversity refer to Aligning separate antennas for spatial diversity on page 6 87 before starting alignment 4a NOTE To achieve best results make small incremental changes to elevation and azimuth The action of tightening the mounting bolts can alter antenna alignment This can be helpful when fine tuning alignment but it can also lead to misalignment To prevent misalignment continue to monitor receive signal level during final tightening of the bolts 6 86 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 11 Aligning antennas To align the antennas proceed as follows 1 At each end of the link adjust the antenna to point at the other end of the link This should be done with the aid of a compass Without moving the master antenna adjust the elevation and azimuth of the slave antenna to achieve the highest receive signal level using one of the recommended methods in Monitoring received signal
343. gnals on the same radio frequency one of which is vertically polarized and the other horizontally polarized The PTP 600 also has the ability to adapt between two modes of operation e Dual Payload When the radio channel conditions allow the PTP 600 will transmit two different and parallel data streams one on the vertical channel and one on the horizontal channel This doubles the capacity of the PTP 600 1 30 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Wireless operation e Single Payload As the radio channel becomes more challenging the PTP 600 has the ability to detect this and switch to a mode which transmits the same data stream on both vertical and horizontal channels This provides polar diversity and is another key feature which allows the PTP 600 to operate in challenging non line of sight radio channels The two modes have been implemented by the introduction of two sets of modulation modes The lower order modulations BPSK 0 63 up to QPSK 0 87 are only available as single payload modes Each of the higher order modulations 16QAM 0 63 to 256QAM 0 81 are available in single payload mode and dual payload mode The switching between modes is automatically controlled by the adaptive modulation feature described in Adaptive modulation on page 1 30 ANOTE The system automatically chooses between dual and single payload to try to increase the capacity of a link However the user can disable the dual payload mode for
344. he above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written permission CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF ORIN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Part 2 Networks Associates Technology Inc copyright notice BSD Copyright 2001 2003 Networks Associates Technology Inc All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met e Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer e Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials pr
345. he maximum mean minimum and latest measurements of Link Loss dB See Diagnostics calculated over time on page 7 47 The link loss is the total attenuation of the wireless signal between the two point to point units The link loss calculation is presented below P P Pr 8r 8r Where Py Link Loss dB P l T Transmit power of the remote wireless unit dBm R Received signal power at the local unit dBm Sro ER Antenna gain at the remote and local units respectively dBi The antenna gain of the PTP 600 Series 23 5 dBi is used unless one or both of the units is a Connectorized version For connectorized ODUs the link loss calculation is modified to allow for the increased antenna gains at each end of the link The maximum mean minimum and latest measurements of Transmit Data Rate Mbps See Diagnostics calculated over time on page 7 47 Expected data rates can be found in Data throughput tables on page 4 74 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Web based management Attribute Meaning Receive Data Rate The maximum mean minimum and latest measurements of Receive Data Rate Mbps See Diagnostics calculated over time on page 7 47 Expected data rates can be found in Data throughput tables on page 4 74 Link Capacity The maximum aggregate data rate capacity available for user traffic assuming the units have been connected using Gigabit Ethernet The
346. he other copper Ethernet interfaces are specified in Table 8 Table 8 Maximum cable lengths of other copper Ethernet interfaces Interface Interface Maximum type length E1 or T1 ODU to network terminating equipment 100 m 330 ft OOBM ODU to network terminating equipment 100 m 330 ft GPS GPS receiver to PTP SYNC 100 m 330 ft 2 8 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Site planning Fiber The maximum permitted length of the fiber Ethernet interface cable ODU to network equipment depends upon which version of the SFP module is installed 1000BaseSX 850 nm or 1000BaseLX 1310 nm Other factors that determine maximum length are core and cladding thickness operating mode and bandwidth Refer to Fiber specifications on page 4 6 Wind loading Ensure that the site will not be prone to excessive wind loading Antennas and equipment mounted on towers or buildings will subject the mounting structure to significant lateral forces when there is appreciable wind Antennas are normally specified by the amount of force in pounds for specific wind strengths The magnitude of the force depends on both the wind strength and size of the antenna The ODU with or without the integral antenna is essentially a flat structure The magnitude of the lateral force can be estimated from surface area and wind speed Calculation of lateral force metric The magnitude of the lateral force can be estim
347. hed Link Name The name of the PTP link as set in the System Configuration page Elapsed Time The time hh mm ss that has elapsed since the last system reboot Indicator The system can reboot for several reasons for example commanded reboot from the system reboot webpage or a power cycle of the equipment System Clock The system clock presented as local time allowing for zone and daylight saving phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 7 5 Web based management Chapter 7 Operation Viewing the system status To display the System Status page select menu option Status The System Status page Figure 162 gives the user a detailed view of the operation of the PTP 600 Series from both the wireless and network perspectives Figure 162 System Status page System Status Master Equipment Wireless attributes vate units Attributes value Link Name Bolinas Ridge to Mount Tamalpais Wireless Link Status pe Site Name Maximum Transmit Power 10 dBm Software Version 49600 10 00 Remote Maximum Transmit Power 10 dBm Hardware Version DO5 RO0 C FPS Transmit Power 10 0 93 15 0 10 0 dBm Region Code RegionCode3t 0 Receive Power 248 69 3 110 0 62 7 dBm Elapsed Time Indicator 00 10 44 Vector Error 7 2 15 7 245 20 3 dB Ethernet Internet Link Loss 119 9 606 0 0 72 7 dB Data Port Status Copper LinkUp Transmit Data Rate 9 32 7 57 000 932 Mbps Data Port Speed And Duplex 1000 Mbps Full Duplex Receive Data Rate 16 67
348. hen Telecoms Interface is set to E1 or T1 Figure 125 The PTP 600 can support one or two telecoms channels Channel A only or Channels A and B Channel A Line Code Only displayed when E1 or T1 are selected Figure 125 Must match the setting of the device connected to channel A Channel A Cable Length Only displayed when T1 is selected Figure 125 The length of the cable connecting the ODU to the channel A transceiver Channel B Line Code Channel B Cable Length Only displayed when E1 or T1 are selected with Channels A and B Figure 125 Must match the setting of the device connected to channel B Only displayed when T1 is selected with Channels A and B Figure 125 The length of the cable connecting the ODU to the channel B transceiver Lowest Telecoms Modulation Mode The modulation mode at which telecoms data can be sent If the link cannot sustain telecoms data in this mode then the effective lowest modulation mode may differ In conjunction with the PTP LINKPlanner tool this setting may be used to optimize the latency for links which operate in consistently high modulation modes High data rate links are able to support lower latencies The effective lowest modulation mode is displayed on the Telecoms page phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 6 Configuring wireless and telecoms interfac
349. hen using ODU installation tones to align connectorized antennas it may not be possible to hear the tones To overcome this problem either use an assistant or use a stethoscope to give a longer reach The tones and their meanings are described in Table 124 In each of the states detailed in the table align the unit to give the highest pitch tone Table 124 ODU installation tones State Name Tone State Description Pitch Indication Description Free Channel Regular beep Executing band scan N A Search Scanning Slow broken tone Not demodulating the wanted Rx Power signal Synchronized Fast broken tone Demodulating the wanted Rx Power signal Registered Solid tone Both Master and Slave units Rx Power exchanging Radio layer MAC management messages Alarm Fast broken dual A fatal error has occurred tone The term wanted signal refers to that of the peer unit being installed phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 11 Aligning antennas If when in the Synchronized or Registered state the tone varies wildly there may be interference or a fast fading link Installing in this situation may not give a reliable link Investigate the cause of the problem During alignment the installation tones should exhibit the following behavior e Band scan When first started up and from time to time the Master unit will carry out a band scan to determine which channels are not
350. hernet LED blinks irregularly Meaning If the Ethernet LED blinks irregularly for example there is a short blink followed by a long blink this indicates that the ODU has booted in recovery mode The causes may be installation wiring or a corrupt ODU software load Action Refer to Using recovery mode on page 7 53 Power LED is on Ethernet LED blinks randomly Meaning Both LEDs are in their normal states implying that the PIDU is receiving power from the AC DC outlet and there is normal Ethernet traffic between the PIDU and ODU Action If in spite of this a fault is suspected in the link end hardware e Ifthe Ethernet connection to the network is only 10 100 BaseT when 1000 BaseT is expected remove the ODU cable from the PIDU examine it and check that the wiring to pins 4 amp 5 and 7 amp 8 is correct and not crossed e Follow the Ethernet packet test flowchart Figure 185 and procedures below phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 8 5 Testing link end hardware Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Figure 185 Ethernet packet test flowchart Perform Test Ethernet packet errors reported by ODU Ethernet Rx Packets counter increments too slowly Ethemet Rx Cre And Align counter lt 10 s PIDU Plus connecte to Managed Switch or Perform Test Ethemet packet errors reported by anaged switch or router Perform Test ping packet loss Packet error rate lt 1 in 1 million
351. hn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 19 Task 4 Upgrading software version Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment 7 Oncompletion the Software Upgrade Complete page is displayed Software Upgrade Complete The software upgrade was completed Successfully To complete the upgrade a system reboot is required Please use the Reboot Wireless Unit button below to reboot the unit Current software image description 2000 2011 Cambium Networks Limited All rights reserved Software Version 49600 10 00 lt lt Back Select Reboot Wireless Unit and select OK to confirm The unit begins the reboot process 8 The reboot process will take up to 120 seconds During this time it will not be possible to communicate with the unit After the reboot check that the required software image is loaded and running 9 Save the post upgrade system configuration as described in Saving the system configuration on page 6 110 Aa NOTE If communication with the unit is not restored after 120 seconds this could indicate a problem with the memory update process If this happens enter Recovery Mode as described in Using recovery mode on page 7 53 6 20 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 5 Configuring security Task 5 Configuring security Perform this task to configure the PTP 600 in accordance with the network operator s security policy Choose from the following procedures e Configuring AES encryption
352. hods for reducing telecoms latency on links which support high data rate modulation modes Under normal circumstances the unit will freely transition between modulation modes to suit the wireless conditions The Single Payload Lock indicates that the ODU will prevent transitions from Single Payload modes to the higher Dual Payload modes in order to avoid loss of telecoms data This field appears where such a transition would pass through modes which cannot carry telecoms data This may be because in order to control latency the lowest modulation mode has been set to a higher Single Payload mode In the absence of the Single Payload Lock the wireless will transition to the faster Dual Payload modes as soon as the conditions are appropriate With the lock enabled the wireless will dwell in slower Single Payload modes whenever there are operational telecoms links operational links are shown as Up in the telecoms channel field described above When the lock is actively preventing transitions the value displayed changes from Enabled to Applied TDD Synchronization Displays the TDD Synchronization status for the link For more information refer to TDD synchronization status on page 7 12 Refresh Page Period The Status page refreshes automatically according to the setting entered here in seconds This attribute is only displayed when the user is logged on as System Administrator Wireless Link Status As the attri
353. hted material for example a book or musical recording except that you may either i make 1 copy of the transportable part of the Software which typically is supplied on diskette CD ROM or downloadable internet solely for back up purposes or ii copy the transportable part of the Software to a PC hard disk provided you keep the original solely for back up purposes If the Documentation is in printed form it may not be copied If the Documentation is in electronic form you may print out 1 copy which then may not be copied With regard to the copy made for backup or archival purposes you agree to reproduce any Cambium copyright notice and other proprietary legends appearing thereon Such copyright notice s may appear in any of several forms including machine readable form and you agree to reproduce such notice in each form in which it appears to the extent it is physically possible to do so Unauthorized duplication of the Software or Documentation constitutes copyright infringement and in the United States is punishable in federal court by fine and imprisonment 5 You will not transfer directly or indirectly any product technical data or software to any country for which the United States Government requires an export license or other governmental approval without first obtaining such license or approval phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 3 3 Cambium Networks end user license agreement Chapter 3 Legal information Title and restric
354. i oenen ETONE EEEE 7 45 Downloading diagnostic data prirna rann E E A Meneses aun gwen O A EENE 7 46 Diagnostics calculated over tiMe s sssesssessseesssrsrsesssesssesssersserssersssrsseressrssseesseenseenseenss 7 47 Restoring Upgrading and reDootin Gurerinerisiensriayn on E E NETA 7 48 Restoring the system configuration serseri E A PAO TI EARNE 7 48 Upgrading SOU Wale seee R E EOE A A 7 49 Rebooting or reviewing reboot reasons rasiesrerenranian a E E EA ERARAS 7 52 USING recovery MOC ssassn E E NA EE EAN EE nis tease eaesiuanaesaasaneias 7 53 Entering recovery ml Ode x facrs isaaicecseSacnsadien r a E a ee 7 53 Selectingia recovery OPULO ssnin aonn A O OTSTE 7 54 Upgrading software Mage senri a raO EEE OE RS 7 56 Resetting IP amp Ethernet configuratiON serere ssrsri iris in eas i ses ATE NEETA EEEE 7 57 Erasing CONMGUTAION srira iaiia E E E E ERE ETEA E ARA 7 58 Rebooting the UNIE sissssysadasecestaasdsatacassmuataas ote ateqnaeandeanaeranecassadeeaaucencte saute toad ak orte danse anaes 7 58 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting cccccceecsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeaeeaeaeeaueuaeeauageauaeeauageauaeeauageas 8 1 Testing ink end Band Wares ssccrscssvecrexssoeanexs eonvatasecanneasiovuvessaweah ennannetoossendinenayevadextbesadcersaxedamseenshest 8 2 Checking the PIDU LEDS wiscssissacsasideacsvsensschunadegesetessgcsanasesesancedaaas E ETE T ETAG 8 2 P wer LED ISOM rsru ponar A E oe edeiny setdete opnueetee cd ei oaan ey easeeeuae 8 3 Power LED
355. iber optic cable before termination It is possible to thread the LC connectors through the gland by separating the rubber seal into its component parts then stretching them open with a sleeve spreading tool phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 Installing a fiber interface Chapter 5 Installation 5 60 Remove the dust caps and plug the LC connectors into the SFP fiber module ensuring that they snap home Fit the extension tube and tighten to hand tight plus 1 8 of a turn Fit the weatherproof gland body and tighten to hand tight plus 1 8 of a turn Fit the weatherproof gland nut and tighten until the rubber part of the gland gives a good seal around the cable phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Installing a fiber interface 6 Do not over tighten the gland as there is a risk of damage to its internal seal and structure 4 7 YV X Removing the fiber optic cable To remove the fiber optic cable assembly the above procedure should be reversed The LC connectors are removed by pressing their release tabs When removing the LC connectors take special care to ensure that the release mechanism does not snag on the threaded part of the hole in the ODU enclosure Removing the SFP fiber module Before attempting to remove the module remove the fiber optic cable as described above To remove the SFP module from the ODU proceed as follows 1 Locate the plastic latches in the LC connectors phn 25
356. ibutor or solutions provider The upgrade is applied by entering an access key together with the MAC address of the target ODU into the PTP License Key Generator web page which may be accessed from the support website see Contacting Cambium Networks on page 2 The License Key Generator creates a new license key delivered by email The license key must be installed on the ODU as described in reference to Task 3 Installing license keys on page 6 14 Once applied the capacity upgrade is bound to a single ODU and is not transferrable Software upgrade The management agent supports application software upgrade using either the web based interface or the SNMP interface PTP 600 software images are digitally signed and the ODU will accept only images that contain a valid Cambium PTP digital signature The ODU always requires a reboot to complete a software upgrade phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 1 57 System management Chapter 1 Product description Aa NOTE Obtain the application software and this user guide from the support website BEFORE warranty expires ODU software version must be the same at both ends of the link Limited operation may sometimes be possible with dissimilar software versions but such operation is not supported by Cambium The management process for software upgrade is described in detail in Task 4 Upgrading software version on page 6 17 Software can be downgraded using Recovery mode as described in Recovery
357. ideas taleaiseieicaina ieee 7 6 Managing alarmsiand Gv GntSiicisscssistcecssteatunaedadecavasciiausaseieatataeasbhiaceerniereeatebitocselstedtteenbiates 7 14 A Ife Ta ee a GA pete We W000 gear ea PO Io oR SR eo ee Rr 7 14 Managing email alerts 6 22 scssasteaengasannacacs E ence aaekar tae Ras 7 18 Managing event notification MESSAGES esses hesasase acd iiini nii E EE N REE 7 19 Managing Spectrum siisscciscsvazsedeaszassaunsdceesans ioii ii hier RE E E E 7 20 Configuring spectrum usage at the master s ssssesseesssesssessesssersserssersserosseesseessresseesss 7 20 Viewing spectrum usage at the Slave sorsra natnn TE R A R ORREN 7 23 Interpreting the spectrum management plots sssssonssoessserssersserssesssersseesssesssersserssersse 7 24 Viewing the active channel history sscecessescecss snieoc stuns cacaeitea A EEE E E 7 32 Viewing historic spectrum management MetriCS sssissnrriosenri veneri E re En ENEE EREKE 7 33 Manag ug SE GU MEY sian A N tatenddecdiesacantasciueataceenetuesbanteatoaaaesantenaes 7 34 Exiting FIPS 140 2 0r UC APL MOA Cai scusxstesasaxeceasiensnmcnsdeadaemeuteanevastoueeanbansacelaneumcantteredess dt 7 34 Zeroizing critical security PaTAMEtETS aciiainisni nananana ana a ARR 7 34 Managing performante ssisssercreiner nenna n n a a E ETE EEE ROTE ETE RETIREES 7 35 Checking systern Statio tiO S osea ear a E N E A A N A 7 35 Checking detailed COUNLELS sssrds aarte AEE ETE 7 41 Using the diagnostics plottel eessesiege
358. ies erate ees ee eae 5 21 Disconnecting an RJ45 and gland from a UMIt 550asissesssccesseccasasvees sees4 ca toss Cess ESEETO EESE RO Eri 5 22 Making a drop cable ground point si cecassxshoxasexsacasebanacasasenacweatenestestvarnoutanernetaawumcennderevesies 5 23 Installing and grounding the drop cable at building entry cece ceecccseeeceeeeseneeeeees 5 27 Installing the PU cnc sac caisa4 en dec r A en senecnaaiaeneaannenreatosanaok a E 5 29 Mounting the PIDU cssccastctaese ene A A O O Maca 5 29 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 vii Contents Connecting the PIDU to the ODU Cableicisccisscsstieatscensouoreasyecasees a R TS 5 29 Preparing the PIDU to LAN Cable s sissicis scssdcsuecessene ness sassnes spassnes i E ET 5 31 Installing a PTP SYNC UNiirserieseeirennoea n a aa a an ainakin biasana 5 32 Preparing for PI P SYNGinstallatioi 55535 ance sssa sacs score vane vawatansecoeven EAA TRE 5 32 Mounting the PTP SYNGC Ui sii ssiscaasseesneasdeathcas anna sans a E E E EEE REEE 5 33 Connecting up the PT PsSY NG Umit ssiiessccctacncetesgagacte sara deantausnsaetass aueciios N E EEA tants 5 34 Powering up the PTP SYNC installation yiccscvsccssesscccssasades shassaes snnssnes rnr rE EEE 5 36 Installing a GPS receiver for PIP SYNG escerai e eN a ERE edema 5 37 Mounting the GPS TECCIVED acc 9 20150025 sca care anssanceansaneseen AA EEE 5 37 Preparing GPS drop Cables i scssee ssccageasscdagssacesagasnccasgesaced tecswecadsannacanaens E EREE TNE NEE
359. ies page Webpage Properties Properties Web Properties Miview Summary and Status pages without login Distance Units metric O imperial Use Long Integer Comma Formatting Disabled Enabled Popup Help O Disabled Enabled Auto Logout Period 10 minutes Configuring RADIUS authentication This procedure is only performed when the PTP 600 unit requires RADIUS authentication RADIUS authentication is only available when PTP 600 is configured for Identity based User Accounts and when RADIUS servers are connected to the network Only users with Security Officer role are permitted to configure RADIUS authentication A NOTE When RADIUS is enabled the Security Officer may disable all local user accounts as described in Creating or updating identity based users on page 6 39 4a NOTE At least one user with Security Officer privileges must exist and be enabled in order to disable the RADIUS client Select menu option Management Web Radius Configuration The RADIUS Configuration page is displayed Figure 121 Update the attributes as required Table 109 Select Submit RADIUS Configuration 6 42 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 5 Configuring security Figure 121 RADIUS Configuration page RADIUS Configuration RADIUS Client RADIUS Primary Server RADIUS Primary Server Dead Time RADIUS Server Retries RADIUS Server Timeout Authentication Method Authenticati
360. igure 118 6 40 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 5 Configuring security Changing own user password This method is used for any user to change their own password Aa NOTE A security officer can change the passwords of other users using the User Accounts page as described in Creating or updating identity based users on page 6 39 Select menu option Change Password The Change Password page is displayed Figure 119 Enter and confirm the new password the factory default is blank The new password must comply with the complexity rules Table 107 Figure 119 Change Password page System Administration example Current Password New Password Confirm Password Update Password Protecting access to the summary and status pages By default the Home and Status menu items are not protected by password If a higher level of system security is required password protection can be extended to these pages Select menu option Management Web Web Properties The Webpage Properties page is displayed Figure 120 In the Web Properties attribute uncheck the View Summary and Status pages without login box then select Apply Properties ANOTE If the System Administration Password has not yet been set see Changing own user password on page 6 41 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 41 Task 5 Configuring security Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Figure 120 Webpage Propert
361. igure 87 2 1 IP L Figure 88 TDM L Figure 88 Adaptive IP L Figure 88 5 MHz 1 1 IP TDM C Figure 81 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 Data throughput tables 4 86 Chapter 4 Reference information Figure 79 PTP 600 range adjustment for data rates curve A Throughput F actor 1 000 0 950 0 900 0 850 0 800 0 750 0 700 0 650 0 600 0 550 o 100 Range km 120 140 160 180 200 Figure 80 PTP 600 range adjustment for data rates curve B Throughput F actor 1 000 0 950 0 900 0 850 0 800 0 750 0 700 0 650 0 600 0 550 Oo 100 Range km 120 140 160 180 200 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Figure 81 PTP 600 range adjustment for data rates curve C Throughput F actor Throughput F actor 1 000 0 950 0 900 0 850 0 800 0 750 0 700 0 650 0 600 0 550 1 000 0 950 0 900 0 850 0 800 0 750 0 700 0 650 0 600 0 550 Data throughput tables 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Range km Figure 82 PTP 600 range adjustment for data rates curve D 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Range km phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 87 Data throughp
362. iles of a Terminal Doppler Weather Radar TDWR system or have a line of sight propagation path to such a system must be configured to avoid any frequency within 30 MHz or 30 MHz of the frequency of the TDWR device This requirement applies even if the master is outside the 35 km 22 miles radius but communicates with outdoor clients which may be within the 35 km 22 miles radius of the TDWBRs The requirement for ensuring 30 MHz frequency separation is based on the best information available to date If interference is not eliminated a distance limitation based on line of sight from TDWR will need to be used In addition devices with bandwidths greater than 20 MHz may require greater frequency separation When planning a link in the USA visit http spectrumbridge com udrs home aspx enter the location of the planned link and search for TDWR radars If a TDWR system is located within 35 km 22 miles or has line of sight propagation to the PTP device perform the following tasks e Register the installation on http spectrumbridge com udrs home aspx e Make a list of channel center frequencies that must be barred that is those falling within 30 MHz or 30 MHz of the frequency of the TDWR radars To comply with FCC rules the affected channels must be barred during staging before the units are allowed to radiate on site as described in Barring channels on page 6 62 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 2 5 Site planning Chapter 2
363. inventory Table 31 lists PTP 600 kit components Table 31 Inventory for PTP 600 kits ODUs ODUs may be Integrated as illustrated or Connectorized End Complete kit contains one ODU with grounding cable Link Complete kit contains two ODUs with grounding cables End Complete kit contains one PIDU unit Link Complete kit contains two PIDU units phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 2 59 Ordering components Chapter 2 Planning considerations Item Notes Mounting bracket assembly S Choice of mains leads US UK and EU End Complete kit contains one bracket Link Complete kit contains two brackets End Complete kit contains one US one UK and one EU lead Link Complete kit contains two US two UK and two EU leads Cable gland End Complete kit contains two glands Link Complete kit contains four glands Other standard components In addition to ODU and PIDU kits standard installations require the components listed in Table 32 Table 32 Inventory for standard installations Item Notes Outdoor drop cable Always use Cat5e cable that is gel filled and shielded with copper plated steel Alternative types of drop cable are not supported by Cambium Superior Essex BBDGe cable is supplied by Cambium with the following lengths and part numbers other lengths are available fro
364. ion configuration SC SP attribute name SC SP Web user SNMP user SNTP SC SP was previous value SC SP now new value SC status status SC SP attribute name SC SP was previous value SC SP now new value SC event event SC SP identifier SC SP event message content SC Configuration and status messages Configuration and status messages contain all of the relevant attributes This is an example of a configuration message PTP600 configuration IP Address Web user was 10 10 10 10 now 169 254 1 1 This is an example of a status message PTP600 status Data Port Status was Down now Up 4 48 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Event messages Syslog message formats Event messages are listed in Table 78 Definition of abbreviations This is an example of an event message PTP600 SC neu SP event auth_login web user MarkT connection HTTP authentication local from 169 254 1 1 port 80 Table 78 Event messages Facility Severity I dentifier Message content security 4 warning 4 auth_idle f Web user user name SC SP security 4 info 6 auth login from IP address SC SP security 4 warning 4 auth login failed port port number SC SP connection HTTP HTTPS SC SP ty 4 4 th 1 locked SSeS ete Pa gene authentication local RADIUS SC se
365. ion Link mode optimization Link mode optimization allows the PTP 600 link to be optimized according to the type of traffic that will be bridged The link supports two modes IP Traffic and TDM Traffic IP traffic IP Traffic mode is optimized to provide the maximum possible link capacity IP Traffic mode is an appropriate choice where applications in the bridged networks provide some measure of reliable transmission and where very low latency is not critical IP mode supports both fixed and adaptive link symmetry see Link symmetry on page 1 27 TDM traffic TDM Traffic mode is optimized to provide the lowest possible latency TDM Traffic mode additionally implements a more conservative approach to adaptive modulation leading to lower error rates in fading channels at the expense of slightly lower link capacity TDM Traffic mode is an appropriate choice for delay intolerant data without reliable transmission for example voice over IP data TDM mode is selected automatically when Telecom interfaces are enabled Link symmetry The PTP 600 series provides four configuration options for apportioning the available capacity between the two link directions e Symmetric The Master and Slave have equal capacity The PTP 600 series achieves this by allocating an equal Burst Duration for the Master and the Slave e 2 1 The capacity in the direction Master to Slave is twice that of the direction Slave to Master The PTP 600 series achieves thi
366. ion IP 4 83 Table 96 Range adjustment characteristics 2 2 sacs saacssiiasindaaseaes Sad oteen ware ccosvereecs REE a ATOE 4 85 Table 97 GPS 12 way circular connector to RJ45 pin MapPiNndS ccccceecceseecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeenees 5 42 Table 98 El or T1 patch panel pin OUtSvsesersisdecersvagexenssedorsaceuasdsnsculeeusncadeosaaeaabeaneeecacanstamanataraeayanies 5 52 Table 99 Resistance referenced to the E1 T1 SOUTCe sssesssesereresesssssseeseeerssssssersceeressssseeeseees 5 53 Table 100 IP interface attri Dutes sssrin e R OE 6 9 Table 101 Management port attributes cczs 2i 525 acksieneasisasianeareist onan eecenuarudanscartecs vee reeasbaammensqoauaaaetes 6 10 Table 102 Data port attributes eissira E ties dhediae iad MS 6 11 Table 103 Bridging attri DUles esisccisdecccscacexernisaces ni ETE ESENE EN TOE EEEE En 6 13 Table 104 Capability summary attribute Seane A REE 6 15 Table 105 HI TP and Telnet attributes rnnr e EE meensaaieeatrmuaee 6 32 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 xxi List of Tables Table 106 User account management Attributes sisacccsiiscsiececsapcsagaynaseynesescsseagweseneeasieaveashbepeacoerays 6 36 Table 107 Password complexity configuration attributes ccccccccsseeeccceeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeaaeeseeenaes 6 37 Table 108 Identity based user accounts attributes 20 0 0 cc cccecccsseccceesceceseecueeecseeseeaeeceseeeeeseeeeea 6 40 Table 109 RADIUS Authentication attributes iz ccccic c
367. ion which is supplied as standard with Windows and MAC operating systems To test ping packet loss proceed as follows 1 Ensure that the IP address of the computer is configured appropriately for connection to the PTP 600 under test and does not clash with other devices connected to the network 2 If the PIDU is connected to an Ethernet switch or router then connect the computer to a spare port if available 3 Ifitis not possible to connect the computer to a spare port of an Ethernet switch or router then the PIDU will need to be disconnected from the network in order to execute this test a Disconnect the PIDU from the network b Connect the computer directly to the LAN port of the PIDU This will disrupt network traffic carried by the PTP 600 under test 4 Onthe computer open the Command Prompt application phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 8 7 Testing link end hardware Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 5 Send 1000 ping packets of length 1500 bytes The process will take 1000 seconds which is approximately 17 minutes If the computer is running a Windows operating system this is achieved by typing ping n 1000 1 1500 lt ipaddress gt where lt ipaddress gt is the IP address of the PTP 600 ODU under test If the computer is running a MAC operating system this is achieved by typing ping c 1000 s 1492 lt ipaddress gt where lt ipaddress gt is the IP address of the PTP 600 ODU under test 6 Record how many Ping pack
368. is device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Le pr sent appareil est conforme aux CNR d Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence L exploitation est autoris e aux deux conditions suivantes 1 l appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage et 2 l utilisateur de l appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radio lectrique subi m me si le brouillage est susceptible d en compromettre le fonctionnement In Canada high power radars are allocated as primary users meaning they have priority of the 5650 5850 MHz spectrum These radars could cause interference or damage to license exempt local area network LE LAN devices Product labels FCC IDs and Industry Canada Certification Numbers are reproduced on the product label Figure 77 Figure 77 FCC and IC certifications on 5 8 GHz product label This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Reales FCC ID QWP58100 ae is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference ard G i 2 This device must accept any interference received induding 1C 10940 58100 interference that may cause undesired operation Where necessary the end user is responsible for obtaining any National licenses required to operate this product and these must be obtained before using the product in any particular country Contact the appro
369. is only performed when a fiber optic Ethernet interface is installed This task consists of the following procedures e Obtaining the license key for Ethernet fiber support on page 6 105 e Connecting to the unit and checking for fiber support on page 6 105 e Entering the license key for Ethernet fiber support on page 6 106 e Connecting to the fiber network on page 6 107 e Configuring SFP on page 6 109 Obtaining the license key for Ethernet fiber support Before the fiber interface can be enabled a new license key must be installed in the PTP 600 unit Instructions on how to obtain the license key and a unique ID code are provided in a sealed envelope in the PTP 600 Series Bridge Optical Interface Upgrade Kit Figure 153 Figure 153 Fiber license key instructions Congratulations on the purchase of your new upgrade key To obtain your licence keys you will need the following The MAC address of the units to be upgraded The access key below Then fill out the simple form at tp www jumnetworks com support You will receive via e mail a new set of licence keys for the newly upgraded units R9PDV LUADN A3XPX The new license key is specific to a single wireless unit Prior to installation obtain the license key from the Cambium website Connecting to the unit and checking for fiber support Connect the management PC to the PTP 600 unit power up and log into the web interface as described in Task
370. ish to reconfigure the installation agent then use the wizards back button Installation configuration IP Address 1 1 100 3 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Gateway IP Address 1 1 1 254 Use VLAN For Management Interfaces No VLAN Tagging DSCP Management Priority 00 DF Telecoms Interface None Access Method Link Access Target MAC Address 00 04 56 30 16 65 Dual Payload Enabled Master Slave Mode Master Spectrum Management Control DFS Link Mode Optimization IP Traffic TDD Synchronization Mode Disabled Tx Max Power 25 dBm Ranging Mode Auto 0 to 40 km Platform Variant Connectorized Antenna Gain 23 0 dBi Cable Loss 0 0 dB EIRP 43 0 dBm Channel Bandwidth 10 MHz Link Symmetry 1to1 Lower Center Frequency 5480 MHz Tx Color Code A Rx Color Code A Max Receive Modulation Mode 64QAM 0 92 Lowest Ethernet Modulation Mode BPSK 0 63 Installation Mode Arm Without Tones 44 Back 6 46 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 6 Configuring wireless and telecoms interfaces Figure 123 Current installation summary page Current Installation Summary This page shows a summary of the current unit configuration Press the Continue to Installation Wizard button below to change this configuration Installation configuration IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Use VLAN For Management Interfaces DSCP Management Priority Telecoms Interface Access Method Target MAC Address Dual Pa
371. its encryption Frequency Variant Frequency variant of the wireless unit Bandwidth Variant Bandwidth variant of the wireless unit Generating a new license key To generate a new license key to activate new licensed capabilities for example Region Code FIPS Security Level or Encryption Algorithm proceed as follows 1 Purchase the required new capabilities from the Cambium authorized Point To Point dealer who supplied the PTP 600 link The dealer will supply one or more access keys a fF W N license key phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 Go to the PTP web support website see Contacting Cambium Networks on page 2 Select Key Generator The PTP License Key Generator form should be displayed Enter the required details including the access keys supplied by the dealer Submit the web form The PTP License Key Generator will respond with the new Task 3 Installing license keys Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Entering a new license key To upgrade the unit to a new license key proceed as follows 1 Select menu option System License Key The Software License Key page is displayed Enter the new License Key Select Validate license key If the license key is valid the Reboot Wireless Unit dialog is displayed Reboot Wireless Unit The new license key has been accepted The system now requires a reboot before any new features can be accessed Reboot VVireless Unit Sele
372. k 10SS ecccceecccceeccceeeeeeeeeeaeseenaes 4 40 Table 70 PTP 54600 TDM mode threshold power and link 10SS ceccceeeccceeeceeeeeneeeeenees 4 41 Table 71 PTP 58600 IP mode threshold power and link 10SS cccececccseeccceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaes 4 42 Table 72 PTP 58600 TDM mode threshold power and link 10SS eeccceeccceneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 4 43 Table 73 PTP 59600 IP mode threshold power and link 10SS ccccceccceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaes 4 44 Table 74 PTP 59600 TDM mode threshold power and link 10SS ecccececccseeceeeeeeeeeeeeenees 4 45 Table 75 PTP 600 Ethernet bridging specifications sssesseesseesseesseessecsseeeseeesssesssesssesssesssees 4 46 Table 76 PTP 600 telecoms interface specifications sss sssesssessseesseessersseesssesssesssersserssersseees 4 46 Table 77 Destination address in layer 2 control protocols ss sssessssesseesseesssesssesseessserssersseees 4 47 Table 78 EVent messages ai isiscisisacsrseddaisseaienaceiabesaga sas ER E EA A AEA 4 49 Table 79 PTP 600 safety compliance specifications s ssssccscvscasctacasassiaviacessaeeaasvadsdeansanbelanausteatauebes 4 51 Table 30 EMG emissions complian Ces rosenn aN A a E eas seaee eee ae 4 52 Table 81 Power compliance margi nS sass ocsiascessscasedes agundecsscasvaes boas Hada ERIE eE EER TEVRAT 4 55 Table 82 Radio certiNicatioNS x teccsssacecesranceaossderzeusiunizannsueemendenbeaba
373. ks can be successfully deployed with the integrated PTP 600 However the integrated units may not be sufficient in some areas for example e Where the path is heavily obscured by dense woodland on an NLOS link e Where long LOS links gt 23 km or gt 14 miles are required e Where there are known to be high levels of interference PTP LINKPlanner can be used to identify these areas of marginal performance In these areas connectorized ODUs and external antennas should be used Choosing external antennas When selecting external antennas consider the following factors e The required antenna gain e Ease of mounting and alignment e Antenna polarization o Fora simple installation process select one dual polarization antenna as the integrated antenna at each end o To achieve spatial diversity select two single polarization antennas at each end Spatial diversity provides additional fade margin on very long LOS links where there is evidence of correlation of the fading characteristics on Vertical and Horizontal polarizations For connectorized units operating in the USA or Canada 5 4 GHz or 5 8 GHz bands choose external antennas from those listed in FCC and IC approved antennas on page 2 64 Do not install any other antennas For links in other countries it is not mandatory to choose antennas from FCC and IC approved antennas on page 2 64 but this may be used as a guide If an EIRP limit is in force refer to Calculating
374. l CAT5e cable foil or braid Customer Customer Customer screened with screened Cluster Slave ODU Cluster Slave ODU Cluster Master ODU PTP SYNC Additional gt PTP SYNCs Mains supply LAN LAN LAN connectors CAT5e cable unscreened or screened e Ground cable phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 2 33 Mounting options for the PTP SYNC GPS receiver Chapter 2 Planning considerations Mounting options for the PTP SYNC GPS receiver This section describes the requirements of the optional GPS receiver for PTP SYNC If PTP SYNC is to be installed with a GPS receiver as the timing reference source then the GPS receiver must be mounted as described in this section Ensure that the GPS receiver module is mounted in a position where all protection requirements can be met Aa NOTE The GPS receiver is not approved for operation in locations where gas hazards exist as defined by Hazloc USA and ATEX Europe If PTP SYNC is required in a hazardous location then the timing reference source must be either a PTP 600 ODU or a cabled 1 Hz signal from a system approved for Hazardous locations GPS receiver location requirements The GPS receiver for PTP SYNC must be mounted at a location that meets the following requirements e It must be possible to protect the installation as described in General protection requirements on page 2 23 e It must have an un interrupted view of the
375. l Sealing nut Push plug housing with nut with strain up to solid screen adhesive relief back phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 5 39 Installing a GPS receiver for PTP SYNC Chapter 5 Installation 3 Install the RJ45 crimp plug Connector housing po load bar ay T Start with tails over length to assist insertion into load bar then trim them to 5 mm T Connect the RJ45 pins to the following conductors Superior Essex BBDGe colors Pin 8 Brown Pin 7 Light Brown Pin 6 Green Pin 5 Light Blue Pin 4 Blue Pin 3 Light Green Pin 2 Orange Pin 1 Light Orange 4 _ Assemble plug housing Depress the RJ45 locking tab A Slide the plug housing assembly B over the RJ45 plug Tighten the sealing nut C This is easier to fully tighten when the plug housing is mated to the socket of the adapter cable 5 40 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Installing a GPS receiver for PTP SYNC 5 Check the assembly This is an exampled of an assembled plug housing on the end of a drop cable wy Cee ee eee Ls AEEA KAA Wy phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 5 41 Installing a GPS receiver for PTP SYNC Chapter 5 Installation Assembling a 12 way circular connector This procedure is only performed when a GPS adapter cable kit is NOT available A 12 way circular connector must be connected to the top end of the main GPS drop cable AX NOTE This procedure requires a soldering iron and solder The drop cable has
376. l Strength Ratio This indicates the antenna system is doing exactly as intended System counters The System Statistics page contains the following system counters e Data port counters Table 141 e Management port counters Table 142 e Wireless port counters and performance information Table 143 The packet counter attributes each contain a number in parentheses this shows the number of packets received since the last page refresh To reset all system counters to zero select Reset System Counters Table 141 Data Port Counter attributes in the System Statistics page Attribute Meaning Ethernet Tx This displays the total number of good packets the bridge has sent Packets for transmission by the local Ethernet interface 7 38 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Managing performance Table 142 Management Port Counter attributes in the System Statistics page Attribute Packets To Internal Stack Meaning This displays the total number of good packets the bridge has transmitted to the internal stack for example ARP requests PING requests HTTP requests Packets From Internal Stack This displays the total number of good packets the bridge has received from the internal stack for example ARP responses PING replies HTTP responses Table 143 Wireless Port Counter attributes in the System Statistics page Attribute Meaning Wireless Tx This displa
377. l protocol LACP e Link OAM IEEE 802 3ah e Port authentication IEEE 802 1X e Ethernet local management interface E LMI ITU T Q 933 e Link layer discovery protocol LLDP e Multiple registration protocol MRP e Generic attribute registration protocol GARP The PTP 600 Series does not generate or respond to any L2CP traffic phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Ethernet bridging Quality of service for bridged Ethernet traffic The PTP 600 Series supports eight traffic queues for Ethernet frames waiting for transmission over the wireless link Ethernet frames are classified by inspection of the Ethernet destination address the Ethernet priority code point in the outermost VLAN tag the Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP in an IPv4 or IPv6 header or the Traffic Class in an MPLS header PTP 600 provides a configurable mapping between Ethernet IP or MPLS priority and transmission queue together with a simple way to restore a default mapping based on the recommended default in IEEE 802 1Q 2005 Untagged frames or frames with an unknown network layer protocol can be separately classified Scheduling for transmission over the wireless link is by strict priority In other words a frame at the head of a given queue is transmitted only when all higher priority queues are empty Fragmentation The PTP 600 Series minimizes latency and jitter for high priority Ethernet traffic by fragmenting Ethernet fram
378. label cceccecceseeececeeeeeeeceneeeeceeaes 4 69 Figure 76 European Union certification on 5 4 GHz product label ceeeccccceseseeceeeeeeeeeeeees 4 70 Figure 77 FCC and IC certifications on 5 8 GHz product label 0 0 ccc ccecccceecceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 4 71 Figure 78 European Union certification on 5 8 GHz product label cc cceeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 72 Figure 79 PTP 600 range adjustment for data rates CUIVE A eeeccccesescecceneesecccnsnseecneeseecenees 4 86 Figure 80 PTP 600 range adjustment for data rates curve B ceeceeccseescecceeeeseeccneseccenseneeesenes 4 86 Figure 81 PTP 600 range adjustment for data rates CUIVE C cece cceeescecceeeeseecenseseccenaeneeeeenen 4 87 Figure 82 PTP 600 range adjustment for data rates curve D eee ceseeccccceeeesceceeeeseecenaeneeeeenes 4 87 Figure 83 PTP 600 range adjustment for data rates curve E essssesssssresssseeressseressseressseersssse 4 88 Figure 84 PTP 600 range adjustment for data rates curve Foo eee ccceeeccccceneeeeeeeeeeeceenaaeeeeeenes 4 88 Figure 85 PTP 600 range adjustment for data rates curve G ssssesessssresssseeessseresssseressseeesssse 4 89 Figure 86 PTP 600 range adjustment for data rates curve H esssessssseessssereessseressseressseeressee 4 89 Figure 87 PTP 600 range adjustment for data rates curve K cece cceeeecccceeeeececeeeeesecenaeeeeeenes 4 90 Figure 88 PTP 600 range adjustment for data rat
379. lation by performing the following tasks from Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment from Task 1 Connecting to the unit on page 6 3 to Task 10 Configuring remote access on page 6 83 If the units are to be pre configured during staging the safety precautions below MUST be observed Safety precautions before installation All national and local safety standards must be followed while developing a site installing equipment or performing maintenance A WARNING When installing the PTP 54600 and PTP 58600 ATEX Hazloc product variants in hazardous locations follow the instructions contained in the PTP 600 Series Hazardous Location Guide supplied in box with the products in addition to the instructions in this user guide A WARNING Ensure that personnel are not exposed to unsafe levels of RF energy The units start to radiate as soon as they are powered up Respect the safety standards defined in Compliance with safety standards on page 4 51 in particular the minimum separation distances Observe the following guidelines e Never work in front of the antenna when the ODU is powered e Always power down the PIDU when connecting and disconnecting the drop cable from either the PIDU or ODU Protection requirements The installation must meet the requirements defined in Grounding and lightning protection on page 2 21 5 2 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Preparing for installation Selecting insta
380. le 153 Select Submit Updated System Configuration Perform loopback tests Reset Telecom Loopback to None for operational use Alarms on the Home Page indicate the presence of loopbacks on either channel 8 16 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Testing a telecoms link Figure 188 Telecoms page Telecoms Telecoms Interface Channel 4 Line Code Channel 4 Cable Length Channel 4 Loopback Channel B Line Code Channel B Cable Length Channel B Loopback This page controls the telecoms configuration of the wireless unit r r Lowest Telecoms Modulation Mode Lowest Dual Payload Modulation Mode Lowest Single Payload Modulation Mode 256Q4M 0 81 Single Submit Updated System Configuration T1 B8ZS HDB3 133 feet 2 None O Copper O wireless B8ZSHDB3 133 feet None Copper Wireless 25604M 0 81 Single 16O4M 0 87 Dual Table 153 Telecoms attributes Value Meaning None This is the required setting for an operational link Copper Connects the received data on a given telecoms interface to the transmit interface May be used in conjunction with a Bit Error Rate Tester to confirm that the correct connections have been made to the ODU This mode cannot be used for resistance tests as it is only capable of looping back valid telecoms signals Wireless Sends the telecoms data received from the wireless link back across the link on the same te
381. lecoms channel The link may be checked using for example a Bit Error Rate Tester to ensure that no errors are detected phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 Troubleshooting a fiber interface Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting a fiber interface If any problems are experienced when a fiber link is installed refer to this section No response from the unit via 1000BaseT If the unit does not respond when connected via the 1000BaseT connection e Check that the Cat5e cables have been inserted correctly e Ensure that the network settings on your PC are correct e Ifa fiber connection has been made to your network then remove it In the default configuration the wireless unit will ignore the copper connection if a fiber connection is available e Confirm that you have entered the IP address of the unit correctly into your browser No response from the unit via fiber If the unit does not respond when connected via the fiber interface Browse to the unit over the wireless link from a computer connected to the remote unit and check whether the SFP Configuration menu option is available e If SFP Configuration is not available switch off the power to the wireless unit remove and then replace the SFP module switch the unit back on and confirm that the SFP Configuration menu is now available e If SFP Configuration is available check the Ethernet Link Status attribute on the System Status page to see if it indicates a fau
382. led Configure one or two SNTP servers by entering their IP addresses and other attributes set SNTP Server Authentication Protocol to DES or MD5 and enter SNTP Server Key Identifier and Server Key to match the security settings of the SNTP servers Set Time Zone to GMT 00 00 Set Daylight Saving to Disabled 7 Perform Configuring system logging syslog on page 6 81 taking care to complete the following additional settings Set Syslog State to Enabled Set Syslog Client to Enabled Configure one or two syslog servers by entering their IP addresses and other attributes 6 116 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Configuring for UC APL applications Security banner text for UC APL This is the text for the security banner for UC APL to be entered in Step 3 of the Security Wizard You are accessing a U S Government USG Information System IS that is provided for USG authorized use only By using this IS which includes any device attached to this IS you consent to the following conditions The USG routinely intercepts and monitors communications on this IS for purposes including but not limited to penetration testing COMSEC monitoring network operations and defense personnel misconduct PM law enforcement LE and counterintelligence CI investigations At any time the USG may inspect and seize data stored on this IS Communications using or data st
383. led Receive Modulation Mode Detail Running At Maximum Receive Mode Range 0 0 km Automatic page refresh period in seconds faso Seconds Update Page Refresh Period Reset form 6 108 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 16 Configuring the fiber interface Configuring SFP Select menu option System SFP Configuration The SFP Configuration page is displayed Figure 157 Aa NOTE If the SFP fiber module is not automatically sensed by the PTP 600 unit the SFP Configuration menu option will not be available Figure 157 SFP Configuration page SFP Configuration This page controls the SFP configuration of the PTP wireless unit Data Port Ethernet Media Type To Use Auto Select Fiber Preference v Sfp Vendor Name APAC Opto Sfp Vendor OUI 00 0f 99 Sfp Part Number KM28 C3S TLN Sfp Revision Level 0000 Sfp Laser Wavelength 850 Sfp Serial Number 421057121 Sfp Date Code 050218 Submit Updated System Configuration Reset Form This page contains a single user selectable attribute Data Port Ethernet Media Type To Use This attribute has three options e Auto Select Fiber Preference means that if a supported SFP module is present and is working and the fiber carrier is present the Ethernet service connects through fiber and the copper data port is not used If the fiber link fails or loses the carrier signal the Ethernet service falls back to the copper LAN conne
384. les 0 100 km 0 62 miles and 0 200 km 0 124 miles Operation of the system will depend on obstacles in the path between the units Operation at 40 km 25 miles or above will require a near line of sight path Operation at 100 m 330 ft could be achieved with one unit totally obscured from the other unit but with the penalty of transmitting at higher power in a non optimal direction thereby increasing interference in the band 2 12 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Link planning LoS links in radar regions When planning an LoS link to operate in a radar detection region ensure that receiver signal level is low enough to allow the PTP 600 to detect radar signals e With integrated antennas the recommended minimum LoS operating range is 180 meters 580 ft for 5 4 GHz or 300 meters 990 ft for 5 8 GHz Shorter operating ranges will lead to excessive receiver signal levels e With higher gain connectorized antennas the recommended minimum predicted receiver signal level from LINKPlanner is 53 dBm for 5 4 GHz or 58 dBm for 5 8 GHz PTP LINKPlanner for synchronized networks TDD synchronization should be planned using PTP LINKPlanner This will provide the necessary TDD Frame parameter values which are required to complete a synchronized installation Please refer to the PTP LINKPlanner User Guide Path loss considerations Path loss is the amount of attenuation the radio signal undergoes between the two en
385. lick on the warning page image The Recovery Option Page is displayed Figure 184 Review the Software Version and Recovery Reason Table 148 Select a recovery option Table 149 Figure 183 Recovery Image Warning page Recovery Image Click this image to update IP Ethernet configuration or upgrade operational software Figure 184 Recovery Options page PTP 58600 Full Recovery Options i Browse Upgrade Software Image Reset IP amp Ethernet Configuration back to factory defaults Erase Configuration Reboot Software Version Recovery 04 02 Recovery Reason Recovery Button Active MAC Address 00 04 56 80 2e 12 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Using recovery mode Table 148 Recovery Options attributes Attribute Software Version Recovery Reason Meaning The software version of the recovery operating system permanently installed during manufacture The reason the unit is operating in Recovery mode for example Recovery button active or Invalid or corrupt image MAC Address The MAC address shown here is the MAC address of the unit programmed during manufacture Table 149 Recovery Options buttons Button Purpose Upgrade Software Image Use this option to restore a working software version when software corruption is suspected or when an incorrect software image has been loaded Refer to Upgrading software image on
386. lid IP address and subnet mask is required before the PTP unit can be used on a network Please see your network administrator if you are unsure of the correct values to enter here Interface configuration data entry acrutes vas rt IP Address ao ho Lho ho Subnet Mask bss 255 E 0 o i Gateway IP Address 169 254 0 o Use VLAN For Management Interfaces No VLAN Tagging i a Telecoms Interface None OH OT Submit Internet Protocol Configuration Hext gt gt 6 48 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 6 Configuring wireless and telecoms interfaces Figure 125 Step 1 Interface Configuration page with T1 enabled Step 1 Interface Configuration Please complete the wizard in order to arm the unit A valid IP address and subnet mask is required before the PTP unit can be used on a network Please see your network administrator if you are unsure of the correct values to enter here Interface configuration data entry CN r IP Address 1 fa J100 26 Subnet Mask 255 255 ay 0 Gateway IP Address 1 1 1 254 Use VLAN For Management Interfaces No VLAN Tagging v Telecoms Interface O None OH n Telecoms Channel Selection Channel 4 Only Channels 4 and B Channel A Line Code O awl B8ZSHDB3 Channel 4 Cable Length 133 O26 O399 Os33 O655 feet Channel B Line Code O aMi B8ZS HDB3 Chann
387. llation options Use the installation report to determine which installation options are required Refer to PTP LINKPlanner on page 2 12 Preparing personnel In no event shall Cambium Networks be liable for any injury or damage caused during the installation of the Cambium PTP 600 Ensure that only qualified personnel undertake the installation of a PTP 600 link Ensure that all safety precautions are observed Preparing inventory Perform the following inventory checks Check that an installation report is available and that it is based on the principles described in Chapter 2 Planning considerations Check that the correct components are available as described in Ordering components on page 2 53 Check the contents of all packages against their packing lists Preparing tools Check that following specific tools are available in addition to general tools 13mm wrench and 22 mm wrench for use with the glands RJ45 crimp tool it must be the correct tool for the type of RJ45 being used Personal Computer PC with 10 100 or 1000 BaseT Ethernet Either Internet Explorer 7 Internet Explorer 8 Firefox 3 or Firefox 3 5 Ethernet patch cables phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 5 3 Installing the ODU and top LPU Chapter 5 Installation Installing the ODU and top LPU Perform this task to install the ODU integrated or connectorized and top Lightning Protection Unit LPU on the supporting structure This task consists of
388. lled If the tower is greater than 61 m 200 ft in height an additional grounding kit must be installed at the tower midpoint Additional ground kits must be installed as necessary to reduce the distance between ground kits to 61 m 200 ft or less In high lightning prone geographical areas additional ground kits should be installed at spacing between 15 to 22 m 50 to 75 ft This is especially important on towers taller than 45 m 150 ft A schematic example of a mast or tower installation is shown in Figure 32 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Grounding and lightning protection Figure 32 Grounding and lightning protection on mast or tower Outdoor CAT5e cable gel filled shielded with copper plated steel ODU LE i CAT5e cable foil or braid screened Dis a with screened connectors e A on PTP 600 ground cable Top LPU direct ground cable if mandated by regulations e First point of contact between drop cable and tower o Grounding system Q Mid point of tower kd Equipment building L Bottom of tower Leu y n y PIDU Tower 4 ground bar External gt ground bar Ground ring phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 2 25 Grounding and lightning protection Chapter 2 Planning considerations Protection requirements for a wall installation If the ODU is to be mounted on the wall of a building then in addition to the general protection requirements above the follo
389. lling the PIDU Perform this task to install the PIDU and connect it to the ODU and network cables This task consists of the following procedures e Mounting the PIDU on page 5 29 e Connecting the PIDU to the ODU cable on page 5 29 e Preparing the PIDU to LAN cable on page 5 31 Mounting the PIDU Mount the PIDU on a wall or other suitable mounting surface at a height that protects it from flooding or rising damp Mount it using the lugs provided as this prevents the unit from being knocked or kicked and can help maintain link availability Ensure that the Recovery switch can be accessed when mounting the unit The PIDU is not waterproof and should be mounted away from sources of moisture If mounted outdoors the unit should be mounted in a moisture proof enclosure preferably ventilated Connecting the PIDU to the ODU cable The cable from the ODU is connected to the PIDU by means of a concealed RJ45 socket Plugging other equipment into the ODU RJ45 socket may damage the equipment due to the non standard techniques employed to inject DC power into the 1000BaseT connection between the PIDU and the ODU Plugging the ODU into other equipment may damage the ODU and or the other equipment Do not dress the PIDU cables too tightly as this may make the connections unreliable The connected network equipment must feature screened RJ45 connectors and must be connected to ground otherwise the PIDU will not be grounded phn
390. lt Trying swapping the transmit and receive fibers Remove and remake both ends of the fiber connection ensuring that is no dust or other debris contaminating the connections License key is incorrect for optical If the license key which you have is incorrect then contact your distributor or reseller 8 18 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Troubleshooting a fiber interface Fiber alarms are raised ALARM An SFP is installed but has been disabled because your license key does not include Fiber support This alarm indicates that the license key entered into the PTP 600 unit is invalid ALARM No Fiber link established but no LOS i e an optical carrier is detected Broken TX Fiber or link disabled at Fiber link partner This alarm indicates that a signal is being received over the fiber interface but the transmit fiber is broken or the receiver at the far end is disabled phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 8 19 Troubleshooting a fiber interface Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 8 20 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Glossary Term Definition ARP Address Resolution Protocol ATPC Automatic Transmit Power Control BPSK Binary Phase Shift Keying CSP Critical Security Parameter DC Direct Current DER Distinguished Encoding Rules DFS Dynamic Frequency Selection EIRP Equivalent Isotropic Radiated Power ETSI Eur
391. m Peak 91 dBm Submit configuration changes Reset form Channel barring is disabled in fixed frequency mode it is not required as dynamic channel hopping is prohibited in this mode The only controls available to the master are the Page Refresh Period and Interference Threshold attributes They will have no effect on the operation of the wireless link and will only effect the generation of the channel spectrum graphics The active channel history menu is removed in this mode of operation as channel hopping is prohibited phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 7 27 Managing spectrum Chapter 7 Operation 7 28 Spectrum management in radar avoidance mode When the link is operating in radar avoidance mode the Spectrum Management page Figure 171 and Figure 172 contains the following additional information e The main page title has the Radar Avoidance suffix e The only controls available to the master are the Interference Threshold attribute This has no effect on the operation of the wireless link and will only affect the generation of the channel spectrum graphics e Extra color coding of the interference histogram is provided Table 138 When operating with RTTT Road transport and Traffic Telematics Avoidance enabled or other regulatory restrictions on channel us
392. m Superior Essex 1000 ft Reel Outdoor Copper Clad CAT5E Cambium part number WB3175 328 ft 100 m Reel Outdoor Copper Clad CATS5E Cambium part number WB3176 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Ordering components Item Notes RJ45 connectors 4a NOTE The specified connectors and crimp tool are specific to Superior Essex BBDGe cable they may not work with other types of cable Cable glands Tyco AMP Mod Plug RJ45 Unscreened 25 pk Cambium part number WB3177 Tyco AMP Crimp Tool Cambium part number WB3211 For protecting the drop cable entry points Glands are included in the ODU and LPU kits but additional glands may be purchased from Cambium if required PTP SER EMC CABLE GLAND GROUNDING Quantity 10 Cambium part number WB1811 Cable hoisting grip SF PTE tne Cable grounding kits phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 For hoisting the drop cable up to the ODU without damaging the gland or RJ45 plug Not supplied by Cambium One kit is required per drop cable grounding point Cable Grounding Kits For 1 4 And 3 8 Cable Cambium part number 01010419001 Kit contents grounding cable self amalgamating tape PVC tape tie wraps bolts washers and nuts 2 61 Ordering components Chapter 2 Planning considerations Item Notes Lightning Protection Unit LPU kit
393. mage corruption Table 4 PIDU LED functions LED Function Power green Power supply detection Ethernet yellow Ethernet traffic detection ANOTE For a full list of LED states and fault finding actions refer to Testing link end hardware on page 8 2 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 1 13 Powered indoor unit PIDU Chapter 1 Product description Redundancy and alternative powering configurations The PTP 600 Series can be powered from an external DC source and can be provided with power supply redundancy as follows e External DC supply only Figure 8 This configuration is for use where there is no mains supply e External DC supply and AC supply Figure 9 This configuration provides redundancy through the use of mains and DC supply e External DC supply and redundant AC Supply Figure 10 This configuration guards against mains failure and failure of the DC output of one PIDU Figure 8 External DC supply only To Network To ODU Somat Figure 9 External DC supply and AC supply To onu To Network Equprert 1 14 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Powered indoor unit PI DU Figure 10 External DC supply and redundant AC supply pc Supply To Network To ODU Equpmert Remote LEDs and recovery switch The PIDU provides a facility to connect remote LEDs and Recovery switch allowing the PIDU to be mounted inside an enclosure At the left hand end of the
394. mber of consecutive repeated 2 Characters alphabetic numeric and special characters permitted in passwords For example if all values are set to 2 then aaa XXX 999 and will be rejected but aa XX 99 or will be accepted Maximum The maximum number of consecutive lowercase 5 Consecutive uppercase and numeric characters permitted in Characters passwords For example if all values are set to 5 then ALFRED neuman and 834030 will be rejected Maximum The maximum number of alphabetic and numeric 3 Sequential characters permitted in passwords haraciets For example if set to 3 then abcd WXYZ and 0123 will be rejected but abc xyz and 123 will be accepted Maximum Repeated The maximum sequence of characters that canbe 3 Pattern Length repeated consecutively in passwords For example if set to 3 then BlahBlah and 31st31st will be rejected but TicTicTock and GeeGee will be accepted Blah Blah will be accepted because the two sequences are not consecutive Match Reversed No means that reversed patterns are not Yes Patterns checked Yes means that reversed patterns are checked For example if Maximum Repeated Pattern Length is set to 3 and Match Reversed Patterns is set to Yes then AB1221BA will be rejected Minimum The minimum number of password characters th
395. me The Home web page reports Wireless Link Status and basic information needed to identify the link The Home page additionally lists all active alarm conditions e Status The Status web page reports the detailed status of the PTP 600 e System These web pages are used for configuration management including IP and Ethernet AES encryption keys quality of service software upgrade and installation of license keys The System pages additionally provide detailed counters and diagnostic measurements used for performance management e Installation The Installation Wizard is used to configure the PTP 600 wireless interface and to arm the unit ready for alignment e Management These web pages are used to configure the network management interfaces e Security The Security Wizard is used to configure the HTTPS TLS interface and to operate the PTP 600 with optional enhanced security for FIPS 140 2 or UC APL applications The Security Wizard is disabled until AES encryption is enabled by license key e Change Password The Change Password web page changes the web interface password of the active user Users use this screen to change their own password e Logout Allows a user to log out from the web based interface Transport layer security The HTTPS TLS interface provides the same set of web pages as the HTTP interface but allows HTTP traffic to be encrypted using Transport Layer Security TLS PTP 600 uses AES encryption for HTTPS TLS
396. ment In connection with Cambium s delivery of certain proprietary software or products containing embedded or pre loaded proprietary software or both Cambium is willing to license this certain proprietary software and the accompanying documentation to you only on the condition that you accept all the terms in this End User License Agreement Agreement IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT DO NOT USE THE PRODUCT OR INSTALL THE SOFTWARE INSTEAD YOU MAY FOR A FULL REFUND RETURN THIS PRODUCT TO THE LOCATION WHERE YOU ACQUIRED IT OR PROVIDE WRITTEN VERIFICATION OF DELETION OF ALL COPIES OF THE SOFTWARE ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE PRODUCT WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR ACCEPTANCE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT Definitions In this Agreement the word Software refers to the set of instructions for computers in executable form and in any media which may include diskette CD ROM downloadable internet hardware or firmware licensed to you The word Documentation refers to electronic or printed manuals and accompanying instructional aids licensed to you The word Product refers to Cambium s fixed wireless broadband devices for which the Software and Documentation is licensed for use Grant of license 3 2 Cambium Networks Limited Cambium grants you Licensee or you a personal nonexclusive non transferable license to use the Software and Documenta
397. ment attributes on page 6 83 taking care to complete the following additional settings a Set Access Control to Enabled b Enter the IP address of the CAC enabled workstation as the Access Control IP Address Perform either Configuring SNMPv3 agent on page 6 63 or Configuring SNMPv1 2c agent on page 6 72 taking care to complete the following additional settings In Step 1 set SMP Access Control to Enabled In Step 1 enter up to three SNMP Access Control IP Address phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 6 115 Configuring for UC APL applications Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment 4 Perform Configuring local user accounts on page 6 34 taking care to complete the following additional settings a Configure password complexity as required by the latest version of the Application and Security Development STIG b Configure appropriate identity based user names and passwords taking care to select Force Password Change for all users apart from the current user 5 Perform Configuring RADIUS authentication on page 6 42 taking care to complete the following additional settings Set RADIUS Client to Enabled Set Authentication Method to PEAP MS CHAPv2 Configure one or two authentication servers by entering their IP addresses and other attributes 6 Perform Setting the real time clock to synchronize using SNTP on page 6 101 taking care to complete the following additional settings Set SNTP State to Enab
398. ments but still allows easy access for connecting and weatherproofing the cables To minimize cable losses select a position where the antenna cable lengths can be minimized If separate antennas are being deployed it is not necessary to mount the ODU at the midpoint between the antennas phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 5 5 Installing the ODU and top LPU Chapter 5 Installation Selecting a mounting option for the top LPU 5 6 Select the most suitable mounting option for the top LPU Figure 93 Figure 93 Top LPU mounting options Option 1 LPU mounted back to back with the ODU on ODU bracket recommended Grounding system Mounting pole Top LPU mounted back to back with the ODU gt ODU to top LPU ground cable 4 Top LPU direct ground cable if mandated by local regulations Drop cable grounding point Outdoor CAT5e cable A gel filled shielded with copper plated steel Option 2 LPU mounted on pole with U bolt supplied in LPU kit Grounding system Mounting pole ODU mounted on pole with bracket supplied Pan Top LPU mounted on pole with U bolt supplied in LPU kit_ ODU to top LPU ground cable Top LPU direct ground cable if mandated by local regulations Drop cable grounding point a Outdoor CAT5e cable gel filled shielded with copper plated steel phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012
399. messages on page 7 19 Syslog Configuration Configuring system logging syslog on page 6 81 Configuring HTTPS TLS on page 6 23 Zeroize CSPs Change Password Zeroizing critical security parameters on page 7 34 Changing own user password on page 6 41 x yi Oo oO c ai Zz Logout phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Web based management Viewing the system summary To display the System Summary page select menu option Home The System Summary page Figure 161 contains a high level summary of the status of the wireless link and associated equipment Figure 161 System Summary page System Summary auintes uae nts Link Name Tower of London Elapsed Time Indicator 00 08 13 System Clock 08 Nov 2006 10 42 08 The System Summary page displays any uncleared system alarms below the System Clock attribute Whenever system alarms are outstanding a yellow warning triangle is displayed on the navigation bar For more information refer to Managing alarms on page 7 14 The attributes of the System Summary page are described in Table 131 Table 131 System Summary attributes Attribute Meaning Wireless Link Current status of the wireless link Status A green background with status text Up means that the point to point link is established A red background with suitable status text for example Searching indicates that the link is not establis
400. methods one is set to IP and the other TDM Management Port Configuration Mismatch Management Port Disabled Warning Ethernet fragments runt packets have been detected when the out of band management link is in full duplex This indicates an auto negotiation or forced configuration mismatch The out of band management link has been administratively disabled via the SNMP Interface Management Port Status A non OK value indicates that the out of band management link is down The most likely cause is that the unit has no Ethernet cable plugged into its AUX port No Wireless Channel Available Spectrum Management was unable to locate a suitable wireless channel to operate on Region Code The installed license key contains an invalid region code The wireless unit is prohibited from operating outside the regulated limits SNTP Synchronization failed SNTP has been enabled but the unit is unable to synchronize with the specified SNTP server Setting the real time clock on page 6 100 explains how to configure SNTP Syslog Local Enable Disable The local log of event messages has been enabled or disabled See Task 9 Configuring syslog on page 6 81 Syslog Local Nearly Full The local log of event messages is nearly full Syslog Local The local log of event messages is full and is now being Wrapped overwritten by new messages TDD The current status of the TDD Synchronizati
401. mode on page 1 58 Recovery mode The PTP 600 recovery mode provides a means to recover from serious configuration errors including lost or forgotten passwords and unknown IP addresses Recovery mode also allows new main application software to be loaded even when the integrity of the existing main application software image has been compromised The most likely cause of an integrity problem with the installed main application software is where the power supply has been interrupted during an earlier software upgrade The ODU operates in recovery mode in the following circumstances e When a checksum error occurs for the main application software image e When the PIDU recovery button is pressed at the same time as the ODU is rebooted or power cycled Recovery mode options Options in recovery mode are as follows e Load new main application software e Reset all configuration data to factory default This option resets IP and Ethernet configuration and erases zeroizes critical security parameters e Reset IP and Ethernet configuration to factory default e Erase zeroize critical security parameters e Reboot with existing software and configuration Aa NOTE If recovery mode has been entered because of a checksum error by default the ODU will reboot with existing software and configuration following a 30 second wait phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide System management The recovery software im
402. more convenient collocation of units on a single mast e Allows use of smaller or lower performance antennas e Reduces inference resulting in use of more efficient modulation modes In a correctly designed synchronised network all links are configured with the same TDD frame duration and the TDD frame contains guard periods longer than the propagation delay between the most distant interfering units Each synchronized unit is assigned to one of two phases A master ODU can be assigned to either phase A slave ODU must be assigned to a different phase from the associated master ODU The phase is set by suitable configuration of TDD Frame Offset TDD synchronization eliminates RF interference between units in the same phase This means that frequency planning in a synchronized network is concerned only with interference between units in different phases Frequency planning is still necessary but the number of potential interference paths to be considered is halved Frequency planning in a synchronized TDD network has approximately the same level of complexity as frequency planning in a Frequency Division Duplex FDD network TDD synchronization Additional hardware Additional hardware is needed to synchronize PTP 600 links Two alternative approaches are supported e MemoryLink UltraSync GPS receiver This unit contains a GPS receiver producing a 1 Hz timing reference locked to the GPS network The UltraSync unit is connected directly t
403. mperature 40 C 40 F to 60 C 140 F Suitable for use indoors or outdoors within a weatherproofed cabinet Humidity 0 to 95 non condensing Waterproofing Not waterproof Table 51 PTP SYNC unit electrical specifications Category Power supply Specification Integrated with PIDU Power consumption 1 5 W max extra power is required to supply a GPS receiver 4 4 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Equipment specifications There are two timing inputs to the PTP SYNC unit GPS SYNC IN RJ 45 Table 52 and 1PPS IN SMA Table 53 Table 52 PTP SYNC unit timing specifications GPS SYNC IN RJ 45 Category Specification Signal type Differential 1 Hz signal Common mode range 7 V to 7 V relative to GPS SYNC IN pin 2 ground Maximum differential voltage 5 V Threshold 0 4 V Impedance 90 ohms to 110 ohms Pulse width 1 us to 500 ms Polarity Reference edge is when pin 3 PPSA is positive with respect to pin 6 PPSB Table 53 PTP SYNC unit timing specifications 1PPS IN SMA Category Specification Signal type 1 Hz signal Pulse Positive pulse reference edge is rising edge Maximum voltage 5V Threshold 0 4 V to 0 6 V Input impedance 45 ohms to 55 ohms Pulse width lus to 500ms phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 5 Equipment specifications Chapter 4 Reference information The pinouts of the PTP SYNC
404. n Installing the ODU and top LPU on page 5 4 Describes how to install the ODU integrated or connectorized and top Lightning Protection Unit LPU on the supporting structure Installing connectorized antennas on page 5 10 Describes how to install separate antenna s for a connectorized ODU Installing the drop cable and bottom LPU on page 5 16 Describes how to install the drop cable from the top LPU to the bottom LPU and PIDU and to provide grounding for the installation Installing the PIDU on page 5 29 Describes how to install the PIDU and connect it to the ODU and network cables Installing a PTP SYNC unit on page 5 32 Describes how to install a PTP SYNC unit optional Installing a GPS receiver for PTP SYNC on page 5 37 Describes how to install a GPS receiver optional Installing an E1 or T1 interface on page 5 50 Describes how to install an E1 or T1 telecommunications interface optional Installing an OOBM interface on page 5 55 Describes how to install an out of band management interface optional Installing a fiber interface on page 5 57 Describes how to install a fiber optic interface optional phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 5 1 Preparing for installation Chapter 5 Installation Preparing for installation This section describes the checks to be performed before proceeding with the installation Unit pre configuration It is common practice to pre configure the units during staging before site instal
405. n 2c5 0ss2scccsanis na E E ER 6 111 Configuration procedures for FIPS 140 2 rsnsenenisnsnsin neie a E aiaa 6 112 Checking that the unit is in FIPS 140 2 secure Mode ssesseirsiisssrrsresircssecsiersiessseroieriens 6 112 AIPS Key Size Wall Mil Gis ecisecca2ssesia scan capuuacmetanmeseeeeeeas oeaeecaas sap eee ean teas Seneca SR 6 113 Configuring for UC APL applications siressa 8a dyes aE EEEE 6 114 Prerequisites for UC APL CONMG ULATION esssisscccsrsxadesasesdaevsncesbedesceseens neaescaneeecreusebeesiawsetentes 6 114 Configuration procedures for UC APL sssrini aA S SE ASAREE 6 115 Checking that the unit is in UC APL secure mode sss sssesssessseesseesserssersssrssserssersserese 6 117 IPT TPS Keys izes wali eoon onr aan E sees sens eeaeecae ooo een cau case See eee Pree ein 6 118 Chapter 7 Operation cccccsceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeuaeeeuaeeeuaeeeeeeaseeeaseaeaseeeaseeuaseguaseguansguanes 7 1 Web based Mana GeMent 3 25 15 sisssssaadisiaiasasanssesisasadesaswacensaaeaads senandcanisantetansdsaasaueddaceeasuaieaanal 7 2 Accessing the web interface s ssseesseesseesseerssesssersseessressressresseessressserssersserssereserssernsserss 7 2 Using the menu OPE ONS sa c2sesesiedeeescie ere E a nes vasa eae cee E A A 7 3 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Viewing the System Sumimary prerane ara ee eee a eeen oun ncaa eco eee ca ee A 7 5 Viewing the system Status cssscessesyscessavnecsaewsadessaess sesdecb
406. n 2512 007v000 Dec 2012 xvii Figure 180 Figure 181 Figure 182 Figure 183 Figure 184 Figure 185 Figure 186 Figure 187 Figure 188 xviii List of Figures Reboot Wireless Umit page 2 452 ss siaetasmasespasatiasias oaaemeipoereaeeneaes ease euiens see eneeeeoiauiass 7 52 Reboot confirmation Pop Up sssasesesxscaasaahsageaesagessazsa AA E rra dane ian eee 7 52 PIDU recovery switch location ais decaotedevacdidacxaadalsoys reuhsnae adalaces baavehisraunwalabnassaedesevedit 7 53 Recovery Image Warning pag sister craneacessncsarsaanegewnss a ERE EE R ERATES 7 54 Recovery Options Pag Crs isishassacesaas vaaiaadhciansansacacasanccanaanatdeadanecascaavasteantvetatedansedead deecaias 7 54 Ethernet packet test flowchart esicccsvegaacscdnav ences sua ndeaedeadactesnsaceuwadeendetvanseiainonsacestosavetees 8 6 Drop cable tester front and back views sssssssnsssesssessseesseesseeessrrsserssersserssersserss 8 8 GPS synchronization Unit senecs a E E E 8 10 Telecom pag eana E A AA E A EE 8 17 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide List of Tables Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15 Table 16 Table 17 Table 18 Table 19 Table 20 Table 21 Table 22 Table 23 Table 24 Table 25 Table 26 Table 27 Table 28 Table 29 Table 30 Table 31 PTP 600 Series frequency variants x1 25 5204 2eccessseoeemea onset e
407. n 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Wireless specifications LCF 4713 LCF 4714 LCF 4715 LCF 4716 LCF 4717 Figure 55 PTP 48600 available spectrum in 5 MHz channel bandwidth En Region Code 23 4940 MHz 4 o Iac y 4710 MHz Region Code 15 5000 MHz Region code 24 NTIA In the 20 MHz Figure 56 channel bandwidth the PTP 48600 variant operates on a 20 MHz channel raster In the 10 MHz Figure 57 channel bandwidth the PTP 48600 variant operates on a 10 MHz channel raster The channel raster is set to even center frequencies Figure 56 PTP 48600 available spectrum in the 20 MHz channel bandwidth RC 24 c1 C2 C3 C4 cs ce C7 cs cg c10 Cit C12 4710 4730 4750 4770 4790 4890 4910 4930 4700 MHz 4940 MHz Figure 57 PTP 48600 available spectrum in 10 MHz channel bandwidth RC 24 D D2 D3 D4 DS D D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D2t D22 D23 D24 4705 4715 4725 4735 4745 4755 4765 4775 4785 4795 4805 4815 4825 4835 4845 4855 4865 4875 4885 4895 4905 4915 4925 4935 4700 MHz 4940 MHz phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 21 Wireless specifications Chapter 4 Reference information PTP 49600 available spectrum settings In the 20 MHz Figure 58 10 MHz Figure 59 and 5 MHz Figure 60 channel bandwidths the PTP 49600 variant operates on a 5 MHz channel rast
408. n Chapter 2 Planning considerations Configuration options for TDD synchronization This section describes the different configuration options that may be used for implementing TDD synchronization in the PTP 600 Series Schematic diagrams are included The PTP 600 supports the following TDD synchronization configurations e Single link configuration with UltraSync on page 2 30 e Single link configuration with PTP SYNC on page 2 31 e Cluster with PTP SYNC and GPS receiver on page 2 32 e Cluster with PTP SYNC and no GPS receiver on page 2 33 Single link configuration with UltraSync Each link requires an UltraSync GPS receiver connected at the master ODU Figure 36 The wireless configuration settings are e Master Slave Mode Master e TDD Sync Device UltraSync Figure 36 TDD synchronization configuration standalone with UltraSync PTP 600 ODU Sync Top LPU Aux FIBER PIDU 2 30 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Configuration options for TDD synchronization Single link configuration with PTP SYNC Each link requires one PTP SYNC unit connected to the master ODU and one compatible GPS receiver Use this configuration where a site contains only one TDD master ODU The GPS receiver and LPU can be replaced by an alternative compatible 1 Hz timing reference Figure 37 The wireless configuration settings are e Master Slave Mode Ma
409. n a VLAN If so decide if this is a standard IEEE 802 1Q VLAN or provider bridged IEEE 802 1ad VLAN and select the VLAN ID for this VLAN Use of a separate management VLAN is strongly recommended Use of the management VLAN helps to ensure that the ODU management agent cannot be accessed by customers The in band local management mode is not available unless the IP interface is connected in a VLAN Priority for management traffic Choose the Ethernet and IP DSCP priority for management traffic generated within the ODU management agent The priority should be selected so as to be consistent with existing policy on priority of management traffic in the network Use of a high priority is strongly recommended to ensure that management traffic is not discarded if the link is overloaded Ensure that the priority assigned to management traffic is consistent with the quality of service scheme configured for bridged Ethernet traffic If QoS for bridged traffic is based on the IP MPLS scheme set the DSCP management priority to map to a high priority queue If QoS for bridged traffic is based on the Ethernet scheme set the VLAN management priority to map to a high priority queue IP interface Choose an IP address for the IP interface of the ODU management agent The IP address must be unique and valid for the connected network segment and VLAN Find out the correct subnet mask and gateway IP address for this network segment and VLAN phn
410. n access key and generate a new license key as described in Task 3 Installing license keys on page 6 14 Select menu option System Configuration The System Configuration page is displayed with encryption attributes Encryption Algorithm None AES 128 bit Rijndael O AES 256 bit Rijndael Encryption Key Confirm Encryption Key Select the Encryption Algorithm either AES 128 bit or AES 256 bit The same algorithm must be used at both ends of the link Enter and confirm the encryption key The key consists of 32 or 64 case insensitive hexadecimal characters The same key must be used at both ends of the link Select Submit Updated System Configuration The reboot confirmation dialog is displayed The Configuration Changes Require a System Reboot The configuration changes you requested can only be activated via a system reboot VWVYould you like to reboot the wireless unit now Reboot Wireless Unit lt lt Back Select Reboot Wireless Unit and then OK to confirm phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 5 Configuring security Configuring AES encryption in an operational link Configuring link encryption over an operational link will necessitate a service outage Therefore the configuration process should be scheduled during a period of low link utilization To enable AES encryption over an operational link proceed as follows Ope
411. n contains specifications of the PTP 600 Ethernet and telecoms interfaces Ethernet and telecoms interfaces 4 46 The PTP 600 Ethernet ports conform to the specifications listed in Table 75 and Table 76 Table 75 PTP 600 Ethernet bridging specifications Ethernet Bridging Specification Protocol IEEE802 1 IEEE802 1p IEEE802 3 compatible QoS IEEE 802 1p eight levels IEEE 802 1Q IEEE 802 1ad DSCP IPv4 DSCP IPv6 MPLS TC Interface 10 100 1000BaseT RJ 45 Supports MDI MDIX Auto Crossover Data Rates See Data throughput tables on page 4 74 Maximum Ethernet Frame Size 2000 bytes Service classes for bridged traffic 7 classes out of band management mode 8 classes in band management mode Aa NOTE Practical Ethernet rates will depend on network configuration higher layer protocols and platforms used Over the air throughput will be capped to the rate of the Ethernet interface at the receiving end of the link Table 76 PTP 600 telecoms interface specifications Telecoms Specification Interfaces 2 E1 balanced 120R or 2 T1 balanced 100R over a CAT5 screened twisted pair cable Jitter and Wander Compliant with G 823 G 824 Surge Protection and Power Cross Compliant with GR1089 EN60950 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Layer 2 control protocols Data network specifications PTP 600 identifies Layer
412. n descending order of Trimble location number that is 12 11 9 5 4 3 2 1 Push the contacts in so that the shoulder on the contact fits into the hole in the plug shell When all contacts have been fitted push them in further to engage with the locking mechanism in the plug shell This can be done by applying pressure to the contact with a small diameter stiff object such as tweezers ANOTE If a contact is pushed in to the point where the locking mechanism engages before all of the contacts have been inserted it will limit the amount of room available to fit the remaining contacts requiring harder bends to be applied Fit the plug to its shell The plastic ring fits inside the rubber boot and ensures a tight fit when the plug body is clipped onto the plug shell Be aware that the plug body is a hard push fit onto the plug shell phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 5 45 Installing a GPS receiver for PTP SYNC Chapter 5 Installation 7 Fitthe strain relief clip Installing the GPS drop cable Perform this procedure to install the main GPS drop cable connect it to the GPS and ground it to the supporting structure To install the main GPS drop cable proceed as follows 1 Hoist the main GPS drop cable up to the GPS unit using the hoisting grip anda hoist line When the cable is in position and the grip handle is fastened to the supporting structure remove the hoist line 2 Ifa GPS adapter cable is available use it to co
413. n disabled A non OK value indicates that the master and slave ends of the wireless link are different hardware products or have different software versions It is very unusual to detect this because incompatible units will normally fail to establish a wireless link However some combinations may establish a partial wireless link and detect this situation Incompatible Region Codes The two linked units have different region codes To clear this alarm obtain and install license keys for the same region code see Task 3 Installing license keys on page 6 14 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Managing alarms and events Alarm Meaning Install Arm State Install Status A wireless unit is in installation mode After installation the wireless unit should be disarmed This will increase the data carrying capacity and stop the installation tone generator The wireless link is disarmed from the Installation process see Disarming the units on page 6 91 A non OK value indicates that signaling was received with the wrong MAC address It is very unusual to detect this because units with wrongly configured Target MAC Address will normally fail to establish a wireless link However rare circumstances may establish a partial wireless link and detect this situation Link Mode Optimization Mismatch The Master and Slave ODUs are configured to use different link mode optimization
414. n drop cable as described in Assembling a 12 way circular connector on page 5 42 LPU PTP SYNC drop cable To prepare a short section of drop cable to connect the LPU to the PTP SYNC cut off the approximate length required allowing a bit of surplus then fit an RJ45 connector and gland to the LPU end only as described in Assembling an RJ45 connector and gland on page 5 18 5 38 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Installing a GPS receiver for PTP SYNC Assembling an RJ45 plug and housing for GPS This procedure is only performed when a GPS adapter cable kit is available This kit is used to connect the Trimble Acutime Gold GPS receiver to the GPS drop cable The kit contains an adapter cable GPS receiver circular connector to RJ45 socket and an RJ45 plug housing The plug housing should be assembled over the end of the drop cable to provide a sealed connection to the adapter cable 4a NOTE These instructions are for the preparation of the Cambium supplied drop cable type Superior Essex BBDGE Other types of cable may need different preparation methods To assemble the plug housing over the end of the drop cable proceed as follows 1 Prepare the top end of the GPS drop cable Inner Inner plastic sheath Solid screen Outer plastic conductors sheath 2 Install plug housing from the converter kit onto the prepared cable Do not tighten the nuts at this stage Gasket Housing Screw Sea
415. n to the System Summary page and view the alarms If the warning triangle disappears when it is clicked it indicates that the outstanding alarms have been cleared The alarm configuration procedure is described in Task 8 Configuring alarms and messages on page 6 77 The example in Figure 165 shows the warning triangle in the navigation bar and the Channel A alarm displayed in the System Summary page The alarms are defined in Table 133 A change of state in most alarms generates an SNMP trap or an SMTP email alert Figure 165 Alarm warning triangle Q Cambium Networks System Summary Link Name Bolinas Ridge to Mount Tamalpais Home Elapsed Time Indicator 00 00 58 Status System Clock 18 Nov 2011 16 22 48 System Installation Management Security Change Password Logout phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Managing alarms and events Table 133 System alarms Alarm Meaning Channel A The current status of telecoms channels A or B Alarm conditions are as follows or Channel B No Signal Local There is no telecoms signal present at the connection to the ODU at the local end No Signal Remote There is an absence of telecoms data across the wireless link No Signal Local and Remote The above two alarm conditions occur concurrently Remote Timing There is insufficient wireless capacity available to carry telecoms data Under
416. n two browsers Log into the web interfaces at each end of the link Perform Configuring AES encryption on page 6 22 at one unit Perform Configuring AES encryption on page 6 22 at the other unit a fF WN Ff Reboot both ends of the link The software is designed to allow five seconds so that a user can command both ends of the link to reboot before the wireless link drops Configuring HTTPS TLS Perform this procedure if the unit is required to operate in HTTPS TLS mode For more information refer to Planning for HTTPS TLS operation on page 2 41 Aa NOTE If FIPS 140 2 secure mode is required refer to Configuring for FIPS 140 2 applications on page 6 111 instead of this procedure If UC APL secure mode is required refer to Configuring for UC APL applications on page 6 114 instead of this procedure To configure HTTPS TLS proceed as follows 1 Ensure that the following cryptographic material has been generated Key Of Keys TLS Private Key and Public Certificates for the correct IP address User Defined Security Banner Entropy Input Wireless Link Encryption Key for AES 2 Identify the Port numbers for HTTPS HTTP and Telnet phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 23 Task 5 Configuring security Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Ensure that the web browsers used are enabled for HTTPS TLS operation Select menu option Management Web Local User Accounts and check that EITHER Identity Based User Accounts are Disabled
417. nal packaging is no earlier than the minimum listed in Table 7 Table 7 Minimum part number suffix for FIPS 140 2 mode Frequency variant Part number suffix PTP 25600 BB PTP 45600 BB PTP 48600 AA PTP 49600 AA PTP 54600 EE PTP 58600 DD PTP 59600 BB The ODU will also have compatible hardware security if the part number suffix is earlier and PTP 600 Hardware Security Upgrade has been applied The Hardware Security Upgrade Kit is available as Cambium part number WB3593AA phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide FIPS 140 2 mode Units with compatible hardware security have tamper evident labels fitted as shown in Figure 22 and Figure 23 Figure 22 Tamper evident label on side edge of ODU Figure 23 Tamper evident label on top edge of ODU The ODU will have hardware security compatible with FIPS 140 2 if the hardware version displayed on the Status page contains the string FPS as shown in Figure 24 This provides an alternative means of checking hardware where the ODU has already been deployed and is in a physical location that makes it difficult to observe tamper evident labels Figure 24 FIPS 140 2 hardware version identification System Status Master Equipment Attributes value unit Link Name FIPS 140 2 test Site Name School building Software Yersion 45600 SPECTRA0850 DEY B16 we Hardware Yersion DO6 RO1 C FPS Validated software image FI
418. nc was No Sync now in Sync phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 7 19 Managing spectrum Chapter 7 Operation Managing spectrum This section describes how to configure the spectrum management feature of the PTP 600 and how to interpret spectrum management graphical plots This section contains the following procedures e Configuring spectrum usage at the master on page 7 20 e Viewing spectrum usage at the slave on page 7 23 e Interpreting the spectrum management plots on page 7 24 e Viewing the active channel history on page 7 32 e Viewing historic spectrum management metrics on page 7 33 Configuring spectrum usage at the master 7 20 All spectrum management configuration changes are applied at the master ODU only These changes are then sent from the master to the slave so that both master and slave keep identical copies of spectrum management configuration It is therefore possible to swap master and slave roles on an active PTP 600 link without modifying Spectrum Management configuration A NOTE Before attempting to improve the performance of the spectrum management algorithm by changing the default configuration consulting the Cambium Point to Point distributor or one of the system field support engineers The default channelization can be modified by varying the lower center frequency attribute in the installation wizard as described in Step 2 Wireless configuration on page 6 51 To configure spectrum usage
419. nce information Wireless specifications Figure 70 PTP 59600 available spectrum in 15 MHz channel bandwidth D vs LCF 5836 LCF 5838 LCF 5925 MHz 5825 MHz PTP 59600 available spectrum in 10 MHz channel bandwidth Figure 71 O m ee w LCF 5832 LCF 5834 LCF 5925 MHz 5825 MHz phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 30 PTP 600 Series User Guide Wireless specifications Figure 72 PTP 59600 available spectrum in 5 MHz channel bandwidth SIS1 51 5 51 51 5 LCF 5828 slis isiis isiisiis 2113114141 51 5116 B14 loll 6li2iial 4 SIS1 5 1 51 51 5 5 LCF 5830 slisiisiisiisiislls 3I3 l4l 41l5llelle O 6 21 8 l4 loll 5115 15 8 18 18 LCF 5832 allalla 2 81 4 5825 MHz Compan ONGUI NNO eNO anton o N o W O u Noon e o a o o un E Ees gt MOOM O Noon ooo n ooo n POOO Ee N OW e Og O ONOM m on PNOO TTS System threshold output power and link loss The following tables specify the system threshold dBm output power dBm and 5925 MHz maximum link loss dB per channel bandwidth and modulation mode Table 61 PTP 25600 IP mode Table 62 PTP 25600 TDM mode Table 63 PTP 45600 IP mode Table 64 PTP 45600 TDM mode Table 65 PTP 48600 IP mode Table 66 PTP 48600 TDM mode Table 67 PTP 49600 IP mode Table 68 PTP 49600 TDM mode Ta
420. nd other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC The declaration of conformity may be consulted at the support website see Contacting Cambium Networks on page 2 The European R amp TTE directive 1999 5 EC Certification Number is reproduced on the product label Figure 76 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 69 Notifications Chapter 4 Reference information Figure 76 European Union certification on 5 4 GHz product label CE B 08 2005 PTP 58600 regulatory compliance 4 70 This system has achieved Type Approval in various countries around the world This means that the system has been tested against various local technical regulations and found to comply The frequency band in which the system operates is license exempt and the system is allowed to be used provided it does not cause interference The licensing authority does not guaranteed protection against interference from other products and installations For the connectorized version of the product and in order to reduce potential radio interference to other users the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the Effective Isotropically Radiated Power EIRP is not more than that permitted for successful communication U S Federal Communication Commission FCC This device complies with part 15 of the US FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept
421. nd to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15E of the US FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with these instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment on and off the user is encouraged to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Increase the separation between the affected equipment and the unit e Connect the affected equipment to a power outlet on a different circuit from that which the receiver is connected to e Consult the dealer and or experienced radio TV technician for help FCC IDs Certification Numbers are reproduced on the product label Figure 73 Figure 73 FCC certifications on 2 5 GHz product label FCC ID QWP25601 Where necessary the end user is responsible for obtaining any National licenses required to operate this product and these must be obtained before using the product in any particular country Contact the appropriate national administrations for details on the conditions of use for the bands in question and any exceptions that might apply phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 67 Notifications Chap
422. nd weatherproofing example for GPS adapter cable Installing the GPS drop cable at building entry Install and ground the main GPS drop cable and LPU at the building or cabinet entry point and install the LPU PTP SYNC drop cable as described in Installing and grounding the drop cable at building entry on page 5 27 Connect this cable to the PTP SYNC unit as described in Connecting up the PTP SYNC unit on page 5 34 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 5 49 Installing an E1 or T1 interface Chapter 5 Installation Installing an E1 or T1 interface Perform this task to install an optional E1 or T1 interface This task consists of the following procedures e Preparing for E1 or T1 installation on page 5 50 e Installing E1 or T1 on page 5 50 e Testing the E1 T1 installation on page 5 53 Preparing for E1 or T1 installation Check that the correct components are available as described in Ordering components on page 2 53 To prevent damage to the ODU while making or breaking the connections ensure that power is removed from the system at the PIDU ANOTE The maximum permitted lengths of E1 or T1 cables are specified in Maximum cable lengths on page 2 7 Installing E1 or T1 To install an E1 or T1 interface proceed as follows 1 Mount the top LPU for the E1 or T1 interface close to the ODU using the U bolt bracket supplied with the PTP LPU kit Drop cable to PIDU Drop cable to E1 or T1 link on PTP 600 ground cable
423. nded that you now visit the Configuration page and enter the link name and location description fields and optionally save a backup copy of the link configuration You may also wish to visit the Spectrum Management page and configure the wireless link channel utilization To proceed directly to Task 12 Updating system configuration on page 6 92 click the Configuration link on the above page phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 91 Task 12 Updating system configuration Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Task 12 Updating system configuration Reviewing system configuration attributes When antenna alignment is complete and the units have been disarmed the system configuration should be reviewed and updated as necessary A NOTE At this stage Max Transmit Power must be set to the maximum value dBm for normal operation as recommended in the installation report A WARNING When installing or operating the PTP 54600 and PTP 58600 ATEX Hazloc product variants in hazardous locations ensure that the EIRP and Max Transmit Power do not exceed ATEX or Hazloc limits as specified in the PTP 600 Series Hazardous Location Guide supplied in box with the products To update the system configuration select menu option System Configuration The System Configuration page is displayed Figure 148 Update the attributes as required Table 125 then select Submit Updated System Configuration Figure 148 System Configuration page
424. ne 15 MHz 33 dBm EIRP phn 2512 007v000 Dec 2012 4 63 Compliance with radio regulations 4 64 Chapter 4 Reference information Region License Frequencies DFS Channel Max power code regulation bandwidth 9815 5850 10 MHz 31 dBm EIRP MHz 5 MHz 28 dBm EIRP 1 11 Korea 9725 5825 30 MHz 43 dBm EIRP BENE 15 MHz 41 dBm EIRP 10 MHz 40 dBm EIRP 5 MHz 37 dBm EIRP 19 India 5825 5850 10 15 MHz 36 dBm EIRP a RA 5 MHz 33 dBm EIRP 20 Thailand 5725 5850 5 10 15 30 30 dBm EIRP MHz MHz 22 Germany 5755 5850 Yes 30 MHz 35 dBm EIRP Nae 15 MHz 33 dBm EIRP 10 MHz 31 dBm EIRP 5 MHz 28 dBm EIRP 24 Bahrain 5725 5850 Yes 30 MHz 32 dBm EIRP ass 15 MHz 29 dBm EIRP 10 MHz 28 dBm EIRP 5 MHz 25 dBm EIRP 25 ETSI 9725 5850 Yes 30 MHz 35 dBm EIRP ne 15 MHz 33 dBm EIRP 10 MHz 31 dBm EIRP 5 MHz 28 dBm EIRP 27 Denmark 5725 5795 Yes 30 MHz 35 dBm EIRP seen gee oo ase o 1 10 MHz 31 dBm EIRP 5 MHz 28 dBm EIRP 28 Greece P 5795 Yes 30 MHz 35 dBm EIRP 15 MHz 33 dBm EIRP phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Compliance with radio regulations Region License Frequencies DFS Channel Max power code regulation bandwidth 10 MHz 31 dBm EIRP 5 MHz 28 dBm EIRP 29 Portugal 5725 5850 Yes 30 MHz 35 dBm EIRP Iceland Serbia MHz 15 MHz 33 dBm
425. ne required per antenna cable For example Polyphaser LSXL ME or LSXL phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 Ordering components Chapter 2 Planning considerations 2 64 FCC and IC approved antennas For connectorized units operating in the USA or Canada choose external antennas from Table 34 5 4 GHz or Table 35 and Table 36 5 8 GHz These are approved by the FCC for use with the product and are constrained by the following limits for single or dual polarization parabolic dish antennas e 5 4 GHz 34 9 dBi 33 4 dBi for 5 MHz bandwidth per polarization or antenna e 5 8 GHz up to 37 7 dBi per polarization or antenna Antennas not included in these tables are strictly prohibited for use with the PTP 600 in the specified bands This radio transmitter IC certification number 109A0 5X250 has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated Antenna types not included in this list having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type are strictly prohibited for use with this device Le pr sent metteur radio Num ro de certification IC 109AO 5X250 a t approuv par Industrie Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d antenne num r s ci dessous et ayant un gain admissible maximal et l imp dance requise pour chaque type d antenne Les types d antenne non inclus dans cette liste
426. nearessauuaveahanenseanadenegeradunbhariteceasyens 4 58 Table 83 Licenses and region codes for PTP 25600 ccccccssseccecneessceceeesceceeeesececeseeeeeceaeeeseees 4 60 Table 84 Licenses and region codes for PTP 45600 ccccccccccsesccceeecceeeeceeeeeeseeceeaeeseeseeeeseseeaaes 4 61 Table 85 Licenses and region codes for PTP 48600 isiiccssicassiaccsticsssanacdevccer ses vaavovssaecesesnseesecessecnses 4 61 Table 86 Licenses and region codes for PTP 49600 ccsssssccccsesseccccesssccesessececsensscecsensscees 4 61 Table 87 Licenses and region codes for PTP 54600 cccccssssccccnseesceceeeeseeceseseccceseeseeceneeeseees 4 62 Table 88 Licenses and region codes for PTP 58600 isiccsesassateccsvecsescsanasdtnowsea a AER ESA 4 63 Table 89 Licenses and region codes for 5 9 GHZ eee eecccseccceeeeeceeeccceeecesecceseseeaueceeseeesaseeaaes 4 65 Table 90 Default and alternative region codes for PTP 600 variants cccceccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 66 Table 91 Throughput for PTP 600 Full link symmetry 1 1 link optimization IP 4 75 Table 92 Throughput for PTP 600 Full link symmetry 1 1 link optimization TDM 4 77 Table 93 Throughput for PTP 600 Full link symmetry 2 1 link optimization IP 4 79 Table 94 Throughput for PTP 600 Full link symmetry 2 1 link optimization TDM 4 81 Table 95 Throughput for PTP 600 Full link symmetry Adaptive link optimizat
427. net Ethernet Link Status Copper LinkUp Ethernet Speed And Duplex 100 Mbps Full Duplex MAC Address 00 04 56 80 2e 80 Remote IP Address 10 10 10 10 Telecoms Channel Disabled Channel B Disabled TDD Syncronization Wireless Wireless Link Status Maximum Transmit Power Remote Maximum Transmit Power 15 Transmit Power Receive Power Vector Error Link Loss Transmit Data Rate Receive Data Rate Link Capacity Transmit Modulation Mode Receive Modulation Mode Link Symmetry Receive Modulation Mode Detail Range 15 150 15 0 150 150 45 2 45 2 454 452 329 358 38 7 357 96 3 96 2 962 962 18 46 1846 18 46 18 46 18 46 1846 18 46 18 46 36 92 256QAM 0 81 Dual 5 MHz 256Q 4M 0 81 Dual 5 MHz 1to1 Running At Maximum Receive Mode 01 mo A tt eo dBm dBm dBm dBm dB dB Mbps Mbps Mbps km phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 Managing alarms and events Chapter 7 Operation Managing alarms and events This section describes how to manage PTP 600 system alarms and events This section contains the following procedures e Managing alarms on page 7 14 e Managing email alerts on page 7 18 e Managing event notification messages on page 7 19 Managing alarms 7 14 Whenever system alarms are outstanding a yellow warning triangle is displayed on the navigation bar The warning triangle is visible from all web pages Click the warning triangle or menu option Home to retur
428. ng gland Either SFP SX Gig E Optical Pluggable Module 850 nm Cambium part number 01010430001 Or SFP LX Gig E Optical Pluggable Module 1310 nm Cambium part number 01010431001 Kit contents SFP fiber module either 1000BaseSX or 1000BaseLX Extension tube complete with O ring seal Weatherproofing gland License key instructions and ID code Fiber optic cable and connectors Purchase separately For specification refer to Fiber optic cable and connectors on page 4 8 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 2 75 Ordering components Chapter 2 Planning considerations 2 76 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Chapter 3 Legal information This chapter provides legal notices including software license agreements Intentional or unintentional changes or modifications to the equipment must not be made unless under the express consent of the party responsible for compliance Any such modifications could void the user s authority to operate the equipment and will void the manufacturer s warranty The following topics are described in this chapter e Cambium Networks end user license agreement on page 3 2 e Hardware warranty on page 3 19 e Limit of liability on page 3 20 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 3 1 Cambium Networks end user license agreement Chapter 3 Legal information Cambium Networks end user license agreement Acceptance of this agree
429. nk range Link optimization mode Link symmetry Offered traffic loading The TDD frame duration varies depending on the following TDD burst duration master slave TDD burst duration slave master Link range phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 1 25 Wireless operation Chapter 1 Product description 1 26 The propagation delay in Step 2 is necessarily equal to the propagation delay in Step 6 and is determined solely by the link range There will be added delays between rx and tx on the master and slave to minimize interference as set up by the link planner or installer Figure 17 TDD cycle TDD frame Frame sete Burst Burst arain Master transmits Propagation delay Slave receives Slave receive to transmit delay 4 Slave transmits Propagation delay Master receives Channel selection The PTP 600 series links are capable of transmitting and receiving on the same channel or on different channels In other words the slave master direction may use a different channel from the master slave direction Independent selection of transmit and receive frequencies can be useful in planned networks or for countering interference When links operate in radar avoidance regions each unit must monitor its transmit channel for the presence of radar signals and thus transmit and receive channels are always identical phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Wireless operat
430. nnect the main GPS drop cable to the GPS unit 5 46 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Installing a GPS receiver for PTP SYNC 3 Ifa GPS adapter cable is not available connect the main GPS drop cable to the GPS unit via a 12 way circular connector Weatherproof the connection as follows Wrap a layer of self amalgamating tape starting 25mm below the bared back outer of the cable and finishing at the GPS housing Wrap a layer of PVC tape starting just below the start of the self amalgamating tape and finishing at the GPS housing overlapping at half width Repeat with four more layers of PVC tape alternating the start and finish ends A 4 Lay the main drop cable as far as the building entry point ensuring there is enough length to extend through the wall of the building to the LPU 5 Attach the main GPS drop cable to the supporting structure using site approved methods Grounding the GPS drop cable Ground the drop cable to the supporting structure at the points shown in Figure 40 wall installation or Figure 41 mast or tower installation See Making a drop cable ground point on page 5 23 A NOTE A mast or tower may require additional grounding points as specified in Protection requirements for a mast or tower installation on page 2 24 Top grounding point when using GPS adapter cable If a GPS adapter cable has been installed Figure 102 ground the drop cable at the point where the solid
431. nnectorized outdoor transceiver unit containing all the radio and networking electronics e PIDU An indoor connection box containing a mains power supply status indicators and network connection port e Cabling and lightning protection Cat5e cables grounding cables connectors and lightning protection units LPU 1 4 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Overview of the PTP 600 Product variants The PTP 600 Series is available in the following product variants Frequency variants There is a frequency variant for each license exempt frequency band as well as the licensed 2 5 GHz band in the USA Table 1 Check that local regulations allow the use of these frequency variants Integrated or Connectorized All frequency variants are available in either Integrated with attached antenna or Connectorized without an antenna variants Link Complete or End Complete The Link Complete kit consists of two ODUs and two PIDU units pre configured as a link The End Complete kit consists of one ODU and one PIDU unit Lite or Full Some frequency variants are available in either Lite or Full variants Lite data rates are half those of Full FCC IC or ETSI RoW The PTP 54600 and PTP 58600 are available in two regional variants one is for use in regions where FCC or IC licensing restrictions apply FCC IC and the other is for use in ETSI or the rest of the world ETSI RoW ATEX Hazloc The PTP 54600 and PTP 58600 are av
432. nnel Change DFS Impulse Interference SMTP Enabled Messages L Enabled Diagnostic Alarms C Data Port Up Down C Management Port Up Down O Telecoms Channel Up Down SMTP Server IP Address 0 J0 hi 0 J0 SMTP Server Port Number 25 SMTP Source Email Address SMTP Destination Email Address Send SMTP Test Email es Submit Updated Configuration Update the Email Configuration attributes Table 121 Select Submit Updated Configuration The Configuration Change Reboot dialog is displayed 4 Select Reboot Wireless Unit The Reboot Confirmation dialog is displayed Select OK The reboot progress message is displayed On completion the unit restarts phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 79 Task 8 Configuring alarms and messages 6 80 Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Table 121 Email Configuration attributes Attribute SMTP Email Alert Meaning Controls the activation of the SMTP client SMTP Enabled Messages The SMTP Enabled Messages attribute controls which email alerts the unit will send SMTP Server IP Address The IP address of the networked SMTP server SMTP Server Port Number The SMTP Port Number is the port number used by the networked SMTP server By convention the default value for the port number is 25 SMTP Source Email Address The email address used by the PTP 600 Series to log into the SMTP server This must be a valid em
433. nput e Wireless Link Encryption Key for AES Ensure that a Common Access Card CAC enabled computer is available for use as a network management workstation for managing the PTP 600 units Determine the IP address of the CAC enabled workstation this will be configured in an Access Control List ACL in the PTP 600 units to prevent management access from other workstations Determine the required DoD password complexity requirements from the latest version of the Application and Security Development Security Technical Implementation Guide STIG See for example Section 3 1 24 2 in Version 3 Release 4 of the STIG phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 2 43 Security planning Chapter 2 Planning considerations Select an installation location that affords significant physical security For example a location at least 10 meters 33 feet from ground level on the outside of a protected building or on a telecommunications tower surrounded by protective fencing Ensure that the PTP 600 link will be installed behind the installation s protective firewall within the installation s managed network infrastructure Ensure that the following are available in the network A RADIUS authentication server capable of supporting the PEAP MS CHAPv2 authentication method For example Microsoft Windows Server 2003 An SNTP server supporting DES or MD5 authentication A syslog server also known as a syslog collector Configure all of the above c
434. ns Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense A NOTE A Class A Digital Device is a device that is marketed for use in a commercial industrial or business environment exclusive of a device which is marketed for use by the general public or is intended to be used in the home phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 59 Compliance with radio regulations Examples of regulatory limits 4 60 Chapter 4 Reference information Examples of the regulatory limits that apply in typical regions of operation are in the following tables e Table 83 e Table 84 e Table 85 e Table 86 e Table 87 e Table 88 e Table 89 A NOTE PTP 25600 PTP 45600 PTP 48600 PTP 49600 PTP 54600 PTP 58600 PTP 59600 In Canada the EIRP limit in the 5470 5600 MHz and 5650 5725 MHz 5 4 GHz band is 1 0 W or 17 10 log10 B dBm whichever power is less B is the 99 emission bandwidth in MHz according to RSS 210 Annex 9 2 3 In Canada NO operation is permitted in the band 5600 5650 MHz Table 83 Licenses and region codes for PTP 25600 Region License Frequencies DFS Channel Maximum code regulation bandwidth power 16 FCC Upper 2624 2690 MHz 5 10 15 30 63 dBm MHz 1 EIRP 2 FCC Middle 2572 2614 MHz 5 10 15 30 63 dBm MHz 1 EIRP 2 FCC Lower 2496
435. ns eeneasenire narnia E E EET EEE ON E 5 4 Selecting a position for the ODU connectorized esssssesssssresssseerssseeresseeressseerssssersssse 5 5 Selecting a mounting option for the top LPU sssssseesseesssesssesssesssersserssersssesssesseesseeesserssee 5 6 Mounting the ODU and top LPU oreore one a E RA E basen reece 5 7 Connecting and grounding the ODU and top LPU wisjisssasesisscassscsesesssenssenases sdcaaassnccpeneavecnatees 5 8 Installing an UltraSyne GPS TECOIVER ss cesesiascexusscaaesiveestaensioatnnas nesiacwaneaustenaeausecuayecaceanetewnertanee 5 9 Installing CONNECtOTIZE antennas izarrean naarn rE E EN ean yaaas AE TEE 5 10 Preparing for connectorized installations s ssseesseesssesseessserssersserssersssresseessessseesseesss 5 10 Mo ntingand connecting antenhaSenssorierees iiei rinia e EEEE TENE eats 5 10 Weatherproofing an N type COnneCtOr ssesiscatsssidesszacasasedes ties ssesgaassaasiiesbdtatdaniraneeea aes 5 13 Installing the drop cable and bottom LPU ssi isecssisscesssdaases cides daceacacvacs voesiacdsdedevagsonsieaavoedesasveees 5 16 Preparing CT OPC ALCS sec ac occ ecu etna vance sone eae c oes ea cot oasis oe ce 5 17 Assembling an RJ45 connector and Glan jiicsisccsssscssacsessssccsssasasssasastaess seat sasanasaseosdesesasenesess 5 18 Installing and grounding the main drop Cable x ieivzsscia sere sageeacs iieo EA 5 20 Connecting an RI45 and gland to a milise 2ssciesiaseasedscseicsseare thease Haren v
436. nt and rear views ccsescecceseeeecceneeseeeeneenees 1 7 Figure 4 ODU interface Surenin rA T N A O E E nana E 1 8 Fig re 5 Connectorized ODU antenna interfaces sy sivcsevesdeians anqusviedensasvdes toss dads idr tinii E r ain ni iniiae 1 9 Figure 6 Mod record labels si ccccnass Sevaeans ign aar ET NNE EE UAE ENN ENSE EREE 1 10 Figure 7 PIDU interfaC S ernaia nunana E E EEA EREET TR i 1 12 Figure 8 External DC supply only s sssersssesssresssosseesseesssesseessscesseesserssersserssereseeosseessersserssersseesss 1 14 Figure 9 External DC supply and AG Supply sssssacsenicaese ina o e E ARRAIS 1 14 Figure 10 External DC supply and redundant AC supply essssssessssresssseesssssersssseressseerssseersesss 1 15 Figure 11 Remote LED and recovery Switch Wiring cccccseccceeesccseececenecesesecseseceeecesaeseeseees 1 15 Figure 12 Cable grounding kit for 1 4 and 3 8 Cable seca secscntasesicconvensstannnes seatanssdtanwesedecabeneaiecanes 1 18 Figure Ls LPU double end Me sase ccccaatanct saveazdigacaadacs dncasbamanadslacecnemad AO AET 1 19 Figure 14 LPU sing even kitero ei a caus tatnnanneess R e rea 1 20 Figure 15 PTP SYNC bit cisscagessscsencssasedea a a ATOE ORTONA L 1 22 Figure LG PIP SYNCG font panel scsi cccesdsewccesan evs anen e aa E E N i 1 23 Figure 17 TDD Cy Cle i caccss cnc ocstvices eens E E E ERAI ONN T OOA 1 26 Figure 18 Forwarding behavior in out of band local management mode sssssssessse
437. nteed to work if the installed software version has not been changed since the configuration file was saved This is why the configuration should always be saved immediately after upgrading the software version Licensed capabilities The license key is restored automatically if the configuration file is saved and then loaded on the same unit However the license key is not restored if the configuration file is loaded on a different unit Before restoring configuration to a different PTP 600 unit ensure that a valid license key is installed with optional capabilities enabled where appropriate For instructions see Task 3 Installing license keys on page 6 14 Restoring from the configuration file To restore the system configuration from file select menu option Configuration Save And Restore The Save amp Restore Configuration page is displayed Figure 158 Select Browse and navigate to the PC folder containing the saved configuration file cfg Select Restore Configuration File and Reboot Select OK to confirm the restore The configuration file is uploaded and used to reconfigure the new unit to the same state as the old unit On completion the unit reboots phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Restoring upgrading and rebooting Attributes excluded from save and restore Most of the configuration can be restored from the backup However certain attributes that were part of the configuration are not saved o
438. ntegrated End Complete WB3379 Connectorized Link Complete WB3382 Connectorized End Complete WB3383 Table 27 PTP 49600 kit part numbers Integrated or Link or end Part connectorized complete number Integrated Link Complete WB3225 Integrated End Complete WB3229 Connectorized Link Complete WB3226 Connectorized End Complete WB3230 Table 28 PTP 54600 kit part numbers Product Regional Integrated or Link or end Part variant variant connectorized complete number Lite ETSI RoW Integrated Link Complete BP5530BH15 2 Lite ETSI RoW Integrated End Complete BP5530BH15 1 Lite ETSI RoW_ Connectorized Link Complete BP5530BHC15 2 Lite ETSI RoW_ Connectorized End Complete BP5530BHC15 1 Lite FCC IC Integrated Link Complete WB3870 Lite FCC IC Integrated End Complete WB3871 Lite FCC IC Connectorized Link Complete WB3874 Lite FCC IC Connectorized End Complete WB3875 Full ETSI RoW Integrated Link Complete BP5530BH 2 Full ETSI RoW Integrated End Complete BP5530BH 1 Full ETSI RoW_ Connectorized Link Complete BP5530BHC 2 Full ETSI RoW_ Connectorized End Complete BP5530BHC 1 Full FCC IC Integrated Link Complete WB3868 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Ordering components Product Regional Integrated or Link or end Part variant varian
439. ntenna connectors Ensure that the cables do not flap in the wind as flapping cables are prone to damage and induce unwanted vibrations in the supporting structure 5 12 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Installing connectorized antennas Weatherproofing an N type connector The following procedure should be used to weatherproof the N type connectors fitted to the connectorized ODU and antenna if recommended by the antenna manufacturer A NOTE N type connectors should be tightened using a torque wrench set to 15 lb in or 1 7 Nm If a torque wrench is not available N type connectors may be finger tightened To weatherproof an N type connector proceed as follows 1 Ensure the connection is tight A torque wrench should be used if available 2 Wrap the connection with a layer of 19 mm 0 75 inch PVC tape starting 25 mm 1 inch below the connector body Overlap the tape to half width and extend the wrapping to the body of the LPU Avoid making creases or wrinkles 3 Smooth tape edges phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 5 13 Installing connectorized antennas Chapter 5 Installation Cut a 125mm 5 inches length of rubber tape self amalgamating la fpr Expand the width of the tape by stretching it so that it will wrap completely around the connector and cable Press the tape edges together so that there are no gaps The tape should extend 25mm 1inch beyond the PVC tape Wrap a
440. ntered here in seconds Hopping Margin Spectrum Management uses this margin when making a channel hop decision If the interference level of the target channel is lower than that of the active channel by at least the Hopping Margin the link will hop to the target channel The default setting is 3 dB in non radar regions or 10 dB in radar regions phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 7 21 Managing spectrum Chapter 7 Operation Attribute Meaning Asymmetric DFS Only displayed in non radar regions when i DFS is enabled The default configuration of symmetric operation constrains the link to operate symmetrically using the same transmit and receive channels When in symmetric mode the slave unit will always follow the master If the master moves to a new channel the slave will hop to the same channel When the Point to Point link is configured as an asymmetric link both the master and slave are free to select the best channel from their own set of local interference metrics Spectrum Management Control Only displayed in radar regions The options are DFS and DFS with i DF9S Hopping Period not configurable The Spectrum Management algorithm evaluates the metrics every Hopping Period seconds 180 seconds by default looking for a channel with lower levels of interference If a better channel is located Spectrum Management performs an automated channel hop If SNMP or SMTP alert
441. nterface is automatically negotiated This is the default setting Disabled means that configuration is forced Use the same setting for both ends of the link phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 Task 2 Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Attribute Meaning Data Port Auto Neg Advertisement Only displayed when Data Port Auto Negotiation is set to Enabled Select the data rate that the auto negotiation mechanism will advertise as available on the the data Ethernet interface Use the same setting for both ends of the link Only select a data rate that is within the capability of connected network equipment otherwise loss of service may occur The new setting will only take effect after a system reboot Data Port Forced Configuration Data Port Auto Mdix Only displayed when Data Port Auto Negotiation is set to Disabled This forces the speed and duplex setting of the data Ethernet interface Over the air throughput will be capped to the rate of the Ethernet interface at the receiving end of the link Use the same setting for both ends of the link The same configuration must be forced on connected network equipment otherwise a duplex mismatch will occur and data throughput will be greatly reduced This enables disables the Auto Medium Dependent Interface MDI Medium Dependent Interface Crossover MDIX capability Default is Enabled
442. nterface Configuration page with T1 enabled ss esseesssesssesssesssessseesseess 6 49 Step 2 Wireless Configuration page example s ssssesssesssesssesssersserssersseesssesssens 6 51 Step 2 Wireless Configuration page extract for fixed frequency 0000e 6 58 Step 3 TDD Synchronization page secere ise rr E eE nr Eeh rE Dir Eni 6 59 Step 3 Confirm Installation Configuration Page cccccccccsseccceeeceeeeeeseeceeaeeeeeaeees 6 61 ReEbOOt CONnMPATa OM POD UP vecicoctsc ess scadceseancss ec oust E E EOE 6 62 Current SNMP Summary page when SNMP is disabled cceeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 63 Step 1 SNMP Configuration page for SNM PV3 accsisecevsadeserssaas Slesesirasabonavnniaestaeaeese 6 64 Step 2 SNMP MIB II System Objects page for SNMPV3 ccceccceeccccseeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 65 Step 3 SNMP User Policy Configuration page for SNMPV3 cccccseceeseeeeeeeeees 6 66 Step 4 SNMP User Accounts Configuration page for SNMPV3 cccseceeeeeeees 6 68 Step 5 SNMP Trap Configuration page for SNMPV3 cccccseccceseceeeseeeeeeeaeeees 6 69 Confirm SNMP Configuration page for SNMPV32 cccccseseccseeeeseeeeeseeeeaeeeeseeseees 6 71 Step 1 SNMP Configuration page for SNMPV1 2C cseccsciisessansssancseicswaissearsicerveioeasse 6 72 Step 2 SNMP MIB II System Objects page for SNMPV1 2C cceccceeeceeeeeeeeeeees 6 73 Step 3 SNMP Trap Configuration
443. o When 5 MHz bandwidth is selected OFDM and channel bandwidth The PTP 600 series transmits using Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing OFDM This wideband signal consists of many equally spaced sub carriers Although each sub carrier is modulated at a low rate using conventional modulation schemes the resultant data rate from all the sub carriers is high OFDM works exceptionally over a Non Line of Sight NLoS channel The channel bandwidth of the OFDM signal is configurable to one of five values 5 MHz 10 MHz 15 MHz 20 MHz and 30 MHz Higher bandwidths provide greater link capacity at the expense of using more spectrum Systems configured for a narrower channel bandwidth provide better receiver sensitivity and can also be an appropriate choice in deployments where the amount of free spectrum is limited Each channel is offset in center frequency from its neighboring channel by 10 MHz or 6 MHz A NOTE The Channel Bandwidth must be configured to the same value at both ends of the link Not all channel bandwidths are available in all regions or all frequency variants Spectrum management The spectrum management feature of the PTP 600 Series monitors the available wireless spectrum and directs both ends of the wireless link to operate on a channel with a minimum level of co channel and adjacent channel interference 1 28 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Wireless operation Spectrum management m
444. o carry the required traffic Lowest Ethernet Modulation Mode The lowest modulation mode that must be achieved before the link is allowed to bridge Ethernet frames Ethernet Capped Max Wireless Speed When enabled this option will cap the wireless speed to a mode that the connected Ethernet connection can sustain Max Transmit Power This is the maximum transmit power at which the unit will operate configurable in steps of 1 dB Its maximum setting is dependent on the region of operation and this is controlled by the license key Set this to the maximum value dBm for normal operation as recommended by PTP LINKPlanner This may be a higher value than that used for alignment Antenna Gain This is only displayed when Platform Variant is set to Connectorized in Step 2 of the Installation wizard Updated in Step 2 Wireless configuration on page 6 51 Cable Loss This is only displayed when Platform Variant is set to Connectorized in Step 2 of the Installation wizard Updated in Step 2 Wireless configuration on page 6 51 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 Task 12 Updating system configuration Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Attribute Meaning EIRP This is only displayed when Platform Variant is set to Connectorized in Step 2 of the Installation wizard Effective Isotropic Radiated Power EIRP describes the strength of the radio signal leaving the wireless unit U
445. o the Sync input at the master ODU One UltraSync unit is required for each synchronized link e PTP SYNC This option is the preferred solution One PTP SYNC unit is required for each master ODU The PTP SYNC unit is connected in line in the drop cable between the PIDU and the ODU and is collocated with the PIDU Aa NOTE PTP 600 System Releases earlier than 600 08 04 do not support PTP SYNC 1 34 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Wireless operation Timing references for use with PTP SYNC PTP SYNC requires an external timing reference in all but the simplest networks Up to ten PTP SYNCs can be connected in a chain to share the timing signal from one timing reference In the majority of applications one reference is required for each site that contains PTP 600 master ODUs The timing reference can be from any timing system that provides a 1 Hz signal accurately synchronized in frequency and phase with a network wide master timing reference GPS timing receivers are a very practical way of obtaining a suitable reference The PTP SYNC is compatible with the following GPS timing receivers e Trimble Acutime Gold GPS receiver In simple networks where all master ODUs are at a single site the external reference can be omitted In this case one ODU acts as a reference for other collocated units Configuring the TDD frame In synchronized operation frame duration and burst duration must be configured directly
446. oftware will continue in perpetuity unless terminated as follows Your right to use the Software will terminate immediately without notice upon a breach of this Agreement by you Within 30 days after termination of this Agreement you will certify to Cambium in writing that through your best efforts and to the best of your knowledge the original and all copies in whole or in part in any form of the Software and all related material and Documentation have been destroyed except that with prior written consent from Cambium you may retain one copy for archival or backup purposes You may not sublicense assign or transfer the license or the Product except as expressly provided in this Agreement Any attempt to otherwise sublicense assign or transfer any of the rights duties or obligations hereunder is null and void Governing law This Agreement is governed by the laws of the United States of America to the extent that they apply and otherwise by the laws of the State of Illinois Assignment This agreement may not be assigned by you without Cambium s prior written consent phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 3 7 Cambium Networks end user license agreement Chapter 3 Legal information Survival of provisions The parties agree that where the context of any provision indicates an intent that it survives the term of this Agreement then it will survive Entire agreement This agreement contains the parties entire agreement regarding your
447. olic QFD2 52 N Gabriel Gabriel 2 5 foot Standard Dual QuickFire 31 1 Y Parabolic QFD2 5 52 N Gabriel Gabriel 2 foot Standard Dual QuickFire 28 4 N Parabolic QFD2 52 N RK Gabriel Gabriel 4 foot Standard Dual QuickFire 34 7 Y Parabolic QFD4 52 N Gabriel Gabriel 4 foot Standard Dual QuickFire 34 7 Y Parabolic QFD4 52 N RK Gabriel Gabriel 6 foot Standard Dual QuickFire 37 7 Y Parabolic QFD6 52 N phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Ordering components Manufacturer Antenna Type Gain Flat Parabolic dBi Plate Dish RadioWaves Radio Waves 2 foot Dual Pol Parabolic 28 1 Y SPD2 5 2 28 1dBi RadioWaves Radio Waves 2 foot Parabolic SP2 5 2 29 Y 29 0dBi RadioWaves Radio Waves 3 foot Dual Pol Parabolic 31 1 Y SPD3 5 2 31 1dBi RadioWaves Radio Waves 3 foot Parabolic SP3 5 2 31 4 Y 31 4dBi RadioWaves Radio Waves 4 foot Dual Pol Parabolic 34 4 Y SPD4 5 2 34 4dBi RadioWaves Radio Waves 4 foot Parabolic SP4 5 2 34 8 Y 34 8dBi RadioWaves Radio Waves 6 foot Dual Pol Parabolic 37 5 Y SPD6 5 2 37 5dBi RadioWaves Radio Waves 6 foot Parabolic SP6 5 2 37 7 Y 37 7dBi RadioWaves Radio Waves 2 foot Parabolic SP2 2 5 28 3 Y 28 3dBi RadioWaves Radio Waves 3 foot Parabolic SP3 2 5 31 4 Y 31 4dBi RadioWaves Radio Waves 4 foot Parabolic SP4 2 5 34 6 Y 34 6dBi RadioWaves Radio Waves 6 foot Parabolic SP
448. om the PIDU at the Master and Slave sites 2 At each site connect the PIDU LAN ports to a router port switch port or other network equipment in the data network using the Cat5e cable that was prepared for this purpose in Preparing the PIDU to LAN cable on page 5 31 3 Check that the Master and Slave units are reachable from the network management system by opening the web interface to the management agents or by requesting ICMP echo response packets using the Ping application The network management system will normally be geographically remote from the sites so it may be necessary to request that this action is completed by co workers at the management center Alternatively it may be possible to use remote login to the management system 4 Check the data network for correct operation across the wireless link This may be by requesting ICMP echo response packets between hosts in the connected network segments or by some more structured use of network testing tools 5 Select menu option Home or Status and check that the Wireless Link Status is Up on both units If it is not Up refer to Managing alarms and events on page 7 14 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 99 Task 15 Connecting link to the network Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Connecting to the network with out of band management To connect to the network with out of band management proceed as follows 1 2 Disconnect the local PC from the PIDU at the M
449. on DC supply Volts PTP SYNC site selection If PTP SYNC is to be installed consider the following factors when selecting a site e Indoor location with no possibility of condensation e Accessibility for viewing status indicators e Cable lengths see Maximum cable lengths on page 2 7 Maximum cable lengths When PTP SYNC is not installed e The maximum permitted length of the copper Ethernet interface cable is 100 m 330 ft from ODU to network terminating equipment e Ifthe copper Ethernet interface supplies power only because fiber Ethernet is installed the maximum permitted length of the copper Ethernet interface cable is 240 m 790 ft from ODU to PIDU When PTP SYNC is installed the maximum permitted lengths of each section of the copper Ethernet interface cable are as specified in Figure 29 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 2 7 Site planning Figure 29 Cable length restrictions when PTP SYNC is installed Chapter 2 Planning considerations Maximum cable lengths when either PTP SYNC model number is WB3665AA or LPU model number is one of WB2900A WB2900B or WB2900C greater Maximum cable lengths when PTP SYNC model number is WB3665BB or greater and LPU model number is WB2900D or A 60 m 200 ft PTP 600 only 40m 130 ft 2m 2m 6 5 ft 6 5 ft 20m 65 ft Network terminating equipment 100 m 330 ft The maximum lengths of t
450. on OK Timing Synchronization System Failure Not Synchronized Alarm phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 Managing alarms and events Chapter 7 Operation Alarm Meaning Unit Out Of The unit is out of calibration and must be returned to the factory Calibration using the RMA process for re calibration Wireless Link The wireless link has been administratively disabled via the Disabled Warning SNMP Interface The wireless interface MIB II ifAdminStatus attribute has been set to DOWN To enable the Ethernet interface set the ifAdminStatus attribute to UP Managing email alerts The management agent can be configured to generate alerts by electronic mail when certain events occur The email message configuration procedure is described in Task 8 Configuring alarms and messages on page 6 77 The alerts are defined in Table 134 Table 134 Email alerts Alert Wireless Link Up Down Meaning There has been a change in the status of the wireless link DFS Channel Change DFS Impulse Interference DFS has forced a change of channel DFS has detected impulse interference Enabled Diagnostic Alarms Diagnostic alarms have been enabled Ethernet Link Up Down or Data Port Up Down There has been a change in the status of the Ethernet link or data port Management Port Up Down There has been a change in the status of the management port Telecoms Channel Up Down There ha
451. on Server 1 RADIUS Server Status RADIUS Server IP Address RADIUS Server Authentication Port RADIUS Server Shared Secret RADIUS Server Shared Secret Confirm Authentication Server 2 RADIUS Server Status RADIUS Server IP Address RADIUS Server Authentication Port RADIUS Server Shared Secret RADIUS Server Shared Secret Confirm phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 Disabled Enabled Server 1 O Server 2 5 minutes 2 3 seconds CHAP MS CHAP v2 PEAP MS CHAP v2 server not yet used e W H o 1812 i evevesecees server not yet used e Wo Wo Ho 1812 Submit RADIUS Configuration 6 43 Task 5 Configuring security Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Table 109 RADIUS Authentication attributes Attribute RADIUS Client Enabled Meaning Enabled means that PTP 600 users may be authenticated via the RADIUS servers Disabled may only be selected if at least one user with Security Officer privileges exists RADIUS Primary Server Specifies the primary server determining the order in which the servers are tried RADIUS Primary Server Dead Time Time in minutes to hold off trying to communicate with a previously unavailable RADIUS server Setting the value to zero disables the timer RADIUS Server Retries Number of times the PTP 600 will retry after a RADIUS server fails to respond to an initi
452. on of the bracket to be mounted to the pole first This allows the installer to take the weight of the unit and secure it one handed with a single mounting bolt phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 1 9 Outdoor unit ODU Chapter 1 Product description Network connection The network connection to a PTP 600 Series is made via a 1000BaseT Ethernet connection Power is provided to the ODU over the 1000BaseT Ethernet connection using a patented non standard powering technique Very early releases of the PTP 600 Series platform used different powering and connection arrangements Users of equipment prior to Mod Record 1 should refer to the User Guide shipped with the original equipment The Mod Record label can be found on the back of the ODU as shown in Figure 6 Figure 6 Mod record label Fiber optic connection Alternatively the network connection to a PTP 600 Series can be made using a 1000BaseSX or 1000BaseLX fiber Optic cable connected directly to the ODU In this case power is still provided over the 1000BaseT Ethernet connection If the fiber optic cable fails the PTP 600 automatically falls back to the copper Ethernet connection provided that the cable length does not exceed 100 m 330 ft PTP 600 Series Fiber Interface Upgrade Kits can be obtained from your distributor reseller or system integrator For more information refer to the PTP 600 Series Optical Interface Upgrade Guide 1 10 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Serie
453. on page 6 22 to configure AES link encryption without HTTPS TLS e Configuring HTTPS TLS on page 6 23 to configure the unit to operate in HTTPS TLS mode e Configuring local user accounts on page 6 34 to set user account options password complexity and identity based users e Changing own user password on page 6 41 for any user to change their own password e Protecting access to the summary and status pages on page 6 41 to apply password access to the System Summary and System Status pages e Configuring RADIUS authentication on page 6 42 to configure RADIUS server authentication of PTP 600 users A NOTE If FIPS 140 2 secure mode is required refer to Configuring for FIPS 140 2 applications on page 6 111 instead of Configuring HTTPS TLS on page 6 23 A NOTE If UC APL secure mode is required refer to Configuring for UC APL applications on page 6 114 instead of Configuring HTTPS TLS on page 6 23 Ensure that the operator s security requirements are configured before connecting the PTP 600 to the network Otherwise security may be compromised phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 21 Task 5 Configuring security Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Configuring AES encryption To configure AES link encryption before the link is operational proceed as follows 1 6 6 22 Check the capability summary in the Software License Key page to ensure that the current license key supports AES If necessary obtain a
454. ons are described in Table 6 6 PIDU IN Input from PIDU 7 ODU OUT Output to ODU 8 Ground stud For connecting to a ground point Table 6 PTP SYNC LED functions LED Function GPS GPS satellite data detection SYNC SYNC OUT port data detection STATUS Power and satellite lock detection ODU ODU signal detection phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 1 23 PTP SYNC unit Chapter 1 Product description Aa NOTE For a full list of LED states and fault finding actions refer to Testing PTP SYNC on page 8 13 Further reading on PTP SYNC For more information on PTP SYNC and TDD synchronization refer to the following e TDD synchronization on page 1 34 describes how TDD synchronization is achieved using PTP SYNC e PTP SYNC site selection on page 2 7 describes factors to be considered when choosing sites for the PTP SYNC unit e Configuration options for TDD synchronization on page 2 30 describes the different TDD synchronization methods that may be implemented using PTP SYNC e Mounting options for the PTP SYNC GPS receiver on page 2 34 describes the requirements of the optional GPS receiver for PTP SYNC e Ordering components on page 2 53 lists the components required for PTP 600 installations including PTP SYNC and GPS units with Cambium part numbers e PTP SYNC specifications on page 4 4 contains specifications of the PTP SYNC unit that is supplied by Cambium for PTP 600 installation
455. ontains tables and graphs to support calculation of the data rate capacity that can be provided by PTP 600 configurations as follows e Data throughput capacity on page 4 74 e Range adjustment curves on page 4 85 The calculation procedure is described in Calculating data rate capacity on page 2 15 Data throughput capacity Table 91 Table 92 Table 93 Table 94 and Table 95 show the data throughput rates Mbits s that are achieved when two PTP 600 Full ODUs are linked and the link distance range is 0 km Use the curves in Range adjustment curves on page 4 85 to adjust these figures to allow for link range 4a NOTE When using these tables be aware of the factors that affect data throughput as listed below Data throughput capacity is restricted by the following factors e PTP 600 Lite data rates are half the PTP 600 Full rates given in this section e Modulation Mode 256QAM 0 81 dual is not available in all product variants and channel bandwidths e Throughput for Link Symmetry 2 1 is the same as that for 1 2 but the Tx and Rx data rates are swapped e The data rates for Adaptive symmetry apply to the most asymmetric case where the link has significant offered traffic in one direction only The data rates for Adaptive symmetry with bidirectional offered traffic are the same as those for Link Symmetry 1 1 with Link Optimization IP 4 74 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Data throughput ta
456. opean Telecommunications Standards Institute FAQ Frequently Asked Question FIPS Federal Information Processing Standard GPS Global Positioning System HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers IP Internet Protocol ISM Industrial Scientific and Medical ITPE Initial Transmit Power Estimate LAN Local Area Network LOS Line of Sight clear line of sight and Fresnel zone is clear LPU Lightning Protection Unit MAC Medium Access Control Layer MDI Medium Dependent Interface MDIX Medium Dependent Interface Crossover MIB Management Information Base NLOS Non Line of Sight NMEA National Marine Electronics Association phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 Glossary Term Definition ODU Outdoor Unit OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex PC IBM Compatible Personal Computer PIDU Powered Indoor Unit PTP Point to Point QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation RAM Random Access Memory RF Radio Frequency RSSI Received Signal Strength Indication SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage SMTP Simple Mail Transport Protocol SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol STP Shielded Twisted Pair STP Spanning Tree Protocol TCP Transmission Control Protocol TLS Transport Layer Security TDWR Terminal Doppler Weather Radar URL Universal Resource Location UTC time Coordinated Universal Time UTP Unshielded T
457. or a lower level of radio frequency RF interference This approach is appropriate where the network consists of a small number of PTP links or where the RF interference is predominantly from equipment belonging to other operators Using frequency planning Networks will benefit from the use of fixed channel allocations if a the network consists of multiple PTP links and b RF interference predominantly arises from equipment in the same network Frequency planning is the exercise of assigning operating channels to PTP units so as to minimize RF interference between links Frequency planning must consider interference from any PTP unit to any other PTP unit in the network Low levels of interference normally allow for stable operation and high link capacity The frequency planning task is made more straightforward by use of the following techniques e Using several different channels e Separating units located on the same mast e Using high performance directional external antennas For help with planning networks refer to Chapter 2 Planning considerations or contact your Cambium distributor or re seller phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 1 33 Wireless operation Chapter 1 Product description Synchronized networks TDD synchronization can be used to relax constraints on the frequency planning of PTP networks Synchronization has the following benefits e Allows tighter frequency re use and thus wider channel bandwidth e Allows
458. or operation depends on the region When configured with the appropriate license key the unit will only allow operation on those channels which are permitted by the regulations ANOTE In Italy there is a regulation which requires a general authorization of any 5 4 GHz radio link which is used outside the operator s own premises It is the responsibility of the installer or operator to have the link authorized Details may be found at http www sviluppoeconomico gov it index php option com_content amp view article amp idme nu 672 amp idareal 593 Gandor ANDGidarea2 1052 amp id 68433 amp sectionid 1 16 amp viewT pe 1 amp showMenu 1 amp showCat 1 amp idarea3 0 amp andorcat AND amp partebassaType 0Gidar eaCalendario1 0 amp MvediT 1 amp idarea4 0 amp showArchiveNewsBotton 0 amp directionidUser 0 The form to be used for general authorization may be found at http www sviluppoeconomico gov it images stories mise_extra Allegato 20n19 doc Certain regulations have allocated certain channels as unavailable for use e ETSI has allocated part of the 5 4 GHz band to weather radar e UK and some other European countries have allocated part of the 5 8 GHz band to Road Transport and Traffic Telematics RTTT systems For details of these restrictions refer to Examples of regulatory limits on page 4 60 Where regulatory restrictions apply to certain channels these channels are barred automatically by the use of the correct licen
459. ored on this IS are not private are subject to routine monitoring interception and search and may be disclosed or used for any USG authorized purpose This IS includes security measures e g authentication and access controls to protect USG interests not for your personal benefit or privacy Notwithstanding the above using this IS does not constitute consent to PM LE or CI investigative searching or monitoring of the content of privileged communications or work product related to personal representation or services by attorneys psychotherapists or clergy and their assistants Such communications and work product are private and confidential See User Agreement for details Aa NOTE The above text is valid at the date of publication of this User Guide Check for the latest DISA approved version of this text Checking that the unit is in UC APL secure mode To confirm that the unit is now in UC APL secure mode proceed as follows 1 Select menu option Security and check the Secure Mode Alarm value 2 Ifthe alarm is Secure mode is active the unit is in UC APL secure mode and no further action is needed phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 117 Configuring for UC APL applications Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment 3 Ifthe alarm is Secure mode is not configured return to Using the Security Wizard on page 6 24 and check that all Security Wizard settings are correct for UC APL Secure Mode Alarm P
460. ormation Version information About This User Guide The following shows the issue status of this document Document issue Date of issue Remarks 003v000 Mar 2012 System Release 600 10 02 004v000 Jun 2012 System Release 600 10 03 005v000 Aug 2012 System Release 600 10 04 006v000 Oct 2012 System Release 600 10 04 revised 007v000 Dec 2012 System Release 600 10 05 Contacting Cambium Networks Support website Main website Sales enquiries Support enquiries Telephone number list Address http www cambiumnetworks com support http www cambiumnetworks com solutions cambiumnetworks com support cambiumnetworks com http www cambiumnetworks com contact php Cambium Networks Limited Linhay Business Park Eastern Road Ashburton Devon UK TQ13 7UP phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide General information Purpose Cambium Networks Point To Point PTP documents are intended to instruct and assist personnel in the operation installation and maintenance of the Cambium PTP equipment and ancillary devices It is recommended that all personnel engaged in such activities be properly trained Cambium disclaims all liability whatsoever implied or express for any risk of damage loss or reduction in system performance arising directly or indirectly out of the failure of the customer or anyone acting on the customer s behalf to abide by the instructions sy
461. ormation see Link mode optimization on page 1 27 TDD Enables the TDD synchronization feature See TDD synchronization Synchronization on page 1 34 for basic description and Step 3 TDD Mode synchronization optional on page 6 58 for installation and configuration details Encryption This is only displayed when encryption is enabled by license key Algorithm The same algorithm must be used at both ends of the link Updated in Task 5 Configuring security on page 6 21 Encryption Key This is only displayed when encryption is enabled by license key The same key must be used at both ends of the link When identity based user accounts are enabled only the Security Officer can change the encryption key Updated in Task 5 Configuring security on page 6 21 Confirm Encryption Key This is only displayed when encryption is enabled by license key Must contain the same value as Encryption Key Tx Max Power This is the maximum transmit power dBm at which the unit will transmit Set this to the value dBm for antenna alignment as recommended in the installation report ANOTE For short line of sight links PTP LINKPlanner may recommend a lower value for alignment than for normal operation phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 Task 6 Configuring wireless and telecoms interfaces Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Attribute Meaning Ranging Mode During installation the wireless units perform
462. orrect peer The MAC Address can be found embedded within the serial number of the unit The last six characters of the serial number are the last three bytes of the unit s MAC address Aa NOTE A PTP 600 Series system is shipped as a pair of units with pre loaded correct MAC addresses Target MAC addresses will only need to be entered if an existing unit has to be replaced in the field or the unit configuration has been erased This controls whether the link takes advantage of the channel condition to increase the link throughput If set to Disable the robustness of the link is improved The default value is Enabled This control is automatically set to Enabled if either E1 or T1 is enabled and Lowest Telecoms Modulation Mode is set to a Dual Payload modulation 6 52 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 6 Configuring wireless and telecoms interfaces Attribute Meaning Master Slave Mode At this point it is necessary to decide which end will designate a Master The Master unit is the controlling unit with respect to the point to point link and its maintenance The master transmits until the link is made while the Slave listens for its peer and only transmits when the peer has been identified Link Mode Optimizes the link behavior according to the type of traffic that will Optimization be bridged There are two modes to choose from IP and TDM For more inf
463. orrectly to ensure that PTP 600 is operating in compliance with the UC APL validation Planning for SNMP operation 2 44 Supported notifications The supported notifications are as follows Cold start Wireless Link Up Down DFS Channel Change DFS Impulse Interference Authentication Failure Ethernet Link Up Down Supported MIBs Ensure that the following MIBs are loaded on the network management system RFC 1493 BRIDGE MIB RFC 2233 IF MIB RFC 3411 SNMP FRAMEWORK MIB RFC 3412 SNMP MPD MIB RFC 3413 SNMP TARGET MIB RFC 3414 SNMP USER BASED SM MIB RFC 3415 SNMP VIEW BASED ACM MIB phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Security planning e RFC 3418 SNMPv2 MIB e RFC 3826 SNMP USM AES MIB e PTP 600 Series proprietary MIB A NOTE The proprietary MIBs are provided in the PTP 600 Series software download files in the support website see Contacting Cambium Networks on page 2 Supported alarms PTP 600 supports the following diagnostic alarms e Region Code e Install Status e Install Arm State e Unit Out Of Calibration e Incompatible Region Codes e Incompatible Master And Slave e Data Port Configuration Mismatch e No Wireless Channel Available e SNTP Synchronization Failed e Wireless Link Disabled Warning e Data Port Disabled Warning e Data Port Status e Data Port Fiber Status e Ethernet Bridging Status e Telecoms Channel A Status e Telecoms Channel B Status e Tel
464. otal number 64 byte frames received Rx 65 to 127 Bytes Total number of frames received in the size range 65 to 127 bytes Rx 128 to 255 Total number of frames received in the size range 128 to 255 Bytes bytes Rx 256 to 511 Total number of frames received in the size range 256 to 511 Bytes bytes Rx 512 to 1023 Bytes Total number of frames received in the size range 512 to 1023 bytes Rx 1024 to Max Total number of frames received in the size range 1024 to Maximum bytes Tx Drops Total number of frames dropped due excessive collisions late collision and frame ageing Tx Packets Total number of packets received by the interface This includes both good and bad packets Tx Broadcasts Total number of good broadcast packets phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 7 43 Managing performance Chapter 7 Operation Attribute Meaning Tx Multicasts Total number of good multicast packets Tx Collisions Total number frames experiencing collisions Tx 64 Bytes Total number 64 byte frames transmitted Tx 65 to 127 Bytes Total number frames transmitted in the size range 65 to 127 bytes Tx 128 to 255 Bytes Total number frames transmitted in the size range 128 to 255 bytes Tx 256 to 511 Bytes Total number frames transmitted in the size range 256 to 511 bytes Tx 512 to 1023 Bytes Total number frames transmitted in the size range 512 to 10
465. ough similar they use different encoding and radio transmission systems from 802 11a In areas where 802 11a systems are operating the products will detect the 802 11a radio signals and choose a clear channel away from any interference Avoiding interference from nearby devices At initialization the PTP 600 Series monitors the available frequency channels to find a channel that is clear of interference In operation the PTP 600 Series continuously monitors the spectrum to ensure it is operating on the cleanest channel Typical deployment The PTP 600 Series Bridge consists of a pair of units deployed one at each end of the link The radio link operates on a single frequency channel in each direction using Time Division Duplex TDD One unit is deployed as a master and the other as a slave The master unit takes responsibility for controlling the link in both directions The PTP 600 Series Bridge is aimed at a wide range of applications An example application is an enterprise that has a requirement to connect together the Local Area Network LAN of two or more buildings as shown in Figure 1 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 1 3 Overview of the PTP 600 Chapter 1 Product description Figure 1 Typical bridge deployment grounding not shown ODU Building 1 Building 2 Mains supply Network Network equipment equipment System components Each end of the link consists of e Outdoor Unit ODU An integrated or co
466. ovided with the distribution e Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Part 3 Cambridge Broadband Ltd copyright notice BSD Portions of this code are copyright 2001 2003 Cambridge Broadband Ltd All rights reserved phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 3 9 Cambium Networks end user license agreement Chapter 3 Legal information Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met e Redistributions of source code must retain the abov
467. page for SNMPV1 2C cccccseseccseseeeeeeeeaeees 6 74 Confirm SNMP Configuration page for SNMPV1 2C cccccseccccseeceeeeceeeeeeeseeeeees 6 76 Diagnostic Alarms page sy acesicccasisiqasccasdapacussaasecacseaeccessacsieaed oan else enawandeaosn asco anesaavadomaaneae 6 78 xvi phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Figure 143 Syslog Configuration Pages secsicsesazdcsasaagitacie siete sacs vale ar AA NAAN Genk deageeosniadeedes 6 81 Figure 144 Web Based Management page ccccccsscccssscccsesceneeeceeneeeeeseceeeseeeeecesaeseeeeeeesseseeeeeeea 6 83 Figure 145 System Summary page when unit is armed seessssssrsssseresessecrsseccrsssesrsssesessseseressse 6 86 Figure 146 Graphical installation page ssi ciecsceoczesnneenesnancadeeaancsmwiansacmmeeaapassesateceeedccerebecnessenavennee 6 90 Figure 147 Optional post disarm Configuration ccccccccssesecccceeescecceseseecceceusecceesuneceeeseneeesenea 6 91 Figure 143 System Configuration page sisesics cesesese hasessiac ca esaaadsantancasaetes edtainas nate teaebatewmiosaretemadaates 6 92 Figure 149 QoS Configuration page Ethernet cccsscccsssssecccsssscccsensseccceessscceseassesessenesceese 6 96 Figure 150 QoS Configuration page IP MPLS ssssssccsevcsaiascessaidesdecssaasetesadaavadsvaedetepaeecseseebedstensiace 6 97 Figure 151 Time Configuration page SNTP disabled cccsssssecensetseseccensesscnensessec
468. phrases sss sssessseesseessersseesseessseseeesseese 2 48 Default SNMPYV3 SETS s2cisscdsncscsadsacas steagesacdsizesanastecsadteseaasedonseasccadsaasedewdied EN A EAEE 2 49 Default VACM VIEW ThEGS serri ionen riri o e E E AT N E E NETA 2 50 Default data fill for access Table sius ornirnenarieris rino R AER E ERE E TS 2 50 Definition of auth role vendor specific attribute s sssesssesssersserssersssrssersseeessersseesse 2 52 PTP 54600 product variants available in each regulation ssesssesessereessseressserrsssseee 2 53 PTP 58600 product variants available in each regulation sesssssessssrresssrressserrsssreee 2 54 PTP 25600 kit part NUMDETS oss ssapecesesasislas agp anaedeapacnacecsumaseasaneconascunaneasseacetedacme chad eeaetads 2 55 PLP 34560 0ab part MUmMDer ss arip N A vee N ee 2 55 PTP 48600 kit part MUmMDers ansin a aT iait 2 56 PTP 49600 kit part MUMDErs lt csissiscenedscpcexaesarecusaeeiecweaearecuanescnndstnesadeneedenaceadneevenaeteevesios 2 56 PTE 5460 0 lat part Mu mbers kenana E neces oos enc AR onan nena eeeeeunee 2 56 PTP 58600 kit part NUMDETS ics sncesass cts shan dcags otanceapacnoneasoaseceaiataassancmeaseaaseacetedeeaaneed oeacta es 2 57 PEP 59600 kit part numb Ors es s2cssccense sein actarsiaccsbytaradcavem acne teashavetnas nate leueacanteseay eatonsadiates 2 58 Inventory for PIP GOO Kits siesessscsedcsvacsasens dossjassnnssaans desadasscdnedasacdoanesaddne Tai 2 59 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 201
469. ppears as shown in Figure 26 1 62 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide FIPS 140 2 mode Figure 26 Secure mode alarm System Summary Link Name Here to There Elapsed Time Indicator 20 32 53 System Clock 01 Sep 2011 10 42 06 Syslog Client Disabled Indication of FIPS 140 2 mode The PTP 600 is operating in FIPS 140 2 mode when the FIPS 140 2 capability logo is displayed in the navigation bar and the secure mode alarm is absent from the Home page Exiting from the FIPS 140 2 operational mode A PTP 600 ODU in FIPS 140 2 operational mode can be prepared to accept new security configuration by zeroizing critical security parameters CSPs The unit remains FIPS 140 2 capable Reverting to standard operation A FIPS 140 2 capable ODU can be used in standard non FIPS mode by loading a standard non FIPS software image and rebooting The critical security parameters CSPs are zeroized when the unit is no longer FIPS 140 2 capable Further reading on FIPS 140 2 For more information on FIPS 140 2 refer to the following e Planning for FIPS 140 2 operation on page 2 42 describes how to prepare for FIPS 140 2 operation by obtaining the required cryptographic material and by configuring the PTP 600 system e Configuring for FIPS 140 2 applications on page 6 111 is a summary of all the configuration tasks that are necessary if the unit is to operate in FIPS 140 2 secure mode e Task 3 Installin
470. priate national administrations for details on the conditions of use for the bands in question and any exceptions that might apply PTP 58600 European Union notification The PTP 58600 is a Class 2 device as it operates on frequencies that are not harmonized across the EU Currently the product may only be operated in the UK Eire IRL Germany Norway and Denmark However the regulatory situation in Europe is changing and the radio spectrum may become available in other countries in future See www ero dk for further information The operator is responsible for obtaining any national licenses required to operate this product and these must be obtained before using the product in any particular country phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 71 Notifications Chapter 4 Reference information This equipment operates as a secondary application so it has no rights against harmful interference even if generated by similar equipment and must not cause harmful interference on systems operating as primary applications Hereby Cambium declares that the PTP 58600 product complies with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC The declaration of conformity may be consulted at the support website see Contacting Cambium Networks on page 2 The European R amp TTE directive 1999 5 EC Certification Number is reproduced on the product label Figure 78 Figure 78 European Union certification on 5 8 GHz product lab
471. r activity has been detected on the operating channel phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Regulatory planning e DFS with i DFS In addition to switching channels on detection of radar the unit will also switch to a channel which has a significantly lower level of interference than the current channel of operation Before radiating on the newly selected channel the unit must again ensure that there is no radar activity on the new channel for a period of 60 seconds This mode therefore provides the benefit of switching to a channel with lower interference but at the expense of an outage of approximately 60 to 120 seconds For this reason the threshold for switching channels is greater than when i DFS is operating in a non radar region Radar avoidance requirements in the 5 4 GHz band are defined as follows e For the EU in specification EN 301 893 version V1 5 1 e For the US in the specification FCC part 15 407 plus the later requirements covered in Important Regulatory Information in this User Guide e For Canada in the specification RSS210 Annex 9 Issue 7 Radar avoidance at 5 8 GHz is applicable to EU operation not FCC IC and the requirements are defined in EN 302 502 Avoidance of weather radars USA only To comply with FCC rules KDB 443999 Interim Plans to Approve UNII Devices Operating in the 5470 5725 MHz Band with Radar Detection and DFS Capabilities units which are installed within 35 km 22 m
472. r and gland to the top end only as described in Assembling an RJ45 connector and gland on page 5 18 LPU PIDU drop cable To prepare a short section of drop cable to connect the bottom LPU to the PIDU or PTP SYNC cut off the approximate length required allowing a bit of surplus then fit an RJ45 connector and gland to the LPU end only as described in Assembling an RJ45 connector and gland on page 5 18 phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 5 17 Installing the drop cable and bottom LPU Chapter 5 Installation Assembling an RJ45 connector and gland Perform this task to prepare the outdoor Cat5e cable with connectors and glands Safety precautions A WARNING The metal screen of the drop cable is very sharp and may cause personal injury When preparing the drop cable take the following safety precautions e ALWAYS wear cut resistant gloves check the label to ensure they are cut resistant e ALWAYS wear protective eyewear e ALWAYS use a rotary blade tool to strip the cable DO NOT use a bladed knife To use the rotary blade tool fit it around the outer cable sheath and rotate the cutter around the cable once or twice The stripped outer section can then be removed Assembly Assemble the drop cable as shown in Figure 96 The gland is only required for outdoor connections that it at the ODU or LPU The connection to the PIDU requires the RJ45 plug but no gland 5 18 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guid
473. r restored automatically Use the web interface to reconfigure the following attributes Upgrad Usernames passwords and roles for the web based interface Key of Keys HTTPS Entropy HTTPS Private Key HTTPS Public Key Certificate HTTP Access Enabled HTTPS Access Enabled Telnet Access Enabled HTTP Port Number HTTPS Port Number Telnet Port Number Encryption Algorithm Encryption Key SNMP Control Of HTTP And Telnet ing software For instructions on how to check the installed software version and upgrade to a new version see Task 4 Upgrading software version on page 6 17 Alternatively to upgrade software remotely using Trivial FTP TFTP triggered by SNMP follow this procedure 1 Check that the TFTP client is enabled Refer to Configuring web based management attributes on page 6 83 Set tFTP attributes as described in Table 146 Monitor tFTP attributes as described in Table 147 When the upgrade is complete reboot the ODU to run the newly loaded software image as described in Rebooting the unit on page 7 58 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 7 49 Restoring upgrading and rebooting 7 50 Chapter 7 Operation Table 146 Setting tFTP attributes Attribute tFTPServerIPAddress Meaning The IP address of the TFTP server from which the TFTP software upgrade file Name will be retrieved For example to set the TFTP server IP address for unit 10 10 10 10 to 10 10 10 1 enter this command snmpset d exe
474. r transport and application protocols The default IP address of the management agent is 169 254 1 2 in the master ODU and 169 254 1 1 in the slave ODU The PTP 600 does not require use of supplementary serial interfaces MAC address The management agent end station MAC address is recorded on the enclosure The MAC address is not configurable by the user VLAN membership The management agent can be configured to transmit and receive either untagged priority tagged C tagged IEEE 802 1Q or S tagged IEEE 802 1ad frames S tagged frames must be single tagged in other words an S tag with no encapsulated C tag The VLAN ID can be 0 priority tagged or in the range 1 to 4094 In band management In the in band management mode the management agent can be reached from the PIDU port at the local ODU and assuming that the wireless link is established the PIDU port at the remote ODU Management frames in the customer network are processed by the management agent if a destination MAC address in the frame matches the ODU MAC address and b the VLAN ID in the frame matches the VLAN configuration of the management agent If Local Packet Filtering is enabled unicast frames forwarded to the management agent are filtered that is not forwarded in the customer network In band quality of service Frames generated within the management agent may be assigned a configured Ethernet priority Management frames are multiplexed with customer
475. rabolic SPF4 52AN or SPFX4 33 9 Y 52AN 33 9dBi RFS RFS 2 foot HP Parabolic SDF2 52AN or 31 4 Y SDFX2 52AN 31 4dBi RFS RFS 4 foot HP Parabolic SDF4 52AN or 33 9 Y SDFX4 52AN 33 9dBi Table 35 Allowed antennas for deployment in USA Canada 5 8 GHz Manufacturer Antenna Type Gain Flat Parabolic dBi Plate Dish Andrew Andrew 1 foot Flat Panel FPA5250D12 N 23 6 Y 23 6dBi Andrew Andrew 2 foot Flat Panel FPA5250D24 N 28 Y 28dBi Gabriel Gabriel 1 foot Flat Panel DFPD1 52 23 5 Y 23 5dBi Gabriel Gabriel 2 foot Flat Panel DFPD2 52 28 Y 28dBi phn 2512 007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Ordering components Manufacturer Antenna Type Gain Flat Parabolic dBi Plate Dish MTI MTI 17 inch Diamond Flat Panel MT 23 Y 485009 23dBi MTI MTI 15 inch Dual Pol Flat Panel 23 Y MT 485025 NVH 23dBi MTI MTI 2 ft Directional Flat Panel MT 28 Y 20004 28dBi MTI MTI 2 ft Flat Panel MT 486001 28dBi 28 RFS RFS 1 foot Flat Panel MA0528 23AN 23 23dBi RFS RFS 2 foot Flat Panel MA0528 28AN 28 Y 28dBi Telectronics Teletronics 2 foot Flat Plate Antenna 28 Y ANT P5828 28dBi Andrew Andrew 2 foot Parabolic P2F 52 29 4 Y 29 4dBi Andrew Andrew 2 foot Dual Pol Parabolic PX2F 29 4 Y 52 29 4dBi Andrew Andrew 3 foot Parabolic P3F 52 33 4 Y 33 4dBi Andrew Andrew 3 foot Dual Pol Parabolic PX3F 33 4 Y 52 33
476. ransmission means that data can be transmitted in both directions on a signal carrier at the same time For example on a local area network with a technology that has full duplex transmission one workstation can be sending data on the line while another workstation is receiving data Half Duplex data transmission means that data can be transmitted in both directions on a signal carrier but not at the same time For example on a local area network using a technology that has half duplex transmission one workstation can send data on the line and then immediately receive data on the line from the same direction in which data was just transmitted Remote IP Address Hyperlink to the other side of the Link The IP address of the peer link is displayed if the Link is UP otherwise unavailable is displayed phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Web based management Attribute Meaning Telecoms Channel A and B Indicate the current status of the telecoms channels Channels which are disabled during installation are marked as such Correctly operating channels display Up on a green background but alarm conditions described in Managing alarms on page 7 14 have a red background The Telecoms Latency value displayed in microseconds is determined when the wireless link starts and will remain the same for a given wireless configuration Section Telecoms circuits on page 1 46 describes met
477. ransmit Data Rate 20 40 14 73 0 00 20 40 Mbps Receive Data Rate 20 40 9 14 0 00 20 40 Mbps Aggregate Data Rate 40 80 23 88 0 00 40 80 Mbps Histogram Measurement Period 00 07 46 Reset System Histogram Measurement Period Data Port Counters Ethernet Tx Packets 295 84 Ethernet Rx Packets 2 819 1 926 Management Agent Counters Packets To Internal Stack 752 432 Packets From Internal Stack 298 86 Wireless Port Counters and Performance Information Wireless Tx Packets 2 950 1 964 Wireless Rx Packets 0 0 Link Symmetry 1to1 Link Capacity 40 30 Mbps Transmit Modulation Mode 64QAM 0 92 Dual 5 MHz Receive Modulation Mode 64QAM 0 92 Dual 5 MHz Receive Modulation Mode Detail Running At Maximum Receive Mode Wireless Link Availability 100 0000 Ethernet Bridging Availability 100 0000 Byte Error Ratio 0 Counter Measurement Period 00 03 23 Reset System Counters Elapsed Time Indicator 00 07 55 Statistics Page Refresh Period seconds Submit Page Refresh Period Chapter 7 Operation phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Managing performance System histograms The System Histograms attributes Table 140 are presented as an array of four elements These elements represent the maximum mean minimum and latest values respectively The maximum mean and minimum are calculated over a running one hour period To reset all histograms and restart the measurement period sel
478. ratory Barred environment prior to installation which makes the grey of the channel bar difficult to see An additional red lock symbol is used to indicate that a channel is barred This channel needs to be monitored for one minute and found free ilabl i ee Unavailable of radar signal before it can be used for transmitting Impulsive Radar Interference has been detected on this channel and the channel is unavailable for 30 minutes At the end of the 30 minute period a Channel Availability Check is required to demonstrate no radar signals remain on this channel before it can be used for the radio link This channel has been barred from use by the local region regulator 7 30 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Managing spectrum Spectrum management for the PTP 25600 The PTP 25600 frequency variant can operate in three frequency bands Figure 173 shows an example of a Lower Band with a 30 MHz channel bandwidth Figure 173 PTP 25600 example of Spectrum Management page Spectrum Management Fixed Frequency Mode Peer Channel 4 State A VAILABLE Mean 91 dBm 99 9 90 dBm Peak 89 dBm Local Receive Channel Spectrum 40 50 60 70 Power dBm 80 90 100 2513 2524 2535 2546 Peer Receive Channel Spectrum 40 E 50 60 70 Power dBm 80 30 100 2513 2524 2535 2546 Attributes TE Oo waue unis Spectrum Management Page
479. re configuration can be created using SNMPv3 The secure configuration should be configured in a controlled environment to prevent disclosure of the initial security keys necessarily sent as plaintext or sent as encrypted data using a predictable key The initial security information should not be configured over an insecure network The default configuration is restored when any of the following occurs e All ODU configuration data is erased e All SNMP users are deleted using the SNMP management interface e The SNMP Engine ID Format has been changed e The SNMP Engine ID Format is IP Address AND the IP Address has been changed e The SNMP Engine ID Format is Text String AND the text string has been changed e The SNMP Engine ID Format is MAC Address AND configuration has been restored using a file saved from a different unit e SNMPv3 Security Management is changed from web based to MIB based The default user configuration is specified in SNMPv3 default configuration MIB based on page 2 49 PTP 600 creates the initial user and template users with localized authentication and privacy keys derived from the passphrase string 123456789 Authentication keys for the templates users are fixed and cannot be changed Any or all of the template users can be deleted phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 1 53 System management Chapter 1 Product description 1 54 The default user initial is created with a view of the entire MIB requiring authen
480. red in compliance with the requirements of Industry Canada and the FCC installers must have the radio engineering skills and training described in this section This is particularly important when installing and configuring a PTP 600 system for operation in the 5 4 GHz UNII band Avoidance of weather radars The installer must be familiar with the requirements in FCC KDB 443999 Essentially the installer must be able to e Access the FCC data base of weather radar location and channel frequencies e Use this information to correctly configure the product using the GUI to avoid operation on channels that should be barred according to the guidelines that are contained in the KDB and explained in detail in this user guide IV phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide External antennas When using a connectorized version of the product as compared to the version with an integrated antenna the conducted transmit power must be reduced to ensure the regulatory limit on transmitter EIRP is not exceeded The installer must have an understanding of how to compute the effective antenna gain from the actual antenna gain and the feeder cable losses The range of permissible values for maximum antenna gain and feeder cable losses are included in the user guide together with a sample calculation The product GUI automatically applies the correct conducted power limit to ensure that it is not possible for the installation to exceed the E
481. rk is approximately 500 kbit s in each direction End to end out of band management is possible only when the network management mode is configured to out of band at every ODU Out of band management is only available in the following product variants e PTP 45600 e PTP 54600 OOBM e PTP 58600 OOBM Out of band quality of service Out of band management traffic is forwarded over the wireless link using a dedicated channel The management channel represents a single traffic class and the same quality of service is afforded to all management frames Traffic in the management channel is fragmented for transmission over the wireless link to minimize the jitter imposed on high priority traffic in the customer network The management channel has higher priority than traffic in the customer network Out of band local management The out of band local management mode is similar to the standard out of band mode except that management frames are not forwarded over the wireless link Connection to the management agent is solely through the management port of the local ODU phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 1 41 Ethernet bridging Chapter 1 Product description Source address learning If Local Packet Filtering is enabled the PTP 600 learns the location of end stations from the source addresses in received management frames The agent filters transmitted management frames to ensure that the frame is transmitted at the Ethernet port or over the
482. rk management systems or PCs can be connected to this agent using a choice of two in band and two out of band modes These modes are described in detail in Management network on page 1 40 The management agent supports the following interfaces e Hyper text transfer protocol HTTP e HTTP over transport layer security HTTPS TLS e RADIUS authentication e TELNET e Simple network management protocol SNMP e Simple mail transfer protocol SMTP e Simple network time protocol SNTP e System logging syslog Web server 1 48 The PTP 600 management agent contains a web server The web server supports the HTTP and HTTPS TLS interfaces Operation of HTTPS TLS is enabled by purchase of an optional AES upgrade as described in Task 3 Installing license keys on page 6 14 Web based management offers a convenient way to manage the PTP 600 equipment from a locally connected computer or from a network management workstation connected through a management network without requiring any special management software The web based interfaces are the only interfaces supported for installation of PTP 600 and for the majority of PTP 600 configuration management tasks phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide System management Web pages The web based management interfaces provide comprehensive web based fault configuration performance and security management functions organized into the following web pages and groups e Ho
483. rnames and passwords When identity based user accounts are enabled a security officer can define from one to ten user accounts each of which may have one of the three possible roles e Security officer e System administrator e Read only Identity based user accounts are enabled in the Local User Accounts page of the web based interface Password complexity PTP 600 allows a network operator to enforce a configurable policy for password complexity Password complexity configuration additionally allows a pre determined best practice configuration to be set See Configuring local user accounts on page 6 34 for further details RADIUS authentication PTP 600 supports remote authentication for users of the web interface using the Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS with one of the following authentication methods e Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP e Microsoft CHAP Version 2 MS CHAPv2 e MS CHAPv2 with Protected EAP Operation of Protected EAP is enabled by purchase of an optional AES upgrade as described in Task 3 Installing license keys on page 6 14 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide System management PTP 600 supports connections to primary and secondary RADIUS servers The RADIUS interface is configured through the RADIUS Authentication page of the web based interfaces PTP 600 RADIUS supports the standard Service Type attribute to indicate authentication roles of
484. rnet interface specifications 1000BaseSX Core Mode Bandwidth at Maximum Insertion cladding 850 nm length of fiber loss dB microns MHz km interface 62 5 125 Multi 160 220 m 720 ft 2 38 62 5 125 Multi 200 275 m 900 ft 2 6 50 125 Multi 400 500 m 1640 ft 3 37 50 125 Multi 500 550 m 1800 ft 3 56 Table 56 Fiber Ethernet interface specifications 1000BaseLX Core Mode Bandwidth at Maximum Insertion cladding 1310 nm length of fiber loss dB microns MHz km interface 62 5 125 Multi 500 550 m 1800 ft 1 67 50 125 Multi 400 550 m 1800 ft 0 07 50 125 Multi 500 550 m 1800 ft 1 19 10 125 Single N A 5000 m 16400 ft 0 16 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 Equipment specifications Chapter 4 Reference information Fiber optic cable and connectors The fiber optic cable and connectors are not supplied as part of the fiber upgrade kit Order them from a specialist fiber optic cable fabricator quoting the specification shown in Figure 42 Figure 42 Fiber optic cable and connector specification Individual male LC Connectors Glued heat shrink to make Outdoor UV Stable finished outside diameter of 2 or 4 core 6 to 7mm This specification is based on the following considerations Individual LC connectors are specified to aid installation and removal of the fiber optic cable assembly to and from the SFP module installed in the ODU The finished diameter
485. rounding cable for building Ground bus conductor Rack Ground Bar RGB Lightning Protection Unit LPU To PIDU External Ground Bar EGB Plus Ground ring To ODU LPU phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 2 35 Mounting options for the PTP SYNC GPS receiver Chapter 2 Planning considerations Mounting the GPS receiver module on a metal tower or mast If mounting the GPS receiver module on a metal tower or mast Figure 41 select a position that meets the following requirements e It must not be mounted any higher than is necessary to receive an adequate signal from four GPS satellites e It must be protected by a nearby lightning air terminal that projects farther out from the tower than the GPS receiver module e It must meet all the requirements stated in Protection requirements for a mast or tower installation on page 2 24 Figure 41 Grounding and lightning protection for GPS receiver on tower or mast CAT5e cable gel filled shielded with copper plated steel CAT5e cable unscreened or screened O Ground cable GPS receiver First point of contact with tower P gt p D Ground bus conductor ae Mid point of tower Rack Ground Bar RGB Master Ground Bar MGB HA Bottom of tower Lightning Protection Unit LPU Tower Ground Bar TGB To PIDU Plus External Ground Bar EGB To ODU LPU on mast Ground ring Equipment rack 2 36 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012
486. rresserressse 1 43 Figure 19 Forwarding behavior in out of band management mode ssssesssseesessseressseressseeressse 1 43 Figure 20 Protocol layers between Ethernet and wireless interfaces cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 1 44 Figure 21 Protocol layers between external interfaces and the management agent 1 45 Figure 22 Tamper evident label on side edge Of ODU eeeeecccseescccceeesecccneeesceceseeseceeeseeeseeenen 1 61 Figure 23 Tamper evident label on top edge Of ODU ceeececcessseecccneesccceeeeececenseececeaueeseeenes 1 61 Figure 24 FIPS 140 2 hardware version identification ssesssssereseseressssrosesereresssceeseseeresesersesss 1 61 Figure 25 Indication of FIPS 140 2 cap ability ssc sexicotssecacdantescaseasoceareasoeacake hace R N anes ee 1 62 Figure 26 Secure Mode alarms sssccssscsidesteasedes innir a a EEE T T a 1 63 Figure 27 Indication of UCAPL Capability scesero Atn a en ATERT EETA ER ENE 1 65 Figure 28 Relationship between DC voltage and cable length sssesssensseessersssesssersserssesssersseees 2 7 Figure 29 Cable length restrictions when PTP SYNC is installed 200 0 ceecccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 2 8 Figure 30 Rolling sphere method to determine the lightning protection ZONGEG ccceeeeee 2 22 Figure 31 Grounding cable minimum bend radius and angle cceeeccccceseeeceeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenes 2 24 phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 xiii List of Figures
487. rs should be physically separated from one another as far as practical phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 2 27 Grounding and lightning protection Chapter 2 Planning considerations Figure 34 Grounding and lightning protection on building CAT5e cable gel filled shielded Air terminal finial with copper plated steel ow PTP 600 ground cable Building ground system Tower grounding conductor 7 gt m Hy To equipment area Building ground ring 2 28 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Grounding and lightning protection Protection inside a high rise building The following protection requirements must be observed inside multi story or high rise buildings Figure 35 e The drop cable shield must be bonded to the building grounding system at the entry point to the building e The drop cable shield must be bonded to the building grounding system at the entry point to the equipment area e An LPU must be installed within 600 mm 24 in of the entry point to the equipment area Figure 35 Grounding and lightning protection inside high building CAT5e cable gel filled shielded with copper plated steel CAT5e cable foil or braid screened with screened connectors PTP 600 ground cable Q Cc Building ground system Equipment area within a larger building his To building ground ring rad phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 2 29 Configuration options for TDD synchronizatio
488. rsion information The attribute is formatted as Dxx Ryy z where Dxx contain the version of the digital card Ryy contains the version of the RF radio frequency card and z describes the antenna type which can be I integrated or C connectorized Region Code The region code is used by the system to constrain the wireless to operate within regulatory regime of the particular country The region code is encoded in the product license key If the operator wishes to change region code a new license key must be obtained from Cambium or the local point to point distributor or system integrator Elapsed Time Indicator The elapsed time indicator attribute presents the total time in years days hours minutes and seconds since the last system restart The system can restart for several reasons for example commanded reboot from the system reboot web page or a power cycle of the equipment Ethernet Link Status This indicates the current status of the Ethernet link A state of Up with a green background indicates that an Ethernet link is established A state of Down with a red background indicates that the Ethernet link is not established phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 Web based management 7 8 Chapter 7 Operation Attribute Meaning Ethernet Speed and Duplex The negotiated speed and duplex setting of the Ethernet interface The speed setting is specified in Mbps Full Duplex data t
489. rtificate files note the format MUST be in DER Distinguished Encoding Rules is a message transfer syntax specified by the ITU in X 690 Click next to keep the existing Private Key Thumbprint Algorithm SHA 1 Thumbprint af Oe 16 62 TES DER Private Browse Key format Click next to keep the existing Public Certificate Thumbprint Algorithm SHA 1 Thumbprint ARA RARER 53 18 ce 4a Hee DER Public Pa Certificate Ad Back Hext gt gt phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 27 Task 5 Configuring security Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Step 3 User defined security banner The Step 3 User Security Banner page is displayed Figure 111 Update the User Defined Security Banner optional and set the Acknowledgement to No or Yes This banner will be displayed every time a user attempts to login to the wireless unit Select Next AX NOTE For UC APL the text reproduced in Security banner text for UC APL on page 6 117 is valid at the date of publication of this User Guide UC APL requires Acknowledgement to be Yes Figure 111 Step 3 User Security Banner page Step 3 Enter User Security Banner Please enter your organization s user security banner text Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetur adipisicing elit sed do eiusmod Ka empor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua Ut enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud exercitation ullamco laboris
490. s Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Cambium could void the user s authority to operate the system Type approvals This system has achieved Type Approval in various countries around the world This means that the system has been tested against various local technical regulations and found to comply The frequency bands in which the system operates may be unlicensed and in these bands the system can be used provided it does not cause interference The system is not guaranteed protection against interference from other products and installations Table 80 lists the radio specification type approvals that have been granted for PTP 600 frequency variants Table 82 Radio certifications Variant Region Specification Type Approvals PTP 49600 USA FCC Part 90 Canada RSS 111 PTP 54600 USA FCC Part 15 E Canada RSS 210 Issue 7 Annex 9 Europe EN301 893 V1 5 1 with DFS testing using radar parameters PTP 58600 USA FCC Part 15 247 CANADA RSS 210 Issue 7 Annex 8 UK IR 2007 Eire ComReg 02 71R1 EU EN302 502 v 1 2 1 4 58 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Compliance with radio regulations FCC and ETSI compliance testing without PTP SYNC Without PTP SYNC installed the system has been tested for compliance to both US FCC and European ETSI specifications It has been shown to comply with the limits for emitted spurious radiation for a Class B digital
491. s LPU double end kit The LPU double end kit Figure 13 is required for ODU drop cables One LPU is installed next to the ODU and the other is installed near the point at which the drop cable enters the building Figure 13 LPU double end kit Back to Back Ethernet with 2 pre fitted strain rellef 600mm 3x Cable Strain Rellef L Nut M6 Locking A J Washer SS M6 Washer SS M6 Nut SS M6 4 Washer M6 Toothed Lock i ae Grounding Cable 600mm 2xM8 SS e G 2xsplit washer O 2x55 washer q Bolt SS M6 60mm 2xM8 SS Nut 2xSplit Washer Q rc MC Z 2xSS Washer S7 Grounding Cable 600mm U Bolt 55 M8 Square Back U Bolt SS M8 Square Back phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 1 19 Cabling and lightning protection Chapter 1 Product description 1 20 LPU single end kit The LPU single end kit Figure 14 is required for GPS drop cables when GPS is the timing reference source for PTP SYNC optional The LPU is installed near the point at which the drop cable enters the building Figure 14 LPU single end kit PTP LPU Grounding Cable 2xM8 SS Nut a 2xSplit Washer Ke 2xSS Washer 2x Cable Gland Nut M6 Locking Washer SS M6 Washer SS M6 Nut SS M6 Washer M6 Toothed Lock Bolt SS M6 60mm phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Cabling and lightning protection
492. s e Installing a PTP SYNC unit on page 5 32 describes how to install a PTP SYNC unit e Installing a GPS receiver for PTP SYNC on page 5 37 describes how to install an optional GPS receiver for PTP SYNC e Task 6 Configuring wireless and telecoms interfaces on page 6 45 describes how to configure TDD synchronization e Testing PTP SYNC on page 8 13 describes how to test a PTP SYNC installation when a fault is suspected 1 24 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Wireless operation Wireless operation This section describes how the PTP 600 wireless link is operated including modulation modes power control and security Time division duplexing TDD cycle PTP 600 links operate using Time Division Duplexing TDD They use a TDD cycle in which the ODUs alternately transmit and receive TDD bursts The TDD cycle is illustrated in Figure 17 The steps in the cycle are as follows So Se Je eS iP The TDD master transmits a burst to the TDD slave A delay occurs as the master slave burst propagates over the link The slave receives the burst from the master The slave processes the master slave burst The slave transmits a burst to the master A delay occurs as the slave master burst propagates over the link The master receives the burst from the slave The master transmits the next burst to the slave TDD frame parameters The TDD burst duration varies depending on the following Channel bandwidth Li
493. s User Guide Outdoor unit ODU Further reading on the ODU For more information on the ODU refer to the following ODU site selection on page 2 6 describes how to select a site for the ODU When to install connectorized units on page 2 17 describes when to choose connectorized ODUs and external antennas rather than integrated ODUs General protection requirements on page 2 23 describes the grounding and lightning protection requirements of a PTP 600 installation including the ODU Ordering components on page 2 53 lists the components required for PTP 600 installations including ODUs with Cambium part numbers FCC and IC approved antennas on page 2 64 contains specifications of the antennas that may be used with connectorized ODUs ODU specifications on page 4 2 contains specifications of the ODU such as dimensions weight and environmental requirements Installing the ODU and top LPU on page 5 4 describes how to install the ODU integrated or connectorized on the supporting structure Installing connectorized antennas on page 5 10 describes how to install separate antenna s for a connectorized ODU Task 11 Aligning antennas on page 6 85 describes how to align the antennas for both integrated and connectorized ODUs phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 1 11 Powered indoor unit PIDU Chapter 1 Product description Powered indoor unit PIDU This section describes the PIDU Plus PTP 300 500 600 Series and its interfaces PIDU
494. s allows an operator to encrypt all traffic sent over the wireless link using 128 bit encryption e 256 bit This allows an operator to encrypt traffic using either 128 bit or 256 bit encryption Encryption must be configured with the same size key in each direction AES encryption at the PTP 600 wireless port is based on pre shared keys An identical key must be entered at each end of the link AES encryption for SNMPv3 or TLS is always based on a 128 bit key regardless of level enabled in the PTP 600 license key For more information see e Task 3 Installing license keys on page 6 14 e Task 5 Configuring security on page 6 21 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide System management Critical security parameters Critical security parameters CSPs are as follows e Key of keys e AES encryption keys for the wireless interface e Private key for the HTTPS TLS interface e Entropy value for the HTTPS TLS interface e User account passwords for the web based interface CSPs can be erased zeroized using the Zeroize CSPs page of the web based interface or by selecting the Zeroize CSPs option in Recovery mode Login information PTP 600 optionally provides details of the most recent successful login and the most recent unsuccessful login attempt for each user of the web based interface Capacity upgrades Capacity upgrades are supplied as an access key purchased from your Cambium Point to Point distr
495. s and region codes for PTP 49600 Region License Frequencies DFS Channel Max power code regulation bandwidth 14 USA Canada 4940 4990 MHz 5 10 20 MHz 24 dBm 1 Public Safety 17 UK Licence 4940 4990 MHz 5 10 20 MHz 22 dBm Required 18 Hong Kong 4900 4950 MHz 5 10 20 MHz 24 dBm 1 Public Safety 19 EU 4940 4990 MHz 5 10 20 MHz 2 Broadband Disaster Recove phn 2512 007v000 Dec 2012 4 61 Compliance with radio regulations Chapter 4 Reference information 1 Region codes 14 and 18 PTP 49600 Max Power depends upon Antenna Gain o If Antenna Gain lt 26 dBi then Max Power 24 dBm o If Antenna Gain gt 26 dBi then Max Power 50 Antenna Gain dBm 2 Region code 19 Max Power depends upon Channel Bandwidth and Antenna Gain o If Channel Bandwidth 5 MHz then Max Power 32 Antenna Gain dBm o If Channel Bandwidth 10 MHz then Max Power 35 Antenna Gain dBm o If Channel Bandwidth 20 MHz then Max Power 37 Antenna Gain dBm Table 87 Licenses and region codes for PTP 54600 Region License or Frequencies DFS Channel Max power code regulation bandwidth 12 FCC USA 5470 5725 Yes 30 MHz 30 dBm EIRP ce AEE 15 MHz 27 dBm EIRP 10 MHz 25 dBm EIRP 5 MHz 22 dBm EIRP 13 Canada 5470 5600 Yes 30 MHz 30 dBm EIRP Australia MHz 15 MH 27 dBm EIRP 5650 5725 pee oon MHz 10 MHz 25 dBm EIRP 1 5 MHz 22 dBm EIRP 20
496. s are enabled an SNMP TRAP or an email alert is sent warning the system administrator of the channel change Hopping Counter This is used to record the number of channel hops The number in the brackets indicates the number of channel changes since the last screen refresh Interference Spectrum Management uses the interference threshold to perform Threshold instantaneous channel hops If the measured interference on a channel exceeds the specified threshold then i DFS will instruct the wireless to immediately move to a better channel If a better channel cannot be found the PTP 600 Series will continue to use the current active channel Default 85 dBm Channel This shows the value of the variable channel bandwidth selected Bandwidth not configurable Barring a channel Channels can only be barred or unbarred from the master Spectrum Management web page Refer to Barring channels on page 6 62 The channel bar will take effect immediately and is not related to the measurement quantization period phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Managing spectrum Viewing spectrum usage at the slave To view spectrum usage at the slave log into the slave ODU for the link Select menu option System Spectrum Management The Spectrum Management page is displayed Figure 168 If necessary update the Page Refresh Period and select Submit configuration changes Figure 168 illustrates 15 MHz op
497. s are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Cambium Networks end user license agreement The word cryptographic can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 If you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS
498. s been a change in the status of the telecoms E1 or T1 channel phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Managing alarms and events Managing event notification messages When system logging is enabled log entries are added to the internal log and optionally transmitted as UDP messages to one or two syslog servers For more information about system logging refer to e System logging syslog on page 1 55 describes the system logging feature e Syslog message formats on page 4 48 describes the format and content of Syslog event messages e Task 9 Configuring syslog on page 6 81 describes the system logging configuration procedure To enable system logging select menu option Management Syslog Syslog configuration The Syslog Configuration page is displayed Figure 143 Set the Syslog State attribute to Enabled To view the log select menu option Management Syslog The local log is displayed Figure 166 Figure 166 Syslog local log 44d Previous Page Refresh lt gt Filter Out Reports Below This Level Info sj Entries 989 to 890 0 filtered event auth_login Web user Geri from 10 130 1 73 port 443 989 00 00 05 Sep 02132721 Sec hate Sn ea rest 988 00 00 17 Sep 02 13 27 08 Security Info ee sued 0 130 1 175 port 443 987 00 00 56 pw Sty be ikea OC S 986 00 01 05 Sep 021326 191 Securty inio E ee eee evar 985 00 01 51 Sep 02 13 25 35 NTP Warning status SNTP Sy
499. s by setting the Burst Duration of the Master to twice that of the Slave e 1 2 The capacity in the direction Slave to Master is twice that of the direction Master to Slave The PTP 600 series achieves this by setting the Burst Duration of the Slave to twice that of the Master Aa NOTE The 2 1 and 1 2 modes are not available when TDD synchronization is enabled or when 5 MHz bandwidth is selected phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 1 27 Wireless operation Chapter 1 Product description e Adaptive The capacity allocated to a given link direction is dependent on the offered level of network traffic in both link directions If the level of offered traffic in both directions is equally high or equally low the PTP 600 will allocate equal capacity to both directions If however the offered level of traffic is greater in one direction it is allocated a greater proportion of the overall link capacity The PTP 600 series achieves this by increasing or decreasing the duration of the Transmit Burst in a given link direction as the offered level of network traffic increases or decreases in this same direction This is done independently for the two directions Adaptive mode is not available in the following configurations o When link mode optimization is set to TDM Traffic see Link mode optimization on page 1 27 o When TDD synchronization is enabled o In regions where radar avoidance is operational see Radar avoidance on page 1 31
500. s oasew tien E EE 1 5 ODU InterlaCeS cicsssiistissccsvesaaadsageaepessddonpcan sed enesaince dedanncdseasaiteasedsdeues sandesedu EEE uesgehaaes 1 8 PIDU interfaco functions spreen asa dlomennsesdetaclectuiieleeasauecehedeuelen cites a ea 1 13 PIDU LED funtion ssszcssiessaneschevessasne nonn EEn a E can neste A E E RE E E O RRS 1 13 PTPSYNC Intertace functions enaena a Ea e E ESS 1 23 PTP SYNCGC LED fUNCHONS i sesesssseexbens i isee AEE EEE Taass 1 23 Minimum part number suffix for FIPS 140 2 mode sesesessseressssecessseceossscerssseeessseeeess 1 60 Maximum cable lengths of other copper Ethernet interfaces ccccccseseccseeeeeeeeeeeees 2 8 Lateral force MOUWIC sci icsensudscssncsdaayeseoneesecuoo can ceancers catneseaumad eqpecguetecadeeveaaedenaencsenntnieeteaes 2 10 Lateral TOrCe U Ses sivscszsdaussasdtenzcssiatacs seeonnds r a E R AE aai 2 10 EIRP limits from ATEX and Hazlo Standards ecisssccsssess conshassevanneexereeetssueanaereenensansacentes 2 11 Parameters that influence modulation mode Selection 0 0 00 eeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 14 Normal EIRP limits with operating channel bandwidth ccceecccecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeenes 2 19 Setting maximum transmit power to meet general EIRP limits 2 0 00 eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 19 RF cable lengths required to achieve 1 2 dB loss at 5 8 GHZ ceeeeccceeeeecceeeeeeeeeeees 2 20 HEEPS TLS Security material ssis EE EE EEEE 2 41 Permitted character set for SNMPv3 pass
501. s of a PTP 600 installation Configuration options for TDD synchronization on page 2 30 describes the different TDD synchronization methods that may be implemented Mounting options for the PTP SYNC GPS receiver on page 2 34 describes the requirements of the optional GPS receiver for PTP SYNC Data network planning on page 2 37 describes factors to be considered when planning PTP 600 data networks Security planning on page 2 41 describes how to plan for PTP 600 links to operate in secure mode Ordering components on page 2 53 describes how to select components for a planned PTP 600 link as an alternative to PTP LINKPlanner It specifies Cambium part numbers for PTP 600 components phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 2 1 Regulatory planning Chapter 2 Planning considerations Regulatory planning This section describes how to plan PTP 600 links to conform to the regulatory restrictions that apply in the country of operation It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that the PTP product is operated in accordance with local regulatory limits Aa NOTE Contact the applicable radio regulator to find out whether or not registration of the PTP 600 link is required Regulatory limits The local regulator may restrict frequency usage and channel width and may limit the amount of conducted or radiated transmitter power For details of these restrictions refer to Examples of regulatory limits on page 4 60 Many countries impose
502. s of damage Check that the ODU cable resistances are correct as specified in Test resistance in the ODU cable on page 8 8 If the ODU cable is suspect replace it 2 Remove the LAN cable from the PIDU Examine it for signs of damage If the LAN cable is suspect replace it phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 8 3 Testing link end hardware Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 3 Use the LPU if installed to check that power is available on the cable to the ODU Access the connections by rotating the LPU lid as shown Slacken the lid nut but do not remove it 4 Test that test point P1 on the LPU PCB corresponds to pin 1 on the RJ45 Repeat for points P2 to P8 Aa NOTE This test is only valid if both the PIDU and the ODU are disconnected Reconnect the ODU cable to the PIDU 6 Check that the PWR LED near the top right of the LPU PCB is illuminated to indicate power in the Ethernet cable 7 Ifany test fails replace or repair the cable that connects the PIDU to the LPU or ODU Ethernet LED is off Meaning There is no Ethernet traffic between the PIDU and ODU Action The fault may be in the LAN or ODU cable e Remove the LAN cable from the PIDU examine it and confirm it is not faulty e Ifthe PC connection is working remove the ODU cable from the PIDU examine it and check that the wiring to pins 1 amp 2 and 3 amp 6 is correct and not crossed 8 4 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Testing link end hardware Et
503. s specifications all Variants sssenessssseressseressseresssseresssseressseresssere 4 9 Table 58 PTP 600 wireless specifications per frequency variant sss ssseesserssersssrsseerssessse 4 10 Table 59 PTP 25600 channel plan FCC BRS EBS Post Transition Band ccecceseeeeeeeeees 4 12 Table 60 PTP 58600 band edge Tx power reductiONn ccccceccccseccceesecceececaecceaeseeeeseesueeeeseeeea 4 28 Table 61 PTP 25600 IP mode threshold power and link 10SS cccccceesccceseeeeeeeeeeeseeneeees 4 32 Table 62 PTP 25600 TDM mode threshold power and link 10SS ccc eecccceccceseeeeeeeeeae sees 4 33 Table 63 PTP 45600 IP mode threshold power and link 10SS cece eeecccseeeeceeeeeneeeeeneeeeea 4 34 Table 64 PTP 45600 TDM mode threshold power and link 10SS ccc cee ccc eeccceneeeeeeeeeeneeees 4 35 Table 65 PTP 48600 IP mode threshold power and link 10SS cceccccseccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 4 36 Table 66 PTP 48600 TDM mode threshold power and link 10SS ccc ceececeececeneseceeeeeeneeees 4 37 Table 67 PTP 49600 IP mode threshold power and link 10SS ccecccsececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeenaeees 4 38 Table 68 PTP 49600 TDM mode threshold power and link 10SS cceeccceecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 39 XX phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Table 69 PTP 54600 IP mode threshold power and lin
504. s used to encrypt all traffic over the PTP 600 wireless link Select the applicable value in the Encryption Algorithm field If a valid encryption key exists then an SHA 1 thumbprint of the key is displayed If this key is correct then take no action Otherwise enter the generated key in the Wireless Link Encryption Key and Confirm Wireless Link Encryption Key fields Select Next Figure 114 Step 6 Enter Wireless Link Encryption Key page Step 6 Enter Wireless Link Encryption Key The wireless link encryption key is used to encrypt decrypt all data transmitted over the wireless link Click next to keep the existing Wireless Encryption Key Thumbprint Algorithm SHA 1 Dimmer lt lt lt lt seeee lt s 22265 Ge oF Encryption prasaan None AES 128 bit Rijndael Encryption Key Confirm Encryption Pett Key 44 Back Next gt gt 6 30 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 5 Configuring security Step 7 HTTP and Telnet settings The Step 7 HTTP and Telnet Settings page is displayed Figure 115 The PTP 600 can be remotely managed in four ways HTTPS HTTP Telnet or SNMP Review and update the HTTP and Telnet attributes Table 105 Select Next Aa NOTE In FIPS and UC APL secure modes the Telnet Access Enable attribute is automatically set to No and the SNMP Control is automatically set to Disabled Figure 115 Step 7 HTTP and Telnet Settings page
505. scisecsaeccanccnetas snese AE RAA RARE 6 44 Table 110 Step 1 Interface Configuration standard attributes eccccsecccseseceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeea 6 49 Table 111 Step 2 Wireless Configuration attributes sccssiscicesesedicaceciedasndsaweacdesbadacadeaentsadetiesactens 6 52 Table 112 Step 3 TDD Synchronization Attributes sissicssscscscsiszesdcasaes sennnses sina neossasactoanesadcoenessedoes 6 59 Table 113 Step 1 SNMP Configuration attributes for SNMPV3 cccccccccseeecccceseseceeeseeeeecenees 6 64 Table 114 Step 2 SNMP MIB II System Objects attributes for SNMPV3 cccccceseeeeeeeees 6 65 Table 115 Step 3 SNMP User Policy Configuration attributes for SNMPV3 sses 6 67 Table 116 Step 4 SNMP User Accounts Configuration attributes for SNMPv3 eee 6 68 Table 117 Step 5 SNMP Trap Configuration attributes for SNMPV3 cccccceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeenees 6 70 Table 118 Step 1 SNMP Configuration attributes for SNMPV1 2C ccceeccccnseeeeecneeeeeecenees 6 73 Table 119 Step 2 SNMP MIB II System Objects attributes for SNMPVv1 2C ccccceccceeeeees 6 74 Table 120 Step 3 SNMP Trap Configuration attributes for SNMPV1 2C ccceeccecesseeeeeeenees 6 75 Table 121 Email Configuration attributes 0 0 0 0 cccccccccccsecccneeecceeeeceeeeecaeseeaeeceeaeseeeeeeeeseseeseeeea 6 80 Table l22 Syslog Comtigurationcat tributes sic 2 aise teesicarascaragesssaeaabine stone peat eensstensaconeus eases A 6 82 Tabl
506. screen is already exposed and weatherproof both the ground cable joint and the RJ45 connection phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 5 47 Installing a GPS receiver for PTP SYNC Chapter 5 Installation Figure 102 Grounding and weatherproofing requirements for GPS adapter cable Weatherproof Follow the procedure described in Making a drop cable ground point on page 5 23 but observe the following differences e There is no need to remove 60mm 2 5inches of the drop cable outer sheath as this has already been done e Wrap the top layer of self amalgamating tape around the complete assembly not just the ground cable joint including the RJ45 connection with the GPS adapter cable Figure 103 e Wrap all five layers of PVC tape around the complete assembly Figure 104 Wrap the layers in alternate directions 1 bottom to top 2 top to bottom 3 bottom to top 4 top to bottom 5 bottom to top The edges of each layer should be 25mm 1 inch above A and 25 mm 1 inch below B the previous layer Figure 103 Wrapping self amalgamating tape around the GPS adapter cable joint Self amalgamating tape phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Installing a GPS receiver for PTP SYNC Figure 104 Wrapping PVC tape around the GPS adapter cable joint Bottom b Check that the joint between the GPS adapter cable drop cable and ground cable is fully weatherproofed Figure 105 Figure 105 Grounding a
507. se it to verify that the link configuration Max Transmit Power Antenna Gain and Cable Loss does not exceed any applicable regulatory limit Encryption This is only displayed when AES encryption is enabled by licensed Algorithm key Updated in Task 5 Configuring security on page 6 21 Encryption Key This is only displayed when AES encryption is enabled by licensed key Updated in Task 5 Configuring security on page 6 21 Confirm This is only displayed when AES encryption is enabled by licensed Encryption Key key Updated in Task 5 Configuring security on page 6 21 6 94 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 13 Checking wireless performance Task 13 Checking wireless performance Comparing actual to predicted performance For at least one hour of operation after disarming the link should be monitored to check that it is achieving predicted levels of performance To check performance select menu option System Statistics The System Statistic page is displayed Figure 176 Monitor the following attributes e Link Loss e Transmit Data Rate e Receive Data Rate PTP LINKPlanner provides the prediction in the form of an installation report For more information refer to Managing spectrum on page 7 20 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 95 Task 14 Configuring quality of service Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Task 14 Configuring quality of service Configuring quality of service
508. se key and region code For example at 5 8 GHz in the UK and some other European countries the RTTT band 5795 MHz to 5815 MHz is barred With the appropriate license key installed for this region the PTP 600 will not operate on channels within this band The number and identity of channels barred by the license key and region code is dependent on the channel bandwidth and channel raster selected Barred channels are indicated by a No Entry symbol displayed on the Spectrum Management web page see Spectrum management in radar avoidance mode on page 7 28 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 2 3 Regulatory planning Chapter 2 Planning considerations Channel bandwidth Select the required channel bandwidth for the link The selection depends upon the PTP 600 frequency variant and region code as specified in Examples of regulatory limits on page 4 60 The wider the channel bandwidth the greater the capacity As narrower channel bandwidths take up less spectrum selecting a narrow channel bandwidth may be a better choice when operating in locations where the spectrum is very busy Lite versions of the PTP 600 products do not support a channel bandwidth of 5 MHz Both ends of the link must be configured to operate on the same channel bandwidth Frequency selection 2 4 Regions without mandatory radar detection In regions that do not mandate DFS choose i DFS or Fixed Frequency e Intelligent Dynamic Frequency Selection
509. single 18 58 9 29 27 87 12 58 6 29 18 86 9 51 4 76 14 27 BPSK 0 63 single 9 29 4 64 13 93 6 29 3 14 9 43 4 76 2 38 7 13 At zero range All rates are in Mbit s phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 81 Data throughput tables 4 82 continued Modulation 10 MHz Mode Tx Rx Both 256QAM 0 81 66 38 33 19 99 56 dual 64QAM 0 92 dual 55 92 27 96 83 88 64QAM 0 75 dual 45 70 22 85 68 55 16QAM 0 87 dual 35 55 17 78 53 33 16QAM 0 63 dual 25 56 12 78 38 34 256QAM 0 81 33 19 16 59 49 78 single 64QAM 0 92 27 96 13 98 41 94 single 64QAM 0 75 22 85 11 42 34 27 single 16QAM 0 87 17 78 8 89 26 66 single 16QAM 0 63 12 78 6 39 19 17 single QPSK 0 87 single 8 89 4 44 13 33 QPSK 0 63 single 6 39 3 19 9 58 BPSK 0 63 single 3 19 1 60 4 79 Chapter 4 Reference information Table 94 Throughput for PTP 600 Full link symmetry 2 1 link optimization TDM This combination is not available with Channel Bandwidth 5 MHz phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Data throughput tables Table 95 Throughput for PTP 600 Full link symmetry Adaptive link optimization IP Modulation 30 MHz 20 MHz 15 MHz Mode Tx Rx Both Tx Rx Both Tx Rx Both 256QAM 0 81 236 95 59 23 296 18 148 53 49 51 198 03 112 12 37 37 149 49 dual 64QAM 0 92 dual 199 63 49 91 249 54 125
510. single 88 0 83 8 82 8 78 3 22 156 0 151 8 150 8 146 3 16QAM 0 63 dual 84 3 80 7 79 3 74 6 22 152 3 148 7 147 3 142 6 16QAM 0 87 single 82 4 79 1 78 2 73 0 20 148 4 145 1 144 2 139 0 16QAM 0 87 dual 79 7 75 7 74 7 70 6 20 145 7 141 7 140 7 136 6 64QAM 0 75 single 78 9 76 4 74 9 70 3 18 142 9 140 4 138 9 134 3 64QAM 0 75 dual 76 5 72 7 71 6 67 7 18 140 5 136 7 135 6 131 7 64QAM 0 92 single 74 4 71 7 70 4 65 0 18 138 4 135 7 134 4 129 0 64 QAM 0 92 dual 70 7 68 5 66 9 62 3 18 134 7 132 5 130 9 126 3 256QAM 0 81 single N A N A N A 63 6 18 N A N A N A 127 6 256QAM 0 81 dual N A N A N A 60 5 18 N A N A N A 124 5 4 40 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Table 70 PTP 54600 TDM mode threshold Wireless specifications power and link loss System threshold dBm Dia Maximum link loss dB Modulation per channel bandwidth ae per channel bandwidth mode 5 10 15 30 All 5 10 15 30 MHz MHz MHz MHz bands MHz MHz MHz MHz BPSK 0 63 single 98 2 94 6 92 3 88 9 25 169 2 165 6 163 3 159 9 QPSK 0 63 single 89 7 88 3 86 4 81 4 24 159 7 158 3 156 4 151 4 QPSK 0 87 single 86 7 84 3 82 3 78 4 23 155 6 153 3 151 3 147 4 16QAM 0 63 single 86 6 81 8 79 9 76 0 22 151 7 149 8 147 9 144 0 16QAM 0 63 dual 83 7 78 2 76 5 72 4 22 148 8 146 3 144 5 140 4 16QAM 0 87 single 78 8 76
511. sky e It must receive an adequate signal from at least four GPS satellites e It must be mounted at least 1 m 3 ft preferably 2 m 6 ft away from other GPS receiving equipment e It must not be sited in the field of radiation of co located radio communications equipment and should be positioned at a distance of at least 3 m 10 ft away Mount the GPS receiver on the wall of the equipment building if there is a suitable location on the wall that can meet these requirements Failing that mount it on a metal tower or mast 2 34 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Mounting options for the PTP SYNC GPS receiver Mounting the GPS receiver module on the equipment building If mounting the GPS receiver for PTP SYNC on the equipment building Figure 40 select a position on the wall that meets the following requirements e It must be below the roof height of the equipment building or below the height of any roof mounted equipment such as air conditioning plant e It must be below the lightning air terminals e It must not project more than 600mm 24 inches from the wall of the building If these requirements cannot all be met then the module must be mounted on a metal tower or mast Figure 40 Grounding and lightning protection for GPS receiver on building CAT5e cable gel filled shielded with copper plated steel CAT5e cable unscreened or screened O Ground cable GPS receiver ai G
512. so the above exclusion or limitation may not apply to you IN NO CASE SHALL CAMBIUM S LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT YOU PAID FOR THE PRODUCT phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Cambium Networks end user license agreement U S government If you are acquiring the Product on behalf of any unit or agency of the U S Government the following applies Use duplication or disclosure of the Software and Documentation is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraphs c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 UNE 1987 if applicable unless being provided to the Department of Defense If being provided to the Department of Defense use duplication or disclosure of the Products is subject to the restricted rights set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 OCT 1988 if applicable Software and Documentation may or may not include a Restricted Rights notice or other notice referring specifically to the terms and conditions of this Agreement The terms and conditions of this Agreement will each continue to apply but only to the extent that such terms and conditions are not inconsistent with the rights provided to you under the aforementioned provisions of the FAR and DFARS as applicable to the particular procuring agency and procurement transaction Term of license Your right to use the S
513. solid copper conductors There are a limited number of times each conductor can be bent before it fatigues and fails Table 97 shows how the 12 way circular connector locations map to the PTP SYNC RJ45 pins Figure 101 illustrates this mapping Table 97 GPS 12 way circular connector to RJ 45 pin mappings GPS Function Cat5e wire color PTP SYNC PTP SYNC connecter Conventional Supported J 10 p Signal location drop cable RJ 45 pin name 1 DC Pwr 12V Orange White Light Orange 1 12VGPS 2 RxB Brown White Light Brown 7 GPS_TXDA 3 RxB Brown Brown 8 GPS_TXDB 4 TxB Blue Blue 4 GPS_RXDA 5 TxB Blue White Light Blue 5 GPS_RXDB 6 RxA N C N C 7 RxA N C N C 8 TXA N C N C 9 DC Ground Orange Orange 2 GND 10 TxA N C N C 11 Tx1PPS Green White Light Green 3 GPS _1PPSA 12 Tx1PPS Green Green 6 GPS _1PPSB 5 42 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Installing a GPS receiver for PTP SYNC Figure 101 Inserting RJ 45 pins into the 12 way circular connector RJ45 pins and wire colors Trimble GPS connector pin insertion side Orange white Pint gt o DH Light orange Pin 2 B Orange ae ia i i T BEE Light brown Green white Pin 3 or nw I Light green Pin 8 J Brown Pin 4 EE Blue Blue white or BE Light blue To connect the drop cable to the 12 way circular connector
514. ssa esassseecnsaieaversaaata easemtnvadegetausacee aaiatensas saat saan nacaieused E A E 3 20 Chapter 4 Reference infOrmatiOn ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeueeeaeaeeeeuaeeauaeeauaseeeeuaseauaseeuaneananss 4 1 EguipmentspeciNcatioNS 232002355 as adeadee E eels want aden we N 4 2 ODU SPECICATION 55354 c5ccss a gacss tices csensdubaccusonemaeaaaaadacadsdessideasetavaieteagetaaseeneetemeedenemeaasanauaaeee 4 2 PIDU SPECMICALONS cicostonenshssascncnsdanacdwsad cascada wacueasunantacanant ooeemans sated E A 4 3 PTP SYNG Specifications isiscscassdeevacsesasesdssdecaadsh sag bsess an aini hanenoebe Gi Rae HAW aR 4 4 IDET SPECICATION asses ts Sas ocas EE r E nO eee 4 6 Wireless SECU CATIONS acscrcraccsotec ace arece a E oan wan ee aea enero 4 9 General wireless specifications si vssesssssssadsacksiseaaiavdeseiass iaksebu eek sesiaasedesnadeniand dds dcasadencasaeeences 4 9 Available Spectrum SSCHNG Srini sane eduessdunaudvanveceyee AEAEE OE AE RE NR 4 11 System threshold output power and Ink loSScs sseces ssasasgicaesiacuesntaedeceeieavycdesanseacseasateaecen se 4 31 Data Network specincalionS see a E O EE mene eens ee 4 46 Ethernetand telecoms interiaCES ssrincseriseciirviressori tene a nE ia nE EENEN na iiid 4 46 Layer 2 control PrOtOCOlS sesiis nN EE EAER RN 4 47 Syslog message formats seseina E R E E stad omentum erteeamasetenaets 4 48 Format of syslog server Messages sicezcscaisatsariaas asqseepuesetawas E A TINERE 4 48 Configuration and status MESSAGES
515. sssecassaviecasisacedeassaccasgibancatbeaveceancescaded 2 20 Grounding and lightning Protection ccc ccccccecccceecccecccseeccceneceneseecaeeeeeeecesaeeeeaeeeesueseeaeeeees 2 21 The need for power Surge protection 3s ce2 2sacicacesstiocedasenanvsneat E N AERAR REER 2 21 SUAMG ALAS sicis zx acsesceivcsesdsssariaasksvea dca taassacsancssdcacmantaraeauenccecwtp E R R 2 21 Lighting protection ZONES 2 ccssensedexeexs Seavetaceeasesesweeseidseeyseeondeaneeresteieacessera an OCRE AE CREES 2 22 General protection requirements assos nar E N A Saas rad een eee 2 23 Protection requirements for a mast or tower installation esssesssesssersserssesseessersseen 2 24 Protection requirements for a wall instalation siscccesienscceseencssesssnes tesasecednsduansdrnobenneaneseanans 2 26 Protection requirements on a high rise building cece cceccceeececneececeeeceseeeeeaeseeaeeees 2 27 Configuration Options for TDD SynChroniZatiom sis ssssiecsscssasadagusseassecasaas scasuecsseasva es vecadescsiaenceeexe 2 30 single link configuration with Ulta Sy MCs scsscnieeresecavesdeeatieeseaswied casnenee EE A I R 2 30 Single link configuration with PEP SYNC ses ssasieeszeeesdcszdacesesaacanscbenestsebaxeonscesadeehdaredoasaanacers 2 31 Cluster with PIP SYNC and GPS receiver iaiseccfisnceessdancstdaavensdneasansdusauagase totenngacsbancecienannss 2 32 Cluster with PTP SYNC and no GPS recevet sziisascavessevesedsacccasgeasacoseadnceantoes ER e REEER
516. st of all the modulation modes can be found in Data throughput tables on page 4 74 where data rate calculations plots are given for each available modulation mode phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 7 39 Managing performance 7 40 Chapter 7 Operation Attribute Meaning Receive This supplies the user with information regarding the receive Modulation modulation mode in use Possible values are Mode Detail Running at maximum receive mode Running at user configured Target Modulation Mode Restricted because Installation is armed Restricted because of byte errors on the wireless link Restricted because a DFS channel change is in progress Restricted due to the low Ethernet link speed Limited by the radio conditions Wireless Link Availability Ethernet Bridging Availability Wireless link availability calculated since the last reset of the system counters Link availability for bridging Ethernet traffic calculated since the last reset of the system counters This is the percentage of time in which the Ethernet Bridging Status attribute has been in the Enabled state Byte Error Ratio The ratio of detected Byte errors to the total number of bytes since the last system reboot This is a true measure of link quality as this measurement is made continually using null frames when there is no user data to transport Counter Measurement Period The tim
517. stem parameters or recommendations made in this document Cross references References to external publications are shown in italics Other cross references emphasized in blue text in electronic versions are active links to the references This document is divided into numbered chapters that are divided into sections Sections are not numbered but are individually named at the top of each page and are listed in the table of contents Feedback We appreciate feedback from the users of our documents This includes feedback on the structure content accuracy or completeness of our documents Send feedback to support cambiumnetworks com phn 2512 007v000 Dec 2012 3 Problems and warranty About This User Guide Problems and warranty Reporting problems If any problems are encountered when installing or operating this equipment follow this procedure to investigate and report 1 Search this document and the software release notes of supported releases 2 Visit the support website 3 Ask for assistance from the Cambium product supplier 4 Gather information from affected units such as any available diagnostic downloads 5 Escalate the problem by emailing or telephoning support Repair and service If unit failure is suspected obtain details of the Return Material Authorization RMA process from the support website Warranty Cambium s standard hardware warranty is for one 1 year from date of shipment from
518. ster e TDD Sync Device PTPSYNC e Cluster Master Slave Cluster Master e PTP Sync Site Reference GPS 1PPS External Figure 37 TDD synchronization configuration single link with PTP SYNC GPS receiver PTP SYNC eee OUldoor CAT5e cable gel filled shielded with copper plated steel s CAT5e cable foil or braid screened with screened connectors CAT5e cable unscreened or screened Ground cable Customer LAN phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 2 31 Configuration options for TDD synchronization Cluster with PTP SYNC and GPS receiver Chapter 2 Planning considerations Each link requires one PTP SYNC unit Each site requires one compatible GPS receiver Collocated PTP SYNC units are connected together in a daisy chain Between two and ten PTP SYNCs may be chained in this way Use this configuration where a site contains collocated TDD master ODUs in an extended network and where multiple sites have TDD master ODUs Figure 38 The wireless configuration settings are e Master Slave Mode Master all ODUs in cluster e TDD Sync Device PTPSYNC all ODUs in cluster e Cluster Master Slave Cluster Master first ODU and Cluster Slave others e PTP Sync Site Reference GPS 1PPS External all ODUs in cluster Figure 38 TDD synchronization configuration cluster with PTP SYNC and GPS Cluster Slave ODU Cluster Sla
519. support website see Contacting Cambium Networks on page 2 and find Point to Point software updates Check that the latest PTP 600 software version for example 600 10 01 is the same as the installed Software Version 6 Ifthe software needs to be upgraded either to the latest version or to a FIPS or UC APL capable version perform Upgrading to a new software version on page 6 18 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 17 Task 4 Upgrading software version Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Upgrading to a new software version To upgrade to a new software version proceed as follows 1 4 Save the pre upgrade system configuration as described in Saving the system configuration on page 6 110 Go to the support website see Contacting Cambium Networks on page 2 and find Point to Point software updates Download and save the required software image for example PTP600 10 00 DLD2 or FI PS PTP600 10 00 DLD2 or UC_APL PTP600 10 00 DLD2 Aa NOTE The FIPS image cannot be loaded unless the Security Level capability is FIPS or UC APL The UC APL image cannot be loaded unless the Security Level capability is UC APL Select menu option System Software Upgrade The Software Upgrade page is displayed Software Upgrade This utility alloys an operator to upgrade a PTP wireless unit s operational software Current software image description Software Version 58600 04 99 Boot monitor Boot 01 01 Recovery software image
520. t Aa NOTE Note text phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 7 Caring for the environment About This User Guide Caring for the environment The following information describes national or regional requirements for the disposal of Cambium Networks supplied equipment and for the approved disposal of surplus packaging In EU countries The following information is provided to enable regulatory compliance with the European Union EU directives identified and any amendments made to these directives when using Cambium equipment in EU countries x Disposal of Cambium equipment Furopean Union EU Directive 2002 96 EC Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE Do not dispose of Cambium equipment in landfill sites In the EU Cambium in conjunction with a recycling partner ensures that equipment is collected and recycled according to the requirements of EU environmental law Disposal of surplus packaging Do not dispose of surplus packaging in landfill sites In the EU it is the individual recipient s responsibility to ensure that packaging materials are collected and recycled according to the requirements of EU environmental law In non EU countries In non EU countries dispose of Cambium equipment and all surplus packaging in accordance with national and regional regulations 8 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Chapter 1 Product description This chapter provides a high level description of the PT
521. t connectorized complete number Full FCC IC Integrated End Complete WB3869 Full FCC IC Connectorized Link Complete WB3872 Full FCC IC Connectorized End Complete WB3873 OOBM Integrated Link Complete WB3768 OOBM Integrated End Complete WB3769 OOBM Connectorized Link Complete WB3770 OOBM Connectorized End Complete WB3771 ATEX Hazloc ETSI RoW Integrated Link Complete WB3820 ATEX Hazloc ETSI RoW Integrated End Complete WB3821 ATEX Hazloc ETSI RoW_ Connectorized Link Complete WB3822 ATEX Hazloc ETSI RoW_ Connectorized End Complete WB3823 ATEX Hazloc FCC IC Integrated Link Complete WB3788 ATEX Hazloc FCC IC Integrated End Complete WB3789 ATEX Hazloc FCC IC Connectorized Link Complete WB3790 ATEX Hazloc FCC IC Connectorized End Complete WB3791 Table 29 PTP 58600 kit part numbers Product Regional Integrated or Link or end Part variant variant connectorized complete number Lite ETSI RoW Integrated Link Complete BP5830BH15 2 Lite ETSI RoW Integrated End Complete BP5830BH15 1 Lite ETSI RoW_ Connectorized Link Complete BP5830BHC15 2 Lite ETSI RoW_ Connectorized End Complete BP5830BHC15 1 Lite FCC IC Integrated Link Complete WB3862 Lite FCC IC Integrated End Complete WB3863 Lite FCC IC Connectorized Link Complete WB3866 Lite FCC IC Connectorized End Complete WB3867 Full ETSI RoW Integrated Link Complete BP5830BH 2 Full ETSI RoW Integrated End Complete BP5830BH 1 Full ETSI RoW_ Connectorized Link Complete BP5830B
522. taes ated aenwaate E tale 6 96 Task for Connecting link tothe Me tWOK 2 3 cctstscsidecesd cawaspeasenuay cea gesvecee EA 6 99 Connecting to the network with in band ManageMent cccccsecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeees 6 99 Connecting to the network with out of band management ccceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 100 Setting the real time ClOCK 22750 saiss das acasiacardaa sedeacsy shansdansadascdasdecadse Da EE EEA REA E 6 100 Task 16 Configuring the fiber interface sssessseesseesseesseesssesssesssersserssersserssersssesssersseessee 6 105 Obtaining the license key for Ethernet fiber support sssesssessseesseessersssrsssrsssessesrese 6 105 Connecting to the unit and checking for fiber support cece ceecccceeccceeeeeeeeeeneeceeaees 6 105 Entering the license key for Ethernet fiber SUPPOTt csceccccceseeeccceeeeseeceeeeseeeeeeeaees 6 106 Connecting to the Tiber network sareren aa A a uae ea ee 6 107 Configuring SEP sis ssace ah siceas daceaatpare dew nasadacaas otondeaanse ia adancusuamasa baeaciee ce EREA 6 109 Task 17 Saving the system configuration rseson a erno sthansneateasa ie ieaane eases 6 110 Saving the system COMMUTATION i sis2scssecessasviacgiaovessaadeensdeisessatasieanacoidenedion nian oeanneeaae 6 110 Configuring for FIPS 14022 applications vss cssenicgesdensscoxceesseeaucesss ca tacss ca saeaceusesessweeaiecesoaeneaaes 6 111 Prerequisites for FIPS 140 2 Configuratio
523. tallation wizard on page 6 45 Step 1 Interface configuration on page 6 48 Step 2 Wireless configuration on page 6 51 Step 3 TDD synchronization optional on page 6 58 Step 3 or 4 Confirm installation configuration on page 6 60 For units operating within the FCC certain channels may need to be barred from operation as described in Barring channels on page 6 62 Starting installation wizard To check that the wireless configuration meets network requirements select menu option Installation The response depends upon the state of the unit If the unit is armed for alignment factory default configuration the Disarm Installation page is displayed Figure 122 If the unit is not armed the Current Installation Summary page Figure 123 is displayed Review the configuration If it already meets requirements skip this task If it does not meet requirements execute the installation wizard by one of the following methods o From the Disarm Installation page Figure 122 select Back o From the Current Installation Summary page Figure 123 select Continue to Installlation Wizard phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 45 Task 6 Configuring wireless and telecoms interfaces Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Figure 122 Disarm Installation page when unit is armed Disarm Installation The installation agent is armed If you wish to disarm installation then use the Disarm Installation Agent button If you w
524. te key and public certificate on page 6 27 Figure 159 HTTPS key size warning alarm HTTPS Key Size Warning Less than 2048 bits phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 6 113 Configuring for UC APL applications Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Configuring for UC APL applications This is a summary of all the configuration tasks that are necessary if the unit is to operate in UC APL secure mode For more information on UC APL secure mode refer to Unified Capabilities Approved Product UC APL mode on page 1 65 and Planning for UC APL operation on page 2 43 Prerequisites for UC APL configuration To confirm that all prerequisites for UC APL are ready proceed as follows 1 Ensure that the following cryptographic material has been generated using a FIPS approved cryptographic generator Key Of Keys TLS Private Key and Public Certificates for the correct IP address these should be encoded in DER format DES keys are required for NTP maximum key size is 2048 bits Entropy Input Wireless Link Encryption Key for AES 2 Obtain the following details Port number for HTTPS AAA server configuration details Syslog server details Authenticated NTP key material Approved security banner text DoD password complexity rules IP address of the CAC enabled management workstation 3 Ensure that the web browsers used are enabled for HTTPS TLS operation using FIPS approved cipher specifications 4 Select menu option Man
525. ter 4 Reference information PTP 49600 regulatory compliance The PTP 49600 complies with the regulations that are in force in the USA and Canada The relevant notifications are specified in this section PTP 49600 FCC and IC notification The system has been approved under FCC Part 90 and Industry Canada RSS 111 for Public Safety Agency usage The installer or operator is responsible for obtaining the appropriate site licenses before installing or using the system FCC IDs and Industry Canada Certification Numbers are reproduced on the product label Figure 74 Figure 74 FCC and IC certifications on 4 9 GHz product label FCC ID QWP49100 Cc 1C 109A0 49100 PTP 54600 regulatory compliance The PTP 54600 complies with the regulations that are in force in the USA Canada and Europe The relevant notifications are specified in this section PTP 54600 FCC and IC notification U S Federal Communication Commission FCC and Industry Canada IC Notification This device complies with part 15 407 of the US FCC Rules and Regulations and with RSS 210 Issue 7 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation In Canada users should be cautioned to take note that high power radars are allocated as primary users meaning they have priority of 5250 5350
526. terminated Ethernet and sync cables and cable glands Mounting bracket and mounting bracket bolts Outdoor rated UV resistant cable tie UltraSync user manual phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 2 71 Ordering components PTP SYNC installations 2 72 Chapter 2 Planning considerations PTP SYNC installations require the additional components listed in Table 38 Table 38 Additional inventory for PTP SYNC installations Item Notes PTP SYNC kit PTP SYNC Cambium part number WB3665 Kit contents 1 x PTP SYNC unit 1 x M4 pan screw 2 x M4 washers 2 x M3 6mm torx drive screws 1 x lug for unit ground cable not supplied 1 x Cat5e cable length 1 meter Installation guide PTP SYNC rack mount Required for rack mounted PTP SYNC units PTP800 CMU PTP SYNC 19 rack mount installation kit Cambium part number WB3486 Kit contents 1 x rack bracket 8 x M3 washers 8 x M3 screws 1 x rack mount blank plate 8 x M5 nuts 8 x M5 washers 2 x rack handles Cat5e cable This is only required if the 1 meter Cat5e cable supplied with the PTP SYNC kit is not long enough It may be up to 2 meters long phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Ordering components GPS receiver installations GPS receiver installations for PTP SYNC require the components listed in Table 39 Table 39 Additional inventory for GPS receiver installations
527. ternal timing reference This permits the design of synchronized networks in which the phase of the TDD frame is independent of the master slave function Enter a value in the range from zero to one microsecond less than the TDD Frame Duration Slave Receive To The duration of the gap between receive and transmit at the slave Transmit Gap ODU TDD Holdover Master only Strict means that the unit will not transmit when Mode synchronization is lost Best Effort means that the unit will synchronize when there is a reference signal but otherwise will operate in unsynchronized mode TDD Holdover Master only Default value 10 minutes maximum 60 minutes Duration Specifies duration of holdover period following loss of the external timing reference for TDD synchronization 3 or 4 Confirm installation configuration Step 3 of the Installation wizard is provided for reviewing and confirming the wireless configuration parameters Figure 129 this becomes Step 4 if TDD Synchronization is enabled The page contents vary depending upon the product variant and configuration options selected If any of the Installation wizard attributes have been updated select Confirm Configuration and Reboot The confirmation popup is displayed Figure 130 Select OK to reboot Aa NOTE If any of the interface attributes have been updated in Step 1 of the Installation wizard the local management PC will not be able to communicate a
528. th is not supported in the FCC region phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 11 Wireless specifications Chapter 4 Reference information Table 59 PTP 25600 channel plan FCC BRS EBS Post Transition Band Block Channel Channel center frequencies MHz bandwidth MHz Lower 5 2499 25 2504 75 2510 25 2515 75 2521 25 2526 75 Band 2532 25 2537 75 2543 25 2548 75 2554 25 2559 75 Segment 2565 25 10 2502 2507 5 2513 2518 5 2524 2529 5 2535 2540 5 2546 2551 5 2557 2562 5 15 2504 75 2510 25 2515 75 2521 25 2526 75 2532 25 2537 75 2543 25 2548 75 2554 25 2559 75 30 2513 2524 2535 2546 Middle 5 2575 2581 2587 2593 2599 2605 2611 Pond 10 2578 2584 2590 2596 2602 2608 Segment 15 2581 2587 2593 2599 2605 30 2587 2599 Upper 5 2626 75 2632 25 2637 75 2643 25 2648 75 2654 25 Band 2659 75 2665 25 2670 75 2676 25 2681 75 2687 25 Segment 19 2629 5 2635 2640 5 2646 2651 5 2657 2662 5 2668 2673 5 2679 2684 5 15 2632 25 2637 75 2643 25 2648 75 2654 25 2659 75 2665 25 2670 75 2676 25 2681 75 30 2640 5 2651 5 2662 5 2673 5 The channel center frequencies listed above have been selected to align with the so called post transition BRS channels as shown in Figure 43 The PTP 25600 frequency variant supports three portions of the BRS spectrum allocation These are configurable at installation and constrain the wireless to operate in a
529. the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 3 13 Cambium Networks end user license agreement Chapter 3 Legal information THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT
530. the antenna cables for the two antenna ports then the average value should be entered Frequency Band Only displayed for the PTP 25600 frequency variant which operates in one of three bands as described in Channel bandwidth on page 2 4 Lower 2496 MHz to 2568 MHz Middle 2572 MHz to 2614 MHz Upper 2624 MHz to 2690 MHz 6 54 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 6 Configuring wireless and telecoms interfaces Attribute Meaning Channel Users can choose a variable channel bandwidth for the available Bandwidth spectrum The choice of bandwidths depends upon the frequency variant and region as shown in Table 1 Link Symmetry Master only Values of Adaptive 2 to 1 1 to 1 and 1 to 2 can be selected The adaptive setting allows link symmetry to vary dynamically in response to offered traffic load The remaining values select three options for fixed division between transmit and receive time in the TDD frame of the master ODU The first number in the ratio represents the time allowed for the transmit direction and the second number represents the time allowed for the receive direction The appropriate matching Link Symmetry is set at the slave ODU automatically For example if Link Symmetry is configured as 2 to 1 at the master ODU then the slave ODU will be set automatically as 1 to 2 In this example the master slave direction has double the capacity
531. the selection of the Rx frequency based upon the setting of the Tx frequency phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 6 Configuring wireless and telecoms interfaces Attribute Meaning Tx Color Code Rx Color Code The Tx Color Code and Rx Color Code attributes need only be considered when the unit is installed in a dense network of synchronized PTP 600 units and where some of the PTP 600 units are operating on the same frequency In this case the value would normally be derived by a network radio planner In all other cases it is strongly recommended that this attribute is left at the default value of A 4a NOTE The value of Tx Color Code MUST always match the value of Rx Color Code at the other end of the link Automatic Tx Power Control Automatic Transmit Power Control ATPC availability is frequency variant dependent When available its default setting is Enabled If Master Slave Mode has been set to Slave the additional option Enabled with ITPE is available When selected the unit calculates its transmit power prior to enabling its transmitter in order to minimize the interference caused to other user in the band Max Receive Modulation Mode Lowest Ethernet Modulation Mode Installation Mode The maximum mode the unit will use as its adaptive modulation By default the Max Receive Modulation Mode is the highest mode available For
532. the user with information regarding the receive Modulation Mode modulation mode in use Possible values are Detail Running at maximum receive mode Running at user configured Max Modulation Mode Restricted due to byte errors on the wireless link or local Ethernet Tx Fifo Drops Restricted because a DFS channel change is in progress Restricted due to telecoms acquisition mode Restricted due to the low Ethernet link speed Limited by the wireless conditions Range The range between the PTP 600 Series ODUs This is displayed in km by default but can be changed to miles by updating the Distance Units attribute to imperial as described in Protecting access to the summary and status pages on page 6 41 TDD synchronization status The Status Page displays the TDD Synchronization status for the link I I I f TDD Synchronization is not enabled the Attribute is set to TDD Synchronization nactive and the Value is set to Timing System Not Connected f TDD Synchronization is enabled and the installation is rebooted the Attribute is set to TDD Synchronization Status and the Value is set to one of the following Locked Figure 163 Holdover Holdover Not Connected Acquiring Lock No Timing Reference Timing System Not Connected Figure 164 Initializing phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User G
533. these conditions telecoms timing information is still sent to keep the telecoms clocks synchronized No Signal Local and Remote Timing Indicates both no local signal and remote timing In remote timing mode the ODU will transmit an Alarm Indication Signal AIS consisting of all ones from the associated telecoms interface Channel A The loopback status of telecoms channel A and B These are Loopback intended for installation testing and should be set to None for Gk normal operation The wire connections to a unit can be tested by applying a Copper loopback to the local unit The wireless Channel B connection to the remote unit can be tested by applying a Loopback Wireless loopback to the remote unit with no loopback on the local unit The loopback can be disabled from the telecoms configuration sub menu see Performing a telecoms loopback test on page 8 16 Data Port See Ethernet Configuration Mismatch Configuration Mismatch Data Port Disabled See Ethernet Link Disabled Warning Warning Data Port Fiber See Fiber Link Status Status Data Port Status See Ethernet Link Status phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 7 15 Managing alarms and events Chapter 7 Operation Alarm Meaning Ethernet Bridging Status Diabled means that the link has stopped bridging Ethernet frames because the Lowest Ethernet Modulation Mode is not being achieved or because the wireless link is down
534. tication for SET operations There is no access for template users A NOTE VACM grants access for requests sent with more than the configured security level The default user initial will have read write access to the whole of the MIB This is described in further detail in View based access control model on page 1 53 The template users have no access to the MIB in the default configuration User initial will normally be used to create one or more additional users with secret authentication and privacy keys and with appropriate access to the whole of the MIB or to particular views of the MIB according to the operator s security policy New users must be created by cloning template users The user initial may then be deleted to prevent access using the well known user name and keys Alternatively the keys associated with initial may be set to some new secret value Web based management of SNMPv3 security PTP 600 supports an alternative web based approach for configuring SNMPv3 security In this case the web based interface allows users to specify SNMPv3 users security levels privacy and authentication protocols and passphrases Web based management will be effective for many network applications but the capabilities supported are somewhat less flexible than those supported using the MIB based security management Selection of web based management for SNMPv3 security disables the MIB based security management Web based managem
535. ting a telecoms link on page 8 16 describes how to perform a loopback test on an E1 or T1 link Troubleshooting a fiber interface on page 8 18 Describes how to respond to any problems experienced when a fiber link is installed phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 8 1 Testing link end hardware Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Testing link end hardware This section describes how to test the link end hardware when it fails on startup or during operation Before testing link end hardware confirm that all outdoor drop cables that is those that connect the ODU or GPS receiver if installed to equipment inside the building are of the supported type as defined in Ordering components on page 2 53 If an UltraSync GPS synchronization unit has been installed but one or more of its status LEDs are not illuminated refer to Test UltraSync GPS receiver on page 8 10 Checking the PIDU LEDs When the PIDU is connected to the power supply the expected LED sequence is The Power green LED illuminates steadily b After about 45 seconds the Ethernet yellow LED blinks slowly 10 times c The Ethernet yellow LED illuminates steadily then blinks randomly to show Ethernet activity If the expected LED sequence does not occur or if a fault is suspected in the link end hardware check the PIDU LED states and choose the correct test procedure e Power LED is off on page 8 3 e Power LED is blinking on page 8 3 e Ethernet LED did not blink 10 times on p
536. tion subject to the Conditions of Use set forth in Conditions of use and the terms and conditions of this Agreement Any terms or conditions relating to the Software and Documentation appearing on the face or reverse side of any purchase order purchase order acknowledgment or other order document that are different from or in addition to the terms of this Agreement will not be binding on the parties even if payment is accepted phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Cambium Networks end user license agreement Conditions of use Any use of the Software and Documentation outside of the conditions set forth in this Agreement is strictly prohibited and will be deemed a breach of this Agreement 1 Only you your employees or agents may use the Software and Documentation You will take all necessary steps to insure that your employees and agents abide by the terms of this Agreement 2 You will use the Software and Documentation i only for your internal business purposes ii only as described in the Software and Documentation and iii in strict accordance with this Agreement 3 You may use the Software and Documentation provided that the use is in conformance with the terms set forth in this Agreement 4 Portions of the Software and Documentation are protected by United States copyright laws international treaty provisions and other applicable laws Therefore you must treat the Software like any other copyrig
537. tions If you transfer possession of any copy of the Software and Documentation to another party outside of the terms of this agreement your license is automatically terminated Title and copyrights to the Software and Documentation and any copies made by you remain with Cambium and its licensors You will not and will not permit others to i modify translate decompile bootleg reverse engineer disassemble or extract the inner workings of the Software or Documentation ii copy the look and feel or functionality of the Software or Documentation iii remove any proprietary notices marks labels or logos from the Software or Documentation iv rent or transfer all or some of the Software or Documentation to any other party without Cambium s prior written consent or v utilize any computer software or hardware which is designed to defeat any copy protection device should the Software and Documentation be equipped with such a protection device If the Software and Documentation is provided on multiple types of media such as diskette CD ROM downloadable internet then you will only use the medium which best meets your specific needs and will not loan rent lease or transfer the other media contained in the package without Cambium s written consent Unauthorized copying of the Software or Documentation or failure to comply with any of the provisions of this Agreement will result in automatic termination of this license Confidenti
538. tity required TLS Private Key and Public Certificates An RSA private key of size 1024 or 2048 bytes generated in either PKCS 1 or PKCS 5 format unencrypted and encoded in the ASN 1 DER format An X 509 certificate containing an RSA public key generated in either PKCS 1 or PKCS 5 format unencrypted and encoded in the ASN 1 DER format The public key certificate must form a valid pair with the private key Two pairs per link These items are unique to IP address User Defined Security Banner The banner provides warnings and notices to be read by the user before logging in to the ODU Use text that is appropriate to the network security policy Normally one per link This depends upon network policy Entropy Input Wireless Link This must be of size 512 bits 128 hexadecimal characters output from a random number generator Two per link For greater security each link end should be allocated a unique Entropy Input An encryption key generated using a Encryption Key for AES cryptographic key generator The key length is dictated by the selected AES encryption algorithm 128 or 256 bits One per link The same encryption key is required at each link end Port numbers for HTTP HTTPS and Telnet Port numbers allocated by the network As allocated by network Planning for FIPS 140 2 operation If the link is to operate in FIPS 140 2 secure mode ensure that
539. to change a Password password minutes A value of zero disables this feature Change Period Password The time that elapses before a password expires days A value of Expiry Period zero disables this feature Maximum The maximum number of login attempts with incorrect password Number of that are allowed before a user is locked out Login 7Attem pts Also the maximum number of password change attempts before a user is locked out Login Attempt Action to be taken when a user is locked out Lockout Action Timeout means the user is allowed to attempt to log in again after a specified period Disabled means the user is disabled Login Attempt Lockout Period The time that elapses before a locked out user is allowed to log in again minutes Only displayed when Login Attempt Lockout Action is set to Timeout Webpage Session Control When this is enabled any attempt to open a new tab or browser instance will force the user to re enter password Password Expiry Action The action to be taken by the PTP 600 when a password expires phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 5 Configuring security Setting password complexity Complete this procedure to configure password complexity rules for the web based management interface If identity based user accounts are enabled this task may only be performed by a Security Officer 4a NOTE If the unit is requir
540. ton below to change this configuration Security configuration Key of Keys Configured Private Key Configured Public Certificate Configured Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetur adipisicing elit sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua Ut enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud exercitation ullamco laboris nisi ut aliquip ex ea commodo consequat Duis aute irure dolor in reprehenderit in voluptate velit esse cillum dolore eu fugiat nulla ee ee pariatur Excepteur sint occaecat cupidatat non proident sunt in culpa qui officia E deserunt mollit anim id est laborum Security Banner Require Acknowledgement Yes Of Notices Display Login Information DRNG Entropy Configured Wireless Encryption Key Not configured HTTPS Port Number a HTTP Access an Enabled HTTP Port Number 80 Telnet Access Was Enabled Telnet Port Number i SNMP Control Of HTTP And Tenet Disabled TFTP Client Disabled Debug Access Enabled eo Cross Site Request Forgery Enabled Protection Continue to Security Wizard Step 1 Enter key of keys Erasing or changing the key of keys erases all critical security parameters CSPs phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 25 Task 5 Configuring security Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment The Step 1 Enter Key of Keys page is displayed Figure 109 Enter the generated key of keys in both the Key Of Keys and Confirm Key Of Keys fields Select Next Figure 109 St
541. trees and access as shown in Table 19 and Table 20 Table 19 Default VACM view trees Storagelype nonVolatile Object Entry 1 Entry 2 Vi ewName internet restricted Subtree 1 3 6 1 1 3 6 1 Mask Ar s Type included included nonVolatile Table 20 Default data fill for access table Planning for RADIUS operation Object Entry 1 Entry 2 Gr oupName initial initial Context Prefix an a Securitylevel authNoPriv noAuthNoPriv Context Match exact exact ReadVi ewName internet restricted WriteViewName internet e NotifyViewName internet restricted StorageType nonVolatile nonVolatile Configure RADIUS where remote authentication is required for users of the web based interface Remote authentication has the following advantages e Control of passwords can be centralized e Management of user accounts can be more sophisticated For example users can be prompted by email to change passwords at regular intervals As another example passwords can be checked for inclusion of dictionary words and phrases e Passwords can be updated without reconfiguring multiple network elements e User accounts can be disabled without reconfiguring multiple network elements Remote authentication has one significant disadvantage in a wireless link product such as PTP 600 If the wireless link is down a unit on the remote side of the broken link may be prevented from contacting a RADIUS Server with the res
542. tric Code ANSI NFPA No 70 1984 USA In Canada follow Section 54 of the Canadian Electrical Code These codes describe correct installation procedures for grounding the outdoor unit mast lead in wire and discharge unit size of grounding conductors and connection requirements for grounding electrodes Other regulations may apply in different countries and therefore it is recommended that installation of the outdoor unit be contracted to a professional installer PIDU Always use the Cambium Power Indoor Unit Plus PIDU Plus PTP 300 500 600 Series to power the ODU Failure to use the Cambium supplied PIDU could result in equipment damage and will invalidate the safety certification and may cause a safety hazard phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 l Safety and regulatory information Alternative DC supplies If an AC supply is not required or an additional back up DC supply is required the DC supply is connected to the PIDU DC IN terminals This is the only method of supplying external DC to the ODU The DC supply must comply with the following requirements e The voltage and polarity is correct and is applied to the correct terminals in the PIDU e The power source is rated as Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV e The power source is rated to supply at least 1A continuously e The power source cannot provide more than the Energy Hazard Limit as defined by IEC EN UL60950 1 Clause 2 5 Limited Power The Energy Hazard Limit is 240VA Powering
543. ts for both ends of a link including two ODUs and two PIDU units An End kit contains components for one end of a link including one ODU and one PIDU unit The kits may contain either integrated ODUs antennas included or connectorized ODUs separate antennas must be purchased PTP 54600 and PTP 58600 variants PTP 54600 and PTP 58600 kits are supplied in two regional variants one is for use in regions where FCC or IC licensing restrictions apply FCC IC and the other is for use in ETSI countries or the rest of the world ETSI RoW Table 22 and Table 23 indicate which PTP 54600 and PTP 58600 product variants may be deployed in each regulatory region Table 22 PTP 54600 product variants available in each regulation Regulation Lite and Full ATEX Hazloc OOBM ETSI RoW FCC IC ETSI RoW FCC IC Australia Yes Canada Yes Yes ETSI Yes Yes FCC Yes Yes Full Power Yes Full Power Radar Yes Korea Yes Mexico Yes Thailand Yes phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 2 53 Ordering components Chapter 2 Planning considerations Table 23 PTP 58600 product variants available in each regulation Regulation Lite and Full ATEX Hazloc OOBM ETSI RoW FCC 1IC ETSI RoW FCC IC Australia Yes Bahrain Yes Brazil Yes Canada Yes China Yes Denmark Yes Yes ETSI Yes Yes Eire Yes Yes FCC Yes Yes Full Power Yes Yes Germany Yes
544. uide Figure 163 Status page TDD enabled and synchronized Web based management System Status Master Equipment Wireless rites value nts Mattes value it eo Link Name Link Location Software Version 25600 B1 236 wdog Hardware Version D05 R00 C Region Code Elapsed Time Indicator 4 Days 01 28 25 Ethernet Internet Ethernet Link Status Copper LinkUp 0 Ethernet Speed And Duplex 100 Mbps Full Duplex MAC Address 00 04 56 80 2e 80 Remote IP Address 10 10 10 10 Telecoms Channel amp Disabled Channel B Disabled TDD Syncronization TDD Synchronization Status locked Wireless Link Status Maximum Transmit Power Remote Maximum Transmit Power 15 Transmit Power Receive Power Vector Error Link Loss Transmit Data Rate Receive Data Rate Link Capacity Transmit Modulation Mode Receive Modulation Mode Receive Modulation Mode Detail Range 15 15 0 150 150 150 45 2 452 454 453 329 358 387 36 2 96 3 96 2 96 2 962 18 46 1846 1846 1846 18 46 1846 1846 18 46 36 92 256Q4M 0 81 Dual 5 MHz 256Q4M 0 81 Dual 5 MHz Running At Maximum Receive Mode EO dBm dBm dBm dBm dB dB Mbps Mbps Mbps km Figure 164 Status page TDD enabled and not synchronized System Status Master Equipment Link Name Link Location Software Version 25600 51236 wdog Hardware Version D05 R00 C Region Code Elapsed Time Indicator 4 Days 01 30 26 Ethernet Inter
545. uide Task 5 Configuring security Step 8 Commit security configuration Review all changes that have been made in the Security Wizard Figure 116 To ensure that the changes take effect select Commit Security Configuration The unit reboots and the changes take effect Figure 116 Step 8 Commit Security Configuration page Step 8 Confirm Security Configuration Confirm the security changes Key of Keys Unchanged Private Key Unchanged Public Certificate Unchanged Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetur adipisicing elit sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua Ut enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud exercitation ullamco laboris nisi ut aliquip ex ea commodo consequat Duis aute irure dolor in reprehenderit in voluptate velit esse cillum dolore eu fugiat nulla User Defi pariatur Excepteur sint occaecat cupidatat non proident sunt in culpa qui officia aor ae tet deserunt mollit anim id est laborum Security Banner Require Acknowledgement Yes Of Notices Display Login Ves Information DRNG Entropy Unchanged Wireless Encryption Key Unchanged HTTPS Port Number a HTTP Access Yes Enabled HTTP Port Number 80 Telnet Access rae Enabled Telnet Port Number 5 SNMP Control Of gt HTTP And Tenet Disabled TFTP Client Disabled Debug Access Enabled s Cross Site Request Forgery Enabled Protection Confirm Security Configuration 44 Back phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 33
546. uired for mounting the antennas are specific to the antenna chosen Refer to the antenna manufacturer s instructions To prevent water ingress always use crimped N type connectors at the ODU and antenna Mounting and connecting antennas To mount and connect the antenna s proceed as follows 1 Mount the antenna s according to manufacturer s instructions When using separate antennas to achieve spatial diversity mount one with Horizontal polarization and the other with Vertical polarization 2 Connect the ODU to the antenna s with cables of type LMR100 LMR200 LMR300 LMR400 or LMR600 Connect the ODU V interface to the vertical polarization antenna and connect the ODU H interface to the horizontal polarization antenna Figure 5 Aa NOTE When using separate antennas to achieve spatial diversity the antenna cables will be disconnected from the ODU during the alignment procedure Therefore do not weatherproof the ODU joints until antenna alignment is complete 5 10 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Installing connectorized antennas 3 Ifthe ODU is to be mounted indoors assemble the Polyphaser LSXL ME or LSXL as shown Outdoors Indoors N Type Connector Star Washer O Ring N Type Connector Flange Polyphaser LSZL a Fixing Nut Grounded Building Entry Plate 4 Ifthe ODU is to be mounted indoors install lightning arrestors at the building entry
547. ult that users are unable to access the web based interface 2 50 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Security planning One useful strategy would be to combine RADIUS authentication for normal operation with a single locally authenticated user account for emergency use PTP 600 provides a choice of three authentication methods e CHAP e MS CHAPv2 e PEAP MS CHAPv2 PEAP MS CHAPv2 is supported for Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Ensure that the authentication method selected in PTP 600 is supported by the RADIUS server RADIUS is not permitted in FIPS 140 2 applications RADIUS and PEAP MS CHAPv2 are mandatory in UC APL applications RADIUS attributes If the standard RADIUS attribute session timeout Type 27 is present in a RADIUS response PTP 600 sets a maximum session length for the authenticated user If the attribute is absent the maximum session length is infinite If the standard RADIUS attribute idle timeout Type 28 is present in a RADIUS response PTP 600 overrides the Auto Logout Timer with this value in the authenticated session If the vendor specific RADIUS attribute auth role is present in a RADIUS response PTP 600 selects the role for the authenticated user according to auth role The supported values of auth role are as follows e 0 Invalid role The user is not admitted e 1 Read Only e 2 System Administrator e 3 Security Officer If the vendor specific auth role attribute
548. um Privilege Level System Administrator Security Officer SNMP State Disabled Enabled SNMP Access Control Disabled Enabled SNMP Version Ovce Ov3 SNMP Community String public SNMP Port Number 161 Next gt gt phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Task 7 Setting up SNMP agent Table 118 Step 1 SNMP Configuration attributes for SNMPv1 2c Attribute Meaning SNMP Minimum Minimum security level which is permitted to administer SNMP Privilege Level security settings SNMP State Enables or disables SNMP SNMP Access Enables or disables access control to SNMP management by IP Control address SNMP Access A list of up to three IP addresses permitted to perform SNMP Control IP Address 1 2 3 SNMP Version management Only displayed when SNMP Access Control is Enabled SNMP protocol version v1 2c or v3 SNMP Community String The SNMP community string acts like a password between the network management system and the distributed SNMP clients PTP 600 ODUs Only if the community string is configured correctly on all SNMP entities can the flow of management information take place By convention the default value is set to public SNMP Port Number Enter the port that the SNMP agent is listening to for commands from a management system Step 2 SNMP MIB II System Objects for SNMPv1 2c The Step 2 SNMP MIB II System Objects page is displ
549. ure 144 Web Based Management page Web Based Management HTTPS Access Enabled Ono yes HTTPS Port Number 43 HTTP Access Enabled Ono ves HTTP Port Number sos Telnet Access Enabled Ono yes Telnet Port Number 230s Access Control Disabled O Enabled SNMP Control Of HTTP And Telnet Disabled Enabled TFTP Client Disabled O Enabled Debug Access Enabled One Yes Cross Site Request Forgery Protection Disabled Enabled Submit Updated Configuration Table 123 Web Based Management attributes Attribute Meaning HTTPS Access Only displayed when HTTPS is configured Shows the current Enabled status of HTTPS access enabled or not phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 83 Task 10 Configuring remote access 6 84 Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Attribute Meaning HTTPS Port Only displayed when HTTPS is configured The port number for Number HTTPS access A value of zero means the wireless unit uses the default port HTTP Access Enabled HTTP Port Number Telnet Access Enabled No means that the unit will not respond to any requests on the HTTP port Yes means that the unit will respond to requests on the HTTP port Remote management via HTTPS is not affected by this setting The port number for HTTP access A value of zero means the wireless unit uses the default port No means that the unit will not respond to any requests on the T
550. usage see Available spectrum settings on page 4 11 Aa NOTE Because the 4 9 GHz spectrum is restricted by license the Lower Center Frequency attribute is not available for the PTP 49600 The lower center frequency attribute must be configured to the same value for both the master and slave otherwise the wireless link will fail to reestablish The only way to recover from this situation is to modify the Lower Center Frequency attributes so that they are identical on both the master and slave units Default Raster Fixed Tx Frequency Fixed Rx Frequency This is only displayed when Spectrum Management Control is set to Fixed Frequency If this is set to On the list of options presented in the fixed Tx frequency box is limited by the default raster This is only displayed when Spectrum Management Control is set to Fixed Frequency The software for the PTP 600 Series allows a user to optionally fix the Transmit and the Receive frequencies for a wireless link The settings must be compatible at each end of the link Once configured the spectrum management software will not attempt to move the wireless link to a channel with lower co channel or adjacent channel interference Therefore this mode of operation is only recommended for deployments where the installer has a good understanding of the prevailing interference environment See Fixed frequency example on page 6 58 Aa NOTE A raster limits
551. ut tables 4 88 Chapter 4 Reference information Figure 83 PTP 600 range adjustment for data rates curve E Throughput F actor Throughput F actor 1 000 0 950 0 900 0 850 0 800 0 750 0 700 0 650 0 600 0 550 1 000 0 950 0 900 0 850 0 800 0 750 0 700 0 650 0 600 0 550 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Range km Figure 84 PTP 600 range adjustment for data rates curve F ji 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Range km phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Data throughput tables Figure 85 PTP 600 range adjustment for data rates curve G 1 000 0 950 0 900 0 850 0 800 0 750 Throughput F actor 0 700 0 650 0 600 0 550 100 120 140 160 180 200 Oo nN D o Q o oO Range km Figure 86 PTP 600 range adjustment for data rates curve H 1 000 0 950 0 900 0 850 0 800 0 750 Throughput Factor 0 700 0 650 0 600 0 550 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Range km phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 4 89 Data throughput tables 4 90 Chapter 4 Reference information Figure 87 PTP 600 range adjustment for data rates curve K Throughput F actor Throughput F a
552. ve ODU Cluster Master ODU GPS receiver PTP SYNC Mains Mains supply supply Outdoor CAT5e cable gel filled shielded with copper plated steel CATS5e cable foil or braid Customer Customer Customer screened with screened LAN LAN LAN connectors CATS5e cable unscreened or screened Ground cable 2 32 Additional gt PTP SYNCs Mains supply phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Configuration options for TDD synchronization Cluster with PTP SYNC and no GPS receiver Each link requires one PTP SYNC unit PTP SYNC units are connected together in a daisy chain Between two and ten PTP SYNCs may be chained in this way One ODU is designated as a cluster timing master Use this configuration where all master ODUs are collocated at a single site As this configuration does not require a GPS receiver it provides additional flexibility particularly in applications requiring rapid deployment Figure 39 The wireless configuration settings are Master Slave Mode Master all ODUs in cluster TDD Sync Device PTPSYNC all ODUs in cluster Cluster Master Slave Cluster Master first ODU and Cluster Slave others PTP Sync Site Reference Internal all ODUs in cluster Figure 39 TDD synchronization configuration cluster with PTP SYNC and no GPS eee Outdoor CAT5e cable gel filled shielded with copper plated stee
553. ve been updated to meet network requirements then reconfigure the local management PC to use an IP address that is valid for the network Refer to Configuring the management PC on page 6 3 When the unit has rebooted log in using the new IP address Refer to Logging into the web interface on page 6 5 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 Task 3 Installing license keys Task 3 Installing license keys This task consists of the following procedures e Checking licensed capabilities on page 6 14 e Generating a new license key on page 6 15 e Entering a new license key on page 6 16 Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Some PTP 600 products are supplied with two license keys one installed at the factory and one alternative key Checking licensed capabilities To check that the capabilities of the installed license key meet the operator s requirements select menu option System License Key The Software License Key page is displayed Figure 107 Check the attributes in the Capability summary section Table 104 These attributes other than MAC Address must be the same at both link ends otherwise the link will not operate correctly If the current capabilities of the default and alternative license keys do not meet the operator s requirements then determine the new requirements and perform Generating a new license key on page 6 15 Figure 107 Software License Key page Software License Key contact your distributor Li
554. voidance 60666 7 30 Table 139 Interference represented in the time series plot eecccesseeccccceeeeeeceneeesecenseneeccenees 7 33 Table 140 System Histograms attributes in the System Statistics Page ccceccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 7 37 Table 141 Data Port Counter attributes in the System Statistics Ppage ccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 38 Table 142 Management Port Counter attributes in the System Statistics page eeee 7 39 xxii phn 2512_ 007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Table 143 Table 144 Table 145 Table 146 Table 147 Table 148 Table 149 Table 150 Table 151 Table 152 Table 153 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 Wireless Port Counter attributes in the System Statistics Page cecccceecceseeeeeeees 7 39 Other attributes in the System Statistics Page ccecccecccsseccceeeceeesceueeeeeeneceaeeeeees 7 40 Detailed Counters atin UleS ccet tuscasinaesviededtewnadebeoystecksausaseuenlebaeesaioscersiatanuveb testes 7 43 FSX SHBG C18 gt ll OW Badr 1 al LUT gt Ropes OOO tee ee eer 7 50 Monitoring tFTP attributes 3 cacassiasnsestpnsndasantiecaagaaeeiansaaancaase chess acameaswanareeasasemnenoed eariede 7 51 Recovery Options SttmibUtes sveiesscanssecssanesecacacasdesaandautence satan ealaneds baiese EEE 7 55 Recovery Options DUttons viesi sisceesesasscesisagaacesaestensainseiees TE EEE a EE TR 7 55 RJ45 cable resistance tests at the PIDU Cn scsisisesciiccssisisssees
555. wing requirements must be observed e The equipment must be lower than the top of the building or its lightning air terminal e The building must be correctly grounded A schematic example of a wall installation is shown in Figure 33 Figure 33 Grounding and lightning protection on wall Outdoor CAT5e cable gel filled shielded with copper plated steel CAT5e cable foil or braid screened with screened connectors eo PTP 600 ground cable Top LPU direct ground cable Equipment building 0 if mandated by regulations Grounding system External ground bar 2 26 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Grounding and lightning protection Protection requirements on a high rise building If the ODU is to be mounted on a high rise building it is likely that cable entry is at roof level Figure 34 and the equipment room is several floors below Figure 35 The following additional requirements must be observed e The ODU must be below the lightning terminals and finials e A grounding conductor must be installed around the roof perimeter to form the main roof perimeter lightning protection ring e Air terminals are typically installed along the length of the main roof perimeter lightning protection ring typically every 6 1m 20ft e The main roof perimeter lightning protection ring must contain at least two down conductors connected to the grounding electrode system The down conducto
556. wisted Pair UV Ultraviolet VLAN Virtual Local Area Network phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012
557. xcept as required in Conditions of use you will not during the term of this Agreement or thereafter use any trademark of Cambium Networks or any word or symbol likely to be confused with any Cambium Networks trademark either alone or in any combination with another word or words Transfer The Software and Documentation may not be transferred to another party without the express written consent of Cambium regardless of whether or not such transfer is accomplished by physical or electronic means Cambium s consent may be withheld at its discretion and may be conditioned upon transferee paying all applicable license fees and agreeing to be bound by this Agreement Updates During the first 12 months after purchase of a Product or during the term of any executed Maintenance and Support Agreement for the Product you are entitled to receive Updates An Update means any code in any form which is a bug fix patch error correction or minor enhancement but excludes any major feature added to the Software Updates are available for download at the support website Major features may be available from time to time for an additional license fee If Cambium makes available to you major features and no other end user license agreement is provided then the terms of this Agreement will apply Maintenance Except as provided above Cambium is not responsible for maintenance or field service of the Software under this Agreement phn
558. y error details For example enter this command snmpget d exe v 2c c public 10 10 10 10 iso 3 6 1 4 1 17713 1 9 10 0 tFTPSoftwareUpgradeStatus AdditionalText This is used if tFTPSoftwareUpgradeStatusText is full and there are more than 255 characters to report It contains additional text describing the status of the TFTP software upgrade process including any error details For example enter this command snmpget d exe v 2c c public 10 10 10 10 iso 3 6 1 4 1 17713 1 9 11 0 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 7 51 Restoring upgrading and rebooting Chapter 7 Operation Rebooting or reviewing reboot reasons To reboot the ODU or view a list of previous reboot reasons select menu option System Reboot The Reboot Wireless Unit page is displayed Figure 180 Use the drop down list to view the Previous Reasons For Reset Reboot If a reboot is required select Reboot Wireless Unit The Reboot Confirmation dialog is displayed Figure 181 Select OK The reboot progress message is displayed On completion the unit restarts Figure 180 Reboot Wireless Unit page Reboot Wireless Unit Use this page to reboot the wireless unit Attributes wae Previous Reasons For ResetReboot User Reboot Console 08 Nov 2006 10 33 21 7 Reboot Wireless Unit Figure 181 Reboot confirmation pop up http 169 254 1 1 x 9 Are you sure you want to REBOOT this unit Cancel 7 52 phn 2
559. y to communicate information about the nature of the communications and information about the parties involved In certain instances Cambium makes specific recommendations regarding security practices however the implementation of these recommendations and final responsibility for the security of the system lies with the operator of the system 6 phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 PTP 600 Series User Guide Warnings cautions and notes Warnings cautions and notes The following describes how warnings and cautions are used in this document and in all documents of the Cambium Networks document set Warnings Warnings precede instructions that contain potentially hazardous situations Warnings are used to alert the reader to possible hazards that could cause loss of life or physical injury A warning has the following format A WARNING Warning text and consequence for not following the instructions in the warning Cautions Cautions precede instructions and are used when there is a possibility of damage to systems software or individual items of equipment within a system However this damage presents no danger to personnel A caution has the following format Caution text and consequence for not following the instructions in the caution Notes A note means that there is a possibility of an undesirable situation or provides additional information to help the reader understand a topic or concept A note has the following forma
560. yload Master Slave Mode Spectrum Management Control Link Mode Optimization TDD Synchronization Mode Tx Max Power Ranging Mode Platform Variant Antenna Gain Cable Loss EIRP Channel Bandwidth Link Symmetry Lower Center Frequency Tx Color Code Rx Color Code Max Receive Modulation Mode Lowest Ethernet Modulation Mode Installation Mode 1 1 100 3 255 255 0 0 1 1 1 254 No VLAN Tagging 00 DF None Link Access 00 04 56 30 16 65 Enabled Master DFS IP Traffic Disabled 25 Auto 0 to 40 km Connectorized 23 0 0 0 48 0 10 MHz 1to1 5480 A A 64QAM 0 92 BPSK 0 63 Arm Without Tones dBm dBi dB dBm MHz phn 2512_007v000 Dec 2012 6 47 Task 6 Configuring wireless and telecoms interfaces Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Step 1 Interface configuration Step 1 of the Installation wizard is for updating the interface configuration Figure 124 or Figure 125 The attributes are described in Table 110 Update the attributes as required and select Next Aa NOTE If a copper loopback is used to test the E1 or T1 link if enabled ensure that the test set is configured manually If the test set is allowed to configure automatically neither it nor the ODU send a signal until they receive one so the test appears to fail Figure 124 Step 1 Interface Configuration page Step 1 Interface Configuration Please complete the wizard in order to arm the unit A va
561. ys the total number of good packets the bridge has sent Packets for transmission by the wireless interface Wireless Rx This displays the total number of good packets the bridge has Packets received from the wireless interface Link Symmetry A ratio that expresses the division between transmit and receive time in the TDD frame The first number in the ratio represents the time allowed for the transmit direction and the second number represents the time allowed for the receive direction Link Capacity The maximum aggregate data capacity available for user traffic under the current radio link conditions assuming the units have been connected using Gigabit Ethernet The sum of the displayed Transmit and Receive data rates may be lower than this figure if the link isn t fully loaded by the current traffic profile Transmit The modulation mode currently being used on the transmit channel Modulation The number in brackets after the modulation mode and coding rate Mode string is the effective data rate available to all MAC layer protocols List of all the modulation modes can be found in Data throughput tables on page 4 74 where data rate calculations plots are given for each available modulation mode Receive The modulation mode currently being used on the receive channel Modulation The number in brackets after the modulation mode and coding rate Mode string is the effective data rate available to all MAC layer protocols Li
562. ystem threshold output power and link loss For details of the system threshold output power and link loss for each frequency variant in all modulation modes for all available channel bandwidths refer to System threshold output power and link loss on page 4 31 Calculating data rate capacity The data rate capacity of a PTP link is defined as the maximum end to end Ethernet throughput including Ethernet headers that it can support It is assumed that Ethernet frames are 1500 octet Data rate capacity is determined by the following factors Product variant PTP 600 Full or Lite Link Symmetry Link Mode Optimization IP or TDM Modulation Mode Channel Bandwidth Link Range Calculation procedure To calculate the data rate capacity of a PTP 600 link proceed as follows 1 Use the tables in Data throughput capacity on page 4 74 to look up the data throughput capacity rates Tx Rx and Both for the required combination of Link Symmetry Link Mode Optimization Modulation Mode Channel Bandwidth 2 The tables contain data rates for PTP 600 Full only If the ODUs are PTP 600 Lite divide the data rates by 2 3 The tables contain data rates for links of zero range Use the curves in Range adjustment curves on page 4 85 to look up the Throughput Factor that must be applied to adjust the data rates for the actual range of the link 4 Multiply the data rates by the Throughput Factor to give the throughput capacity of the link

PTP 600 Series User Guide (600-10-05)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents